~EVIEWE~
GEORG€ S". S"AL\JAN ARCHITE:Q
FUAP
PUBLISHED BY: JMC PRESS, INC, 388 QUEZON AVENUE QUEZON CITY, PHILIPPINES TEL. Nos.: ( +632) 410-9534 • 781-9187 TELEFAX: ( +632) 712-4929 E-MAIL ADDRESS:
[email protected]
PhitiJilllni'Copyrilht 2001 br JMC PRESs, INC. ai'GEORGI: S. SALVAN JSI)l: 9'11-11-1118-7 -~Printing 2001
All Right• Reseroed Any copy that does not bear the signature of the publisher or the author will be considered as having come from an1unauthorizcd source.
Authorized.
PRif\TED BY: JMC PRESS, INC. 388 QUEZOf\ AVENUE QUEZON CITY, PHILIPPINES TEL. ~OS.:
(+632) 410-9534 • 781-9187 (+632) 712-4929 E-MAIL ADDRESS:
[email protected]
TELEF'AX:
This sourcebook entitled "THE NEW ARCHITECTURAL REVIEWER" has been prepared by the author to provide the graduates in the department of Architecture, Comprehensive review materials in the sixteen (16) learning subjects and divided into three (3) AREAS as follows:
AREA A: Part Part Part Part
I. II. Ill. IV.
HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE THEORY OF ARCHITECTURE ARCHITECTURAL AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT THEORY AND PRINCIPLES OF PLANNING
AREA B: Part I. Part II. Part Ill.
STRUCTURAL DESIGN BUILDING MATERIALS AND METHODS 01= CONSTRUCTiON UT IL IT IES 1. SANITARY AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 2. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, HVAC HEATING. VENTILAl,NG AIR-CONDITIONING 3. ELECTRICAL AND OTHER POWER SYSTEMS 4. ACOUSTICS AND ILLUMINATION 5. DISASTER PREVENTION AND FIRE PROTECTION SECURITY SYSTEMS 6. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 7. HIGH- TECH SYSTEMS
AREA C: Part I.
PRE-DESIGN - BUILDING
Part II.
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
Part Ill.
SITE PLANNING
PHOC;H;'>-fvHv1ir·~G
The items included in th1s Reviewer are drawn Horll Boo~\ 9 , 1\rctlltcctural ar1c Construction Data) by the same author. as compret1ens1vely d1scussed w1th full illustrations comprising 1 ,300 pages. with the end view of equipping the graduate students of B.S. Architecture before taking the Board Examlflat1ons (Boohs 1 to 8 are individual books on one subject matter). The comprehensive treatment in each learning area and the adequate exercises provided by the author will challenge the students as they read and answer each test item in the three (3) areas of instruction. With the guidance of instructors and parents, "The New Architectural Reviewer" will prove to be very beneficial to the graduate students of B.S. Architecture GEORGES $ALVAN Architect Fuap AUTHOR iii
The LICENSURE EXAMINATION for Architects shall be given twice a year in the City of Manila and other places where conditions may warrant on the second Mondays, Tuesdays, and Wednesdays of JANUARY and JULY provided such days do not fall on a h9liday. In which case the working day following will be the day of examination. The examination iscontinually evolving. Currently, the Board of Examiners for Architects, under the PRC or Professional Regulation Commission is developing and testing a computer-adaptive exam. The use of computers will speed up reporting of grades, and improve reliability. One interesting feature of a computer-based exam is that it will allow ability and knowledge to be demonstrated progressively as the test is taken. The answer to one question can affect the difficulty of the next so that a more competent candidate will answer fewer difficult questions and probably finish earlier. Although there is no substitute for a good, formal education and broad-based experience provided by. your two (2) year Diversified Experience in various technical aspects of the practice of architecture with a practicing architect, this view guide will help direct your study efforts to increase your chances of passing the Board of Examination for Architects.
1.
EXAMINATION FORMAT
The Architecture Licensure Examination is designed to protect the health, safety and welfare of the public by regulating the practice of Architecture. It does this by testing to see if someone has the knowledge, skills and abilities to perform the services required of an entry-level architect. To this end, the examination is divided into three major areas with their corresponding weights as follows. I
(a) History and theory of architecture; principles of plannmg; architectural practice ............................................. .
(30%)
(b) Structural design; building materials and methods of construction, Utilities ........................... .
(30%)
(c) Architectural design and site planning ........................................ .
(40%)
2. HOW TO TAKE THE TEST
A. Time Management One of the biggest problems many candidates have in taking the board examinations is simply completing it in time. This is especially true of the 10 hour/12 hour design problem because the design problem is particularly unique, guidelines for time management and tips on completing it are discussed in AREA C part II. For the portions of the exam that co 1sist of multiple choice questions, you may want to proceed in one of two ways.
v
With the fh'st approach, proceed from the first question to the last, trying to answer each one regardless of its difficulty. Divide the time alloted by the number of questions to give yoursetf an average time per question. Of course, some will take less than the average, some, more. If you are not able to confidently answer a question in your alloted time or a little more, make note of it and move on to the next one. If you have time at the end, you can go back to the most difficult questions With the second approach, go through the test three (3) times. During the first pass, read each question and answer the ones you are sure of and that do not take any lengthy calcuiations or study of the information packet. Since you will be jumping around, always make sure you are marking the correct answer soace. If a question does not fit into the first category of "easy to answer", makb a mark by it indicating whether yo~.; can answer it with a little thinking or easy calculation or whether it seems impossible and may be a best-guess type or response. During the second pass, answer the next easiest questions. These should be the ones that you can confidently respond t0 after some deductive reasoning or with a calculation with which you are familiar. Once again, make sure you are marking the correct numbered spaces on the answer sheet. During the third pass, answer the questions that remain and that require extra effort or those for which you have to make the best guess between two of the most likely answers. In some cases, you may be making your best guess from among all four options. Using the three-pass method allows you to get a feel1ng for the difficulty of the test during the first pass and helps you budget the remaining time for the unanswered questions. One of the tricks to making this method work is not to go back to reread or reanswer any completed question. In most cases, your first response (or guess) is the best response. No matter which approach you use, answer every question, even if it is a wild guess. You are not penalized for guessing. B. Tips on taking the Examination
Even if you are completely familiar with the subject matter, taking the Licensure Board Examination can be an arduous process, simply because of its length and the concentration required to get through it. As with any act1vity requiring endurance, you should be rested when you start the exam. You should have stopped studying a day or two before the first test day in order to relax as much as possible. Get plenty of sleep the night before and every night between test days. Allow yourself plenty of time to get to the exam site so you do not have to worry about getting lost. stuck in traffic jams, or other transportation problems. An early arrival at the exam room also lets you select a seat with good lighting and as far away from distractions as possible Once in the room, arrange your working materials and other supplies so you are ready to begin as soon as you are allowed. The proctor will review the test instructions as well as general rules about breaks, smoking and other housekeeping matters. You can ask any questions about the rules at this time Once the test begins you should quickly review the material given to you in the test Information packet. For the non-structural divisions of the test, depending on which Major Area you are taking, this will include such things as contracts, specification vi
sections, ~rtioAS of zoning ordinances, portions of building codes, contract drawings, and similar items. You do not need to study this material. Simply make a mental or written note about what is included. So you know it is available when a question requires that you use it. Next cneck the number of questions and set up a schedule for yourself as described in the pre~$ section. If you plan on tackling the questions one by one in sequence, you should have completed about half the questions when half of your alloted time is up. In your scheduling, leave some time at the end of the period to double-check some of the answers,you are most unsure of and to see that you have not marked two responses for any question. C. Study Guidelines vour methoet of studying for the board exams should be based both on the content .1nd form of the exam and your school and work experience. Because the exam covers such a broad range of subject matter, it cannot possibly include every detail of practice. Rather, it tends to focus on what is considered entry-level knowledge and that is important for the protection of the public health, safety and welfare. Your recent work experience should also help you determine what areas to study the most. if you have been involved with construction documents for several years, you will probably require less work in that areathan in others with which you have not had recent experience. This REVIEWER was prepared to help you focus on those topics that will most likely be included in the exam in one form or another. As you go through the manual, you will probabiy find some subjects that are familiar or that come back to you quickly. Others may seem like completely foreign subjects, and these are the ones to give particular attention when using this reviewer. You may even want to study additional sources on these subjects, take review classes, or get special help from someone who knows the topic. The following steps provide a useful structure for organizing your study for the Board Examination.
step 1: Start early. You .cannot review for a test like this by starting two weeks before the date. This is especially true if you are taking all port1ons of the exam for the first time. step 2. Go through the review manuals quickly to get a feeling for the scope of the subject matter. Although this manual and the companion manual on the structural portions of the exam have been prepared based on the content covered, you may want to review the detailed list of tasks and considerations given in the PRC study guides. step 3: Based on this review and a realistic appraisal of your strong and weak areas, set priorities for your study. Determine what topics you need to spend more time with than others. step 4.· Divide the subjects you will review into manageable units and organize them into a sequence of study. Generally, yo!.. should" start with those subjects least familiar to you. Based on the date of the examination vii
and when you are starting to study, assign a time limit to each of the study units you identify. Again, your knowledge of a subject should determine the time importance you give it. For example, you mavwant to devote an entire week to earthquake design if you are unfamiliar with that and only one day to timber design if you know that well. In setting up a schedule, be realistic about other commitments in your life as well as your ability to concentrate on studying for a given amount of time.
step 5: Begin studying and stick with your schedule. This, of course, is the most difficult part of the process and the one that requires the most self-discipline. The job should be easier if you have started early and set up a realistic schedule, allowing time tor recreation and other personal commitments. step 6: Stop studying a day or two before the exam to relax. If you do not know the material by this time, no amount of cramming will help. Here are some additional tips: Know concepts first, then learn the details. For example, it is much better to understand the basic ideas and theories of waterproofing than it is to attempt to memorize dozens of waterproofing products and details. Once you fully understand the concept, the details and application are much easier to learn and to apply during the exam. Do not overstudy any one portion. You are generally better off to review the concepts of all the divisions of the test than to become an overnight expert in one area. For example, the test may ask general questions about plate girders, but it will not ask that you perform a cor:nplete, detailed design of one. Try to talk with people who took the test the year before. Although the exam questions change yearly, it is a good idea to get a general feeling tor the types of questions asked, the general emphasis, and areas that previous candidates found particularly troublesome.
VIii
PAGE
• AREA "A" PART I. HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE
Building and Structures A, B and C........................................
2
Architectural Characters D, C and F.......................................
4
Definitions ... G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, 0, P, Q, R, S ...................
9
Architects/Buildings Designed................................................
28
Famous Dictums/Philosophies/Sayings.................................
29
PART II. THEORY OF ARCHITECTURE
Principles ot Design ' A ......................................................... .
31
Categories of Concern • B ............................................ .
31
Contrast C ..................................................................... .
32
Proportion D ................................................................... .
32
Rhythm E ................................................................................ .
34
Colors F ....................................................................... .
35
Function G .................................................................... .
36
Space H ......................................................................... .
37
Circulation I ............................................................................ ..
38
Massing J ......................... ,....................................................... .
39
Site Control K .... .. .. .. ... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. .. . .. ............. .
41
Enclosure and Systems L ...................................................... .
43
Economics M ......................................................................... .
45
Human Factors and Behavior N ........................................... ..
46
Architectural Lingo 0, P .................................................... ..
48
PART Ill. OFFICE AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE
Agencies Involved in Shelter A ...............................................
52
National Building Code B, C, D...............................................
53
Fire Code E................................................................................
57
Office Practice F, G .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
60
Project Classification H ............................... ............................
66
Spectrum of Architect's Services I ............................... ... .. .. .. ..
69
ix
Contracts J ... .......................... .. .................. .. .. ... ......... .... .. ....... ...
86
Bidding K ........................... ................ ... .. ... .. .. ...... .. ....................
87
Time of Construction Completion L. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. ........ .. ......
90
Projects M. .. .. .. . .. .. ... .. ................. .. ... ...........................................
92
Contract Documents Questions N ... .. .. ... ....... .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .. ......
93
Bidding and Construction Documents 0 ... .. .. ... .. ... .. ... .. .. .......
97
Project Manual and Specifications P ......................................
101
Miscellaneous Questions Q.....................................................
106
PART. IV. THEORY AND PRINCIPLES OF PLANNING 1. PRE-DESIGN- ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS A.
Influence on Urban Development.........................
110
B-1 Community Influence on Design ..........................
115
B-2 Land Analysis.........................................................
116
C.
Transportation and Utility Influences...................
118
D.
Climatic, Ecological, Legal and Economic Influences .............................................
120
Miscellaneous Questions......................................
125
E.
2. SITE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 1. Topography...............................................................
128
2.
Climate.......................................................................
130
3.
Drainage....................................................................
132
4.
Utilities ....................................................... ,...............
133
5. Circulation Automobile, Pedestrian and Service ......................
134
·6.
Parking......................................................................
137
7.
Landscaping.............................................................
141
8.
Property Descriptions,............................................
141
9. Other Design Considerations..................................
142
10. Site Analysis and Design Questions......................
143
• AREA "B" PART I. STRUCTURAL DESIGN Standard Structural Systems ............................. :................. A. wood
B. steel X
c. concrete
154
II
Complex Structural Systems .... ......... ....... .. .. .. .... ......... .
158
Ill
Structural System Selection Criteria.............................
161
IV
Loads on Buildings ... .... ... ....... .. ... ....... ......... .... ... .. ... .. ..
163
V
Structural Fundamentals . .. .. ....... .......... .. ........ .. ..... .. .. ...
165
VI
Definitions, Miscellaneous Questions .. .. ...... .. ..... .. ... .. ...
168
VII
Selection of Structural System . .... .. ... .. .. ........ . . ... .. ... .. .
171
VIII
Loads on Buildings.......................................................
174
IX
Structural Fundamentals ... .. ..... ... .. .. ... .. ... .. ..... .. .. ... .. .....
177
X
Beams and Columns ... .... . .. .. ..... .. .. .. ... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. ... .... .
180
XI
Trusses ... .. .. ... .. ..... .. ... ....... ..... .. ... .. .. . .. ..... .. ..... ..... .. .. ... ...
182
XII
Soil and Foundation ......................... ..
185
XIII
Connections ...................................... .
188
XIV
Building Code Requirements on Structural Design ......................... .
190
Wood Construction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. .. . . .................... .
193
Steel Construction ............................. .
196
XVII
Concrete Construction ................. .
198
XVIII
Wall Construction ........................................................ .
200
XIX
Lateral Forces - Wind ................................................. .
203
XX
Lateral Forces - Earthquake ........................................ .
205
XXI
Long Span Structure One Way Systems ....... ..... ... .. .. ... .. . .. .. ....... ..... .. .. ... ... .... .
208
Long Span Structure Two Way Systems ... .. ... ................ ...... ... .. .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ...
210
XV XVI
XXII
PART II. BUILDING MATERIALS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
1. BUILDING MATERIALS
A. Concrete ................................................................... ..
214
B. Wood, Boards .......................................................... ..
217
·c.
Metals ...................... .. ... .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ..... ... .. .. ... ... .. .. .. ... ... .
221
D. Glass, Plastics, Sealants .. ..... .. .. .. ... . ..... .. .. ...... .. .... .. .. .
224
E. Insulation........................................... .........................
227
F. Doors,. Hardwares ... ....... .. ........ ..... .... ....... ... .. .. ........ ...
229
G. Windows, Hardwares ..................................... :...........
231
xi
H. Abilities, Qualities, Properties of Materials..............
233
I.
Materials and Suppliers or Manufacturers ... .. .. ... .. ...
235
J. Painting .......................................................................
236
K. Miscellaneous Questions ..........................................
239
L. Miscellaneous Questions . .. .. ... ..... .. ......... ... ..... ..... .. .. .
243
M. Miscellaneous Questions ..........................................
246
N. Miscellaneous Questions ..... ........ ............ .. .. .. ...... .. ...
250
2. METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Miscellaneous Questions .......................................... P~RT
253
Ill. UTILITIES
1. SANITARY PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT A. Water Supply...............................................................
258
B. Water Supply...............................................................
261
C. Fire Protection, Storm Water ... ....... ... .. .. .. ... ..... ......... .
264
D. Sanitary, Drainage Systems.......................................
266
E. Sewage Disposal System, Refuse Handling ............
269
F. Miscellaneous Questions ........................ ..................
272
2. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Heat, Moisture, Human Comfort................................
276
B. Heating, Ventilating, Solar Energy ............ ................
280
C. Air -Conditioning ............................. .............. .............
284
D. Conveyors, Vertical Transportation, Building Mechanical Equipments .......... :..................
288
E. Miscellaneous Questions ................... ...... .................
292
3. ELECTRICAL AND OTHER POWER SYSTEMS A. Principles of Electricity..............................................
296
B. Electrical Systems:
Materials, Wiring......................
299
C. Service and Utilization .......... .......... ..... ......... .. ... .. .. ... .
302
D. Miscellaneous Questions ..........................................
305
4. ACOUSTICS and ILLUMINATION
A. Sound Sources, Human Response...........................
309
B. Acoustical Properties of Materials............................
312
C. Solid Structure and Air-Borne Noise Reduction.........................................................
318
xii
D. Physics of Light and Sources...................................
321
E. Miscellaneous Questions ................. .. ... .. ... .. .. ........ ...
327
5. BUILDING PROTECTION, FIRE, SECURITY A. Building Protection ... ..... ................... .. .. ..... ... ..... ..... .. .
331
B. Building Protection Materials........... ........................
334
C. Fire Detection and Alarms ................... ... ............ ... ....
339
D. Fire Alarm Systems, Definitions................................
343
E. Fire Alarm Systems, Definitions................................
346
F. Fire Prevention, Protection........................................
349
G. Security - Burglar Proofing........................... ... .
351
H. Miscellaneous Questions ............................. .
355
6. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS A. Signal Systems ................... ...... ...... ..
358
B. Telelingo ............................................
364
7. HIGH TECH SYSTEMS A. Building Automation ......................... B. Robotics .............................................
369 .... .. .... .. .
372
C. Intelligent Buildings .......................... .... ..... ........ .... ...
376
• AREA "C" PART I. PRE-DESIGN BUILDING PROGRAMMING 1. Functional Requirements ..... .. ..... .. .... ..... .. .. ·~.......
382
A. Determining Space and Volume Needs ........ .... ........
382
B. Determining Total Building Area .... ..
383
C. Determining Space Relationships ........ .
385
2. Design Considerations ......................... ..
386
A. Organizational concepts ......................................... ..
387
B. Circular Patterns ........................................................ .
388
C. Service Spaces ......................................................... .
391
D. Flexibility .................................................................... .
392
3. Psychological and Social Influences ............................ ..
392
A. Behavior Settings .................................................... ..
392
B. Territoriality ...................................................... :........ ..
393
C. Personalization .......................................................... .
393
xiii
0. Group Interaction .................................. .. ........ .. .. ..... ..
393
E. Status ... .. .. ... ... ....... .. .. ... .... ... .. ... .. .. ... ........................ .. ...
394
4. Budgeting and Scheduling...............................................
394
A. Cost Influences...........................................................
395
9. Methods of Budgeting................................................
396
C. Cost Information.........................................................
398
D. Scheduling ............................................................ ......
399
5. Codes and Regulations ... .. .. ... ..... .. .. ........................... .. ....
402
6. The Programming Process ... .. .. .................................. .....
403
A. Establishing Goals ...... .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ... ..... .. .. ... .. .. .. .
403
B. Collecting Facts..........................................................
403
C. Uncovering Concepts ........................... .. ............ .......
403
D. Determining Needs ... .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ........ .. ........ .. ..
404
E Stating the Problem....................................................
404
F. Four Major Considerations During Programming...........................................
404
7. Sample Questions.............................................................
404
PART II. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
1. HOW TO SOLVE 10-12 HOUR DESIGN PROBLEMS A. Strategies for time Management ............. ...... ........ ....
408
B. Read Information Booklet..........................................
410
C. Develop Graphic Notes ............................ ·'··. .. .. ..........
411
D. Check Areas................................................................
411
E. Develop Adjacency Areas ... .. .. ... ... ..... ........... ... .. ..... .. .
412
F. Study Structural Systems ........................... ...............
413
G. Study Mechanical and Plumbing Systems...............
413
H. Begin Detailed Design................................................
414
Check Complete Final Drawing ............. ....................
415
J. Graphic Presentation .................................................
419
I.
PART Ill. SITE PLANNING
A. Design Requirements Related to Topography ... .. .. ..
423
B, Planning for Circulation.............................................
425
C. Parking Requirements...............................................
426
xiv
D. Other Design Considerations .......... ""' ... ,.....................
E. Design Procedure and
Sc-hedu~......
ANSWER
...............•.•.......
427 428
KEYS
• AREA "A"
History of Architecture .
434
Part II. Theory of Architecture .
437
Part ill. Office and Construction Practice
418
Part IV Theory and Principles of Planning
441
Part I.
• AREA "B''
Part I
Structural Oes1gn
442
Part II
Building Materials and Methods c•f Construci!On
456
Part 111
Utilities
459
1
Sanitary and Plumbino Systems
459
,
Mechanical Systems
460
3 , Electrical and Power Systems
461
Acoustics and llluminiation
462
4
5 D1saster Prevention/Fire/Secunty
46~
6. Communication Systems .
464
Pre-Design Building Programming ..
464
• AREA "C''"
Part I
XV
AREA ''A'' PART I
HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE
AREA "A"
PART I
Every country has its own distinctive Architectural Character, and this is immediately recognizable and shown by the different building or structure found in its mainland. In the following questions, match the right examples indicated at the right side and place the right letters in the indicated parenthesis.
MATCHING TYPE
A. EXAMPLE OF BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES
A. Ziggurat of UR, persepolis, hall
1. PRE-HISTORIC PERIOD ...... (
of the hundred columns. ANCIENT NEAR EAST B. Pantheon, Forums, Basilicas, Thermae, Amphitheaters, Colosseum Coemeteria, Triumphal arch, gateways Aqueducts.
2. EGYPTIAN ............................. (
ROMAN
3. ANCIENT NEAR EAST (Mesopotamia) ...................... (
c.
Basilican church, Baptisteries. PRE-HISTORIC
4. PRE-COLUMBIAN, ................ ( MAYA, AZTEC, MEXICO
D. Beehive huts, caves, tents
5. GREEK .................................. (
E. The great mosques, Damascus, and Cordoba, Kiosk at Istanbul, Taj Mahal mausoleum at Agra, Tomb of Humayun, Delhi.
ROMAN .............................. (
F. Sphinx, pyramids, obelisks, mastaba Tombs, Great Temple, Abu-Simbel. Temple of Khons
stonehenge, England, igloos. EARLY CHRISTIAN
ISLAMIC v.
EGYPTIAN
7. EARLY CHRISTIAN .............. (
G.
8. BYZANTINE ........................ (
H. Temple pyramid of the sun, C~a-
St. Sophia, Constantinople St. Mark, Venice. BYZANTINE
del Teotilluacan, Temple of the giant Jaguar, Great plaza of Tenochtitlan Machu Picchu, Peru. PRE-COLUMBIAN
I. Acropolis, Parthenon-temple, Agora, ODEION theatre, stoa, Mausoleum Sarcophagus, open hillside theatres.
9 ISLAMIC .......................... (
GREEK
2
B. EXAMPLE OF BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES
1. ROMANESQUE .................... (
2. GOTHIC ................................. (
3.
RENA~SANCE
..................... (
4. BRITAIN ................................ (
5. CONTINENTAL EUROPE .... (
6. AMERICAS ................. .
..
(
7. MODERN/ INTERNATIONAL ................ (
MATCHING TYPE
A. Palazzo ricardi at Florence. St. Peter's PIAZZA and Cathedral Vatican, Palais du louvre, Paris Chateau de Maisons. St. Paul's Cathedral, London, Guild Houses at Brussels. RENAISSANCE B. The white house, Washington D. C., U. S. Capitol, Trinity Church, Boston Empire estate building, English country houses. Bungalows. AMERICAS C. Eiffel tmler, new louvre, Paris Opera house, Paris & cologne. CONTINENTAL EUROPE D. Salginatobel bridge, Einstein · tower, Chapel of Notre Dame, Johnson Wax building, Falling water, Dulles International Airport, Guggenhiem Museum Sydney Opera house. Geodesic Dome MODERN INTERNATIONAL E. Notre Dame Cathedral. Paris Canterbury Cathedral, King's College. Canterbury town halls. skippers house at Ghent. GOTHIC F. Westmmster New Palace (House of Parliament) London. Crystal Palace, London, University Museum, Oxford. Red house, Kent, Cathedral at Guildford. BRITAIN
G. St. Zeno. Maggiore monastery, Leaning Tower, Cathedral & baptistery of Pisa, Monas!eries, Castles fortifications, chateaus, Manor houses. ROMANESQUE
3
C. EXAMPLE OF BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES 1. INDIA, PAKISTAN .................. (
A. Pagoda, great wall, Imperial Palace, Temple of the Sleeping Buddha, courtyard houses.
2. SRI LANKA ............................ (
B. SHWE Dagon Pagoda, Bakong temple, Angkor, Temple of Angkor vat, Throne Room, Royal Palace, Bangkok. WAT phra Kaew Temple, Stupa of Barabudur, Angkor WAT.
CHINA
3. AFGHANISTAN, NEPAL, TIBET ..................................... (
BURMA, CAMBODIA, THAILAND, INDONESIA
C. Nipa house, Bontoc house, Datu·s house, Yakan house, Vigan houses, Antillan houses, Asian Development Bank, cultural Center, Folk Arts theater, PICC, Heart Center, Lung Center. PHILIPPINES
4. BURMA, CAMBODIA, THAILAND, INDONESIA ...... (
D. Wa-ta-da-ge (circular relichouse) Polonnaruwa, Anuradhapura house. SRI LANKA
5. CHINA .................................... (
E. Torii (Shinto gateways) ISE shrine. pagodas, palaces, Bath houses, tea houses, Imperial Villa. JAPAN
6. JAPAN .................................... (
F. Rock-cut temple, Great Stupa at Sanchi, Great Temple, Tanjore Vihara monastery. INDIA, PAKISTAN
-;-
PHILIPPINES
....
G. Statue of Buddha, Pagoda roofs, Potala Palace. Temple of Muktinath.
(
AFGHANISTAN, NEPAL, TIBET
D. ARCHITECTURAL CHARACTERS OF COUNTRY 1 PRE-HISTORIC PERIOD ...... (
A. Columnar and · trabeated, wooden roofs were untrussed, ceilings sometimes omitted, optical illusions were corrected, in Greek temples. Three orders of architecture; the Doric, ionic and Corinthian were introduced. GREEK
4
2. EGYPTIAN ............................. (
B. Novel development of the dome to cover polygonal and square plans for churches. Tombs and baptisteries, by means of a pendentive. "Fresco" decoration is used-marble al')d Mosaic were used broadly. BYZANTINE
3: ANCIENT NEAR EAST (Mesopotamia) ....................... (
C. Widely spaced columns carrying semi-circular arches. Basilican churches have 3 or 5 aisles, covered by a simple timber roof. Mosaic decoration was added internally, separate buildings used for baptism or Baptisteries are a feature. EARLY CHRISTIAN
4. PRE-COLUMBIAN.
AMERICA Maya-AztecMexico-Peru .......................... (
D. The arch and the vault was de-
veloped. Two orders of architecture was added. The Tuscan and the composite concrete is now used, a composition of lime, sand, pozzolana and broken bricks, or small stones. ROMAN
5. GREEK ............................. (
E. Abundance of clay provided bricks. Roofs flat outside. Architecture was arcuated winged deity and winged human headed lion used as decor. Houses of one room, entered by a single door and without windows. ANCIENT NEAR EAST
6. ROMAN .............................. (
F. Bulbous or onion dome, Minarets stalactite moulding. crestings, painted arch are employed.
7. EARLY ~HRISTIAN ............... (
G. Temporary shelter from perishable materials, caves, rocks on top of each other, hard packed snow blocks, animals skins.
ISLAMIC
PRE-HISTORIC
5
8. BYZANTINE ........................... (
H. Temple pyramids are approached by a single steep flight of steps. For all buildings of importance, stone was employed, either finely dressed or carved or laid as roughly dressed rubble. PRE-COLUMBIAN AMERICA
9. ISLAMIC ................................. (
I. Batlered or sloping outside wall, columns and capitals from vegetable origins, papyrus buds, lotus flower walls are of mud-brick and thick, up to 9 meters. Unbroken massive walls are adorn with HIEROGLYPHICS. EGYPTIAN
E. ARCHITECTURAL CHARACTERS OF COUNTRY
A. Neo-classic and Greek revival
1. ROMANES9UE ..................... (
was followed. Baloon frame was introduced. The skyscraper was contributed related to metal frame construction. The nonload bearing "curtain wall" and the elevator. AMERICAS
2. GOTHIC ................................. (
B. Repetition of standard bays, both plan and elevation, an affinity with bay system, programmatically adopted with the introduction of iron construction. CONTINENTAL EUROPE
3. RENAISSANCE ..................... (
C. Ribbed & panel, cross vaults; plaster strips, arcades, rose windows. Sober and dignified style, formal massing depends on the grouping of towers and the projection of transepts and choir.
4. BRITAIN ................................. (
D. Free-standing glass sheath suspend on a framework across the face of the building or curtain wall. Art Noveau and Bauhaus was developed. Enormous spans unobstructed were at length achieved with concrete. Steel is used in "space-frame.
ROMANESQUE
MODERN INTERNATIONAL
6
5. CONTINENTAL EUROPE ..... (
E. Picturesque values, reflected in the predilection for highly textured, colorful materials, asymmetry and informaiity. The palazzo style was a triumph of national eclecticism. New functions and techniques produced new forms. Taller buildings were designed due to reinforced concrete and cast-iron frames. New materials were used due to the effect of canals. Railroad systems. central heating and elevator or lift.
6. AMERICAS ................... :........ (
F. Pointed arch, buttress, flying buttress, gargoyles, decorated vaulting, rose and lancet windows ploughshare twist, variety of open roofs (trussed, tiebeam, collar)
BRITAIN
GOTHIC
7. MODERN/ INTERNATIONAL .................. (
G. Rusticated masonry, quoins, Balusters, dome or raised drums, pediments one within the other, rococo, Baroque style, salon, mansard roofs. RENAISSANCE
F. ARCHITECTURAL CHARACTER OF COUNTRY A. Stepped temple pyramid, terraced on a hill, using stone without mortar fitted perfectly and numerous colossal towers. Religious buildings were overlaid with ornamentation of Chinese characters surfaces often finished with porcelain tile. Walls are white stucco, multi-levelled overlapping timber roofs. Gables and bargeboard decorated with Hindu iconography. Doors and window shutters are of carved wood, lacquered in black and gold.
1. INDIA, PAKISTAN .................. (
BURMA, CAMBODIA, THAILAND, INDONESIA
7
2. SRI LANKA ............................ (
B. Use of indigenous materials for houses like bamboo, palm leaves, sturdy wooden posts, carved wooden sidings, cogon grass roof. Spanish style high pitch roots, Capiz shell windows, barandillas, balconies, coconut shell and wood dasign. Much use of galvanized iron sheet for roofing. PHILIPPINES
3. AFGHANISTAN, NEPAL,
C. Root ridges are laden with
TIBET ..................................... (
elaborate ornamental cresting and the up-tilted angles are adorned with fantastic dragons and grotesque ornament. Roofs one on top of each other using S-shape enamelled tiles. Roof framing in rectangle and not triangle. Use of bright colors columns brackets are decorated with birds, flowers and dragons. CHINA
4. BURMA, CAMBODIA,
THAILAND, INDONESIA ....... (
D. Hindu worship is an individual act. Buddhist religious buildings or shrine<> took the form of stupas, and are designed for congregational use. Mouldings have bulbous character. The Torus moulding is used. Various Bas reliefs 1depicting scenes of daily life and story of Buddha. The female form in its most voluptuous form is often used.
5. CHINA .................................... (
E. Light and delicate timber construction is refined by minute carving and decoration. Dominant roofs characterized by their exquisite curvature, supported by a succession of brackets. Upper part of the roof is terminated by a gable placed vertically above the end walls. Rooms are regulated by a "KEN" Tatami mats. Love of nature. Using stone.. lantern, bonsai.
INDIA, PAKISTAN
JAPAN
8
F. Rock temples, with square or
6. JAPAN .................................... (
octagonal pillars. A circular relic house (wata-dage) built in stone and brick is an outstanding arch'l creation. An architecture of wood. with high pitched roofs, with wide eaves, slightly curved, finished with small flat shingles and terra cotta tifes. Windows with, lacquered wood bars, carved timber doorways, ornamental metalwork door furniture, painted walls. SRI LANKA
7. PHILIPPINES ......................... (
G. Cupola roofs, spanning with arched squinches, the square chamber angles, lantern roof and coffered dome, an elaborate systems of hexagon each containing statue of Buddha, the "sikhara" and "pagoda" temples survive. A monumental pillar generally supporting a metal super structure adorned with mystic symbols, groups of divinities and portraits statuary of royalties. Windows have intricate lattice screens and roof have red curved tiles, metal gutters and projecting cornice and fancifully decorated with carving, embossing and tinkling bells and hanging lamps. The monastery is fortress like sited on hil· tops pillars and beams are painted yellow or red and painted silks hang from the roof. AFGHANISTAN, NEPAL, TIBET
G. DEFINITIONS (put the corresponding letter) 1. SPHINX .................................. (
A. Consists of a complex of sarsen
stones and smaller blue stones set in a circle and connected by lintels. STONEHENGE
2. MASTABA .......... :................... (
B. Pictorial representation ot reli-
gious ritual. historic events and daily pursuits. HIEROGLYPHICS
9
3. OBELISK ................................ (
c.
4. PYRAMID ............................... (
D. Mythical monsters each with the body of a lion and a head of a man, hawk, ram or a woman possessed.
5. BATTER ................................. (
E. An ancient Egyptian rectangular, flat-topped funerary mound, with battered (sloping) sides covering a burial chamber below ground.
6. STONEHENGE ..................... (
F. A massive funerary structure of stone or brick with a square base and four sloping triangular sides meeting at the apex.
Inward inclination or slope of an outer wall. BATTER
SPHINX
MASTABA
PYRAMID
7. ZIGGURAT ............................. (
G.
8. HIEROGLYPHICS ................. (
H.
Huge monoliths, square on plan and tapering to an electrumcapped pyra-midion at the summit, which was the sacred part. The four sides are cut with hieroglyphics. OBELISK
Artificial mountains made up of tiered, rectangular stages which rose in number from one to seven. ZIGGURAT
H. DEFINITIONS (put the corresponding letter) 1. DOLMEN ............................... (
A. The term applied to the triangular curved overhanging surface by means of which a circular dome is supported over a square or polygonal compartment.
2. VOUSSOIRS ......................... (
B. A term originally applied to painting on a wall while the plaster is wet and is not in oil colors.
3. EXEDRA ................................ (
C. An adjective used to describe an artist who selects forms and ideas from different periods or countries and combines them to produce a harmonious whole.
PENDENTIVE
FRESCO
ECLECTIC
10
'
4. CELLA .................................... (
D.
5 STUPA ····························-······ (
E. A large fortified place; a fort of-
Term in a specialized sense to describe one of the attitudes of taste towards architecture and landscape gqrdening in the late 18th and early 19th century. PICTURESQUENESS
ten including a town; any place of security. FORTRESS
6. ECLECTIC ............................. (
F. Pre-Colombian edifice dedicated to the service or worship of their god which is made of stones entered by a single door to a very steep single flight of steps, above it rises a high stone roof. MAYAN TEMPLE PYRAMID
7. SOFFIT .................................. (
G.
The sanctuary of a classical temple, containing the cult statue of the god.
8. FORTRESS ........................... (
H.
An ancient structure usually regarded as a tomb, consisting of two or more large, upright stones set with a space between and capped by a horizontal stone.
CELLA
DOLMEN
9. PENDENTIVE ........................ (
I. In ancient (Greece or Rome) a room or covered area or open on one side used as a meeting place. EXEDRA
10. MAYAN TEMPLE PYRAMID ............................... (
J. Any of the pieces, in the shape of a truncated wedge, which form an arch or vault. VOUSSOIR
11. PICTURESQUENESS ........... (
K. Domical mounds which grouped with their rails, gateways, professional paths and crowning "umbrella" came to be known as symbols of the universe.
12. FRESCO ................................ (
L. The exposed undersurface of any overhead component of a building such as an arch, balcony, beam, cornice, lintel or vault.
STUPA
SOFFIT
11
MATCHING TYPE
I. DI!PINITIONS
1. STOA ..................................... (
A. A triangular piece of wall above the entablature enclosed by rak ing corr.ices. PEDIMENT
2. ATLANTES ............................. (
B. The sharp edge formed by the meeting of two surface usually in DORIC columns.
3. ABACUS ................................ (
C. The vertical channeling on the
ARRIS
shaft of a column. FLUTES
4. ENTASIS ................................ (
D. A small flat band between mouldings to separate them from each other. FILLETS
5. FLUTES ................................. (
E. The lowest square member of the base of a column.
6. CARYATIDS ........................... (
F. The portion of a pedestal between its base and cornice. A
PLINTH
term also applied to the lower portions of walls when decorated separately. DADO
7. DADO ..................................... (
G. Or town square, was the centre of social and business life, around which were stoas, or colonnaded porticoes, temples, markets, public buildings, monuments, shrines. AGORA
8. ARRIS .................................... (
H. A swelling or curving outwards along the outline of a column shaft, designed to counteract the optical illusion which gives a shaft bounded by straight lines the appearance of curving inwards.
9. FILLETS ................................. (
I. A slab forming the crowning member of a column.
1U. PEDIMENT .......................... (
J. Carved male figures serving as
ENTASIS
ABACUS
pillars also called Telamones. ATLANTES
K. Sculptured female figures used
11. PLINTH ................................. (
as columns or. supports. CARYATIDS
12
12. AGORA .................................. (
L. A long colonnaded building, served many purposes, used around public places and as shelter at religious shrines. STOA
J. DEFINITIONS
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1. TRIUMPHAL ARCH ............... (
A. A mass of masonry built against a wall to resist the pressure of an arch or vault. BUTTRESS
2. THERMAE ............................. (
B.
Line of intersection of cross vaults.
3. COLOSSEUM ........................ (
c.
An arch covering in stone or brick over any building.
4. AQUEDUCTS ........................ (
D. A turret or part of a building elevated above the main building.
5. FORUM .................................. (
E. Sunk panels, caissons or Iacunaria formed in ceilings, vaults or domes.
6. PINNACLE ............................ (
F. Corresponds to the Agora in a Greek city was a central open space, used as a meeting place. market or rendezvous for political demonstrations.
7. SARCOPHAGUS ................... (
G. Palatial public baths of Imperial Rome, raised on a high platform.
GROINS
VAULT
PINNACLE
COFFER
FORUM
THERMAE
8. MAUSOLEUM ....................... (
H. Elliptical Amphitheaters are characteristically Roman buildings found in every important settlement, used to display of mortal combats (Gladiatorial)
9. GROINS ................................. (
I. A term applied to monumental tombs. They consisted of large cylindrical blocks, often on a quadrangular podium, topped with a conical crown of earth or stone.
COLOSSEUM
MAUSOLEUM
13
10. COFFER ............................ (
J. These are arches erected to emperors and generals commemorating victorious campaigns, with one or three openings. Such arches were adorned with appropriate bas-reliefs and usually carried grit-bronze '3tatuary on an attic storey and having a dedicatory inscription in its face. TRIUMPHAL ARCH
11. BUTTRESS ............................ (
K. A roman structure where immense quantities of water were required for the great thermae and for public fountains, and for domestic supply tor the large population.
12. VAULT .................................... (
L. Taken from a tomb chamber, or
AQUEDUCTS
the ornamental treatment given to a stone coffin hewn out of one block of marble and with sculptures, figures and festoons of a late period, surmounted by lids like roofs terminating in scrolls. SARCOPHAGUS
MATCHING TYPE
K. DEFINITIONS 1. NARTHEX ................. c............ (
A.
2. BAPTISTERIES ..................... (
B. The circular or rnultangu1ar ter-
A canopy supported by columns generally placed over an altar or tomb also known as ciborium. BALDACHINO
mination of Cl church sanctuary. APSE
3. FONT ..................................... (
C. Decorative surfaces fonned by a small cubes of stones, glass, and marble. MOSAIC
4. DOME .................................... (
D. A range of arches supported on piers or columns attached to or detached from the wall.
5. BEMA .................................... (
E. Tile principal or central longitudinal area of a church, extending from the main entrance or narthex to the chancel, usually flanked by aisles of less height.
ARCADE
NAVE
14
6. ARCADE ................................ (
F. A long arcaded entrance porch to a Christian basilican church.
7. AMBO .................................... (
G.
~-
H.
MOSAIC ................................. (
NARTHEX
A longitudinal division of an interior area. as in a church, separated from the main area by an arcades or the like. AISLE
A raised stage in a basilican church reserved for the clergy. BEMA
9. BALDACHINO ....................... (
I. A raised pulpit on either side of a basilican church from which the epistle of a gospel were AMBO read.
10. AISLE ..................................... (
J. A building or a part of a church in which baptism is administered. BAPTISTERIES
11. NAVE ..................................... (
K. A basin usually of stone which holds the water for baptism. FONT
12. APSE .................................... (
L. A vault having a circular plan, and usually in the form of a portion of a sphere, so constructed as to exert an equal thrust in all directions. DOME
L. DEFINITIONS 1. KIOSK .................................... (
A. A public open space in Byzantine architecture. surrounded by buildings. PIAZZA
2. MOSQUE ............................... (
B. The central stone of a semi-circular arch, sometimes sculptured. KEYSTONE
3. CORBEL ................................ (
C. The triangular space enclosed by the curve of an arch, a vertical line from its springing, a horizontal line through its apex.
4. MINARET ............................... (
D. A screen in a Greek orthodox church on which icons or (sacred images), pictures, are placed separating the chancel from the space, open to the laity
SPANDREL
VERANDAH
15
5. CHAMFER ............................. (
E. Women's or private quarters of a house or place in Islamic architecture. HAREM
6. ATRIUM ................................. (
F. An inward-looking building whose prime purpose is contemplation and prayer. A space without object of adoration (Muslim) MOSQUE
7. SQUINCH .............................. (
G. A tall tower in, or continuous to, a mosque arch, stairs leading up to one or more balconies from which the faithful are called to prayer. MINARET
8. HAREM .................................. (
H. A small pavilion, usually open, built in gardens and parks KIOSK
9. CENOTAPH ........................... (
I. An approach or an open forecourt surrounded by arcades in a Basilican church. ATRIUM
10. OGEE ..................................... (
J. A block of stone, often elaborately carved or moulded, projecting from a wall, supporting the beams of a roof, floor or vault. CORBEL
11. KEYSTONE ........................... (
K. A diagonal cutting of an arris formed by two surfaces at an angle.
12. ICONOSTASIS ....................... (
L. Geometrical ornaments due to absence of human and animal statues.
13. VERANDAH ........................... (
M. A double curve, resembling the letterS, formed by the union of a curve and a convex line.
14. PIAZZA .................................. (
N. A small arch or bracket built across each angle of a square or polygonal structure to form an octagon or other appropriate base for a dome or a spire.
15. ARABESQUE ........................ (
0. A covered porch or balcony extending along the outside of a building, planne.d for summer leisure.
CHAMFER
ARABESQUE
OGEE
SQUINCH
VERANDAH
16
16. SPANDREL ............................ (
P. An empty tomb a monument erected in memory of one not interred in or under it. CENOTAPH
M. DEFINITIONS 1. TURRET ................................ (
A. The high platform on which temples were generally placed (in general, any elevated platform)
2. MULLIONS ............................. (
B. An umbrella shaped cupola
3. CHATEAU .............................. (
c.
4. FLECHE ................................. (
D. Is a rectangular feature in the
PODIUM CHATTRIS
Vaulting in Romanesque in which a framework of ribs supported thin stone panels. The new method consisted in designing the profile of the transverse, longitudinal and diagonal ribs to which the form of the panels was adopted. RIB AND PANEL
shape of a pillar, but projecting only about one sixth of its breadth from the waiL PILASTER STRIP
5. NICHE .................................... (
E. The ornamental pattern work in stone, filling the upper part of a Gothic window. TRACERY
6. BOSS ..................................... (
F. The part of a cruciform church, projecting at right angles to the main building. TRANSEPT
7. PILASTER STRIP .................. (
G.
8. CHATTRIS ............................. (
H. A slender wooden spire rising from a roof.
A (shell) or a recess in a wall, hallowed like a shell for a statue or ornament. NICHE
FLECHE
9. TRACERY .............................. (
I. Small towers, often containing stairs, and forming special features in mediab"'' ~t:iidi;Jgs.
10. PODIUM ................................. (
J. Vertical tr:1cery .members dividing windows into different numbers of light.
TURRET
MULLIONS
17
11. TRANSEPT ............................ (
K. A castle in a french-speaking country, or a stately residence. CHATEAU
12. RIB AND PANEL .................... (
L. (lump or knob) or projecting ornamert at the intersection of the ribs of ceilings, whether vaulted or flat. BOSS
14. DEFINITIONS. 1. CIMBORIO ............................. (
A. A slight convex curvature built into a truss or beam to compensate for any anticipated deflection so that it will have no sag when under load. CAMBER
2. LARDER·························'······ (
B. A vault in which the ribs compose a star-shaped pattern. STELLAR VAULT
3. SPIRE .................................... (
c.
4. STEEPLE ............................... (
D. Covered passages round an
A bay window especially cantilevered or corbelled out from the face of a wall by means of projecting stones. ORIEL WINDOW
open space or garth, connecting the church to the chapter house. CLOISTERS
5. WARDROBE .. ..................... (
E. The dining hall of a monastery, convent, pr college. REFECTORY
6. CAMBER ................................ (
F. A building complex of a certain english order or a self -contained community used by monks. MONASTERY
7. CLOISTERS .......................... (
G.
8. PANTRY ................................. (
H. A room where food is stored.
A serving room between kitchen and dining room, or a room for storage of food supplies. PANTRY LARDER
9. STELLAR VAULT ................... (
I. A room for storage of garments.
10. MONASTERY ........................ (
J. Special term for a lantern or
WARDROBE
raised structure above a roof admitting light into the interior. CIMBORIO
18
11. ORIEL WINDOW ................... (
K. The tapering termination of a tower in Gothic churches. SPIRE
12. REFECTORY··········:·············· (
L. The term applied to a tower crowned by a spire. STEEPLE
0. DEFINITIONS. 1. SCROLL ................................. (
A. The chief magistrate's buildings, in the former republic of Venice and Genoa. DOGE'S PALACE
2. PALAZZO ............................... (
B. A tower not connected with "Bell" a term applied to the upper room in a tower in which the bells are hung.
3. BALUSTER ... .. .. ... .. ... .
c.
BELFRY
... (
A space entirely or partly under a building; in churches, generally beneath the chancel and used for burial in earlier times. CRYPT
4. ROCOCO .............................. (
D. The space about the altar of a church. usually separated by a screen for the clergy and other officials, usually referred to as the "choir" CHANCEL
5. BAROQUE ........................... (
E. (British) The hall built or used by a medieval association as of merchants and tradesmen, organized to maintain standards that constituted a governing body. DOGE'S HALL
6. BELFRY ................................. (
F. An Italian impressive public building or private building. PALAZZO
7. ENTABLATURE ..................... (
G.
8. DOGE'S HALL ....................... (
H. One of a number of short vertical members often circular in section used to .s..;tJport a stair handratl or a coping.
An eternal solid angle of a wall or the like. One of the stones forming it, corner stone (Renaissance) QUOINS
BALUSTER
19
9. PAVILION ............................... (
10. CHANCEL .............................. (
I. Or rock, a term applied to a type of Renaissance ornament in which rock-like forms, fantastic scrolls, and crimped shells are worked up together in a profusion and confusioR of detail often without organic coherence but presenting a lavish display of decoration. ROCOCO J. An ornament consisting of a
spirally wound band, either as a running ornament or as a terminal. like the volutes of the ionic capital. 11. QUOINS ................................. (
SCROLL K. In France, anything extrava-
gantly ornamented, so ornate as to be in bad taste, a style of art· and architecture in Italy in the 17th to 18th century. BAROQUE
12. CONSOLE .........·.................... (
13. CRYPT ................................... (
L. The central shaft of a circular staircase. Also applied to the post in which the handrail is framed. NEWEL M. A sphencal roof, placed like an
inverted cup over a circular, square, or multangular apartment. CUPOLA
14. NEWEL .................................. (
N. (little hou¢e, for pleasure and
recreation). A prominent structure, generally distinctive in character. PAVILION
15. DOGE'S PALACE .................. (
0. Or bracket, is a projecting member to support a weight generally formed with scrolls or volute ~hen carrying the upper member of a cornice.
16. CUPOLA ................................ (
P. The entire construction of a classical temple or the like, between the columns and the eaves usually composed of an architrave, frieze, a cornice.
CONSOLE
ENTABLATURE
20
P. DEFINITIONS 1. VESTIBULE ........................... (
A. Also called brackets or ccnsoles or ancones is a projecting member to support a weight generally formed with scrolls or volutes which carry the upper member of a cornice.
2. LANTERN .............................. (
3. WREATH ................................ (
4. SALON ................................... (
5. MANSARD ............................. (
6. NYMPHAEUM ....................... (
7. FINIAL .................................... (
8. PEDESTAL ............................ (
9. DORMER ............................... (
10. HERMES ................................ (
21
MODILLIONS B. A support for a column statue or vase, it usually consists of a base, die, and cornice or cap mould. PEDESTAL C. A decorative niche often topped with a canopy and housing a statue. TABERNACLE D. A window in a sloping roof usually that of a sleeping apartment. DORMER E. Vertical members dividing windows into different number of lights. MULLION F. The horizontal divisions or crossbars of windows. TRANSOM G. A roof having a double. Slope on all four sides; the lower slope being much steeper and flatter upper portion also known as gambrel roof. MANSARD H. A room decorated witn plants, sculpture and fountains (often decorated with beautiful Maidens living in rivers, trees) and intended for relaxation. NYMPHAEUM I. A twisted band, garland or chaplet, representing flowers, fruits, leaves, often used in decoration. WREATH J. A construction such as a tower, at the crossing of a church rising above the neighboring roofs and glazed at the sides. LANTERN
11. MULLION ............................... (
K. An ante-room to a larger apartment of a building. VESTIBULE
12. PATIO ..................................... (
L. In Renaissance, a room used primarily for exhibition of art objects, or a drawing room.
13. MODILLIONS ......................... (
M. A bust on a square pedestal instead of a human body, used in classic times to mark boundaries on highways, and used decoratively in Renaissance times.
14. TRANSOM ............................. (
N. (to walk) the cloister or covered passage around the east end of a church, behind the altar.
15. TABERNACLE ....................... (
0. An ornate iron grille, or screen, a characteristic feature of Spanish church interiors.
16. AMBULATORY ...................... (
P. A Spanish arcaded or colonnaded courtyard.
SALON
HERMES
AMBULATORY
FINIAL
PATIO
Q. DEFINITIONS
1. FINIAL .................................... (
A. Phase of the early period of Spanish architecture c-f thP. later 15th and early 16th century, an intricate style named after its likeness to silver work. PLATERESQUE
2. DAIS ....................................... (
B. An expression of Spanish Baroque architecture and sculpture, a recurrent feature was the richly garlanded spiral column.
3. BAY WINDOW ················'······ (.
C. A movable candle lamp-stand with central shaft, and often, branches or a decorative representation thereof.
4. HELM ROOF ......................... (
D. Earth baked (unglazed) or burnt in moulds. For use in construction and decoration, harder in quality than brick.
CHURRIGUERESQUE
CANDELABRA
TERRA COTTA
22
5. GALLERY .............................. (
E. One of the winged heavenly beings that support the throne of God or act as guardian spirits. or Chubby, rosy-faced child with wings.
6. STRAPWORK ........................ (
F. A coat of arms.
CHERUBS HERALDIC
7. · INTERCOLUMNIATION ......... (
G. The window of a protruded bay or the windowed bay itself.
8. CHERUBS ............................. (
H. A raised platform reserved for the seating ol speakers or dignitaries.
9. TERRA-COTIA ...................... (
I. A roofed but open-sided structure afford inn an extensive view, usually located at the Rooftop of a dwelling but sometimes an independent buildmg or an eminence on a formal garden.
BAY WINDOW
DAIS
BELVEDERE
J. A communicatin11 passage or
10. HERALDIC
wide comdor for ',:ctures and statues. An upper f · y for seats in a church. GALLERY .(
K. A type of relit~ I ·>r 'ldment or cresting resernbl'i ·J studded leather straps arranged in geometrical and sometimes interlaced patterns much used in the early renaissance architecture of England.
12. PULPIT .............................. (
L. Bulbous termination to the top of a tower, found principally in Central and Eastern Europe.
13. BELVEDERE .......................... (
M. The space between the two columns.
14. CHURRIGUERESQUE .......... (
N. (grating) an ornament in classic or renaissance architecture consisting of an assembly of straight lines intersecting at right angles, and of various patterns.
11. PLATERESQUE ..
STRAPWORK
HELM ROOF
INTERCOLUMNIATION
FRETWORK
15. CANDELABRA ..................... (
0. Also called "key pattern" the upper portion of a pinnacle. FINIAL
23
16. FRETWORK .......................... (
P. An elevated enclosed stand in a church in which the preacher stands. PULPIT
R. DEFINITIONS
1. WATA-DAGE .......................... (
A.
Type of timber framing in America about 1820 wherein it owes its strength to the walls, roof acting as diaphragms; and not on the post. It is an extension of the roof.
2. TUDOR-REVIVAL .................. (
B.
The arrangement and design of windows in a building.
3. TORUS·····························:···· (
c.
4. PAGODA ................................ (
D. An art free from any historical
BALLOON FRAME
FENESTRATION
A structural system consisting of trusses in two directions rigidly· connected at their intersections. A rectangular shape is formed where the top and bottom chords of the trusses are directly above and below one another. SPACE-FRAME
style characterized by forms of nature for ornamentation in the facade aptly called for floral design. ART NOUVEAU
5. BUNGALOW .......................... (
E.
6. FAIENCE ................................ (
F. Related or conforming to tech-
A school founded by Gropius in 1919, developing a form of training intended to relate art and architecture to technology and the practical needs of modern life. BAUHAUS
nical architectural principles. ARCHITECTONIC
7. STAMBAS or LATHS ............. (
G.
One storey with low overhanging roof and broad front porch. Unpretentious style often rambling spreadout floor plan, more expensive to build.
8. GREAT WALL ....................., .. (
H.
Picturesque composition built in America since 1980. Half timbering and massive medieval
BUNGALOW
TUDOR REVIVAL
24
l
chimney. Identified by prominent gables and large, expansive windows with small panes. Roof often slate or tiles. Also called Elizabethan or Jacobean. DOME
9. ART NOVEAU ........................ (
I. Rock-cut temples in India. RATHS
10. BAUHAUS .............................. (
J. A large c•nvex moulding used principally in the bases of columns .
11. FENESTRATION ................... (
K. A glazed earthware originally made in ltaiy.
1i
ARCHITECTONIC ................. (
L. Monumental pillars standing free without any structural function, with circular or octagonal shafts with inscriptions carved in it. The capital was bellshaped and crowned with animal supported bearing the Bud· dhist wheel of the Law
13. RATHS .................................. (
M. Outstanding Architectural creation in Sri Lanka which is a circular relic house built in stone and brick.
14. SPACE-FRAME .................... (
N. A Chinese ceremonial gateway erected in memory of an eminent person.
15. SALOON-FRAME ................. (
0. Most typical Chinese building ,
.
TORUS
FAIENCE
STAMBAS or LATHS
WATA-DAGE
PAILOU
usually octagonal in pi
16. PAILOU .................................. (
P. Most famous of ancient Chinese building undertakings. It snakes, loops, and double back on itself. Meandering across valleys, plains, scaling mountains, plunging into deep gorges and leaping raging rivers for 3,700 miles. GREAT WALL
25
S. DEFINITIONS 1_
BONSAI ................................. (
A.
A Japanese aominant roof characterized by their exquisite curvature, and are supported upon a succession of simple or com-· pound brackets. The upper part of the roof is terminated by a gable placed vertically above the end walls, while the lower part of the main roof is carried round the ends of the building in a hipped form. IRIMOYA GABLE
2. ANTILLAN HUUSF: ................ (
B.
lntercolumniation is regulated by this standard of Japanese measurement, which is divided into 20 parts called minutes and in each minute being again divided into 20 parts or seconds of spac,e. KEN
3. BELVEDERE .......................... (
c.
Shinto temples are characterized by this gateway formed by upright posts supporting two or more horizontal beams. TORII
4. TEJI. HOUSE .......................... (
D. An arcade of roofed gallery built into or projecting from the side of a building particularly one overlooking an open court.
5. KEN
E.
LOGGIA .................
(
An open rooted gallery in an upper storey, built for giving a view of the scenery. BELVEDERE
6. IFUGA0 1BONTOC HOUSE ... (
F. A dwarf tree, which is a perfect reflection of Japanese culture. BONSAI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I\
G.
In Japan, a structure where the appreciation of the arts and flower arrangement, with drinking ceremony is done.
8. MARANAO HOUSE ............. (
H.
Cordillera one room house on four wooden posts with an animal or insect barrier and a pyrarnidal root Cogon grass built IFUGAO-BONTOC HOUSE without nails.
7. NIPA HUT
. .. .
TEA HOUSE
26
9. IVATAN HOUSE ..................... (
I. Lowlands area house with pitched roof, made of bamboo poles, thatch roof with woven split canes for walls and split bamboo slats for flooring.
10. LOGGIA ................................. (
J. A house with prowlike majestic rr)ot, the polychrome, extrava-
MARANAO HOUSE
gant wooden carvings derived from the Malay Mythical bird the "SARI MANOK" The silken Muslim canopies in the interiors. The protruding ends of floor beams is decorated with intricate carvings. NIPA HUT
11. IRIMOYA GABLE ................... (
K. An elegant two storey, rectangular town house with a massive stone first floor and a light and airy second floor, motherof-pearl o~ 'capiz' windows and picturesque wide tile roof. Entrance is of heavy plank door with wrought iron or brass nails, sturdy balustrades of wood or iron grilles below windows to let in cool air.
12. TORII ..................................... (
L. Made of 0. 75 m. thick stone of lime wall with thick thatched roof made of several layers of cogon and held together by seasoned sticks or reeds and rattan to withstand fiercest typhoons in the north.
13. TROMPE L'OEIL. .................. (
M. These are Garden rooms. (a) fanciful, pre-fabricated models attached to houses, filled with wrought iron or wicker furniture exotic plants and birds. (b) These are open spaces with seating areas beneath wood rafters or leaf-entwined plants. (c) a roofed place, shaded from the sun, to read or to entertain and enjoy the view.
ANTILLAN HOUSE
IVATAN HOUSE
CONSERVATORIES, ARBORS and GAZEBOS
27
14. COUNTRY HOUSE ............... (
N. 1930,s modernists style of art in: spired by mechanical forms and chiefly distinguished by geometrical shapes, bold colour schemes and symmetrical designs, suitable for mass production. ART DECO
15. ART DECO ............................ (
0. Or "fool the eye" are paintings adorning everything from cabinets to cupboards, fire screen to dishwashers. This creates an illusion of space. A make-believe doorway for example extends a hall. A glass cabinet or a door is painted with cows and chicken and make believe or create an outdoor scene. TROMPE L'OEIL
16. CONSERVATORIES, ARBORS and GAZEBOS ...... (
P. A house composed of natural materials. It is an eclectic and organic look that grows and changes with antiques and a clutter of different collections, made of rough plaster, old beams, wood framed windows and slate or brick floors. COUNTRY HOUSE
T. ARCHITECTS/BUILDING DESIGNED 1. LEVER HOUSE, N.Y. ............ (
A. FRANK LLOYD WRIGHT SOLOMON GUGGENHEIM MUSEUM
2. CHRYSLER BUILDING N. Y. .................... (
B. MANUEL MANOSA
3. GEODESIC DOME ................ (
C. WALTER GROPIUS
SAN MIGUEL CORP. BLDG. BAUHAUS BLDG., GERMANY
4. SYDNEY OPERA HOUSE .................... ( 5. SOLOMON GUGGEN• HElM MUSEUM ..................... (
D. EERO SAARINEN TWA KENNEDY AIRPORT, N.Y.
E. SKIDMORE) OWINGS & MERRIL LEVER HOUSE, N.Y.
6. PARLIAMENT BUILDINGS, BRAZIL ................................ ( BANK OF CHINA (HONG KONG)
28
7. BAUHAUS Bldg. GERMANY ............................. (
G. PHILIP JOHNSON
8. EINSTEIN TOWER ................ (
H. BUCKMINSTER FULLER
AT&T BLDG.
9. CHAPEL OF NOTRE DAME ....................... (
GEODESIC DOME
I. LUCIO COSTA & OSCAR NIMEYER PARLIAMENT BUILDINGS, BRAZIL
10. CULTURAL CENTER OF THE PHILS ...................... (
J. EIRCH MENDELSOHN EINSTEIN TOWER
11. TAHANANG FILIPINO or • COCONUT PALACE .............. ( 12. ASIAN DEVELOPMENT BANK OF PHILS ................... ( 13. SAN MIGUEL CORP. BUILDING ............................. ( 14. BANK OF CHINA (HONG KONG) ...................... (
K. WILLIAN VAN ALEN CHRYSLER BUILDING, N.Y.
L. FRANCISCO "BOBBY" MANOSA TAHANANG FILIPINO or COCONUT PALACE
M. LE CORBUSIER CHAPEL OF NOTRE DAME
N. C.C. de CASTRO ASIAN DEVELOPMENT BANK OF PHILS.
15. TWA KENNEDY AIRPORT N.Y. USA .............. ( 16. AT & T Bldg. N.Y. USA ............................ (
0. LEANDRO LOCSIN CULTURAL CENTER OF THE PHILS.
P. JOAN UTZON SYDNEY OPERA HOUSE
U. FAMOUS DICTUMS/PHILOSOPHIES/SAYINGS 1. "FORM FOLLOWS FUNCTION" ..... by LOUIS SULLIVAN 2 .. "FORM DOES NOT NECESSARILY FOLLOW FUNCTION" .......................................................... by ANTONIO GAUD I 3. "ART AND ARCHITECTURE, THE NEW UNITY" ............................................................ by WALTER GROPIUS 4. "A HOUSE IN A~HOUSE" ................... by LOUIS KAHN 5. "CUBE WITHIN A CUBE" ................... by LE CORBUSIEA 6. "A BRIDGE IS LIKE A HOUSE ........... by ROBERT MAILLART 7. "LESS IS MORE" ................................ by LUDWIG MIES VAN DEAOHE 8. "FUNCTION INFLUENCE BUT DOES NOT DICTATE FORM" ............................................................ by ECRO SAARINEN 9. 'MODERN ARCHITECTURE NEED NOT BE WESTERN" ............................................................ by KENZO TANGE 10. "ARCHITECTURE MUST MEET 3 REQUIREMENTS STRENGTH, BEAUTY, UNITY ................................. by MARCUS VITRUVIUS POCIO
29
AREA ''A'' PART II
THEORY OF ARCHITECTURE
AREA "A"
PART II
MATCHING TYPE: Write the corresponding correct letter in the bracket provided for at the left
A. The seven (7) basic principles of composition to space enclosing elements are 1 . CONTRAST ........................... (
2. PROPORTION ....................... (
3. SCALE ................................... (
4. BALANCE .............................. (
5. RHYTHM ................................ (
6. UNITY AND HIERARCHY .......................... (
7. CHARACTER ........................ (
A.
Equilibrium, Equality, Adjustment of Tones, Values. BALANCE B. Harmony, unrelated parts are brought into proper relationship. UNITY AND HIERARCHY c. Variety of shapes and textures. CONTRAST D. Relationships the eye makes with, between the size, shape, and tone of various objects or parts of a composition. PROPORTION E. is expressiveness. The exterior of a building expresses the internal function. CHARACTER
F. Size, magl)itude, relationship of
G.
the human body with architectural motifs such as doors, windows, steps. SCALE Repetition, regular recurrence of lines, shapes, forms, and colors. RHYTHM
B. There are at least eight (8) categories of concern within the project that the designer will use as a checklist to problem solving. Indicate the right choice.
1. FUNCTION ............................ (
A. Sanitation, electrical, structural, lightning, HVAC, Acoustics, water. SYSTEMS
31
2. SPACE ................................... (
B.
First costs, Maintenance costs.
3. GEOMETRY .......................... (
c.
Volume required by activities.
4. CONTEXT .............................. (
D.
5. ENCLOSURE ........................ (
E. Activity Grouping and Zoning.
6. SYSTEMS .............................. (
F. Site and climate.
ECONOMIC SPACE
Perception and Behavior. HUMAN FACTORS FUNCTION CONTEXT
7. ECONOMIC ........................... (
G. Structure, Enclosing planes, openings
8. HUMAN FACTORS ................ (
H. Circulation, forms and images.
ENCLOSURE GEOMETRY
C. MATCHING TYPE. Select and indicate the proper letters. 1. Contrast of CHARACTER ......................... (
A. Using the same shape but of different dimensions. Contrast of SIZE
2. Contrast of FORM .................. (
B. Having light and dark colored materials.
3. Contrast of SIZE .................... (
c.
4. Contrast-of TREATMENT ..... (
D. An ecclesiastical with Domestic building
5. Contrast of TONE ................. (
E. Using different materials, glass, marble, steel.
6. Contrast of LINE .................... (
F. A building of mixed shapes,
Contrast of TONE
Thin and thick, horizontal or vertical direction of beams, columns. Contrast of LINE
Contrast of CHARACTER
Contrast of TREATMENT
angles. Contrast of FORM
D. MATCHING TYPE 1. RELATIVE PROPORTION ....................... (
A. All parts must fit together in such a way that the composition will be disturbed if one element is removed. ORGANIC
2. ABSOLUTE PROPORTION .. (
8. Has an informal·effect. UNSYMMETRICAL BALANCE
32
3. ANTHROPORMOPHIC ......... (
c.
The measurement of man implemented to accommodate him to machines.
4. METHODOLOGY .................. (
D.
Has a picturesqueness of surroundings.
E.
A monumental effect, has a central axis, can .be formal or with a radial effect.
ERGONOMICS
GRAVITATIONAL
5. GENERIC SCALE .................. (
SYMMETRICAL BALANCE
F. Deals with the relationship be-
6. HUMAN SCALE ..................... (
tween an object and the whole structure The window to the wall. ABSOLUTE PROPORTION
7. AXIS ....................................... (
G.
8. ORGANIC .............................. (
H. The size of a building element
A systematic method of problem solving. METHODOLOGY
relative to other forms in its context whose size is known. ex: a door, a stair. GENERIC SCALE
9. SYMMETRICAL BALANCE ............................. (
I. A system based on the dimension and proportions of the human body in relation to forms, furniture, heights. ANTHROPOMORPHIC
10. UNSYMMETRICAL BALANCE .............................. (
J. An elementary means of organizing forms and spaces in architecture. It is a line established by two points. AXIS
The size of a building element relative to the dimensions and proportion of the human body.
11. GRAVITATIONAL ................... (
K.
12. ERGONOMICS ...................... (
L. This deal between the parts of an object and the whole object, ex: window panes and the whole jamb.
HUMAN SCALE
RELATIVE PROPORTION
33
E. MULTIPLE CHOICE 1. UNACCENTED RHYTHM ................................ (
A.
In unity, shapes, sizes of elements are shown one after the other. ALTERNATION
2. ACCENTED RHYTHM ................................ (
B.
3. REPETITION ......................... (
c.
4. ACCENT ............................... (
D.
5. ALTERNATION ...................... (
E.
Forms and spaces especially placed to call attention to themselves as being the important elements in composition. STRATEGIC LOCATION
Influence of traditional types (spires, classical orders, Gothic) ASSOCIATION
This occurs if equally spaced windows are introduced on the unbroken wall, then regular rep- . etition is present. UNACCENTED RHYTHM
To be unique, forms and spaces are visually dominant, and different from that of the other elements in the composition. UNIQUE IN SHAPE
6. UNIQUE BUILDING ............... (
F. Human quality or emotional appeal (dignified, dynamic, strong, forbidding, light)
7. EXCEPTIONAL SIZE ............. {
G.
8. UNIQUE IN SHAPE ............... (
H.
PERSONALITY
Deals with motifs of more than one member, or same size and same energy. REPETITION
If the openings or details are arranged in such a manner that some are more important than the others. ACCENTED RHYTHM
9. STRATEGIC LOCATION ............................. (
I. To give an emphasis or interest in unity. ACCENT
10. FUNCTION ............................ (
J. This reflects the degree of importance, the functional and symbolic roles they play in the organized design. UNIQUE BUILDING
11. ASSOCIATION ....................... (
K.
Use of building, like for a shop, a bank or a church. FUNCTION
34
j:
l
L. Significantly different in dimension than all other elements in the composition. (The biggest, or the smallest to be noticed)
12. PERSONALITY .................... (
EXCEPTIONAL SIZE
F. MATCHING TYPE ON COLORS A. Triangular tips in between red and yellow. yellow and blue, blue and red or orange, green and v1olet.
1. STYLE .................................. (
SECONDARY COLORS
2. ECLECTIC BUILDINGS ..... ... ..... .. .
B. Triangular tips of red and yellow and blue in the color wheel PRIMARY COLORS c. Color opposite each other in the color wheel. COMPLIMENTARY COLORS D. A character expressive of definite conceptions, like grandeur, gaiety or solemnity like a beer garden using indigenous ar.d ubiqUitous materials. STYLE
.. (
3. WARM COLORS .
4. COOL COLORS .
5. ANALOGOUS COLORS ..... .
E. An adjective used to descr~be an artist who selects forms and ideas of different periods and combmes them to produce a harmonious whole. ECLECTIC BUILDINGS
6. COMPLIMENTARY COLORS....................
F. The reds and yellows lead to advance toward the observer usually used for wide rooms to make it smaller (fire, sunlight).
(
WARM COLORS
7. PRIMARY COLORS ............................... (
G. Color near each other in the color wheel ANALOGOUS COLORS
8. SECONDARY COLORS .............................. {
H. The blues, greens, violets, tend to recede from the observer. It suggests distance and is usually used for small rooms to make it seem wider. (sky, mountains. seas) COOL COLORS
3b
G. MATCHING TYPE ON FUNCTION
1. FUNCTIONAL DESIGN ................................. (
A. Newly married, mixed singles, elderly, married with kids. CHARACTERISTICS OF PEOPLE
2. NEED FOR ADJACENCY ......................... (
B. In a parking garage for ex: tollin, park, toll-out. SEQUENCE IN TIME
3. SIMILARITY IN GENERAL RULE ................... (
C. (primary) proportion, labor, delivery, nursery, (secondary) waiting, clean and sterile utility, doctor's and nurses lockers, (tertiary) house keeping, janitor's closet. RELATEDNESS TO CORE ACTIVITIES
4. RELATEDNESS TO DEPARTMENTS, GOALS, SYSTEMS ............... (
D. Delivery, unloading, storage, preparation, craft, sales. EXTENT OF MAN OR MACHINE INVOLVEMENT
5. SEQUENCE IN TIME ·······'···· (
E. Incoming passengers, parking and services, outgoing passengers loading and unloading, taxi, runways. RELATIVE PROXIMITY TO BUILDINGS
6. REQUIRED ENVIRONMENTS .................. (
F. Single house, duplex, condominiums, apartments. VOLUME OF PEOPLE INVOLVED
7. TYPES OF EFFECT PRObUCED .......................... (
G. In sports, tennis, golf, swimming pods. In malls, fast foods, clothing, food. SIMILARITY IN GENERAL RULE
8, RELATIVE PROXIMITY TO BUILDINGS ..................... (
H. Deals with the development of a plan arrangement to serve in a purely mechanical way the functions of the building (sizes of rooms, HVAC) FUNCTIONAL DESIGN
9. RELATEDNESS TO CORE ACTIVITIES ................ (
I. In hospitals ex: Delivery room to recovery room to post partum. RELATEDNESS TO DEPARTMENTS, GOALS, SYSTEMS
36
10. CHARACTERISTICS OF PEOPLE .......................... (
J. Kitchen near to Dining room, Master's Bedroom to toilet. NEED FOR ADJACENCY
11. VOLUME OF PEOPLE INVOLVED ............................. (
K. Radiation, chemicals, smoke, fumes. heat, noise from gymnasiums, mechanical rooms, vibration from machinery wet-dry toilets, labs. TYPES OF EFFECT PRODUCED
12. EXTENT OF MAN OR MACHINE INVOLVEMENT ..................... (
L. Furniture types, need for view, ceiling height, access to roof, need for vents exhausts, security, acoustics. REQUIRED ENVIRONMENTS
H. SPACE
MATCHING TYPE
1. USE OF SPACE .................... (
A. Beauty, using the principles of design. architecture as distinguished from the mere building or Engineering structure. CONTRIBUTIONS OF AESTHETICS
2. COLLABORATION AND USE OF MATERIALS ............ (
B. Consist of forms and spaces whose positions in space and relationship with one another are regulated by a three dimensional pattern or field, such as a skeletal structural system of cofUmns and beams. GRID FORMS
3. CONTRIBUTIONS OF AESTHETICS ........................ (
C. uses proximity to relate its spaces to one another. It often consists of repetitive cellular spaces that have similar functions and share a common visual trait, orientation. CLUSTERED FORMS
4. CENTRALIZED FORMS ........ (
D. Compositions of linear forms that extends outward from central space or form in a wheel manner. RADIAL FORMS
37
5. LINEAR FORMS .................... (
E. Consists of a number of secondary forms clustered about dominant central parent forms, Centrality, can embody sacred places.
6. RADIAL FORMS .................... (
F. Services to occupants (utility,
CENTRALIZED FORMS
function) How high would be the kitchen storage, reach, How big the furnishings will be to learn the size of the enclosed space. USE OF SPACE
7. CLUSTERED FORMS ........... (
G. Consists of forms arranged segmentally in a row of repetitive space (wall path) LINEAR FORMS
8. GRID FORMS ........................ (
H. Strength or permanence and security. COLLABORATION & USE OF MATERIALS
MATCHING TYPE
I. CIRCULATION 1. THE BUILDING APPROACH ........................... (
A. This prolong the sequence of the approach. CIRCUITOUS
2. FRONTAL .............................. (
B.
Entrances maintain the continuity of a wall's surface.
3. OBLIQUE ............................... (
c.
Enclosed or open on one or two sides, corridors, balconies must accomrnodjlte the movement of people as they promenade, pause, rest or take a view.
4. CIRCUITOUS ......................... (
D.
FLUSH ENTRANCE
FORM OF CIRCULATION SPACE
The edges, nodes and termination of the path. Pass by axially, terminate in a space, or pass obliquely or along the edges. PATH-SPACE RELATIONSHIP
5. THE BUILDING ENTRANCE ........................... (
E.
6. FLUSH ENTRANCE .............. (
F. Paths of movement are linear in
Entrances also provide shelter and receive a portion of exterior space into the realm of the buildin g. RECESSED ENTRANCE
nature. Pedestrians meeting each other should have wider
38
volume of space, wheeled vehicles can have a tightly tailored path. 7. PROJECTED ENTRANCES ......................... (
CONFIGURATION OF THE PATH
G. Leads directly to the entrance. FRONTAL
8. RECESSED ENTRANCE ........................... (
H. This enhances the perspective. OBLIQUE
9. FORM OF CIRCULATION SPACE ................................... (
I. This may vary in duration, from a few paces through a compressed space to a lengthy and circuitous route. THE BUILDING APPROACH
10. CONFIGURATION OF THE PATH ........................ (
J. Passing through an implied plane, or a change in level, working the passage from one place to another for visual and spatial continuity between two spaces. THE BUILDING ENTRANCE
11. PATH-SPACERELATIONSHIP ..................... (
K. Entrances announces their functions to the approach and provide shelter overhead. PROJECTED ENTRANCES
J. MASSING
MATCHING TYPE
(
) 0 Beters to site and climate
1. FORM .................................... {
) A. Refers to site and climate.
:1
t;OQU
CONTEXT
2. SURFACE .............................. (
B. Results from the hues of the spectrum.
3. TEXTURE .............................. (
C. Uses a system that requires expensive and energy consuming equipments to operate electric water heaters and air conditioners. (Technically designed Solar Bldgs.) ·
4. TONE ..................................... (
D. As in the case of surfaces,
COLOR
ACTIVE SOLAR DESIGN
which are painted or decorated by man. APPLIED COLOR
39
. 5. C()L.OR ................................... (
E. Deals with shape, and when the figure is 3-dimensional, it becomes mass or volume we should proceed to design from the General (massing) to the Particular (detailing) FORM
6 ANALOGICAL DESIGN ................................. (
F. Areas of materials which enclose a building and are secondary importance to the masses which they create. SURFACE
7. CONTEXT .............................. (
G. These refers to the quality of surface treatment, whether the material is rough or smooth. TEXTURE
8. INHERENT COLOR ............... (
H. So called because it employs no sophisticated collector and no expensive technology to harness the sun's energy. PASSIVE SOLAR DESIGN
9. APPLIED COLOR .................. (
I. A variety in the use of gradation from black to gray to white and from dark to light. TONE
10. ACTIVE SOLAR DESIGN ................................. (
J. Natural color of materials like stone, marble or wood. INHERENT COLOR
11. PASSIVE SOLAR DESIGN ................................. (
K. The drawing of similarities (usually visual) ,into the solution of one's design problems with buildings, with forms from nature, from painting and so on (a laboratory building from a microscope, chapel roof from a CRAB) ANALOGICAL DESIGN
40
MATCHING TYPE
K. SITE CONTROL 1. SOLAR SHADING IN SUMMER .......................... (
A. Hot air is effectively vented out with the use of strategically located clerestories, or windows located on the side of the roof for ventilation purposes. To absorb heat, paint the wall black. Natural daylight is used in the northside. NATURAL HEATING AND DAYLIGHTING
2. WHITE ROOFS AND DESERT COOLING ............... (
B. The overall shape of a building affects the amount of energy it will consume. In general, a configuration that resist unwanted heat transmission for a given
enclosed volume. Aspherical or round building has less surface and thus less heat gain or loss. BUILDING CONFIGURATION
3. PASSIVE SOLAR PLANNING ............................. (
C. Placed between a building and the outside elements, Earth slows the heat transfer from one to the other, reduces the temperature difference between exterior and interior, protects the building from cold winds and the direct rays of the sun. UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
4. NATURAL HEATING AND DAYLIGHTING .............. (
D. Trees reduce window heat gain not only by blocking direct sunlight penetration but also by lowering the ground surface temperature; using deciduous ivy vine can also shade a building facade in summer (hot) and when it dies in the cold months, it allows the sun to shine through. UTILIZATION OF NATURAL GROWTH
5. WINDOWLESS BUILDiNG .............................. (
E. Thermal energy can be stored in a ~ .00 m. hig;, waiar-filled drums in front.to the south facing windows. Once the sun sets, this heat radiate through the
41
house, trapped by the insulation Provision of water pool or fountain is er.ective. Use a fireplace made of solid metal and hollow inside UTILIZATION OF WATER AND AIR
6. UTILIZATION OF NATURAL GROWTH ............. (
F. Paved and planted, this option involves the use of light-colored ground surfaces to reflect sunlight onto a building, dark colored surfaces to absorb sunlight and lower outside temperature. GROUND SURFACE
7. THERMOSIPHONING ........... (
G. In reflecting heat away instead of absorbing it, which increases the temperature of room below, white roofs are effective. Evaporative cooling uses one electric motor. As water is evaporated to vapor heat is drawn from the air reducing its temperature. WHITE ROOFS AND DESERT COOLING
8. BUILDING CONFIGURATION ................. (
H. This employ shading by structural elements but affects the facades'of buildings. Powered louvers are used to diminish heat gain.
9. GROUND SURFACE ............. (
I. This is achieved by orientation by carefully considering the location of theI building. How it will relate to the sun and breezes. Use windbreaks consisting of either a fence or a row of trees which reduce air infiltration through windows by diminishing the wild pressure. Orient solid walls to the west to offset sunset.
SOLAR SHADING IN SUMMER
10. UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES ...................... (
PASSIVE SOLAR PLANNING
J. Large sections of buildings are enclosed by opaque walls. During daylight hours they are densely occupied and welllighted. The space gains of people-load and lighting load are usually sufficient to heat the building by day the cold months. WINDOWLESS BUILDING
42
11. UTILIZATION OF WATER AND AIR ................... (
K. In some cases, it is possible to move the fluids (liquid or air) without mechanical aid; by natural convection. As the fluid is heated, it tends to rise and cooler fluid flows in to take its place. THERMOSIPHONING
MULTIPLE CHOICE
L. ENCLOSURE, AND SYSTEMS 1. DEGREE OF ENCLOSURE ........................ (
A. Follow flow of gravity loads from roof down columns, through floors, to foundations and soils. Follow flow of lateral loads. Earthquake from ground to foundations to columns, walls, floors to roof. Wind from side walls to roof and floor, through columns, footings and earth. STRUCTURAL FUNCTIONS
2. UGHT .................................... (
B. Is the internal focus and outward orientation. Fireplace have an internal focus. Outward orientation will determine the nature of the view. A small window opening tends to frame a view and is seen as a painting. A high window or skylight shows the tree tops and the sky. VIEW
3. VIEW ...................................... (
C. Follow electric supply from off site to transformer, to breakers or panels to each outlet or point of connection. Follow telephone lines off site to TMB to each phone location. ENERGY AND COMMUNICATIONS
4. PEOPLE FUNCTIONS .......................... (
D. Follow wind patterns through site to encourage or block natural ventilation through building as required. Follow air patterns from inlets to ou~iets. F-ollow forced air ventilation pattern through building to address heat and odors. AIR
43
5. STRUCTURAL FUNCTIONS .......................... (
E. Follow paths of natural light (di· rect or indirect sun) to and into the building. Encourage or block as needed. Follow paths of circulation and at spaces to provide artificial illumination where necessary. This include site and building. NATURAL LIGHT
6. WATER, MOISTURE AND DRAINAGE ................... (
F. Follow the flow of occupants from one space to another from stairs to elevators service equipment's pathways, flow of occupant to enter and exit the building as required by CODE, Flow of trash to leave the building. Materials to enter building. PEOPLE FUNCTIONS
7. HEAT ...................................... (
G. The illumination of its surfaces and forms. Entering a room through windows in the wall plane or through skylights in the roof plane overhead, the sun's light falls on surfaces within the room enlivens their colors, and articulates their textures.
8. AIR ......................................... (
H. The form of its space is determined by the configuration of its defining elements and the pattern of its openings (doors, windows) whether at the edges of an enclosing plane, which visually weakens the corner boundaries of space, but promotes its visual continuity with adjacent spaces.
LIGHT
DEGREE OF ENCLOSURE
9. NATURAL LIGHT ................... (
I. Follow sun paths to and into the building to plan for access ,or blocking. Follow excessive external or internal heat throl,lgh building skin and block if necessary. Follow source of internal heat loads (lights, people, equipment) to their outfall (natural ventilation or A. C.) HEAT
44
10. ENERGY AND COMMUNICATIONS ............. (
J. Follow rainwater from highest point on roof to drain, through the piping system to outfall (storm-sewer) of site from highest points off site, around building to outtalk>ff site. Follow rains or moisture at exterior walls and window down building sides, follow contaminated water from farthest point of use to end of septic tank. WATER, MOISTURE AND DRAINAGE
M. ECONOMICS
MATCHING TYPE
1. ECONOMIC COSTS .............. (
A. Watering of lawns and shrubs, removing of trash, etc. LANDSCAPING MAINTENANCE
2. NORMAL COST OF CONSTRUCTION BY CONTRACTORS ................... (
B. The renovation, re-painting of interior and exterior surfaces, replacing roofs, replacing plumbing fixtures replacing furnitures. PERIODIC REFURBISHMENT
3. OTHER COSTS ADDED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE ......................... (
C. Inspecting and repairing windows, roofs, walls, heaters, plumbing and painting. PERIODIC INSPECTION AND REPAIR
4. DAILY HOUSEKEEPING .................. (
5. PERIODIC INSPECTION AND REPAIR ......................... (
45
D. The cost of materials used, the labor involved in every phase of the construction process, the cost of equipment purchased or rented for the project, cost of management and overhead, percentage of profit. NORMAL COST OF CONSTRUCTION BY CONTRACTORS
E. Use non-toxic, non-flammable materials, eliminate sharp edges, create properly designed stairs, rai'Jl)S, put .barriers in wall to ceiHng glass windows, ground all electrical controls, illuminate
dark walkways and stairs, use non-skid materials on wet surfaces. Provide fire-exits, firesprinklers, fence on water heaters, boilers. 6. PERIODIC REFURBISHMENT ................ (
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS IN ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEMS
F. A cleaning of floors, walkways, windows and walls also ceilings. DAILY HOUSEKEEPING
7. LANDSCAPING MAINTENANCE ..................... (
G. It is reasonable to believe that creativity can be enhanced if something is known of the relationship between structural and constructive design options and the cost of implementation. This is actually the cost of the building structure and its maintenance costs. ECONOMIC COSTS
8. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS IN ARCHITECTURAL SYSTEMS ..... :............. :·········· (
H. Added costs of building are professionals fees, cost of landscaping. Permits and licenses, and Interior Design. OTHER COSTS ADDED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE
N. HUMAN FACTORS AND BEHAVIOR
MATCHING TYPE
1. PERCEPTION ....................... (
A. A complex blend of sound common sense,' fine aesthetics and mystical philosophy. It is a traditional Chinese technique which aims to ensure that all things are in harmony with their surroundings. Having this sense is said to enhance happiness and prosperity.
2. VISUAL ACUITY .................... (
B. Human relationship. If you can speak with people and make them at ease, they will trust you more, you will feel better and the chances will be greater that the job you do wil.l turn out well for all concerned. Environment influences values. Design interi-
FENG SHUI
46
ors to make people feel at ease even if they are waiting for their tum. VALUES
3. OPTICAL ILLUSIONS ............ (
C. The architecture of a folk is evolved and modified by ideas and imitation. Architecture is building with which people have identified themselves given its significance like stairs never stopping on the 3rc1 count or oro. plata, mata, no exit door or window direct to a main door opening.
4. VALUES ................................. (
D. Is the keenness. sharpness or acuteness of perception or vision. (imaginative foresight especially of the beautiful). The most important feature of a shape of an object is its general outline or contour.
FOLK BELIEFS IN DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION
VISUAL ACUITY
5. F:OLK BELIEFS IN OESlGN AND CONSTRUCTION .................. (
E. This is a false interpretation by the mind of a sense perception. An example is when shown two lines, you see one as shorter and one larger, but upon measuring it. they are the same. Another are two perfect parallel lines, but when combined with diagonal lines, it will appear either to be wider or thinner at the middle. OPTICAL ILLUSIONS
F. Is the process by which we organize and interpret the patterns of stimuli in our environment. The immediate intuitive recognition as of an aesthetic quality.
6. FENG SHU I ........................... (
PERCEPTION
47
0. ARCHITECTURAL LINGO
MATCHING TYPE
1. SMART HOUSES .................. (
A. Refers to the manner in which the surfaces of form come together to define its shape and volume. Their overall configuration is legible and easily perceived. It clearly reveals the edges of its surfaces and corners at which they meet. ARTICULATION
2. INTELLIGENT BUILDINGS ........................... (
B. To put side by side or close together, to pose for a picture taking, to put in position putting of dark to light areas. JUXTAPOSITION
3. AMBIENCE ............................ (
c.
4. AMENITIES ........................... (
D. To modify equipment that 1s at-
A characteristic, man:-terism, habit or the like, that is peculiar to an individual synonym: peculiarity, quirk.
IDIOSYNCRACIES
ready in service using parts developed or made available after the time of original manufacture. RETROFIT
5. ARTICULATION ..................... (
E.
6. AUSPICIOUS ......................... (
F. To renovate, polish up again,
Deals with objects which may have the same shape, color and direction but may vary in size and tone, this change is gradually increasing or decreasing.
GRADATION '
brighten. REFURBISH 7, AXONOMETRIC .................... (
G.
8. CONFIGURATION ................. (
H. Originating in and characteriz-
To reduce or increase in magnitude according to a fixed scale up or down. (upscale subdivision) a higher priced location.
UPSCALE
ing a particular region or country: native. INDIGENOUS
9. GRADATION .......................... (
I. Surrounding on all sides, an environment or its distinct atmosphere. AMBIENCE
48
10. IDIOSYNCRACIES ................ (
J.
(site) parking, public transit access, walk-in customer, exposure, landscape, illumination, security and emergency access. AMENITIES
11. INDIGENOUS ........................ (
K.
12. JUXTAPOSITION .................. (
L. Defined as continuing capabilities in buildings, drawing from information services or systems. It is a vital urgent tool to enable occupants to live, work or even play under the most satisfying, creative and productive atmosphere. This involves automatically monitoring and taking care of energy consumption and security and fire protection.
13. MILIEU ................................... (
M. Promising success, favorable,
Are future homes, an electronic showcase, which electronically wakes you up, warms your hot tub and brews your coffee. It will respond to your orders and no one else's because security sensors recognize your voice. HVAC are regulated. SMART HOUSES
INTELLIGENT BUILDINGS
favored by fortune, prosperous. AUSPICIOUS 14. REFURBISH .......................... (
N. To form after an arrangement of parts or a form, or figures determined by the arrangement of parts. CONFIGURATION
15. RETROFIT ............................. (
. 16; UPSCALE ..... :........................ (
0. Designating a method of projection in which a three-dimensional object as represented by a drawing having all lines drawn to exact sca-le resu1ting· in the optical distortion of diagonals and curves . AXONOMETRIC
P. An environment, social or cuf~ tural setting. MILIEU
P. ARCHITECTURAL LINGO
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1. TRANCHE .............................. (
A. To discharge, as from the body; void. EGEST
2. LIBOR RATE .......................... (
B. A means or place of entering; an entry way. INGRESS
3. MORATORIUM ...................... (
C. Amount of investment given to A building, wherein the facilities is never used or needed in the first place or property that is troublesome or expensive to keep.
4. ~ACRO .................................. (
D. We plan people's relationship to
WHITE ELEPHANT
indoors and the site, the adjoining buildings, the neighbors, nature. ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING
5. MICRO ................................... (
E. A means of going out or exit. EGRESS
6. EGEST ................................... (
F. French (slice) Foreign Fund is divided into different releases to borrower. TRANCHE
7. INGEST .................................. (
8. EGRESS ................................ (
9. INGRESS ............................... (
G. The process of analyzing systems equipments, materials, and obtain the desired function at the lowest overall cost, without sacrificing quality. VALUE ENGINEERING H. Group such as inhabitants of the same floor 1 of a block or flats, through various social gatherings. MICRO I. London International Borrowing Rate, the present rate of interest. LIBOR RATE
10. ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING .............................. (
J. Group
11. VALUE ENGINEERING ......... (
K. To put in.
12. WHITE ELEPHANT ............... (
L. A legal authority to delay payment of money due; or a temporary cessation of activity considered as dangerous (construction of tall buildings).
of City such as Barangays. In times of conflict, territorial instincts are inflated to include whole group of nations. MACRO
INGEST
50
MORATORIUM
AREA ''A'' PART Ill ARCHITECTURAL PRACTICE
""oi _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . .
PART Ill
AREA "A"
DIRECTION: Read the items below, match it with the answers on the right side. Place the correct letters in the indicated parenthesis thereon.
MATCHING TYPE
A. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN SHELTER 1. HUDCC Housing and Urban Development Coordinating Council ................................... (
A. The agency mandated to administer take-outs of buyers originated by banks and developers, faced with administrative problems in loan processing. It also provides construction and development finance for housing. NHMFC
2. SSS Social Security System ................................... (
3. GSIS Government Service Insurance System .................. {
B. This is administered by NHMFC from funds contributed by SSS, HDMF and GSIS. UHLP - UNITED HOME LENDING PROGRAM
C. The agency ,tasked for the building of housing units and residential condominiums. Facilitates joint venture projects among landowners, developers, financial institutions and local governments. NHA
4. PAG-IBIG Fund ...................... {
D. The golfernment's principal regulatoFy body in housing and land development. It is to enforce, implement, coordinate the land use policies and regulations on human settlements, including building rental laws. HLURB
52
5. UHLP United Home Lending Program ................... (
E. This agency takes care of insuring the subdivisions and is also a lending entity.· HIGC - HOME INSURANCE GUARANTY CORP.
6. HDMF Home Development Mutual Fund ........................... (
F. The insurance system for the Public sector or the government employees .. GSIS
7. NHMFC National Home Mortgage Finance Corporation ............................ (
G. The insurance system tor the private sector, where coverage is compulsory upon all employees not over sixty years of age. SSS
8. NHA National Housing Authority .....'............................ (
H. An office mandated to coordinate and supervise the government's housing agencies. It is also tasked in monitoring the performance of the housing sector, and involved in policy formations. HUDCC
9. HIGC Home Insurance G!Jarantee Corporation .......... (
I. A provident savings fund housing open to most private agencies. PAG-IBIG FUND
10. HLRB Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board ........... (
J. This office administers the PAGIBIG Fund, it entitles Pag-ibig members who are public and private employees as well as the self-employed to housing loans. HDMF - HOME DEV'T MUTUAL FUND
MATCHING TYPE
B. NATIONAL BUILDING CODE 1. BUILDING PERMIT ............... (
A. Any new construction which increases the height or area of an existing building/structure.
2. CONSTRUCTION .................. (
B. A change in the use or occupancy of a building/structure or any portions thereof which has different requirements.
ADDITION
53
CONVERSION
-----"'
........
3. ERECTION ............................ (
C. The systematic dismantling or destruction of a building/structure, in whole or in part.
4. ADDITION .............................. (
D. The National Building Code with its implementing rules and regulations to ensure safety to occupants.
5. ALTERATION ......................... (
E. Remedial work done on any damaged or deteriorated portions of a building/structure to restore its original condition.
6. RENOVATION ........................ (
F. A secondary building/structure located within the same premises, the use of which is incidental to that ot the main building/structure.
7. CONVERSION ....................... (
G. The transfer of a building of portions thereof from its original location or position to another, either within the same lot or to a different one.
8. REPAIR .................................. (
H. Any physical change made on a building to increase its value, utility and to improve its aesthetics quality.
9.- MOVING ............................... , (
I. Installation in place of compo-
DEMOLITION
PD 1096
REPAIR
ANCILLARY BLDG./STRUCTURE
MOVING
RENOVATION
nents of a building/structure. ERECTION
10. DEMOLITION ........................ (
J. Construction in a building involving changes in the materials used, partitioning, location and size of windows, doors, structural parts, existing utilities but does not increase the overall area thereof. ALTERATION
11. ANCILLARY BUILmNG/ STRUCTURE ......................... (
K. · All on-site work done from site preparation, excavation, foundation, assembly of all the components and installation of utilities of building .. CONSTRUCTION
54
IIII!J
j
jl'
12. P. D. 1096 .............................. (
L. A written authorization granted by the Building Official to an applicant allowing him to proceed with the construction of a specific project after plans, specifications, pertinent documents are found in conformity to P. D. 1096. BUILDING PERMIT
MATCHING TYPE
C. DEFINITIONS "BUILDING CODE" 1. CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY ........................ (
A.
2. AS-BUILT PLANS .................. (
B. A lot having two frontages or
Courts, yards, setbacks, light wells, uncovered driveways, access roads and parking spaces.
bounded by two parallel streets and lots on each side. 3. OCCUPANT LOADS .............. (
c.
4. PUBLIC OPEN SPACE .......... (
D. A plan prepared after the con-
A court bounded on three sides by building lines with one side bounded by another open space whether private or publie.
struction is done showing all changes, modifications and alterations made as compared to the original plans and needed for the occupancy permit. 5. PRIVATE OPEN SPACE ........ (
E.
6. INTERIOR LOT ...................... (
F. A court bounded on two oppo-
A non-corner or a single frontage lot.
site sides bounded by other open spaces. 7. INSIDE LOT ........................... (
G. A court bounded on all sides or around or its periphery by building lines.
8. CORNER LOT ....................... (
H. The total number of persons that may occupy a building or portion, thereof at any one time.
55
9. THROUGH lOT ...................... (
1. A lot located in the interior of a block made accessible from a public street or alley by means of a private access road.
10. INNER COURT ...................... (
J. Streets, alleys, easements of seashore, rivers, esteros, railroad tracks, parks, plazas.
11. OPEN COURT ....................... (
K. No building shall be used or occupied until the building official issues this permit, wherein the certificate of completion, logbook and building inspection sheet by contractor signed by Architect, and as-built plans signed by engineers in charge are submitted.
12. THROUGH COURT ............... (
L. A lot facing two streets at an angle meeting each other.
D. DEFINITIONS "BUILDING CODE" 1. R. A. 545 ................................ (
A. A window in a roof and level with it or one set into a flat roof as a dome, etc.
2. PROJECTING SIGN .............. (
B. The line formed by the intersection of the surface of the enclosing wall of the building ar.d the surface of t~e ground.
3. DISPLAY WINDOW ............... (
C. An employee shall be paid this of no less than ten (1 0%) percent of his regular wage for each hour of work performed between ten o'cloCk in the evening and six o'clock in the morning.
4. BUILDING LINE ................ :.... (
D. The outer covering of a ingtstructure.
5. ARCADE ................................ (
e·.
'
build~ <
56
·An act to enhance the mobility· . of disabled persons by requir- . ing certain buildings, irist~- ·. tions, establishmenis and public utilities to install facilities and . other devices.
6. STRUCTURE ......................... (
F. That portion of a building abutting the sidewalk open to public view protected by grilles, screens or transparent materials tor the display of goods.
7. CHAMFER ............................. (
G. The mark or floor plan directly touching the ground, the perimeter of which is seen.
8. SKYLIGH'fS ........................... (
H. A sign fastened to, suspended from or supported on a building or structure. the display surface of which is perpendicular from the wall surface or is at an angle therefrom.
9. BATAS PAMBANSA BLG. 344 ................................ (
10. NIGHT SHIFT DIFFERENTIAL ..................... (
I. Any portion of a building above the first floor projecting over the sidewalk beyond the first storey wall used as protection for pedestrians.
J. An act to regulate the practice of architecture in the Philippines.
11. FOOTPRINT .......................... (
K. That which is built or constructed, an edifice or building of any kind or any piece of work artificially built up or composed of parts joined together in some definite manner.
12. SKIN ....................................... (
L. Surface produced by beveling square edge or corner equally on both sides.
MATCHING TYPE
E. "FIRE CODE" DEFINITIONS 1. AUTOMATIC FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ..... (
57
A. P. D. 1185 prohibits the obstruction of fire exits. fi-e h, ·"!~ants overcrowding beyond authorized capacities, locking fire exits, use of jumpers.
2. COMBINATION STAND-PIPE .......................... (
B.
The time duration that a material or construction can withstand the effects of standard fire test. (1, 2 or 3 hrs.)
3. DRY STANDPIPE .................. (
c.
An integrated system of underground or overhead piping or both connected to a source of extinguishing agent or medium, designed in which when actuated by its automatic device, stops fire within the area protected.
D. The time in which flame will spread over the surface of a burning material. 5. FIRE RESISTANCE RATING .................................. (
E.
6. FIRE WALL ............................ (
F. A gate with four arms set at right
Use sprinkler systems, hose boxes, stand pipe systems, fire alarm systems, fire walls, fire resistive enclosures, fire exits to safe grounds. Stairways sealed from smoke and heat, exit plan, fire resistive doors, fire dampers in centralized aircon ducts, roof vents for fire fighters.
angles, revolving on a central post, allowing the passage of only one person at a time. 7. FLAME SPREAD RATING .................................. (
G.
An air compartment or chamber to which one or more ducts are connected and which form part of an air distribution system.
8. FIRE (FLAME) RETARDANT ......................... (
H.
Pipeline system filled with water and connected to a constant water supply for the use of the service and the occupants of the building solely for fire suppression purposes.
58
9. FUMIGANT ............................ (
I. A fire alarm system activated by the presence of a fire, where the signal is transmitted to designated locations instead of
~6un&rra
aaurrur2t KtKrrrr. Ia
')rder to prevent panic.
10. MEANS OF EGRESS ............ (
J. A wall designed to prevent the spread of .fire, having a fire resistance rating of not less than four (4) hours with sufficient structural stability to remain standing even if construction or either side collapse.
11. PANIC HARDWARE .............. (
K. A device constructed for burning refuse, trash.
12. PLENUM ................................ (
L. Any compound, or mixture which when applied properly improves the fire resistant quality of fabrics and other materials like wood.
13. INCINERATOR ...................... (
M. A type of standpipe system in which the pipes are normally not filled with water. Water is introduced into the system through fire service connections when needed.
14. TURNSTILES ........................ (
N. A mechanical device consisting of linkages and a horizontal bar across a door, which cause the door to open and facilitates exit from a building, structure.
15. PROHIBITED ACTS SEC. 9 FIRE CODE P. D. 1185 .......... (
16. PROVISION ON' FIRE SAFETY ........................ (
59
0. A continuous and unobstructed route or exit from any point in a building, structure, or facility to a public way.
P. A gas, fume, or vapor used for the destruction or control of insects, fungi, vemun, germs, rodents or other pests.
F. "OFFICE PRACTICE"
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1. DIRECT SELECTION OF AN ARCHITECT ............... (
2. COMPARATIVE SELECTION OF AN ARCHITECT ............... (
3. DESIGN COMPETITIONS ................... (
4. COMPENSATION BY MEANS OF PERCENTAGE OF CONSTRUCTION COST ..................................... (
5. COMPENSATION BY MEANS OF MULTIPLE OF DIRECT PERSONNEL EXPENSES ........................... (
60
A. A method frequently used where there is a continuing relationship on q series of projects. It establishes a fixed sum over and above reimbursement for tl1e Architect's technical time and overhead.
B. The Architect renders full-time supervision ensuring the quality of control of work, evaluating the work of the contractor, keeps tiles and records and manages the construction.
C. The Architect's regular services, which include the preliminary design, schemes, design development phase, the contract documents phase (working drawing) and supervision.
D. The settling of a dispute by an impartial member of a party, whose decision both parties to a dispute agree to accept.
E. This is done for a complex building projects where the Architect acts as an agent of the client in procuring and coordinating all the necessary services required by the project, from pre-design to post-construction services.
11. DESIGN SERVICES .............. (
12. SPECIALIZED ALLIED SERVICES ............................. (
13. CONSTRUCTION SERVICES ............................. (
14. POST CONSTRUCTION SERVICES ............................. (
15. COMPREHENSIVE SERVICES ............................. (
16. DESIGN BUILD SERVICES ............................. (
62
K. This method is applicable only to non-creative work such as accounting, secretarial, research, supervision, preparation of reports and the like.
L. This is mostly required in a government contract. This method is risky, since the Architect's expenses might exceed the agreed amount especially if there are costly changes.
M. In this method, the client selects his Architect on the basis of Reputation, personal acquaintance, recommendation of a friend, or of a former client, or of another Architect.
N. This method is fair to both client and Architect as the fee is pegged to the cost of the project the client is willing to undertake.
0. This include Architectural programming, feasibility study, site study, cost effectiveness study and promotional services.
P. A client may request an Architect to do work which will require his personal time such as visit ing a possible site, attend& board meetings, confer with others re: Financing or to joint-venture.
G. ARCHITECTS CODE OF ETHICS/RESPONSIBILITIES
I. IN RELATION TO THE PEOPLE a. The Architect shall seek opportunities to be of constructive service in civic and urban affairs and to the best of his ability advance the safety, health and well-being of the people and the community as well as the promotion, restoration or preservation of the general amenities and other examples of historic and architectural heritage of the nation. b. The Architect shall promote the interest of his professional organization and do his full part of the work to enhance the objectives and services of the organization. He should share in the interchange of technical information and experience with the other design profession and the building industry. c. The Architect as a good citizen shall abide and observe the laws and regulations of the government and comply with the standards of ethical conduct and practice of the profession in the Philippines. He shall at no time act in a manner detrimental to the best interest of the profession. d. The Architect shall not use paid advertisement nor self-laudatory, exaggerated or misleading publicity. However, the presentation of factual materials, verbal or visual, of the aims, standards and progress of the profession through literature or by industrious application of his work and services which tend to dignify the professional or advance public knowledge of the Architect's function in society may be presented through any public communication media. e. The Architect shall not solicit not permit to solicit in his name, advertisements or other support towards the cost of any publication presenting his work. He should refrain from taking part in paid advertisement endorsing any materials of construction or building equipment. f. The Architect shall not mislead the public through advertisements, signs or printed matter citing his professional specializations unless such qualifications are well known facts or sanctioned by professional consensus and years or experience.
2. IN RELATION TO HIS CLIENT a. The Architect may introduce to a prospective Client the professional services he is able to perform provided it is limited to presentation of examples of his professional experience and does not entail the offering of free preliminary sketches or other services without the benefit of an agreement with the Client for legitimate compensation. b. The Architect shall acquaint or ascertain· from the Client at the very inception of their business relationship, the exact nature and scope of his services and the corresponding professional charges. c. The Architect shall advise a Client against proceeding with any project whose practicability may be questionable due to financial, legal or arresting or exigent conditions, even if such advice may mean the loss of a · prospective commission to the Architect.
63
d. The Archilect shaU explain the conditional character of estimates other than estimates submitted in the form of actual proposals by contractors and in no case shall he guarantee any estimates or cost of the work. Neither shall he mislead his Client as to probable cost of the work in order to secure a commission. e. The Architect shall consider the needs and stipulation of his Client and the effects of his work upon the life and well-being of the public and the community as a whole, and to endeavor to meet the aesthetic and functional requirements of the project commensurate with the Client's appropriation. f. The Architect shall charge his Client for services rendered, a professional fee commensurate with the work involved and with his professional standing and experience based upon the Basic Minimum Fee pre.scribed under the "Standards of Professional Practice" of the "Architect's National Code". g. The Architect shall not undertake, under a fixed contract sum agreement, the construction of any project based on plans prepared by him. He may in certain cases, undertake the construction of a project even when the plans prepared by him provided it is undertaken in conformity with the conditions set forth under sections covering "Construction Services" "Comprehensive Services" or "Design-Build Services" of the document on "STANDAR_DS OF PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE." h. The Architect shall be compensated for his services solely through his professional fee charged directly to the Client. He shall not accept nor ask for any other returns in whatever form from any interested source other than the Client. i. The Architect shall be free in his investments and business relations outside of his profession from any financial or personal interests which tend to weaken and discredit his standing as an unprejudiced and honest adviser, free to act in his Client's best interests. If the Architect has any business interest which will relate to, or affect the interest of his Client, he should inform his Client of such condition or situation.
j. The Architect shall include in his agreement with the Client a clause providing for arbitration as a method for settlement of disputes. 3. IN RELATION TO THE CONTRACTOR a. The Architect shall give. the Contractor every reasonable aid to enable him to fully understand the contents of the Contract Documents by furnishing clear, definite and consistent information in all pertinent contract documents to avoid unnecessary mistakes that may involve extra costs to the Contractor. b. The Architect shall not knowingly call upon the Contractor to correct or remedy oversights or errors in the Contract Documents to the Contractor's financial disadvantage. c. The Architect shall immediately upon his personal knowledge and inspection, reject or condemn materials, equipment or workmanship which
64
are not in conformity with the Contract Documents in order not to cause unnecessary delay and additional expense to the Contractor. d. The Architect shall not, at any time or circumstance, accept free engineering services, or receive any substantial aid, gifts, commissions, or favors from any Contractor or sub-contractor which will tend to place him under any kind of mnral obligation. e. The Architect shall upon request by the Contractor promptly inspect each phase of the work completed and if found according.to the terms of the Contract Documents issue the corresponding Certificates of Payment and the Final Certificate of Completion, respectively, to the Contractor.
4. IN RELATION TO MANUFACTURERS, DEALERS, AND AGENTS a. The· Architect shall not avail or make use of engineering or other technical services offered by manufacturers, or suppliers of building materials or equipment which may be accompanied by an obligation detrimental to the best interest of the Client or whici1 may adversely affect the Architect's professional opinion. b. The Architect shall not at any time receive commissions, discounts, fees, gifts or favors from agents or firms handling building materials or equipment which may place him in a reciprocal frame mind. He may however, accept market discounts which shall be credited to the Client.
5. IN RELATION TO HIS COLLEAGUES AND SUBORDINATES a. The Architect shall not render professional services, without compensation except for small civic or charity projects. He shall neither offer nor provide preliminary services on a conditional basis prior to definite agreement with the Client for the commission of the project. b. The Architect shall not knowingly compete with other Architects on the basis of difference of professional charges, nor use donation as a device for obtaining competitive advantage except for worthy civic or religious projects. Neither shall he submit solicited or unsolicited sketches or drawings in competition with other Architects unless such competitive arrangements are conducted substantially under the terms of the UAP Architectural Competition Code. c. The Architect shall not under any circumstances nor throu]h any means seek commissions already known to him as previously endowed to another Architect, whether such endowment has been definitely agreed upon or still in the process of negotiation. d. The Architect shall not, in any case, enter as a competitor in any Architectural Competition when he has direct relations with the formulation of the Program thereof or when he has been engaged to act as Professional Adviser or Juror for such competition. Neither shall the Architect accept and act as professional adviser or juror in any architectural competition when he has had any information or has reviewed or assisted in the preparation of any competition design entered. Nor shall an Architect, retained as professional adviser in a competition, accept employment as an Architect for that competition project except as Consulting Architect.
65
e. The Architect shall not undertake a commission for which he knows another Architect has been previously employed until he has notified such other Architect of the fact in writing and has conclusively determined {hat the original employment has been terminated and has been duly compensated for. f. The Architect shall not undertake a commission for additions, rehabilitation or remodeling of any erected structure undertaken previously by another Architect without duly notifying him of the contemplated project even when the Owner is no longer the same. When the greater mass. area or design of the original structure is substantially maintained the new Architect should limit his advertisement or claim only to the extent of the work done to the structure. Architects are enjoined to preserve or restore as much as possible especially the few and remaining historic examples of our architectural heritage affecting this phase of practice. ~-
The Architect shall not knowingly injure falsely or maliciously, the professional reputation. prospects or practice of another Architect.
h. The Architect shall retrain from associating himself with or allowing the use of his name by any enterprise of doubtful character or integrity. i. The Architect shall affix his signature and seal to any plans or professional documents prepared by other persons or entities not done under his direct personal supervision.
j. The Architect shall inspi_re the loyalty of his employees and subordinates by providing them with suitable working conditions, requiring them to render competent and efficient services and paying them adequate and just compensation therefore. He shall tutor and mentor the young aspirants towards the ideals, functions, duties and responsibilities of the profession. k. The Architect shall unselfishly give his share in the interchange of technical information and experience among his colleagues and young aspirants and do his part in fostering unity in the fellowship of the profession. I. He shall unselfishly give his time and effort to the advancement of the profession thru his active and personal commitment and involvement with the accredited profession organization for Architects.
H. PROJECT CLASSIF.CATJON Architectural work varies in complexities and in the creative skill required to successfully meet the requirements of the client within the constraint of the technical, functional, economic, aesthetic and other considerations. The following groups of building are attempts to classify design projects in accordance with the degree of complexity of each project. The architect's fee includes the normal structural, electrical, plumbing/sanitary, and mechanical engineering services and is determined by getting the percentage indicated in the schedule of Fees and multiplying it with the Project Construction Cost.
66
SCHEDULE OF MINIMUM BASIC FEE Group -1 Structures of simplest, utilization character which are without complication of design or detail and require a minimum of finish, structural, mechanical and electrical design. Parking structures Printing plants Public Markets Service garages Simple loft-type structures Warehouses Other similar utilization types of buildings
Armories Bakeries Farm structures Freight facilities Hangars Industrial building Manufacturing/Industrial plants Packaging and processing plants
MINIMUM BASIC FEE
PROJECT CONSTRUCTION COST
PSO Million and less ............ ... ....... ..... .. .. ... ... ....... 6 Percent
Group- 2 Structures of moderate complexity of design requiring a moderate amount of structural, mechanical and electrical design and research. Art galleries Banks, Exchange and other financial institutions Bowling Alleys Churches and Religious facilities City Halls College buildings Convents, Monasteries and Seminaries Correctional and Detention Institutions Court Houses Dormitories Exhibition Halls and Display structures Fire Stations Laundries Motels and Apartels Multi-storey apartments
Nursing Homes Park, playground and open-air recreational facilities Police Stations Post Offices Private Clubs Private Publishing Plants Race tracks Restaurants Retail Stores Schools Shopping centers Speciality shops Supermarkets Welfare Buildings
And other structures of similar nature or use PROJECT CONSTRUCTION COST
MINIMUM BASIC FEE
PSO Million and less ... .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ... ..... .. .. . 7 Percent
Group-3 Structures of exceptional character and complexity of design or.requiring comparatively large amounts of structural, mechanical and electrical design and research.
67
Aquariums Atomic facilities Auditoriums Airports Breweries Cold storage facilities Communications buildings Convention Halls Gymnasiums Hospitals and Medical buildings Hotels
Laboratories Marinas Medical Office facilities & Clinics Mental Institutions Mortuaries Observatories Public Health Centers Research facilities Stadiums Theaters and similar facilities Veterinary Hospitals
And other structures of similar nature or use PROJECT CONSTRUCTION COST
MINIMUM BASIC FEE
P5() Million and less ..... ....... ... .. ..... .. ... .. ... .. ..... .. .. . 8 percent Group- 4 Residencies (Single Detached or Duplex), small apartment houses and town houses. Minimum Basic Fee ......... .. 10 percent of Project Construction Cost Group- 5 Monumental buildings and other facilities requiring consummate design skill and much precise detailing. Exposition and Fair buildings Mausoleums, Memorials Monuments
Specialized decorative buildings And structures of similar nature or use
Museums Minimum Basic Fee .. .. .... .. .. ..... .. .. .. .......... 12 percent of Project Construction Cost Group - 6 Repetitive Construction of Buildings When the design of the Architect is used again for the repetitive construction of similar structures, without amen<.ling the drawing and the specifications, the Architect's fee is computed as follows: First Structure .. .. . ................................ . Second Structure ................................ .. Third Structure ..................................... . Succeeding structure ............................. .
Minimum Basic Fee 80% of Basic Fee 60% of Basic Fee 40% of Basic Fee
Group - 7 Housing Projects When the Architect is engaged to undertake a HOUSING PROJECT involving the construction of several residential units on a single site with the use of one basic plan and specifications. the MINIMUM FEE chargeable thereunder shall confirm with the following: 68
First Unrt .... ..... ... ... .... ...... ......... ......... ......
10 Percent of the Construction Cost of one unit as Basic Fee
From two to ten units.......... .. ...... ..... ..... .
Fee of :..ne unit plus 60% of aa~.ic Fee for each additional unit
Eleven units and above .. .. .. .. .... .... . .. .. ....
Fee for 10 units plus 30% of Basic Fee for each adjitional unit
Group-8 Projects involving extensive detail such as furniture design, build-in equipment, special fittings, screens, counters, interior~ and other detailed parts or appurtenances of buildings or ~tructures and landscaping designs. Minimum Basic Fee ...... ... .. .. ...... .. .
15 Percent of Project Construction Cost
Group-9 For alterations and additions of existing structures belonging to Group 1 tc o enumerated above, compensdtion for services should be increased by 50 percent or a total of 150 percent of the Basic Fee.
Group- 10 Consultations and Arbitrations Where the Architect is engaged to render opinion or give advise, clarifications or explanation on technical matters pertaining to his profession, the Minimum Fee chargeable thereunder shall not be less than Two Hundred Pesos (P200.00)* per hour subject to increase depending on the extent and coverage of service required. When rendering service as an expert witr•..:ss, the Architect's Fee shall not be less than Five Hundred Pesos (P500.00)* per appearance irrespective of whether the scheduled hearing took place or not. *All references to fixed amount shall refer to the value of the Peso as ot November 1979. Adjustment of the price shall be made at the time of the contract.
I. THE S?ECTRUM OF THE ARCHITECT'S SERVICES The Spectrum of the Architect's services extends over the entire range of activities that proceed from the time the idea is conceived, perfected, transformed into sets of space/des;gn requirements, translated into structure through design, built, used and become a permanent feature of the man-made environment. The Architect's services con!3ist of the necessary conferences, deliberations, discussions, evaluations, invest.gations, consultations, advise on matters affecting the scientific, aesthetic and orderly coordination of all the process of safeguarding life, health and property which enter into the production of different levels and sophistications of man-made structures and environment. The entire range of the Architect's services arP. divideC: into seven (7) major services as follows:
69
1. PRE-DESIGN SERVICES.............................................. This include Architectural Programming, Feasibility, study, site study, cost effectiveness study and others.
UAP rJoc. 201
2. DESIGN SERVICES . .............. ................................. The Architect's Regular Services
UAP Doc. 202
3. SPECIALIZED ALLIED SERVICES ............... .... .... This include Planning, Interior, landscaping, Acoustics, communications and Electronics Engineering.
UAP Doc. 203
4. CONSTRUCTION SERVICES ..... ................... ..... .. . .. .. ... Full-time supervision, construction Management.
UAP Doc. 204
5. POST CONSTRUCTION SERVICES ................. ... . Buildings and Grounds Administration
UAP Doc. 205
6. COMPREHENSIVE SERVICES .......................... .. . .. .. . Project Management Service
UAP Doc. 206
7. DESIGN-BUILD SERVICES ............. :..................... ..... .. Administering the Construct~on.
UAP Doc. 207
DOC. 201 PRE-DESIGN SERVICES There are many instances where the Architect is called upon by the client to perform services other than purely architectural or designing services. For the Architect to effectively assist. and serve his client in Pre-design services, special training will be required leading to a broad background in real estate, finance, business, taxation, human 1'1ehavior, space programming, and others, to supplement the architect's skil! as a researcher, space activities organizer, coordinator and manager of the various activities of professionals and tradesmen. It would not be expected however, that the architect would actually perform services in all such fields, but rather, he would act as the agent of his client in producing some of the necessary services that he and his staff cannot provide. It is his task to coordinate these Services so that acting fpr his client, he can retain the degree of control and coordination of activities :necessary to assure the client of a more unified result. The several activities that fall under the pre-design services are as follows: 1. Economic Feasibility Studies. A study to determine the viability of a project such as its cost of development versus its potential return to the Owner. A detailed cost-benefit analysis can guide the client and the architect in selecting a more viable alternative plan. 2. PROJECT FINANCING Architects assist in the determination of requirements of lending agencies, income-expense relationship and relative demand for different building types in actual financing negotiations. 3. ARCHITECTURAL PROGRAMMING Investigating, identifying and documenting the needs of the. client for use in the design of the project. 70
4. SITE SELECTION AND ANALYSIS Assisting the client in locating sites for the proposed project and evaluating their adequacy with regards to topography, subsurface conditions, utilities, development costs, climate, population, legal considerations and other factors.
5. SITE UTILIZATION AND LAND-USE STUDIES A detailed analysis of the site to develop its potential through the proper utilization of land.
6. SPACE/MANAGEMENT STUDIES Analysis of the space requirements of the proJect based on organizational structure and functional set-up. One method is to use human behavior and transaction analysis to pinpoint Linkages and interactions of spaces. The services cover space use and space character analysis, work station and space module and a space program to serve as basis for architectural design. 7. PROMOTIONAL SERVICES In some cases, the project would require promotional activities in order to generate financial support and acceptance from governing agencies or from the general public. The Architect with his own staff, can accomplish many of these activities including preparation of promotional designs, drawings, brochures and the like. As the agent of the Owner, the Architect can produce and coordinate the additional activities necessary to complete the services. METHOD OF COMPENSATION The Architect's services for the Pre-Design Phase were creative designing is not included are often compensated for on the basis of multiple of direct personnel expenses. This cost based method of compensation is directly related to the Architect's and his consultant's effort where they are compensated for every technical hour expended on the project with a multiplier to cover overhead and a reasonable profit. This method is suitable for projects in wh!Ch the scope of work is indefinite, particularly for large complex projects. Progress Payment for Services shall be made based on the accomplishments of the work of the Architect. DOC. 202 ARCHITECT'S DESIGN SERVICES A. REGULAR SERVICES The architect, In regular practice normally acts as his client's or the Owner's adviser. He translates the Owner's needs and requirements to spaces and forms in the forms in the best manner of professionals services, he can render. The Architect's work starts at the very inception of the project when the Owner outlines his requirements to him. It ranges through his study and analysis of the various aspects of the project, goes through the preparation of the necessary instruments of service and through the multitude of construction problems and does not terminate until the project is completed.
71
In effeC:, the Architect renders services whose sequence come in four phases as follows: a. b. c. d.
Schemetic Design Phase Design Development Phase Contract Documents Phase and Construction Phase
Phase 1 Schematic Design a. Cons1.1lts with the Owner to ascertain the requirem"lnts of the project and confirms such requirements with him. b. Prepares schematic design studies leading to a recommended solution including a general description of the project for approva: by the Owner. c. Submits to the Owner a Statement of Prohable Project Construction Cost based on current parameters.
Phase 2 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT a. Prepares from approved Schematic Design Studies, the Desig'l Development Documents consisting of plans, elevation. and other d, awings, and outline specifications, to fix and illustrate the size and character of the entire project in its essential as to kinds of materials, typt::: of structure, mechanical, electrical and sanitary systems and such other work as may be required. b. Suhmits to the Owner a further Statement of Probable Project Construction Cost
Phase 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Prepares from approved Design Development Documents, thP. complete Construction Drawings and Specifications setting forth in detail the work required for the architectural, structural, electrical, plumbing/sanitary, mechanical and other service-connected equipmenL b. Prepares spe~ific_ations--descfibtAg-type--and quality of materials, finish, marfrler-of construction and the general conditions under which the project is to be constructed. c. Furnishes the Owner not more than five (5) complete sets of all construction drawings, specifications and general conditions for purposes for bidding. d. Keeps the Owner informed of any adjustments to previous Statements of Probable Project Construction Cost indicated by changes in scope, requirements or market conditions. e. Assist the Owner in filling the required documents to secure approval of government authorities having jurisdiction over the design of the Project.
Phase 4
CONSTRUCTION
a. Prepares forms for contract letting, documents for construction, forms for invitation and instruction to bidders, and forms for bidders' proposals.
72
b. Assist the Owner in obtaining proposals from Contractors, in preparing abstract of bids and in awarding and preparing construction contracts. c. When required in the contract, makes decisions on all claims of the Owner and Contractor and on all other matters relating to the execution and progress of work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. Checks and approves samples, schedules, shop drawings and other requirements subject to and in accordance with the descriptive information and provisions of the Contract Documents, prepares change orders, gathers and turns over to the Owner written guarantees required of the Contractor or sub-contractors. d. Makes periodic visits to the project site to familiarize himself with the general progress and quality of the work and to determine whether the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. He shall not be required to make exhaustive or continuous 8-hour on-site supervision to check on the quality of the work involved and he shall not be held responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry 0111 the construction work in accordance with the Contract Documents Dunng such prOJect site visits and on the basis of his observations he shall report to th~> Owner defects and deficiencies noted in the work of Contractors, and shall condemn work found falling to conform to the Contract Documents. ~
Based on \lts qb~ervalions and the Contractors Applications for Pay tne.n! rte shall ~etermm~ the amount owing and due to the Contractor ¥JU ::.tlall1ssue corresponding Certificates for Payment for such amounts These Cer11f1cates will constitute a certification to the Owner that the work t1as progressed to the state indicated and that to his best knowledge the quality of work performed by the Contractor is in accordance with the Contract Documents He shall conduct the necessary inspection to determine the date of substantial and final Certificate for Payrner:t to the Contractor Should more extensive or full-time (8-hour) construction superv1s1on be required by the Owner, a separate full-time supervisor shall be hired and agreed upon by the Owner and the Architect subject to the conditions provided in the UAP Document on Full- Time Supervision. When the Architect is requested by the Owner to do the full time supervision his services and fees shall conform to the same UAP Docur.1ent
B. PAYMENT SCHEDULE
1. Payments on account of the Architect"s basic serv1ces shall be as follows: a. Upon the signing of the Agreement a minimum payment equivalent to five percent (5%) of the compensation for basic services. b. Upon the completion of the Schematic Design Services but not more than 15 days after submission of the Schematic Design to the Owner. a sum equal to fifteen percent ( 15%) of the Basic Fee, computed upon a reasonable estimated construction cost of the structure. c. Upon the completion of the Design Development Services.but not more than 15 days after submission of the Design Development to the owner, 73
a sum sufficient to increase the total payments on the fee to thirty-five percent (35%) of the basic fee computed upon the same estimated construction cost of the structure as in (b). d. Upon the completion of the Contract Documents Services but not more than 15 days after submission of the Contract Documents to the Owner, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments on the fee to Eightyfive percent ·(85%) of the Basic Fee ·computed upon a reasonable estimated construction cost of the structure as in (b). e. Within 15 days after the awards of Bids, the payment to the Architect shall be adjusted so that it will amount to a sum equivalent to eightyfive percent (85%) of the Basic Fee, computed upon the winning Bid price. f. Upon the completion of the construction work, the balance of the Architect's fee, computed on the Final Project Construction Cost of the structure shall be paid. 2. The Owner shall make partial payments during each of the various stages of the Architect's work, up9n request of the Architect, provided that such payments are within the framework of the manner of payments outlined above, C. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 1. Provide full information .as to his requirements for the project. 2. Designate when necessary, representative authorized to act in his behalf. Examine documents submitted by the Architect and render decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Architect's work. Observe the procedure of issuing orders to contractors only through the Architect. 3. Furnish or direct the Architect to obtain at the Owner's expense, a certified survey of the site, giving as may be required, topographical surveys, grades and lines of streets, alleys, easements, encroachments, zoning, and deed restrictions, boundaries, with dimensions and complete data pertaining to existing buildings, and other improvements and full information as to available utility service lines both public and private; and test borings and pits necessary for determining subsoil conditions. 4. Pay for structural, acoustical, chemical, mechanical, soil mechanics or other tests and reports as may be required for the project. 5. Pay for design and consultancy services on acoustic, communication, electronic and other specialty systems which may be required for the project. 6. Arrange and pay for such legal, auditing, and insurance counseling services as may be required for the project. 7. Pay for all reimbursible expenses incurred in the project as called for in Section 6 "Other Conditions on Services" and all taxes (not including income tax) that the government may impose on the Architect as a result of the services rendered by the Architect on the proje.ct whether the service$ were performed as an individual practitioner, as a partnership or as a corporation.
74
8. If the Owner observes or otherwise becomes aware of anything that may impair the successful implementation of the project, he shall give prompt written notice thereof to the Architect.
D. OTHER CONDITIONS ON SERVICES 1. Conditions for Minimum Basic Fee The "Minimum Basic Fee" referred to in Section 3.0 applies to construction work done by a Contractor on the basis of a Lump Sum Contract. Construction works that are let on cost-plus-fee basis, or on any basis other than the Lump Sum Contract, where the Architect has to render additional services shall be subject to additional compensation commensurate with the additional services required. Such additional compensation shall be in addition to the minimum Basic Fee. 2. Other Professional Services The Architect's fee includes normal structural, electrical, plumbing/sanitary and mechanical engineering services. Other services that may be needed in order to complete the project such as services of acoustic and illumination engineers, mural painters, sculptors, interior decorators and landscape architects are to be recommended by the Architect of the Owner's approval and costs for these services are to be paid for separately by the Owner. 3. Miniature Models The Architect may make and include miniature models of his design studies as part of his preliminary work if he so deems it to be necessary but no extra charge for such miniature models shall be made by the Architect. However, if the Owner desires to have a miniature model of the final and approved design for exhibition and display purposes, the Owner shall pay for the cost of said miniature model. 4. Per Diem and Travelling Exp,enses A per diem of not less than P50o.oo· plus traveling and living expenses shall be chargeable to the owner on any occasion where the Architect or his duly authorized representative shall be required to perform services at a locality beyond the radius of 100 kilometers from his established office. *All references to fixed amount shall refer to the value of the Peso as of November 1979. Adjustment of the price shall be made at the time of the contract. 5. Extra Sets.of Contract Documents The Architect shall furnish the Owner five (5) sets of Drawings, Specifications and other contract documents. Cost of printing or reproduction of extra sets of Contract Documents when required by the Owner or his representative is to be charged to and paid for by the Owner. 6. Changes Order~d by Owner If the Architect is caused additional professional services, extra drafting or other office expenses due to changes ordered by the Owner after
75
approval of the Design Development Documents, he shall be paid for such expenses and services involved. The amount of compensation and the extension of time for the completion of the documents shall be upon mutual agreement of both parties. 7. Work Suspended or Abandoned If the work of the Architect is abandoned or suspended, in whole or in part, the Architect is to be paid by the Owner for the services rendered corresponding to the fees due at the stage of suspension or abandonment of the work. The primary service of the Architect is the preparation of plans, specifications and other building construction documents whic_h are actually sets of detailed instructions that shall serve as the basis for the Contractor to build the Project. Once the Architect has prepared all these documents, he has completed the Contract Documents Phase of his services which is equivalent t') EIGHTY FIVE PERCENT (85%) of his work. The remaining FIFTEEN PERCENT (15%) of his work is broken down as follows: TEN PERCENT (1 0%) for the Architect's liability under the Civil Codeand - FIVE PERCENT (5%) for the construction phase serv:ce which includes preparation of contract documents forms and periodic visits during the construction. When the OWNER therefore fails to implement the plans and document for construction as prepared by the Architect, the Architect is entitled to receive as compensation the sum corresponding tc. EIGHTY FIVE (85%) PERCENT of his fee. 8. Different Periods of Construction If portions of the buildings are erected at different periods of time, thus increasing the Architect's construction phase period and burden of services, the charges pertaining to services rendered during the construction phase shall be doubled. A suspension of constwction for a period not exceeding six (6) months shall not be covered by this provi~ion. 9. Services of consultants
It .the Owner desires to engage special consultants, such consultants shall be with the consent of the Architect and the cost of their services shall be paid tor separately by the Owner and shall no! be deducted from the fees due the Architect. 10. Separate Services Should the Owner require the Architect to design or plar:1 movable or fixed pieces of furniture, cabinets, covered walks, grottos, pools, landscaping and other items of similar nature, the Owner shall pay the Architect in addition to the Minimum Basic Fee, a compensation in the amount of Fifteen percent (15%) otthe Construction Cost of the above work. 11. Full-Time Supervision Upon recommendation of the Architect and with the approval of the uwner, full-time construction inspectors as will be deemed necessary shall be
76
engaged and paid for by the Owner. The full-time construction inspectors shall be under the technical control and supervision of the Architect and shall make periodic reports to the Owner and to the Architect as to the progress and quality of the work done. 12. Estimates Any Statements of Probable Construction Cost, or any Semi-Detailed or Detailed Cost Estimates submitted by the Architect is accurate only up to a certain degree. This is so because the Architect has no control over the cost of labor and materials, or the many factors that go into competitive bidding. 13. Government Taxes on Services The Architect's Fees as stipulated in Section 3 "Minimum Basic Fee" is net to the Architect. Any tax that the government may impose on the Architect as a consequence of the services performed for the Project (exclusive of income tax) shall be paid by the Owner. 14. Ownership of Documents All designs, drawings, models specifications and copies thereof, prepared and furnished by the Architect in connection with any project are instruments of professional service. As instruments of service they are the property of the Architect whether work for which they were made may be executed or not, and are not to be reproduced or used on the other work except with a written agreement with the Architect. This is in pursuance with the pertinent provisions of Republic Act 545 promulgated on June 17, 1950 and of Presidential Decree No. 49 on the "Protection of Intellectual Property" issued on November 14, 1972. 15. Cost Records During the progress of work the Owner shall furnish the Architect two (2) copies of records of expenses being incurred on the construction, upon completion of the project, the Owner shall furnish the Architect two (2) copies of the summary of all cost of labor, services, materials, equipment, fixtures and all items used at and for the completion of the construction. 16. Design and Placement of Signs All signboards of contractors, sub-contractors, jobbers and dealers that shall be placed at the project site during the progress of construction shall be approved by the Architect as to size, design and contents. After the completion of the project, the Owner or his building lessee shall consult the Architect for the design and size of all signboards, letterings, directories and display boards that will be placed on the exterior or public areas attached to the building, in order to safeguard the Owner's interest that nothing will be installed inside or outside of the building that would man tne safety and aesthetics of the structure. 17. Project Construction Cost Project Construction Cost as herein referred to, means the cost of the completed structure to the owner including plumbing and electrical fix-
77
tures. mechanical equipment, elevators, escalatC;rs, air-conditioning system, automatic fire sprinkler system, alarm and rtock S~'stem, communications and electronic system, elements attacheJ to the building and all items indicated in the drawings designed by or specified by the Architect and his consultant. Other items if designed and planned by tr"le Architect, such as movable or fixed pieces of furniture, cabinets, covered walks, grottos, pools, landscaping and other items of similar nature are to be paid for separately by the Owner to the Architect as stipulated in Section 6.1 0 (Separate Services). The Project Construction Cost does not include any Architect's fee or Engineer's fee or the salaries of the construction inspectors. When labor or materials are furnished by the Owner below its market cost, the cost of the work shall be computed upon such current market-cost. DOC 203 SPECIALIZED ALLIED SERVICES Architecture - the blending of aesthetics, functions, space and materials-results from the application of the skills of many people. Time and Technology have moved to a level where other applied professions are needed to complete, complement or supplement the necessary services for a building project. Today, the environmental design professions, of which architecture has a lead part, are involved with a total commitment to improving the way we live. The Architect's main responsibility to his client is to produce a structure that will house the activity it was intended for that is well-planned, soundly constructed, aesthetically satisfying design and within the financial limitation of the project The Architect's responsibility to society is to make sure that not the structure alone but also its physical environmental can enhance the Iivas of all the people. He relates not only to purely design and build professions but to allied professions as well, to achieve totality in design. The design of the structure proper falls under the Architect's Regular Services (UAP Doc. 202) Design services needed within and outside the building which require specializations fall under "specialized Allied Services" namely: a. Interior Design. b. Acoustic, Communication and Electronic Engineering. c. Landscape Design
C:. Physical Planning e. Comprehensive Planning A. INTERIOR DESIGN SERVICES Depending on the complexity of the project, the Architect may get assistance from Consultants whose expert advice may be needed in the detailing of Interior elements. SCOPE OF SERVICES 1. The Architect, upon designing a structure, houses specific activities by
78
controlling the spaces where these activities are to take place. The various spaces are designed to make the space fit the specific mood and the required activity. Due to the discovery of new products and equipment. interior design has become a field of specialization. As such it offers the following services. a. Prescribes furniture and interior design finishes appropriate for different activities and spaces and prepares furniture and furnishing layout. b. Prepares the design and schedule of furniture giving their dimensions, specifications and locations. c. Assists the client in. conducting bids or negotiations with furniture fabricators and other suppliers. d. Checks and approves ·samples of materials and shop drawings of furniture, furnishings, fixtures and decor items. e. Conducts final inspection and approval of furniture and other items. PAYMENT 1. For projects including extensive detailing such as furniture design builtin equipment and special fittings, the Architect is paid 15% of the cost of the work. The fee may however vary from 12% to 20% depending on the complexity of the work to be undertaken. 2. The fee of the Architect as stipulated above includes the fee of the Consultant working with the Architect. 3. Should the Client hire separately the services of the Consultant, the fee of said Consultant shall be on the account of the Client and paid directly by the Client. In such a case, the fee for the Architect for coordinating the work and relating the work of the Consultant to the design concept of the Architect will be 5% of the cost of the work. 4. "Cost of the Work" means the total cost of the items which were either designed specified or procured by the Architect and his Consultant for the Client, that were used or installed in the interiors of the building. 5. The Architect shall be paid on the following schedule: a. Upon submission of the preliminary design-- 30% of the tee. b. Upon submission of the final design- 50% of the fee. c. Upon completion of the project- 20% of the fee. B. ACOUSTIC, COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING SERVICES Due to the continuing evolution of products and techniques in sound control, communications and electronics. there is a wider flexibility in the design of the interior environment. The Architect is the prime professional commissioned by the Client to design the structure and all its utilities and to coordinate the works of all allied design professionals involved in the project.
79
As acoustic, communication and electronic engineering are fields of specialization, the allied professionals who wiH perform these services will serve as consultants to the Architect and the Client. The Architect shall coordinate their works and make certain that their inputs will comply to the requirements of the project and shall Je compatible with the architectural design concept of the Architect. SCOPE OF SERVICES The Architect and the Consultant offer the following services: a. Prepare the drawings and specifications foF acoustic designs, acoustic treatment, sound control, sound reinforcement, sound insulation and communication system. b. Prepare specifications of electronic equipment. c. Assist the client.in the bidding or negotiation of the work. d. Check and approve samples of materials and equipment. e. Conduct final inspection of work and equ1pment. f. Assist the Client to evaluate the amount due the Contractor. PAYMENTS
1. The fee for acoustic, communication and electronic engineering services shall be from 10% to 15% of the cost of the work depending on the magnitude and complexity of the work required by the project. 2. The fee of the Architect as stipulated above includes the fee of the consultants working with the Architect. 3. Should the Client hire separately the services of the consultants, the fee of said consul.tants shall be on the account of the Client paid directly by the Client. In such a case, the fee of the Architect for coordinating the works of Consultants and relating their works with the design concept of the Architect will the 5% of the "Cost of the Work". 4. "Cost of the Work" means the total cost of all equipment, utilities and other items which were either designed, specified or produced by the Architect and his Consultants for the Owner, that were used or installed in the project. 5. The Architect shall be paid on the following Schedule: a. Upon submission of the preliminary design - 30% of the fee b. Upon submission of the final design - 50% of the fee c. Upon completion of the project- 20% of the fee. C. LANDSCAPE DESIGN SERVICES Arising from his concept of the total environment, the Architect is not merely concerned with the structure he created but the surrounding space as well. He studies the structure in relation with the existing environment and then consequently designs the surrounding areas of the structure so that the environment act as one
80
Normally, landscaping of small projects can be done by the Architect and his staff. If the project, however, is big in scale, the Architect may hire other professionals Consultants. SCOPE OF SERVICES In order to come up with a well-balanced design of the enwonment, the Architect offers the following services: a. b. c. d. e.
Prepares the general ground modelling plan and planting layout. Prepares drawings and specifications of needed utility lines. Prepares schedule of shrubs, trees and other plants. Prepare details of landscaping elements. Assists the Client to evaluate the amount due the Contrar.tor.
PAYMENTS 1. The fee for landscape design services shall be from 10% to 15% of the cost of the work depending on the magnitude and complexity of the work required by the project. 2. The fee of the Architect as stipulated above includes the fee of the Consultants working with the Architect. 3. Should the Client hire separately the services of the consultant, the fee of said Consultant shall be on the account of the Client and paid directly by the Client. In such a case, the fee of the Architect for coordinating the works of the Consultant and relating his work with the design concept of the Architect will be 5% of the "Cost of the Work". 4. "Cost of the Work" means the total cost of all landscape work including the cost of utilities, landscaping materials and development of the site. 5. The Architect shall be paid in the following schedule: a. Upon submission of the preliminary design - 30% of the fee b. Upon submission of the final design - 50% of the fee c. Upon completion of the project - 20% of the fee D. PHYSICAL PLANNING SERVICES The Architect is not merely concerned with a structure. He is concerned with its relation with the immediate surroundings as well. In planning for building sites (industrial estates, shopping centers, etc.) he studies the possible structures that will be sited there and their relation to other structures, the surrounding environment, and their effect and impact on the neighboring areas. If the Architect is commissioned to do physical plans for a specified site, he has to study human behavior and activities, look into the city's economic systems, its laws and regulations, tax structure, the city's infrastructure, utilities and on the whole, everything that will have a bearing on the project. When the Architect is exposed to all these aspects in sufficient detail he is engaged in the practice of a specialized service - that of Physical Planning.
81
DEFINITION OF PHYSICAL PLANNING Physical Planning is the art and science of ordering the use of land siting of btlilding and communication routes to secure the maximum practicable degree of economy, social amenities, convenience and aesthetics. It is approached through a mechanism which integrates in time and space the following components: a. Physical, pertaining to the world of material things, the tangible and aesthetics. b. Social, concerned with the condition of people. c. Economic and administrative - including the science of management and resources. These components are used in reference to a smaller sca~e the siting of buildings and its influence c,n the neighboring areas to be affected.
ROL.E OF THE ARCHITECT-PLANNER 1. All ideas, concepts, needs and data eventually have to be translated into physical plans before they can be implemented. It is the Architect who provides a 3-dimensional perspective to 2-dimensional plan. By virtue of the Architect's training and experience in coordinating the works of a multi-disciplinary team, the Architect becomes the logical prime professional responsible for the direction of th~ team efforts to deal with the planning work. 2. The physical planning services of the Architect is separate and distinct from the Architect's regular services. The latter being concerned with the production of a structure of building with all its attendant sophistications and complexities while the former is concerned with the general quality of the setting for people, activities, buildings and other natural and man-made phenomenon. 3. Depending on the complexity of the project the Architect may hire additional Consultant whose expert advise may be needed to validate certain feature of the physical plan. The fee of any additional Consultant needed in the project must be paid for separately by the Client.
PHYSICAL PLANNING SERVICES When the Architect is commissioned to do physical planning for building sites such as Industrial Estates, Commercial Institutional and Government Centers, Sports Complexes, Tourist Centers, Resorts, Amusement Parks, Educational Campuses, Housing Subdivisions and the like, the services are as follows: a. Confers with the Client on project requirements and secures and/or generates sufficient data base from which reliable projections and/or analyses can be made for translation to physical design. b. Examines laws ordinances, rules and regulations affecting the project. c. Prepares concept development plans and report from relevant information gathered by other disciplines. d. Prepares scaled preliminary plans showing physical allocatiQn of areas, roads and pedestrian arteries, basic utility layouts and building envelopes.
82
e. Prepares budgetary estimate of cost of physical deveiopment. f. Undertake modifications, revisions and changes as may be required. g. Prepares Final Plans, Report and Specifications neeoed tor approval by the proper government agencies concerned. PHYSICAL PLANNING SCHEDULE OF FEES
Type 1 Physical Planning for building sites such as Industrial Estates, Commercial Centers, Sports complexes, Resorts, Tourist Centers, Amusement Parks, Educational Campuses, Institutional and Government Centers and Site Planning of any complex consisting of several structures within a contiguous site. • Basic rate for the first 50 hectares or less • Over 50 hectares up to 100 hectares · of 50 hectares Over 100 hectares up to 200 hectares • Over 200 hectares
P 5,000 per hectare
-
P 250,000 plus P 4,500 per per hectare in excess P 475,000 plus P 4,000 per hectare in excess P 875,000 plus P 3,000 per per hectare in excess of 200 hectares
• All References to fixed amoun~ are based on the 1979 purchasing value of the Peso. Adjustment of the fee shall be made at the time of the contract due to inflation and other factors.
Type2 Subdivision Planning for housjng on properties within Metro-Manila, cities regional centers and provincial capitals. • Basic rate for - P 3,000 per the first 100 hectares hectare or less • Over 100 hectare up to 200 hectares
- P 300,000 plus P 2,300 per hectare in excess of 100 hectares
• Over 200 hectares
- P 550,000 plus P 2,000 per hectare in excess of 200 hectares
83
Type3 Subdivision Planning for housing on properties located on other localities beside those under Type 2. • Basic Rate for the first 100 hectares or less
-
P 2,000 per hectare
• Over 100 hectares up to 200 hectares
-
P 200,000 plus P 1,500 per hectare in excess of 1 00 hectares
• Over 200 hectares
-
P 350,000 plus P 1,000 per hectare in excess of 200 hectares
The rate stipulated under Article 5 above is based on the assumption that the land to be developed is moderately flat. If the land is rugged with steep terrain the fee shall increase by thirty percent (30%). OTHER CONDITIONS ON PHYSICAL PLANNING 1. The Architect may undertake the site planning of a project requiring a composite arrangement of several building envelop on a contiguous site of a moderate size of three (3) hectares or less. Any commission on physical planning of a larger magnitude or a complex nature, s110uld be done by the Architect with several years of experience in planning or has had additional academic training in planning. He should most importantly possess administrative, technical and managerial ability aside from an equitable social com· mitment. 2. Should other services be required by the project, such as environmental studies, feasibility study, market analysis, movement systems, impact analysis and others. said services should be performed by an Architect acting as the prime professional of the team. 3. The cost for environmental studies surveys, site investigation and titling of the parcels of land shall be on the account of the Owner. 4. The detailed design of the building and landscaping elements is not part of physical planning services and shall be treated separately under the "Architects Regular Services" or "Specialized Allied Services." 5. For the preparation of detailed engineering drawings and specifications on roads drainage, sewerage, power and communication system an additional fee of four percent (4%) of the cost of the development is to be charged. E. COMPREHENSIVE PLANNING SERVICES
.
EXPERTISE Planning calls for the detailed study of physical, social, economic and administrative components and as such requires the expertise and knowledge of other specialists.
84
Comprehensive Planning Services is the range of all services offered by the environrnental-pJanner from data base gathering to environmental impact statements up to the formulation of the Master Development Plan. In the formulation of the Master Development Plan, the following components are to be consk.fered: a. Physical COmponent Concerned with land use and the changes which occur within the physical environment (within the space where these activities take place). b. Economic Component Concerned with the nation's assets and 1ts management. c. Socio-Cultural Component Concerned with the people, their living conditions and the seeking of ways to ameliorate it. d. Transport Component Concerned with the movement of people and goods from one place to another. e. Legal and Administrative Component Concerned with the relationship of policies to the ex•sting laws THE ARCHITECT AS ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNER The Architect's ability to synthesize and organize into a whole, various information relating to the user's needs, user's perception and expectations, site and climatic factors, construction technology, materials, cost and other information has qualified him to take the lead role in any undertaking that cut across various disciplines. The Environmental Planner is concerned with tne management and use of land as well as conservation and upgrading of the human environment. Since the Architect, with experience in planning has the social commitment and technical experience as coordinator of several disciplines, he is qualified as the Environmental Planner and leader of the multi-disciplinary team to offer Comprehensive Planning Services. COMPREHENSIVE PLANNING SERVICES When the Environmental Planner is commissioned to do town and regional planning or urban renewal projects, he performs the following: a. Identifies existing land use, resources, social behavior and interaction. b. Undertakes environmental analysis feasibility studies, demographic analysts. c. Examines existing laws, ordinances, political/Social constraints. d. Prepares concept development plans, policies, implementing strategies to arrive at the Master Development Plan.
85
COMPENSATION FEES As a specialized service, the Architect shall be compensatec' fer by the following methods: a. Professional Fee plus Expenses The fee of the Architect- Planner for the Physical planning cor:1po ne nt is based on the schedule prescribed under UAP Doc. 203-d "Physical Flanning Services" while the fee for consuhants, researches and other out of pocket expenses are·reimbursable to the Architect. b. Multiple of Direct Personnel Expense Refer to UAP Doc. 208-b "Methods of Compensation" for details.
J. CO,NTRACTS. . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. LUMP SUM CONiRACTS ........................ (
2. UNIT PRICE CONTRACT ........................... (
3. COST PLUS FIXED FEE CONTRACT ................... (
4. COST PLUS PERCENTAGE FEE OF COST OF PROJECT .............................. (
86
MATCHING TYPE
A. The person/s managing the construction in behalf of the owner. In here, the contract may have been awarded to a General Contractor and the contractor is directly managed by the management group.
B. A pledge, a promise or assurance with confidence that the amount to be used in a conc;truction will not exceed the specified cost whatever savings made will be shared by the contractor and' the owner.
C. A fixed quantity, amount, distance, measure, used as standard or basis in awarding work credits. An example is cost per cu. m., per sq. m., per lineal m., per piece, per bag, per hour, per bd. ft., etc.
D. The contractor here manages or directs the affair of the construction project like 9rdering materials and 11iring of personnel, but
the owner is responsible for paying the bills, payroll, rent of equipments. 5. ADMINISTRATION CONTRACT ........................... (
E. With the price for goods or services set at the cost of materials, labor, etc. plus a specified amount of profit.
6. MANAGEMENT
F. When the contractor is capable and willing to finance the whole project without any financial help from the owner. The contractor takes care of the design, the construction including changes, revisions, and just turnover the finished building to be paid.
CONTRACT ........................... (
7. GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PLUS PARTICIPATION ON SAVINGS ......................... (
G. After knowing the cost from adding all receipts, payrolls, labor, materials, etc., a specified percentage (%) is added. H. A gross or total sum paid at one time. Advantageous for a standardized type of construction and where a variety of operations is required making it impracticable to break down the work into units.
8. TURNKEY PROJECT ............ (
K. BIDDING (work under detailed Engineering).
MATCHING TYPE
1. DESIGN STANDARDS .......... (
A. Speciftcations shall be prepared for specific items of work or methods of construction, measurement and payment under each contract, which are not covered by standard construction and material specifications adopted by the corporation concerned.
2. FIELD SURVEY ..................... (
B. This is a propQsal bond in the amount of 2 -t% of the total bid
87
price in the form of cash, certified check. manager's check, or bank guarantee confirmed by a local oanK. payable to the owner as guarantee that the successful bidd·Jr shall within 30 calendar days from receipt of the NOA or notice of award, enter into contract with the owner and furnish the performance bond. 3. CONTRACT PLANS .............. (
C. In the event that the contractor refuses or fails to satisfactorily complete the work within the aforesaid period of time, the owner is entitled and shall have the right to deduct from any sum to become due the contractor the sum of ten percent of one percent of the contract price for every day of delay.
4. QUANTITIES ......................... (
D. This construction cost shall be prepared by official duly designated by the Head of office concerned (This is the cost approved by the Head) and shall be held confidential and signed, sealed, and ready for presentation on the day of the opening of the opening of bids/tenders, and shall be announced publicly before the various bids are read.
5. SPECIAL PROVISIONS ........................ (
6. UNIT PRICE .......................... (
88
E. This is a written notice to the contractor if there is a decrease in work due to deletion of work items in the project, or where there is a reclassification of any existing item like earth excavation to solid rock excavation, not known at the time o; bidding, or damage to structure due to force majeure. F. This is furnished by the contractor to the owner five days after signing the contr~ct, in the form of a surety bond given by a
reputable Insurance Agency equivalent to 10% of the contract price, conditioned for the Faithful compliance of the contract and the satisfaction of obligations for materials used and labor employed on the work, and effective within a period of one year.
~
APPROVEDAGENCY ESTIMATE (AAE) .................. (
8. BID/TENDER DOCUMENTS ....'.................... (
9. PROGRAM OF WORK .......... (
10. PBAC PREOUALIFICATION BID AND AWARD COMMITTEE ......................... (
G. This include site development plans, plans and profile sheet, typical sections and details, drainage details. structural plans.
H. To determine the optimum safety of structure and to minimize possible earthquakes dJmage. I. All of these construction items shall be computed to a reasonable accuracy of plus or minus fifteen (15%} percent to avoid variation orders.
J. These shall be prepared for each contract using costs, based on reasonable approved current prices, divided into local and foreign exchange costs.
11. OBLIGATIONS ....................... (
K. This include: Instruction to bidders, General conditions, Agenda, Itemized bill of Quantities, Daywork schedule, Form of Bid/Tender Bond, performance Bond, Specifications.
12. CHANGE ORDER ................. (
L. Necessary surveys which may include aerial, hydrographic, topographic, subsu~ace, monumenting, etc.
89
13. BIDDER'S BOND ................... (
M. Each Office/Agency/Corp. shall have in each head office or its implementing offices a Prequalification, bidding, evaluation of bids and recommending award of contracts. Each committee shall be composed of chairman and members.
14. PERFORMANCE BOND .................................... (
N. When prices of materials, wages, as per agreement or contract goes up abnormally (too high or great difference in cost) or decreases. This is based on fluctuation in the cost of living, production, costs, etc.
15. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................. (
0. A binding leg .... l agreement or a moral responsibility, something which a person is bound to do or not to do as a result of such an agreement or responsibility.
16. ESCALATION CLAUSE ................................. (
P. This is made before prosecuting any project, it shall be prepared and submitted for approval. In no case shall construction funds be ·emitted to field office. or a project be started before this is approved. It includes e'Stimate of the work items, quantities and costs and PERT/CPM network of the project activities.
L. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION 1. SCHEDULING ....................... (
90
MATCHING TYPE
A. A technique that separates planing and scheduling. It also clarifies the interrelationship between time and cost. This method evaluates all the possible alternative plans for a project and associates each plan with a schedule. It is a technique for finding the ordered sequence of all the activities.
2. PLANNING ............................. (
B.
Planning the size of buildings in regard to the ratio of net area to gross area.
3. PROGRAMMING ................... (
c.
An arrow Diagram defining the activities in the project. An activity cannot start if other activities before it has not been completed.
4. EFFICIENCY RATIOS ........... (
D. The placing of the plan on a calendar timetable and showing the allocation of the equipment and manpower that will put the plan into effect.
5. BAR CHART METHOD ......... (
E.
6. CRITICAL PATH METHOD ............................... (
F. The function of coordinating in
It is sometimes necessary to use a "convector" type of activity that doesn't really represent work, but merely helps to observe the rule of network . This special activity is drawn as dotted line and indicates that no work is involved in that activity. This involves no duration and no cost. It serves only as a dependency connector or sequence indicator.
a logical order all the activities, persons, machines and materials necessary to complete the project. 7. NETWORK ............................. (
G.
A chart prepared by a contractor, brought to date monthly (or weekly); the principal trades of the project are tabulated vertically and the scheduled construction shown horizontally from left to right;
8. DUMMY ................................. (
H.
A process leading to the statement of an architectural program and the requirements to be met in offering a solution, such as a complete listing of the rooms required, their sizes, special facilities, etc. It ls the search
91
for sufficient information to clarify, to understand, to state the problem solving. This is problem seeking.
MATCHING TYPE
M. PROJECTS 1. PROJECT FEASIBILITY STUDY ................................... (
2. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................. (
A. Pertaining to a whole or to most of its parts, not limited to one class, field or product, dealing with all or the overall universal aspects of the subject under consideration, a circumstance indispensable to some result, that on which something else is contingent to put into the required state.
B. Something involving a risk, which is owned or done in common agreement with one or more persons, groups, or government.
3. CASH FLOW ......................... (
4. GENERAL CONDITIONS ........................ (
5. SPECIFICATIONS ................ (
92
C. A body or society entitled to act as a single person, an artificial person created by charter, made up of many persons and registered with the SEC or Securities and 'Exchange Commission.
D. Only, unshared or exclusive, a person who has legal rights of possession of land an object, or a process of manufacture or distribution. E. This is a tabulation to show how money is distributed or used in a continuous movement smoothly particularly the working capital.
6. JOINT-VENTURE .................. (
7. SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP ............... {
8. CORPORATION .................... (
F. Concerned with or relating to, the feasibility or project study in a digested form, or a comprehensive brief abstract (concise, direct and prompt) usually containing only 30 pages.
G. A list of materials supplied and work done by a builder, engineer or required for a project to be carried out (a detailed description of an architect's list of materials) and the procedure of execution. H. A word defined as capable of being done or carried out; practicable possible and within reason, a project which when carried out or built is capable of being used or dealt with successfully. In this case, a reasonable return of investment or ROI to the financiers or developers.
DIRECTION: Read the passages and answer the questions that follow. Shade the circle ~(•) of the correct answer to each question.
N. CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS 1. Which of the following may the owner not do? A. Stop work if the contractor's performance is not satisfactory or in variance with the contract documents. B. Carry on the work and deduct costs normally due to the contractor for these corrections. C. Stop the work if the Architect reports safety problems on the site. D. Refuse, with good cause, to give the contractor proof that the owner can meet the financial obligations of the project .
93
A 8 C D
0000
2. If, during bidding, your client asked you to provide a full-time staff member on the job site during construction you would be entitled to extra compensation under what provision would this be?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. CONTRACT SUM B. CONTINGENT ADDITIONAL SERVICES C. PROJECT REPRESENTATION BEYOND BASIC SERVICES D. OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL CHARGES 3. The standard owner-architect agreement separates the architect from the contractor with what? A. DUTIES TO THE CONTRACTOR
C. ARCHITECT'S SERVICES
B. PRIVITY
D. THIRD PARTY RELATIONSHIP
4. What is used to encourage the contractor to finish the job or to satisfy mechanics lien claims by subcontractors? A. RETAINAGE
C. SURETY BOND
B. FIXED LIMIT
D. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
5. What Fee method would you prefer if your Client was doing their first architectural project and did not yet have a program? A. FIXED SUM
C. PERCENTAGE OF CONSTRUCTION COST
B. MULTIPLE OF DIRECT PERSONNEL EXPENSE
D. UNITCOST BASED ON SQUARE METER
6. A project is about 60 percent complete when the owner begins receiving field reports from the architect stating that the contractor is failing to properly supervise the job, resulting in incorrect work. After several weeks of this the owner becomes worried
94
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 ()
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
and asks the Architecf what to do. What should be done if the work is being performed under the terms and conditions of the BUILDING CONTRACT? A. After receiving the architect"s field reports, the owner should stop the work and arrange for a meeting between the owner, architect and contractor to determine the cause of the problems and what the contractor intends to do. If the contractor does not correct the work, the owner should carry out the work with other contractors and deduct the cost by change order from the original contractor's construction cost. B. The architect should recommend that the owner give the contractor written notice of non-conformance with the contract documents and if, after seven days the contractor has not begun corrective measures, terminate the contract. C. The architect and owner should discuss the problem to see if the owner would be willing to accept it in exchange for a reduction in +he contract sum. If not, the owner should give seven days written notice to terminate the contract and find another contractor to finish the job. D. The Architect should, with the owner's knowledge, reject non-coniorming work and notify the contractor that it must be corrected promptly. The Architect should then remind the owner that the owner can have the work corrected after giving the contractor two {2) seJen day written notices to correct the work. 7. Which of the following describes agency?
A. The architect acts on behalf of the owner, making decisions and expediting the work and taking on responsibilities the owner would normally have. B. The architect mediates hetween the owner and the contractor and vendors fur the benefit of the owner. C. The architect is the principal of the relationship who balances the needs of the contractor and the owner.
95
A
B
C
D
0000
D. The architect works for the owner in certain designated area with the authority to act on the owner's behalf.
8. You have a client who owns a large m<1nufact1:~i'"'q plant and needs to expand to new facilities without interruption in production. The owner has alreacy arranged for a flexible line of credit to tinanco·u:.>ll;:, uc tion but wants to minimize project costs. It th€' r~w facility will be very similar to the previous one. onlv sized for greater production capacity, which type cf construction would you recommend? A. DESIGN-BUILD
C. MULTIPLE PRIME CONTRACT
B. FAST-TRACK
D. DESIGN-AWARDBUILD
9. Which of the following are part of the contract documents? · I. an addendum
II. a change oraer
fl
P
r
~
0000
A
B
C
D
000(.)
IV the contractor's bid
V. a written amendmen;
II I. special supplementary conditions A. I, Ill, and V
C. II, Ill, IV, and V
B. I, II, Ill, andV
D. all of the above
10. Which one of the following is not an accurate statement?
A. The architect is responsible for a defect in the work if she or he sees it but fails to report it to the contractor. B. The owner has the sole right to make changes in the work but must do it through the architect. C. The architect does not have to verify soil test reports given by the o•vner. D. By the time construction documents are almost completed, the architect still does not have to give a reasonably accurate construction price.
96
A
B
C
D
0000
11. Which of the following would be used to formally incorporate a substitution into the work prior to the award of the contract? A. CHANGE ORDER
C. ALTERNATE LISTING
B. ADDENDUM
D. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
12. Which of the following are part of the bidding documents? I. SPECIFICATIONS
II. INVITATION TO BID
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
Ill. LIST OF SUBCONIV. OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMEN.l V. PERFORMANCE BOND
A. I, II, tV, and V
C. II, Ill, IV, and V
B. II, Ill, and IV
D. all of the above
0. BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1 . At the time scheduled for a bid opening, a contractor
comes rushing into the room three minutes late with his bid. You have not begun to open the bids What should you do?
b
c
00
(.)
A
c D - 0
A
lj
0
A. Refuse to accept the bid, stating that the deadline has passed. B. Ask if there one are no objections from the other bidders to accepting the bid since none have been opened yet. C. Accept the bid with prejudtce. D. Accept the bid since none have been opened but make a mental note to look on it with disfavor when you are evaluating it. 2. Which of the following is generally not true about bidding?
A. Bidding procedures must be clearly and extensively outlined in the instructions to bidders because there are so many variations of the procedures.
97
C'
B
'-j
B. Bidding is nearly always necessary for public works or government project. C. Open bidding usually presents more problems than other types. D. Competitive bidding takes more time than negotiation but can result in a lower construction cost. 3. A performance bond is designed to:
A. ensure that the subcontractors complete their work.
c D 0 0 0 0 A
B
A
B
B. guarantee that the contractor will finish on time. C. cover any possible liens that may be filed on the building. D. protect the owner by having a third party responsible for completing the work if the contractor does not. 4. If the lowest bid come in 20 percent over your· client's construction. budget, what would be the best advise you could give your client?
C
D
0000
A. that you revise the design at no cost to the client to reduce the construction cost. B. that the project be rebid using another list of contractors. C. that you and the client work to revise the scope of the project to reduce cost. D. that all the deduct-alternates be accepted to reduce the bid, and that the client authorize a slight increase in construction cost to bring the two closer together. 5. What variable affects a bid the most? A. the contractor's profit margin B. the influences of the construction marketplace C. labor and materials D. subcontractor bids
98
A
B
C
D
0000
6. In what order should the following activities take place during project closeout?
A
B
C
D
0000
1. preparation of the final certificate for payment 11. punch list Ill. issuance of the certificate of substantial completion IV. notification by the contractor that the proJect is ready for final inspection V. receipt of consent of surety
A. II, Ill, V, IV, then I
C. IV, II, V, I, then Ill
B. II, IV, Ill, V, then I
D IV, V. 11. Ill. then
I
7. Substantial completion indicates that A. the owner can make use of the work for its intended ptJrpose and the requirements of the contract docu-
A
B
C
[)
()C)Q(_)
ments have been fulfilled B. the contractor has completed correcting punct1 list items C. the final certificate for payment is issued by the Architect and all documentation has been delivered to the owner D. all of the above 8. During a periodic visit to the site the architect notices what appears to be an undersized variable air volume box being installed. What should the Architect do?
A. Notify the mechanical engineer to look at the situation during the next site visit by the engineer. Note . the observation on a field report. B. Find the contractor and stop work on the installation until the size of the unit can be verified by the mechanical engineer and compared against the contract documents. C. Nottty the owner in writing that the work is not proceeding according to the contract documents. Arrange a meeting with the mechanical engineer to resolve the situation.
99
A
B
C
D
0000
D. Notify the contractor that the equipment may be undersized and have the contractor check on it. Ask the mechanical engineer to verify the size of the unit against the specifications and report to the architect. 9. An architect would use which one of the following instruments of the building department required additional exit signs beyond those shown on the approved plans when the project was 90 percent complete?
A. order for minor
A
B
C
D
0000
C. change order change
B addendum
D. construction change directive
10. The contractor is solely responsible for: I. field reports to the owner
A
B
C
D
0000
II. field tests
Ill. scaffolding IV reviewing claims of subcontractor V r·eviewing shop drawings
11
A. I. II. and 1!1
C. II, Ill, and IV
B II. and Ill
D. Ill. and V
Wh1ch of tt1e following is not true about submittals?
A.
H1e architect must review them prior to checking by the contractor
f3
rh8 contractor is ultimately responsible for the accuracy of dimensions and quantities.
C
They are not considered part of the contract documents
D The contractor can reject them and request resubmit! a I
100
c D 0 0 0 0 A
B
12. If a contractor makes a claim for additional money due to extra work cause by unforseen circumstances, the architect must respond within:
A. 5 days
C. 10 days
B. 7 days
D. not until supporting data are submitted
A
B
C
D
0000
P. THE PROJECT MANUAL AND SPECIFICATIONS 1. The PROJECT MANUAL is a bound book containing all the contract and non-contract documents for a construction project except the drawings The project manual contains the technical SPECIFICATIONS, but it also includes several other types of documents.
A. Organization of the Project Manual The project manual is divided into four (4) major parts. 1. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS;
2. PARTS OF THE CONTRACT ITSELF, which will contain the agree ment between owner and contractor, bond forms. and the l1ke 3. The GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS of the tract:
cfH1
4. The TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS A more detailed list of contents of the project might include some o; Z1ll c_,! the following: • Bidaing requirements • invitation to bid • prequalification forms • instruction to bidders • information available to bidders • bid forms • Supplements to bid forms • bid security forms • subcontractor list • substitution list • Contract forms • agreement (contract between owner/contractor) • performance bond • labor and materials payment bond • certificates of insurance
101
• General and supplementary conditions • general conditions of the conti act • supplementary conditions • Technical Specifications
B. Coordination with the Drawings The technical specifications and the drawings are "COMPLIMENTARY". The "DRAWINGS" show the general coniiguration and layout of the building; the size, shape, and dimensions of the construction, and general notes to explain the graphic representation. The "TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS" describe the quality of materials and workmanship, along with general requirements for the execution of the work, standards, aild other items that are more appropriately described in written, rather than graphic form. The drawings, technical specifications and other parts of the project manual must be cooroinated to avoid conflicting requirements, duplications, omissions, and errors. These are several areas of particular concern, 1. The specifications should contain requirements for a!l the materials and construction indicated on the drawings. A common checklist used by both the specifications writer and the project manager or job captain is one way to accomplish this. 2. The Terminology used in both documents should be the same. If \he term "gypsum board" is used in the specifications, the term "drywall" should not be shown on the drawings.
3. Dimensions and thicknesses should only be indicated on one document. If the thickness of flashing is included in the technical specifications, there is no need to note it on the drawings. 4. Notes on the drawings should not describe methods of installation or materials qualities; these belong in the specifications. When there is a "CONFLICT" between the drawings and specifications, the specifications are more binding and take precedence over the drawings.
2. SPECIFICATIONS These must be complete, accurate, unambiguous, and exact. Some standard
methods ot preparing specitications are in general use. In addition, "MASTER SPECIFICATIONS" are available that can be used as starting documents. This is prewritten text that includes the majority of requirements foi a particular specification section. Master specifications are edited by deleting unnecessary portions, adding particular requirements tor a specific job, and coordinating them with other specification
102
sections and other parts of the project manual. They are available in written form and on computer disk. A. Types of Specifications There are two (2) broad categories of specifications. 1. Prescriptive - sometimes called closed
2. Performance- known as open Prescriptive specifications tell exactly what product or material you want the contractor to use by using brand names. Performances specifications tell what results you want the final construction assembly to achieve, but they give the contractor some choice in how they will be achieved. The type you will select will depend on several factors Public projects almost require open specifications in order to encourage competitive bidding In other cases, you may want to use a closed specification to ensure that only one particular product is used. Whether the job 1s bid or a negotiated contract may also affect your choice with bidding, you want to allow the contractor as much choice as possible so he or she can find the lowest price within the context of the specification requirements, Types of Prescriptive Specifications a. "PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATIONS" are the most restrictive in that they call out a specific manufacturer's product. These give the architect complete control over what is installed. They are easier than other types to write and are generally shorter. However, they do not allow for competitive bidding and by limiting products you may force the contractor to get materials that may be difficult or expensive to procure in a certa1n geographical area or that require excessive delivery time. b. A base bid with alternates is a type of specification that cc.!ls out a proprietary product but allows the substitution of other products that the contractor thinks are equal to the one stated. This is a "DANGEROUS" method of specifying because the contractor may substitute a less expensive item that he or she thinks is an equal, but which usually is not. There are two (2) variations of the base bid specification.
1. The first lists several approved manufacturers of a product. The contractor is free to bid on any one listed. This type satisfies the requirements for public work where at least three different manufacturers must be listed, but it puts the burden on the architect to make sure that every one of the approved products or manufacturers listed is equal. 2. The second variation is a bid with "APPROVED EQUAL" language this specification states one product or an approved equal must be used.
103
This means that th~ntractor may submit a proposed substitution but it is subject to review and approval by the architect before it can be incorporated into the bid. Although this gives the contractor some freedom in looking for lower priced alternates, it also puts the burden for finding them on the contractor. However, the responsibility for fairly and accurately evaluating the proposed alternates is placed on the architect or owner.
Types of Perfonnance (open) specifications a. A "DESCRIPTIVE" specification gives detailed written requirements for the materials or product and the workmanship required for its fabrication and installation. It does not mention trade names. In its purest form, a descriptive specification is difficult to write because you must include all the pertinent requirements for the construction and installation of the product. A variation of the descriptive type is a: b. "REFERENCE" standard specification. This describes a material, product, or process based on requirements (reference standards) set by an accepted authority or test method. For example, a product type can be required to meet the testing standards produced by such organizations as the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), or Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). Reference can also be made to specific trade associations, such as the Architectural wood Institute, the American Iron and Steel Institute, and the Gypsum Association. For example, in specifying gypsum wallboard you can state that all gypsum wallboard products must meet the requirements of ASTM C36. This particular document describes in great detail the requirements for gypsum wallboard so you do not have to repeat it and can inste;:~d refer to generally recognized industry standard. Reference standard specifications are fairly easy to write and are generally short. Chances for errors are redL.lced and your liability minimized because you are using industry standards ahd generally recognized methods of buildIngs A pure performance specification i$ a statement setting criteria and results required of the item being specifi~,d. which can be verified by measurement, test evaluation, or other types of assurance that the final result meets the criteria. The means of achieving the re-111uired results are not specified, leaving that up to the person trying to meet the specification. A true performance specification is often used for construction components when the specifier wants to encourage new ways of achieving a particular end result. For example, a movable partition system could be specified by stating its required fire rating, acoustical properties, finish, maximum thick104
ness, tolerances, size required and all the other required properties. It would then be up to the contractor and manufacturer to design and develop a system to meet the criteria. Performance specifications are difficult to write because the specifier must know all the criteria, state the methods for testing compliance, and be prepared for the cost consequences.
B. Specification Writing Guidelines • The language must be precise • must be complete, accurate and unambiguous • know what the standards and test methods referred to include and what parts of them are applicable to your project. They must also be the most current editions. • Do not specify together the results and the methods proposed to achieve those results, as the result may be a conflict. For instance, if you specify that a brick must have certain absorption characteristics according to an ASTM test method and then specify a particular brick that does not meet the stated requirements, the specification will be IMPOSSIBLE to comply with. • Do not include standards that cannot be measured. For example, saying that the work should be done in "a first class manner" is subject to wide interpretation. • Avoid "EXCULPATORY CLAUSES". These are phrases that try to shift responsibility to the contractor or someone else in a very broad, general way. An example is something like "contractor shall be totally responsible for all ... Unless the clause is generally accepted wording or makes sense in the context of the specification", Current legal opinion disapproves of such clauses, especially when they favor the person who wrote1hem. • Avoid words or phrases that are ambiguous. The combination and/or, for example, is [Jnclear and should be replaced with one word or the other. The abbreviation "etc." is also vague and implies that a list can go on forever and may include something you do not want it to include. The word "any" implies the contractor has a choice. This is acceptable if you want to allow a choice, but most often you do not. • Ke~p the specifications as short as possible. Specification writing can be terse, even sometimes omitting unnecessary words like "all", '1he", "an", and "a". • Describe only one major idea in each paragraph. This makes reading easier and improves comprehension and it also makes changing the specification easier.
105
Q. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1. Which of the following would not be found in a project manual? A. bid log
C. sitework specifications
B. subsurface soil conditions report
D. bid bond
2. A performance specification:
A
C
D
0000
A
A. allows innovation by the contractor
B
B
C
0
0000
B. required more work by the architect
C. is not appropriate for normal building products D. all of the above
3. What is likely to occur if the drawings and specifications are not thoroughly coordinated? I. a decrease of the actual cost from the estimated cost because the contractor bid on a less expensive material shown on the drawings while the same material was called out as a more expensive type in the specifications II.
a lawsuit
Ill. the need for a change order during construction to account for modifications required to correct discrepancies in the two documents IV. a delay in construction
V. an increase in cost because the contractor bia the least expensive choice between two conflicting requirements when the client wanted the more expensive option
A. I, Ill, and IV
C. II, IV, and V
B. I and Ill
D. Ill, IV, and V
Question 4 refers to the following excerpt from a specification. Part 2 - Products
2.01 Metal Support Material General: To the extent not otherwise indicated, comply with ASTM C754 for metal system supporting gypsum wallboard. 106
A
B
C
0
0000
Ceiling suspension main runners: channels, cold rolled.
112
inches steel
Hanger wire: ASTM A641, soft, Class 1 galvanized, prestretched; sized in accordance with ASTM C754. Hanger anchorage devices: size for 3 x calculated loads, except size direct-pull concrete inserts for 5 x calculated loads. Studs: ASTM C645; 25 gage, 212 inches deep, except as otherwise indicaterl ASTM C645; 25 gage, 3% inches deep. ASTM C645; 20 gage, 6 inches deep. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs, and for vertical abutment or drywall work at other work. Furring members: ASTM C65; 25 gage, hat-shaped Fasteners: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer for the substrate and application indicated. 4. Which item is described as a performance specification?
A. fasteners
C. hanger anchorage devices
B. hanger wire
D. ceiling suspension main runners
5. In specifying asphalt roofing shingles, which of the following types of specifications would you probably not use?
A. descriptive
C. reference standard
B. base bid or equal
D. base bid with alternate approved manufacturers
6. Which of the following are generally true of specifications?
I. Both narrowscope and broadscope sections can be used in the same project manual.
107
A
B
C
(J
0 \J ',J ()
A
B
C
D
0000
II. For the contractor, drawings are more binding than the specifications if there is a conflict. Ill. Specifications show quality; drawings show quantity. IV. Proprietary specifications are the same as prescriptive specifications. V. They should not be open to interpretation if they are the base bid type.
A. I, Ill, IV, and V
C. II, Ill, and IV
B. I, Ill, and V
D. all of the above
7 Where would you find requirements for testing a plumbing system?
A. in a section of Division 1 of the specifications B. in Part 1 of Section 15400, Plumbing C. in Part 2 of Section 15400, Plumbing D. in Part 3 of Section 15400, Plumbing
108
A
B
C
D
0000
. AREA ''A'' PARTIV
THEORYAND PRINCIPLES OF PLANNING
AREA "A"
PART IV
DIRECTION: Read the passages below and answer the questions that follow. Shade the circle (e) of the correct answer to each question.
I. PRE-DESIGN - ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS A. INFLUENCES ON URBAN DEVELOPMENT
With the proliferation of the automobile, cities have expanded i'n a number of typical pattern. Such of tnese patterns affects the planning of the smaller-scale communities and neighbor hoods and ultimately can have an affect on the design of individual building proJects 1. In this pattern a city is formed at the junction of two
A
f~
A
B
1;
roads and laid out in the prevalent pattern Growtt1 simply follows this pattern until some natural features limiting population, or econorTJics stop it This pattern is characteristics of smaller cities. A CROSS LINE PATTERN 8
GRID J->AT TERN
C LINE PATTERN
U ALTERNATE PATTERN
?
rt1is pattern revolves around the urban core and development follows. radiating spokes of main highways or mass transit routes. Higher densrty tends to form around the spokes with lower density development in betwePn WHfF:L PATTERN 8
H p [) j ,., i
~ 'j\ I
Tf- H N
!
110
iHC IJLAR PATl ERN
C
D
0000
3. This pattern has no central focus or apparent overall organization scheme. Development takes place in an amorphous network of highways and natural features. A. AREA PAITERN
C. SPREAD PAITERN
B. COMMON COVERAGE PAITERN
D. FILLED PAITERN
4. With this pattern, there is a central urban core with other major cores surrounding it. The central core is linked to the others with major highways, and often the outer cores are connected with a road system called a beltway. It is then possible to travel from center to center or around the city without having to go through the core. The outer cores often begin as major shopping areas, peripheral business centers, or transportation centers.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
A. ARTERY PATTERN C. SATELLITE PATTERN B. CONNECTION PATTERN
D. CIRCUMFERENTIAL PAITERN
5. The ultimate in urban development is the Here, two or more major urban centers near each other grow together as the space between is developed.
A. PERSEPOLIS
C., METROPOLIS
B. MEGALOPOLIS
D. PHILOPOLIS
6. Although large-scale urban development can affect the way people view the city and how individual parcels of land are developed, it is within the smaller community and neighborhood scale that architects must plan sites and design buildings. One idea that is useful in linking the urban scale with the community scale is the concept of _ _ _ __ A. OREAMABILITY
C. IMAGEABILITY
B. PERMEABILITY
D. LINKABILITY
111
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
lmageability is the quality of a physical enviiOnment that gives it a high probability of evoking a strong image in the mind of a given observer. For example, the hills of Baguio City are part of the image of that city that in the minds of most people who visit it or live there. Five basic elements of the urban image are the following: these are created by components of the city. 7 A is a way of circulation along which people customarily, occasionally, or potentially move. This may be a street, pedestrian walkway, railroad, transit line, or river. Since circulation is such an important part of any physical environment. These are usually at the center of a person's image.
8.
9.
10.
A. ROAD
C. LINE
B. STRAIT
D. PATH
are linear elements other than tre above, that form boundaries between two districts or that break continuity. This mat be a shoreline, a line of b!Jildings against a park, a wall or a similar feature. This may either be solid or penetrable. A. EDGES
B. FENCES
B. RIMS
C. WALLS
are two-dimensional area that people are having some common. Identifying character and that they can enter. This can be perceived from the inside if you are in it or can be identified as an element of the city if you are outside.
A. BARANGAYS
C. PARKS
B. DIVISIONS
D. DISTRICTS
are strategic centers of interest that people can enter. They may be the intersection of paths;J>Iaces where modes of transportation change, plazas, public squares, or centers of districts. A. CLUSTERS
C. NODES
B. CAMPS
D. CENTROIDS
112
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
11.
are similar to nodes in that they are point references, but people cannot enter them they are viewed from the exterior. A tower, monument, building, or natural feature can be this.
A. SPECIAL STRUCTURES
C. BENCHMARK
B. LANDMARK
D. FOCAL POINT
A B C D
0000
Many of the large-scale elements of imageability are intervene with the smaller community neighborhood. However, there are additional patterns of development that are intimately related to an individual site. 12. One of this approaches is the , which is an outgrowth of the new town concP.pt. Here, the attempt was made to plan a large piece of land that limited the intension of the automobile. It is surrounded ,by a continuous street, and vehicular access was provided with cui-de-sacs. A. SUPER BLOCKS
A
8
C
D
0000
C. MASS DEVELOPMENT
B. SUPER HIGHWAYS D. CORNER AREAS 13. Another variation and extension of the Mone's concept is the concept. With this approach, each large parcel of land can have a mix of uses: residential, commercial, recreational and open spaces designed with variable lot sizes and densities. Industrial developments can also be planned in this variation. A. CONCEPTUALIZED C. PLANNED UNIT DEVELOPMENT (PUD) B. ADVANCED DESIGN
D. DREAM LAND
The physical environment affects human behavior. This is true at any scale, from the plan of a city to the arrangement of furniture in a room. The following principles are:
113
A
B
C
D
0000
14.
. This refers to the number of people per unit of area. For example, a city might be referred to as having a group of 500 people per hectare. This refers only to a ratio, not the total number of people or how they are distributed. The 5,000 people could be evenly distributed over the hectare or they could all be housed in a few high:rise buildings in one part of the land parcel. A. CAPACITY
C. MASSING
B. VOLUME
D. DENSITY
15. Interaction is social contact. In addition to interaction, people also need a place they can call their own, whether it is their house, a seat at a conference table, or one end of a park bench. This is the concept of
A. TERRITORIALITY
C. STAKING
B. OWNERSHIP
D. TITLING
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
Personal, when someone places family pictures, plants, individual coffee mugs. Permanent living environment, such as a house, or apartment, boundaries are provided by walls, fences, property lines. Group if a street, a row of trees, or a change in level 16. Closely related to the concept above is the concept of that surrounds each individual. There are four basic distances that can be used to study human behavior and serve as a guide for designing environments the intimate distance, physical contact from 0.15 to 0.45 m., a crowded bus, personal distance from 0.45 m. to 0.75 m. The social distance, fro;n 1.20m. to 3.60 m. for strangers, business, and the public distance from 3.60 m. upwards. A. SHARED SPACES
C. OPEN SPACES
B. PERSONAL SPACES
D. GENERAL SPACES
114
A
B
C
D
0000
8.1. COMMUNITY INFLUENCES ON DESIGN 1. Nearly all land development is dependent on or affected by some surrounding base of population within a geographical, region. The term used to describe this is the area. For excmple, the developer of a grocery store bases the decision to build on the number of people within a certain distance from the proposed store location. The population within this area is the primary market for the services of the store. (A mall, a school etc.) Other factors are the income brackets, ages, men and women ratios, etc. A. COMMON AREAS
C. PUBLIC AREAS
B. CATCHMENTS AREAS
D. DISTRIBUTION AREAS
2. AccessibiliW to of all types is crittcal to the selection and development of a building site. This is true at all scales, from accessibility by major freeways to the individual road system and pedestrian paths around a small site.
A. MOBILIZATION
C. TRANSPORTATION
B. TRAVELING
D. EGRESS
3. Any development project is an intimate part of the area ill! which it is located. Architects must be sensitive to the existing fabric of a that may influence how a project is designed as well as the impact the project may have all the surroundings. This is defined as a relatively small area in which a number of people live who share similar needs and desires in housing, social activities and other aspects of day-to-day living.
A. NEIGHBORHOOD
C. COMMUNE
B. BARANGAY \
D. ORGANIZATION
115
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
4.
include such places as schools, shops, fire stations, churches, post offices, and recreational centers. Their availability, locatior and relative importance in a neighborhood can affect how a site is developed.
A. GOVERNMENT BUILDINGS
C. GENERAL USE
B. OPEN FOR PUBLIC
D. PUBLIC FACILITIES
A B C D
0000
For example, if a church is the center of social activity in a neighborhood, the designer should maintain easy access to it, surrounding development should be sUbordinate or compatible with it, and the designer should I give consideration to maintaining views or enhancing its prominence in the corr.munity.
8.2. LAND ANALYSIS 5. A study of a site's is an important land conditions affect how development can take place, what modifications need to be made, and what costs might be involved. This map describes the surface features of land commonly used in land, planning and architectural site development this map shows the slope and contour of the land as well as other natural and man-made features. Included in this survey are data such as property boundaries, existing buildings, utility poles, roads and other man-made features, trees and natural features like rock outcropping and heavy vegetation. A. ENVIRONMENT
C. TOPOGRAPHY
B. CONTOUR
D. SLOPES
6. The on a map are a graphic way to show the elevations of the land in a plan view and are used to make a slope analysis to determine the suitability of the land for various uses. Each line represents a continuous line of equal elevation above some reference benchmark. The interval is the vertical distance between adjacent lines.
A. CONTOUR LINES
C. FORMATION LINES
B. CONTROL LINES
D. CONNECTING LINES 116
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
7. The slope of the land at a certain point is represented in percent. Each percent being (1'-0") 0.30 M. of vertical rise for every 33M. (100 feet) of horizontal distance. The slope is found by using the formula
A
B
C
D
0000
G= ~(10o) G=slope; d =vertical distance between
L two points. Find the slope between points A and B if the horizontal distance between them is 24M. and contour interval is 1.50 M. (A and B is three contours afar). A. 15.20%
C. 14.00%
B. 20.25%
D. 18.75%
8. Every site has that may be either desirable or undesirable. A complete site analysis will include a study of these features significant ·features ~uch as rock outcropping cliffs, caves, and bags should be identified to determine whether they must be avoided or can be used as positive design features in the site design. A. EXISTING
FEATURES B. NATURAL FEATURES
C
D
0000
D. MAN-MADE FEATURES
C. SIPHONAGE
DRAINAGE B. NATURAL FLOW PATH
B
C. GEOLOGICAL FEATURES
9. Every site has some type of pattern that must be taken into account during design. Some minor patterns can be diverted around roads, parking lots and buildings with curbs, culverts and minor changes in the contours of the land. Major path~ such as gullies, dry gulches, or rivers may traverse the site. These will have a significant influence on potential site development since they must be maintained. Buildings need to be built away from them or bridge them so water flow is not restricted and potential damage is avoided. A. NATURAL
A
D. CONDUCTORS
117
A
B
C
0
0000
C. TRANSPORTATION AND UTILITY INFLUENCES Another influence is that of transportation and utilny roads provide a primary means of access to a site. Their availability and capacity may be prime d~term;,,ants in whether and how a parcel of land can be devt:!oped. 1.
2.
3.
4
streets have the lowest cap 1city and provide direct access to building site. Thev may be in the form of a continuous grid of curvilin~ar systems or be cui-de-sacs or loops.
A. LOCAL STREETS
C. INTERIOR STREETS
B. ALLEYS
D. PUBLIC STREEYS
streets connect local streets and arterial streets. They have a higher capacit·, than local streets but are usually not intended for through traffic. Intersections of this kind of street rr.ay be controlled by stop signs, while intersections with arterial streets will be controlled with stop lights.
A. AGGREGATE
C. ORGANIZER
B. TWO-WAY
D. COLLECTOR
streets are intended as major continuous circulation routes that carry large arnounts of traffic on two or three lanes. They usually connect expressways. Parking on the street is typically not allowed and direct access from this kind of street to building sites should be avoided. A. WEB
C. CIRCUMFERENTIAL
B. ARTERIAL
D. BATTERY
are limited access roads designed to move large volumes of traffic between, through and around population centers. Intersections are made by various types of ramp systems, and pedestrian access is not allowed. This category of road have a major influence on the land due to the space they require and their noise and visual impact. A. HIGHWAY
C. EXPRESSWAY
B. M EGASTR EET
D. DIVERSION
118
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
5. The availability and location of lines can influence site design of site analysis should include a determination of the types of public access available, whether bus, subway, rail line, or taxi stop, and the location relative to the site. Building entrances and major site features should be located conveniently to these lines.
6.
A. TRAIN
C. JEEPNEY
B. PUBLIC TRANSIT
D. TAXI
to a site includes provisions tor truck loading, moving vans, and daily delivery services. Ideally, this should be sep
C. SERVICE ACCESS
B. PARKING SPACE
D. PULL OFF-LANE
7. Site analysis must determine the availability, locat1on, and capacity of existing _.·The development potential of a site is dependent on the availability of the necessary water. Sanitary sewers, storm sewers, telephone service, gas service and electric service. If these are to be extended from a considerable distance. The cost of development is added greatly. A. UTILITIES
C. SERVICES
B. FACILITIES
D. COMPANIES
8. Depending on the location of the site, ______ ---~ may include police protection, fire protection, trash removal, and street cleaning. The development site plan must provide access for these services, many of which require large land areas.
A. CITY ADMINISTRATION B. MUNICIPAL AID
C. MUNICIPAL FACILITIES D. MUNICIPAL or CITY SERVICES
119
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
D. CLIMATIC, ECOLOGICAL, LEGAL AND ECONOMIC INFLUENCES 1. This aspect of climatic analysis is called a _ _ _ _ _ . This refers to the overall climate of the region and is reflected in the weather data available from the National Weather Bureau. From this information a region can be classified as cool. temperate, hot-arid or hot-humid. A. MAXIMUM CONDITION
C. WIDE ANGLE CLIMATE
B. WEATHER FORECAST
D. MACROCLIMATE
2. The refers to the site-specific modification of the microclimate by such features as lands lope, trees and other vegetation bodies of water, and bujldings. This aspect of climate analysis of a site can have a significant influence on its development, undesirable climatic effects can be minimized by careful planning and desirable effects can be used to enhance the comfort of thP inhabitants. A. MINICLIMATIC
C. MICROCLIMATIC
B. LOCAL CLIMATE
D. NARROW CLIMATE AREA
3. During site analysis, and microclimate effects must be studied during site analysis. Buildings can then be located to take advantage 01 cool breezes or to avoid cold winds especially in hills. Near large bodies of water, warm air rises over the warmer land during the day and causes a breeze from the water. At night the pattern may be reversed. These patterns can be modified by buildings and trees. A. AIR PATTERNS
C. WEATHER PATTERNS
B. WIND PATTERNS
D. CLOUD PATTERNS
120
A
B
C
D
0000
A
·
A
B
o
C
D
C
D
on
0000
buildings. The effect of a building on blocking sunlight from adjacent buildings should be studied. Similarly, the development should avoid any possible annoying reflection or glare on neighboring buildings.
A. BIOLOGY
C. ECOLOGY
B.
D. GEOGRAPHY
ZOOLOGY
8. The most common form of legal constraint nn land development is . This is originally an attempt to improve the problems of the rapidly expanding cities: crowding, factories being built too close to housing, and tall buildings blocking light and air to control the use and location of buildings or regulating land use into one means of implementing planning policy. Its legal basis is largely founded on the right of the state to protect health, safety and welfare of the public. Included in this legal constraint are uses of land as to residential, commercial or industria~. Other requirements are floor area ratio, set backs, parking spaces.
A. ZONING
C. TITLING
B. PARTITIONING
D. SEPARATING
9. An is the right of one party to use a portion of the land of another party in a particular way. It is a legal instrument and is normally recorded in the city registrar's office. Common types are for utility companies, for access if one parcel of land is not served by a public road and one parcel of land separates it from the street. Another is support of common party walls, joint use such as to share a common driveway, scenic, that protect views and development in scenic areas such as Tagaytay volcano lake, Manila Bay. Also conservation, that limit land use in large areas.
A. EMBANKMENT
C. EASEMENT
B. LEVEE
D. ESTADLISHMENT
122
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
10. A is the legal right of one party or the public to traverse land belonging to another. In its most common form, this refers to the public land used for streets and sidewalks. The boundary of this legal right usually corresponds to the property line of adjacent property owners.
11.
A. RIGHTOF OWNERSHIP
C. RIGHT OF FIRST USAGE
B. RIGHT-OF-WAY
D. PUBLIC RIGHT
to property can contain provisions that limits the use of the property by the buyer. These covenant are legal and enforceable if they are reasonable and in the public interest. Subdivision and condominium owners do this and may include such limitations as setbacks, minimum square meters of houses, the types of materials especially roofing, that can and cannot be used on the exterior, and similar provisions, to maintain a desired uniformity of appearance. (The prospective buyer can decide not to purchase if the covenants are not acceptable.)
A. DEED RESTRICTIONS
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
C. UNLAWFUL CONSTRUCTION
B. TITLE LIMITATIONS D. PROHIBITED ACTS 12. As part of the overall economic analysis of a site for potential development (or adaptive reuse of air existing building). the cost of the property is vital in making a decision concerning site selection. This is called the . These are generally based on location, potential profit-making use, and local market conditions, which includes demand for the land. Location includes such things as a potential surrounding market area, population d.ensity in the region, special features of the site such as being waterfront property, and proximity to transportation and utilities. This means that the property is of "highest and best use to yield the highest return on investment.
A. COSTOF
C. PRICE INCREASE
PROPERTY B. PREVAILING COSTS
D. LAND VALUES
123
A
B
C
D
0000
.,..1·---- 90.0 M - - - - r • j
I :----------_______ - - - - - -
- t - 9.00 M rear setback
1
~
I I
g J._
l - r - 6.00 M side setback
3.00 M.
_]_ L- ~ ~------- -_----_-_-_•~-12.00 A. 2STORIES
C. 4STORIES
B. 3STORIES
D. 5 STORIES
M front setback
3. Which of the following would probably not be considered an element of a city's image? A. AGROUPOF HOUSES
C. A NEIGP.BOR HANGOUT BAR
B. AFREEWAY
D. AN AREA WITH A HIGH CONCENTRATION OF HOSPITALS
4. Social contract and interaction in a picnic pavilion could be promoted most by which of the following design decisions?
c D 0000 A
B
c D 0000 A
B
A. Making the dimensions of the pavilion small enough so the anticipated number of users would cross into each other's "personal distance" B. designing benches-around the support columns so people would have a place to sit and talk. C. organizing the cooking and serving area distinct from the dining area and entrance D. providing an informal variety of spaces of different sizes, locations, and uses.
5. If the contour interval on the map shown is 0.60 m. what is the slope between points A and B?
~~----~_.~~~~----~
126
c D 0000 A
B
I
I
I
0
1.50
3.00
A. 27 PERCENT
C. 67 PERCENT
B. 53 PERCENT
D. NOT ENOUGH INFORMATION IS GIVEN TO ANSWER
6. A speculative office building probably would not be buih if the developer discovered that:
A
B
C
D
0000
A. all of the catchment area was not served by arterial streets.
B. the site consisted of mostly sandy soil with a 1 .80 m top layer of expansive clay C. the vacancy rate of office space in the city was three times the national average D. the neighborhood community objected to the site of parking lots 7. Which of the following cause the most foundation · problems?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. extensive underground rock formations just below the surface
B. a 1.50 m water table
C. expansive clay and organic soil D. all of the above
8. In planning a new building, an architect would have to look at regulations other than the zoning ordinance to find a requirement for the following: I. the width of loading berths II. the required size of utility easements ill. minimum lot size IV. the size of the parking area V. what roof coverings are permissible
A. I and IV
C. II, Ill, and V
B. I, II and IV
D. Ill, IV, and V
127
A
B
C
D
0000
A-A convex slope
C-C uniform slope
B-B valley
D-0 concave slope
COMMON CONTOUR CONDITIONS
129
E-E ridge
~' --,----,~~'l
f-------I
---
-- ?:-!,
--~------
1
----
------
- - - - - - - - - - existing contour _j
1.
rproperty line
-----
- - -
-- - - --- -
-
94
---- _,
------------~~:· -----------
_/=tour
1
9?
I
98
NEW AND EXISTING CONTOUR LINES
-+------fill to avoid the expense and problems with removing or hauling in soil. Generally, it is better to orient the length of a building parallel to the direction of the contours rather than perpendicular to them in order to minimize excavation costs. Both existing contour lines and new contour lines are shown on the same plan: The existing lines are shown dashed and the new ones solid. At the property lines, the contour lines must match up with the existing contours at adjacent properties or retaining walls must be built.
2. CLIMATE
Solar orientation influences three (3) aspects of site planning: • Orientation of the building to control solar heat gain or heat loss • The location of outdoor spaces and activities • The location of building entries Prior to design, the path of the sun should be located so you know its angle at various times of the day during the seasons During the coldest months, the sun rises and sets south of an east-west line through the site, and depending upon the site location, during the summer it rises and sets north of the same line. The ORIENTATION of a building- that is, the direction its length faces has a profound effect on energy gains and losses and 0n the comfort of the users. For example for a 40-degree latitude, a Southern exposure in the
130
cold months receives about three times the solar energy as the east and west sides, while in the summerthe east and west facades of a building receive about twice the energy as the north and south combined. For most northern hemisphere locations, the best orientation for a building is to have its principal facade facing sot:h or slightly east or west of !'outh. An orientation about 25 degrees east cf t.outh is considered ideal to balance the desired heat gains in the cold months and to minimize the excessive heat gains on the east and west facades during the summer .
•
' -
I /
·~-
!ummer sun
/'-', I
SUMMER MONTHS
=:t:," ' " '" ' '
wtnter sun
,
/Ydf/2Wd1:80~%',/,.0;::}/?7ffM//?/.-!/:W&#/i'Wff,.0Z)!;/.. ;w»;
COLD MONTHS
SOUTH WALL SUN CONTORL
Overhangs can be used to control the sun in the summer but let it strike the building and glass areas in the cold months for passive solar heating. Deciduous trees can also be used to shield low buildings from the sun in the summer while allowing sunlight through in the cold months. On east and west facades, however, vertical sun baffles are more effective than overhangs because the sun is at a lower angle during the morning and afternoon hours in the summer. Louvers can also be used to shield a builai'ng and its interior from the sun. Either exterior or interior louvers and shades are effective, but exterior louvers are more efficient since they block the sunlight before it enters the space. In addition to building position, solar orientation can also influence outdoor activities. In hot humid climates, it is better to locate such activities as patios outdoor restaurants, and the like where they receive shade from the bltilding or trees. In cold climates building entries are best placed on the south where direct sun hit the pathway. (in winter, to melt ice and snow). The orientation of a building, and locations of windows, plazas and other elements can either take advantage of cooling breezes in hot, hu;nid climates during summer or shield the building and occupants fr')m cold winds in the cold months. Shielding a building as much as possible from cold month's winds can reduce the heat loss through the walls, while providing for natural ventilation can help cool the building during the summer. Wind breaks can be formed with vegetation, buildings, or other man-made site elements suc.h as screens and fences. 131
3. DRAINAGE Any development of site interrupts the existing drainage pattern and creates additional water flow by replacing naturally porous ground with root area and paving. The architect must provide for any existing drainage pattern through the site and account tor additional storm water that does not seep into the ground, which is called "RUNOFF". The site design must also create positive drainage away from the building, parking areas, and walks to avoid flooding, erosion, and standing water. The two (2) basic types of drainage are "ABOVEGROUND" and "UNDERGROUND". ABOVEGROUND drainage involves sheet flow gutters built into roadways and parking areas, ground swales as part of the landscaping, and channels. UNDERGROUND drainage utilizes perforated drains and enclosed storm -'sewers that carry the runoff from the site to a municipal storm sewer system or to a natural drainage outlet, such as a river. "SHEET FLOW" is simply the drainage of water across a sloping surface, whether it is paved, grass, or landscaped. In most case, sheet flow is directed to gutters or channels, which are them emptied into a natural water course or storm sewer. Gutters are often. used because they can be built along ~tith the roadway or parking area and naturally follow the same slope as the paved surface. They can easily be drained into sewers which also typically follow the path of roads. Areas for surface drainage require minimum slopes to provide for positive drainage. Recommended Grade Slopes for Various Uses Stoges in Percent min. ground areas for drainage grass areas for recreation paved parking areas roads sanitary sewers (depends on size) approach walks to buildings Landscaped slopes
2.0 2.0 1.5 0.5 0.5-1.5 1.0 2.0
preferred
max.
4.0 2.5
3.0 5.0 8.0 4.0 50.0
Underground systems use piping with a minimum slope of 0.3 percent. The storm drains collect water from roof downspouts, drains inlets, catch basins, and drain tiles surrounding the building foundation. A drain inlet simply allows storm water to run directly into the storm sewer.
132
A catch basin has a sump built into it so that debris will settle instead of flowing down the sewer. Periodically, the sump must be cleaned out. Large storm sewer systems require manholes for service access and are located wherever the sewer changes direction, or a maximum of 166 meters apart. Storm sewers are comp•etely separate from sanitary sewers. The capacity of a drainage system is based on the size of the area to be drained, the runoff coefficient (that fraction of water not absorbed), and the amount of water to be drained during the most severe storm being used in the design. Frequently, the system is planned for 25-yeci.r storms; other times a 10-year storm is used. These periods are simply the average frequency at which storms of a particular magnitude are likely to occur. If the site development creates a runoff in excess of the capacity of the existing municipal storm sewer or natural drainage course. a holding pond may be needed on the site. This collects the site runoff and releases it into the sewer system at a controlled rate without letting the excess water flood other areas.
4. UTILITIES Determine the location of existing utilities prior to beginning design. These may include, but are not limited to, sanitary sewer lines, storm sewers, water lines, gas, electricity, steam, telephone, and cable television. It possible, the building should be located to minimize the length of utility lines between the structure and the main line. Sanitary sewers and storm sewers usually take precedence in planning because they depend on gravity flow. The "INVERT" or lowest, elevations of the existing public sewer line should be established, since the effluent must flow from the lowest point where the sewer line leaves the building to the main sewer. This portion of the horizontal piping of the sanitary sewer system outside the building is known as the "BUILDING SEWER". The actual connection of the building sewer to the main line must occur above the
invert of the main line at any given point in order not to interfere with the free flow. The minimum slope of the building sewer is 0.5 to 2.0 percent depending on the size of the pipe; a greater slope is required for smaller pipes. In some cases, the run of the building sewer will have to be longer than the shortest distance between the building and the main line simply to intercept the main line at a point low enough to allow for proper slope.
133
-:-----
~ "'
~
#'~
/
j
PJ<:f'"/;/
~-- -~ ~-----
G. //
__
'-
I
:
t
"""--
I
nouse sewer invert 92.0'
;.0099per~:~~_j
~~
,///
/__ -- -30.00M
main line slope lY.!%
-- --- -o
'\ Invert
Actual rpquired house sewer;needs to intercept main sewer down line where it has dropped sufficiently to allow house sewer to drain into it.
I
27.45 M
theoretical shortest distance from building to sewer I i ne
Shortest line dropping at
..! 8 "/ It . for 80' length ( 10") At ..! "/ ft. for 8
approximately 130 feet, (.0099/m). the house sewer invert where it intersects the main line is about 27.20 m (90.7 ft.)
.0099/m for 24.04 length (0.24 m) would intercept main line at 27.40 m too low to drain into line.
Sewer Layout Based On Slope Required
5. CIRCULATION There are three major types of "SITE CIRCULATION"· a. AUTOMOBILE b. PEDESTRIAN c. SERVICE
A. Automobile Circulation Planning for automobile circulation includes locating the entry drives to the site and providing on-site roads to reach the parking areas and the building drop-off point. The entire automobile circulation system should provide direct, easy access to the parking areas and building without excessive drives, turnarounds, dead ends, or con11icts with service areas and pedestrian circulation. The size of the site, its relationship to existing public roads, and the expected traffic will help determine whether vou should use a one-way loop system with two entry drives or a two-way system with one entry
134
drive. In either case, you should lay out the roads so a driver can go directly to the parking area, drop-off point, or loading area. Forcing traffic through the parking area to get to the loading or the drop-off area should be avoided. Entry drives to the site should be as far away as possible.trom street intersections and other intersecting roads. This is to avoid conflicts with vehicles waiting to turn and to avoid confusion about where to turn. Roads should be of sufficient width to make driving easy and to allow two vehicles to pass. Curves should be gradual, following the natural topography and there shou!d be no blind curves.
'
I
II
~
t
l n I '
'
oneway
I
rwo-way
12'
3.60-4.00
7 20-8.00
Dnveway entries
min. SO M from public •ntersectJon
cul-de-sac :urnarcunc
Unless the slope is very gentle, roads shouid not ce laid out perpendicularto ~he slope but across it slightly to minimize the grade. Limit roads to a maximum slope of 15 percent for short distances, although 10 percent or less is preferable. If a road does slope more than 10 percent there should be transition slopes of one-half of the maximum slope between the road and level areas. Ramps crossing sidewalks must have a level area between the ramp and the sidewalk. Roads should have a gradual slope, a minimum of
f ~nch per foot (.0198
per meter), for drainage from the center of 'he roadway. called the "CROWN" to the sides. If the road has a gutter. it should be 15 em. high. level area before cross•ng Sidewalk
) \\
)
\
-::-+-- j_ t--'""" ~ \/~
< 10% preferred 15% max.
~
L,\
down
\
I
\
96 (a) automobile ramps
crown
\
94
92
, 90
88
(bl representation of road wit~ gutters on contour map
Design Guidelines for Road Grades 135
B. Pedestrian Circulation Like roadways, pedestrian circulation should provide convenient, direct access from the various points on the site to the building entrances. If connections with adjacent buildings, public sidewalks, public transportations, stops, and other off-site points are required, the circulation system must take these into account as well. SIDEWALKS should provide for the most direct paths from one point to another since people will generally take the shortest route possible. Pedestrian circulation paths should not cross roads, parking lots, or other areas of potential conflict. There should be collector walks next to parking areas so people can travel from their cars directly to a separate walk. When these walks are next to parking where cars can overhang the walk, it should be a minimum of 6 feet (1.80 M) wide. Required amenities such as seating, trash containers, and lighting should be provided. Walks should slope a minimum of ~ inch (.00635m or 6.352 mm) perpendicular to the direction of the paving for drainage.
/
slope 6.352 mm per 0.31 M 19.056 mm tor rainage across walk
< >--.
~40M main walk
minimum slopes· 4% ( ..1" per foot)(38.11 mm perm) 4
6% preferred elsewhere 8% absolute maximum (1 :12) Design Guidelines for Exterior Walks 136
Changes in elevation are accomplished with ramps and stairs. There must be provisions for making the site accessible to the physically disabled. When a ramp and adjacent stairway serve the same areas, the bottom and top of the ramp and stairway should be adjacent to each other if possible. As with walks, stairways and ramps should be illuminated.
C. Service Circulation Service and automobile circulation should be kept separate. Service access is typically related to some space in the building program. Service trucks may use the same entry and drives as automobiles (unless specifically stated), but the loading area should be separate.
/handrail required both sides
/_ ' "re ''~'~ '":;.~to
minimum width of ramp: 36" 1
c:
12
36"
max. slope
5'
between landmgs
-----~----~~------~---(a) ramps
ACCESS REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PHYSICALLY DISABLED
6. PARKING Plan parking so it is efficient, convenient to the building, and separate from pedestrian circulation. The size of the site, topography, location of entry drives to the property, and relationship to the service drive and building drop-off area will determine the location of the parking area. The number of cars to be parked is determined by requirements of the zoning ordinance or by the building program. The basic planning unit for parking is the size of a car. The standard size is 2.70 m wide and 5.70 m long for standard-size cars and 2.25 m wide and 4.50 m long for compact cars. Layouts for two types of parking are shown below. Ninety degree parking is the most efficient in terms of land use, but angled parking is easier to use, forces a one-way circulation pattern, and requires less tot;;;: .vidttl, tor either a single-or-double-loaded layout. Dead-end parking areas require a backup space and are only appropriate for parking a few cars. The most efficient layouts are those that use double-loaded configurations or that utilize a drive as the back-up space.
137
provide handrail over 4 riws
30" to 34"
or where icy conditions exist
for 6" rise
-lg·j-
rise &" ma>c., 4" min. minimum 3 risers meximum 10 risers between landings
~J
4~·' . ' I i 1
DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR EXTERIOR STAIRS
1111111
•
-
24 '
-:
1-10' tO 12' 1 loading doc
-:---n I
I
35'
tO
'
-
~
[TI
62'
two-way
i'.douole minimu., loaded
IIIIQ
SO'! I
I
lal
' 45' radius for straight bodY :ruck
go•
parking
I
35' to 50'
I
·I
19.81 32.8'
13'
._.. one-y
toedllf.
I I
-'- ---~
-,-
:o 14' one-.Ney
12'
(bl 45• parking
DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR SERVICE DRIVES PARKING LAYOUTS
138
52.6' doUble
Unless otherwise required by the program, you must include at least one parking space for the physically disabled. This space should be located close to the building entrance and be identified with the international symbol for accessibility.
__ j _______ 3_________________ _ 36" min. accessible route
curb·
~
tv
ramp
1:12
~
marking (or sign I
a· s· ---'----,--j
PARKING FOR THE PHYSICALLY DISABLED
Establish drainage in parking areas as part of the site design. The minimum slope should be 1X percent with a maximum slope of 5 percent. but for convenience in calculating, use 2 or 3 percent when figuring parking slopes. Water should drain toward the edges of the parking area where it can run off into the landscaping be collected and diverted to storm sewers or other natural water courses. One useful rule of thumb is that the change in elevation from one side of a double-loaded parking area to the other ( 19.00 m) for a minimum 1X percent slope is one foot (0.31). With an absolute maximum of a 5 percent slope, the maximum change in elevation for (19.00m) is about (0.91) or 3 feet. This is a useful way to quickly check you new contour lines when designing a parking area.
139
92---------------------------91
-------------------
:~~~~~~~~}~=~~~-~~~~F break in curb _ / required for drainage (a) drainage perpendicular to length of lot
92
91
90
I
88
89
87
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I I I I I
I
/I I __.I I
----...
I
(T !
crown in center (b) drainage parallel to length
91
92
90
I
I
I
/]
)
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I'
slope
I
I
I
/( )
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
'}
'
I
I
I
I
I
~
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
sa
89
I
I
I
I
I
I
J/ I
(c) drainage across lot
DRAINAGE PATTERNS IN PARKING LOTS
140
7. LANDSCAPING Landscaping is a vital part of site development. In addition to its purely aesthetic qualities, landscaping can improve energy conservation, moderate noise, frame desirable views, block undesirable views, create privacy, fashion outdoor spaces, provide shade, retard erosion. and visually connect a building to its site. It is also required in some communities. Deciduous trees block sunlight in summer while allowing it to enter a building in the cold months, when leaves fall. Trees can also moderate the wind and thereby reduce heat loss from wall surfaces. If trees are employed as a windbreak, evergreens should be used so they are still effective in the cold months. Grass, shrubs and ground cover lower the ALBEDO of the site. Albedo is that portion of the radiant energy that is reflected as it falls on a surface. Combined with the low conductivity of plant materials, a well-landscaped site can reduce the daytime temperature around the building significantly and in some cases raises the night time temperature slightly. Plants are like any other design material in that they have form, size, color. texture, and other qualities that can serve the purposes of the designer and create the k·ind of image desired. Unlike other materials, however, plant grow. The mature size and height of the tree or shrub must be known so adequate spacing between plants and buildings can be provided. Generally, planting strips with trees in parking areas and between other paved areas should be at least 2.10 m wide while landscaping strips for grass or ground covers between paved areas should be at least 1.20 M wide. Because most trees and shrubs take so long to grow, save existing healthy landscaping whenever possible, especially large trees. The contours of the land cannot be changed around existing trees. so careful planning is necessar}-. Trees and other •landscaping also need protection during construction. 8. PROPERTY DESCRIPTIONS A method of describing the boundaries of a site is called the METES and BOUNDS description. The title of the land describes the boundaries and the corresponding length of line, as well as the direction of line bearings referred to by the number of degrees, minutes, and seconds the line is located either east or west of a north-south line. This also gives the area of the lot in square meters. Another system starts with a set of east-west lines called the "PARALLELS" that follow the lines of latitude of the earth and with a set of north-south lines called "MERIDIANS". Example, a parcel of land Lot 18 containing an area of 912.60 sq. meters located in BAGUIO bounded on the NW by Lot 19, on the NE by Lot 25, on the SE by Lot 17 and on the SW by a street beginning at a point 1 . from B.L.
141
w
S-25°, 32' 03"E .1.700 from lrisan Line Quarry; N-65° 08' 42" 35.00 m to pt.21 thence S 54° 35' 04" W 25.80 m tc pt.4; thence S 35°-29' 01"E 27.00 m to pt. 4 thence N 54°-48' 08"E 41.80 m to pt. of beginning 1.
~N
N
w--+---
I
---r-=7 w,] L~17
--+--·-=."
E
s
(a)
N
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
I
r
I I I
I I
e:~.80M
'
' LOT18 912.60 SQ.M.
•EL39.50M.
' ' ' ' '
ELEVATIONS - BM or Bench marks
9. OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS In addition to the factors already discussed, many other design considerations can influence the location and configuration of a building, as well as other features of the site design. One of the most important is the context of the surrounding development. The design of a building should be sensitive to the "SCALE", "MASSING", and "FENESTRATION" patterns or nearby buildings. The design should also consider any fl,mctional adjacency requirements with other structures or outdoor activities. 142
"VIEws· are also an important consideration. Pleasant, desirable views can be used to ·advantage, either as seen from important spaces within the building or from outdoor spaces. Undesirable views can be avoided by planning the building so service spaces or less important spaces face them. Off-site sources of noise can be similarly avoided by minimizing fenestration near the noise source.
Quite frequently, buildings are located in order to fall on an important axis with surrounding structures or to complete the enclosure of a major outdoor space. The site-planning process should not overlook these· kinds of symbolic criteria.
SITE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN QUESTIONS
1. What is especially important in designing roads for drainage?
A. CROWN
C. DRAIN INLETS
B. BASE LINE
D. INVERTS
C. TOWNSHIP
B. PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN
D. METES AND BOUNDS
3. Waste water flows because of differences between what?
B. INVERTS
D. CATCH BASINS
''·'
North
t
10
8 6 4
2
0
2
143
D
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
0000
4. Assuming the building site shown was surrounded on four sides by city streets, which building and road layout would be most appropriate for the site topography?
4
C
0000
A. SHEET FLOW
C. DRAIN OUTLETS
B
0000
A
2. What is a land measure 9 km. on a side known as?
A. BUILDING SEWER
A
A
B
C
D
0000
A.
C.
B.
D.
D 5. Which of the following statements is incorrect?
A
B
C
D
0000 A. A 1.1% slope is suitable for rough paving 2 . B. Landscaped areas near buildings should have at leas;t a 2% slope away from the structure. C. A safe sidewalk would slope 2.1% 2
D. Roads in northern climates can safely have up to a 12% grade 6. Which of the following would result in the best site circulation?
I. planning the service entry drive separate from the automobile entry and drive II. making parking areas oversize to accommodate pedestrian circulation Ill. designing all two-way roads at least 7.20 M wide
144
A
B
C
D
0000
IV. limiting parking area traffic to a single entrance away from pedestrian walks
v.
laying out walks parallel to parking areas
A. I, Ill, and IV
C. II, IV, and V
B. I, Ill, and V
D. I, Ill, IV, and V
A
7. Property can best be described with: A. METES and BOUNDS C. LOCATION WITHIN A SUBDIVISION B. REFERENCE TO A SECTION AND TOWNSHIP
B
C
D
0000
D. ALL OF THE ABOVE
8. Potential overheating of a medical clinic in a temperature climate could be minimized by:
A
B
C
D
0000
A. designing an overhang for the west and east side of the building. B. planning a building shape to minimize the surface area of south-facing walls. C. having a landscape architect specify deciduous trees near the south elevation D. · all of the above North
t
9.
The contour lines in the sketch shown above indicate:
A. a sidewalk sloping down from east to west with a berm on the south side B. a road with drainage in the middle and a sidewalk and berm on the south C. a swale adjacent to a walking path sloping from northeast to southwest D. a curved street sloping up to west to east next to a drainage ditch 145
A
B
C
D
0000
10. If land is limited, which of the following is the best way to plan parking lots?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. two-way circulation with 90-degree parking on both sides of a drive B. 30-degree parking on both sides of a one-way loop system C. combining service circulation with parking at a 45degree angle
D. 90 degree parking on one side of a one-way circulation drive 11. l'his drainage involves sheet flow gutters built into roadways and parking areas, ground SWALES as part of the landscaping and channels
A. DRAIN INLETS
C. ABOVEGROUND
B. UNDERGROUND
D. BUILDING SEWER
12. Sanitary sewers and storm sewers usually take precedence in planning because they depend on gravity flow. The or lowest, elevations of the existing public sewer line should be established, since the effluent must flow from the lowest point where the sewer line leaves the building to the main sewer.
A. SITE CIRCULATION
C. CATCH BASIN
B. INVERT
D. CROWN
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
Ill. PROCESSING AND APPROVAL OF SUBDIVISION PLANS A. DEFINITIONS 1. PO 957 - Presidential Decree No. 957 an act regulating the sale of subdivision lots and condominiums, providing penalties for violating thereof.
2. SUBDIVISION PROJECT - shall mean a tract or a parcel of land registered under Act no. 496 which is partitioned primarily for residential purposes into individual lot with or without improvements thereon, and offered to the public for sale, in cash or in installment terms. It shall include all residential, commercial, industrial and recreational areas, af:i well as open spaces and other community and public areas in the project.
146
3. CONDOMINIUM PROJECT - shall mean the entire parcel of real property divided or to be divided primarily for residential purposes into condominium units, including all structures thereon. 4. DEVELOPER - shall mean the person who develops or improves the subdivision project or condominium project for and in behalf of the owner thereof. 5. DEALER- shall mean any person directly engaged as principal in the business of buying, selling or exchanging real estate whether on a full-time or part-time basis. 6. BROKER - shall mean any person who for commission or other compensation, undertakes to sell or negotiate the sale of a real estate belonging to another. 7. SALESMAN- shall refer to the person regularly employed by a broker to perform, for and in his behalf, any or all the functions of a real estate broker. 8. NATIONAl,. HOUSING AUTHORITY- shall have exclusive jurisdiction to regulate the real estate trade and business 1n accordance with the provisions of this decree. 9. REGISTRATION OF PROJECTS- the registered owner of a parcel of land who wishes to convert the same into a subdivision project shall submit his subdivision plan to the authority which shall act upon and approve the same, upon a finding that the plan complies with the subdivision standards and regulations enforceable at the time the plan is submitted. 9. LICENSE TO SELL- such owner or dealer to whom has been issued a registration certificate shall not, however, be authorized to sell any subdivision lot or condominium unit in the registered project unless he shall have first obtained in license to sell the project within two weeks from the registration of such project. 10. PERFORMANCE BOND - no license to sell subdivision lots or condominium units shall be issued by the authority under Section 5 of this decree unless the owner or dealer shall have filed an adequate performance bond approved by said Authority to guarantee the construction and maintenance of the roads, gutters, drainage, sewerage, water system, lighting systems and full development of the subdivision project or the condominium project and the compliance by the owner and dealer with the applicable laws and rules and negotiations. The performance bond shall be executed in favor of the Republic of the Philippines and shall authorize the authority to use the proceeds thereof for the purposes of its undertaking in case of forfeiture as provided in this decree.
147
11. REGISTRATION - all contracts to sell, deeds of sale and other similar instruments relative to the sale or conveyance of the subdivision lots and condominium units, whether or not the purchase price is paid in full, shall be registered by the seller in the office of the REGISTER OF DEEDS of the province or city where the property is situated. 12. ALTERATION OF PLANS- no owner or developer shall change or alter the roads, open spaces, infrastructures, facilities for public use and/or other form of subdivision development as contained in the approved subdivision plan and/or represented in its advertisements, without the permission of the authority and the written conformity or consent of the duly organized homeowners association; or lot buyers. 13. HLRB (Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board)- has the power to approve subdivision plans. 14. RIGHT OF WAY- the owner or developer of a subdivision without access to any existing public road or street must secure a right of way to a public road or street and such right of way must be developed and maintained according to the requirement of the government authorities concerned. B. PLANNING AND DESIGN STANDARDS FOR A RESIDENTIAL SUBDIVISION PROJECT PARAMETERS 1. PROJECT LOCATION
PD957 OPEN MARKET HOUSING WITHIN SUITABLE SITES FOR HOUSING AND OUTSIDE POTENTIAL HAZARD PRONE AND PROTECTION AREAS
2. LAND ALLOCATION (Percentage of Gross Area, One hectare and Above) a. Saleable area
a. 70% (maximum)
b. Non-saleable area
b. 30% (minimum) Mandatory allocation for parks and play grounds per tabulation below:
b.1 Area allocated for parks and playgrounds (one hectare and above)
Density (No. of Lots/ Dwelling Units per Hectare) 20 & below 21-25 26-35 26-50
148
% of Gross Area Allocated for Parks and Playgrounds 3.5%
4.0% 5.0% 6.0%
7.0 o/o 9.0 %
51-65 Above 65
Note: In no case shall the area be less than 100 sqm. b.2 Area Allocated for Community Facilities b.3 Circulation System
VARIABLE Observe hierarchy of roads
3. MINIMUM AREAS a. Single Detached
100 square meters
b. Duplex/Single Attached/ Semi-Detached
75 sq.m./unit
c. Rowhouse
50 sqm.
4. MINIMUM LOT FRONTAGE a. Single-Detached a.1 corner lot
12m.
a.2 regular lot
10m.
a.3 irregular lot
6m. PD957 OPEN MARKET HOUSING
PARAMETERS b. Duplex/Single Attached/ Semi-Detached
7.5m.
c. Rowhouse
3.5m.
5. LENGTH OF BLOCK
a. maximum length is 400 m. (for subdivision projects with lot component only) b. blocks exceeding 250 m. shall be provided with alley
NOTE: FOR ROWHOUSES, THERE SHALL BE A MAXIMUM OF 20 UNITS BUT IN NO CASE BE MORE THAN 100 METERS IN LENGTH. ROW
CARRIAGEWAY
a. Major
12.0 m.
8.0
b. Minor
10.0m.
6.0m.
c. Motorcourt (Cul-de-sac,
6.0m.
6. ROADS RIGHT-OF-WAY (ROW)*
branch, loop, "Tee") d. Alley
4.0m.
e.
3.0m.
ROW of access to interior lot
149
*Right-<>f-Way (ROW) of major roads shall be increased as project size increases. ROW shall not be lower than ROW of public road. NOTE: 1. INTERIOR SUBDIVISION PROJECT MUST SECURE RIGHT-OFWAY TO THE NEAREST PUBLIC ROAD.
2. SUBDIVISION PROJECTS WITH DIRECT ACCESS TO A MAIN PUBLIC ROAD MUST PROVIDE SUFFICIENT SETBACK TO ACCOMMODATE LOADING AND UNLOADING OF PASSENGERS. 3. SUBDIVISION PROJECT s:;ALL PROVIDE PROVISION FOR FUTURE EXPANSION (SEE TEXT) 7. MAXIMUM SIZES OF PROJECT PER HIERARCHY OF ROADS Project Size Range: 2.5 has. & below Above 2.5 - 5 has. Above 5 - 10 has. Above 15 - 30 has. Above 30 has.
major road, minor road, COURT, alley major road, minor road, COURT, alley major road, minor r::>ad, COURT, alley major road, minor road, COURT, alley major road, minor road, COURT, alley
MOTOR MOTOR MOl OR MOTOR MOTOR
PO 957 OPEN MARKET HOUSING
PARAMETERS 8. ROAD SPECIFICATIONS: a. Planting Strip/Sidewalks
Planting Strip
Sidewalk
a.1 Major Road (each side)
1.0 m.
1.0 m.
a.2 Minor Road (each side)
1.0 m.
1.0 1.1.
NOTE: REFER TO SUPPLEMENTARY RULES AND REGULATIONS TO IMPLEMENT PD 953[HLRBA.O. NO. 02, SERIES OF 1994 (12APRIL)] b. Road Payment b.1 Major
concrete/asphalt
b.2 b.3 b.4 b.5
concrete/asphalt concrete/asphalt concrete/asphalt concrete/asphalt
Minor Motor Court Sidewalks Alley
150
9. WATER SUPPLY
Mandatory connbction to appropriate public water supply system, or community system if available; or Centralized water supply systdm. NOTE: Each subdivision must have.at least one operational deepwell which shall provide sufficient capacity equal to the Maxi-
mum Daily Demand a. Minimum Water Supply Requirement
150 liters per capita per day for household connection
b. Fire Protection Demand
Provision for fire protection shall comply with the requirements of the National Fire Protection Code.
10. Drainage System
underground • The drainage system must conform with the natural drainage pattern of the subdivision site, and shall drain into appropriate water bodies, public drainage system or natural outfalls.
11. Sewage Disposal System a. Septic Tank b. Connection to Community
Sewer System
Individual septic tank conforming to standard design of the Sanitation Code. Whenever applicable, connections shall be
made to an approved public or community sewer system subject to the requirements and provisions of the Sanitation Code and other applicable rules and regulations with regards to materials and installation practices. PD 957 OPEN MARKET HOUSING
PARAMETERS 12. POWER SUPPLY
Mandatory individual household connection to primary and alternate sources of power if service is available in the locality. Installation practices, materials and fixtures used shall be in accordance with the provision of the electrical code and the local utility company.
13. GARBAGE DISPOSAL SYSTEM
Provide sanitary and efficient refuse collection and disposal system whether independently or in conjunction with the local government garbage collection and disposal services.
151
14. SHELTER COMPONENT a. Minimum Floor Area a.1 Single/Detached
Shall conform with the National Building Code a'ld Local Zoning Ordinance
a.2 Duplex!. Semi-Detached/ Single Attached a.3 Rowhouse b. Minimum Level of Completion b.1 Single Detached
Complete house
t).2 Duplex/ Semi-Detached/ Single Attached
Complete house
b.3 Rowhouse
Complete house
15. SETBACKS/EASEMENTS a. Front
3m.
b. Side
2m.
c. Rear
2m.
d. Abutments
May be allowed per requirements of National Building Code
152
AREA ''B'' PART I STRUCTURAL DESIGN
~~~-------
PART I
AREA "B"
DIRECTION: Read the items below and place the letter of the correct matched letter in the parenthesis indicated herein.
I. STANDARD STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS MATCHING TYPE
A. WOOD, STEEL, CONCRETE 1 . WOOD JOIST SYSTEM ........................... (
A. Another manufactured product
is a wood member manufactured with individual layers of thin veneer glued together. It is used primarily for headers over large opening, and singly or built-up for beams. 2. PLANK AND BEAM SYSTEM ........................... (
B. This is generally limited to bearing walls, it has a high compressive strength, but in unitized nature makes it inherently weak in tension and bending .. Three types of this system is the single way, the double way and the cavity construction.
3. MANUFACTURED JOISTS ............................. (
154
C. When the span of the flat slab is large, or the live loads are heavier, flat plates require drop panels (increased slab thickness around the columns) to ~rovide Qreater resistance against punching shear failures. Column capitals (truncated pyramids or cones) are sometimes also used to handle punching shear as well as large bending moments in
the slab in the vicinity of the columns_ 4. MANUFACTURED FRAMING MEMBER ······-· (
5. TRUSSED. WOOD JOISTS ................ (
6. PLYWOOD BOXED BEAM .................. (
7. STRESSED SKIN PANEL. .................... (
155
D. This is the most common use of solid wood beams, in which members of 100 mm. (4") or 150 mm (6") nominal width span between girders or bearing walls at s·pacings of 1.20, 1.80 and 2.40 M. wood decking, either solid or laminated is used to span between the beams with the underside of the decking being the finished ceiling_ The normal maximum span for the beams is 3.00 to 6.00 M
E. The space between joists is usually spanned with plywood subflooring on which underlayment is placed in preparation for finish flooring because joists are slender, they must be laterally supported to avoid twisting. Maximum intervals of no more than 2.4 meters are recommended.
F. This functions in a manner similar to a steel system in which the slab is supported by intermediate beams which are carried by large girders. Typical spans are in the range of 4.5 M. to 9 M. This allows penetrations and openings to be made in the slab.
G. Here, the slab is designed and reinforced to span in both directions directly into the columns. Because loaJs increase near the columns and there is no provision to· increase the thickness of the concrete or
the reinforcing at the columns, this system is limited to light loads and short spans up to 7.5 M with slabs ranging from 150 to 300 mm. 8. STEEL BEAM AND GIRDER SYSTEM ........................... (
9. OPEN-WEB STEEL JOIST SYSTEM ............... (
10. CONCRETE BEAM AND GIRDER ................... (
H. Any structural system consisting of two or more materials designed to act together to resist loads. This system of construction is employed to utilize the best characteristics of the individual materials. Reinforced concrete construction is the most typical of this system of construction, but others include steel deck and concrete, concrete slab and steel beam systems, and open-web steel joists with wood chord.
I. This system is composed or formed of pre-fabricated, reusable metal or fiberglass forms which allow construction to proceed faster than with custom wood forms. This pre-fab slabs are often left unexposed with lighting integrated into the cotters. This system can provide support for heavier loads at slightly longer spans up to 12M.
J. This is fabricated with plywood panels glued and nailed to solid wood members usually 50x100 framing.
11. CONCRETE ONE-WAY SPAN JOIST ..................... (
156
K. Another manufactured product is a truss made up of standard size wood members connected with metal plates. Typical spans range from about 7.2 M. to 12M. and typical depths
are from 0.3 M. to 0.90 M. a common spacing is 0.60 M. 12. CONCRETE FLAT PLATE ..................... (
13. CONCRETE FLAT SLAB ....................... (
14. CONCRETE WAFFLE SLAB ................. (
157
L. This k1nd of steel joist span between beams or bearing wall. Standard joists can span up to 18 M. with long span joists spanning up to 28 M., and deep long span joists capable of spanning up to 43 M. Depths range from 200 mm. to 750 mm. in 50 mm. increments. Mechanical and electrical service pipes and ducts can easily be run between the members.
M. In this system, large members span between vertical supports and smaller beams are framed into them. The girders span the shorter distance while the beams span the longer distances. Typical spans for this system are from 7.5 M. to 12M. with the beams being spaced about 2.4 M. to 3.0 M. on center. The steel framing is usually covered with steel decking and concrete is poured.
N. Sometimes this is called gluelaminated construction. These structural members are made up of individual pieces of lumber 18 mm. or 38 mm. thick glued together in the factory. It can be manufactured in tapered beams, curved beams and other styles wood joists can be manufactured like a steel wide flange by gluing a top and bottom chord separated by a plywood web.
15. MASONRY ....................... (
0. This is composed of concrete members usually spaced 650 mm. or900 mm. apart running in one direction, which frame into larger bearns. Most spans range from 6 to 9 M. with joist depths ranging from 300 to 600 mm.
16.
COMPOS~TE
CONSTRUCTION ............ (
P. Another type of built-up wood product but they are constructed of plywood glued and nailed to solid 50 mm. nominal thickness lumber and are used for floor or roof structure.
DIRECTION: Read the passages and answer the questions that follow. Shade the circle of the correct answer to each question.
ce)
II. COMPLEX STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS 1. These are structures comprising of straight members forming a number of triangles with the connections arranged so that the stresses in the members are either in tension or compression. These can be used horizontally, vertically, or diagonally to support various types of toads when it would be impossible to fabricate a single structural member to span a large distance.
A THIN SHELL
C. TRUSSES STRUCTURES
B. ARCHES
D. STRESSED SKIN STRUCTURES
2. This is a structural shape. found by suspending the anticipated loads from a flexible cable and then turning the shape upside down, loads in this shape of structure is subjected to a combination of compression and some bending stresses. This system maybe hinged or fix supports. C. FOLDED PLATES A. SPACE FRAMES B. HALF-ROUND ARCH, D. RIGID FRAMES POINTED ARCH OR PARABOLIC-SHAPED ARCHES
158
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
3. This system is constructed so that the vertical and horizontal members work as a single structural unit, in contrast to a simple post-and-beam system. This makes for a more efficient structure because aH three members resist vertical and lateral loads together rather than singly. The beam portion is partially restrained by the columns and becomes more rigid to vertical bending forces, and both the columns can resist lateral forces because they are tied together by the beam. A. RIGID FRAMES
C. INFLATABLE STRUCTURE
B. SUSPENSION
D. ARCHES STRUCTURES
4. A structural system consisting of trusses in two directions rigidly connected at their intersection. It is possible to have a rectangular system where the top and bottom chords of the trusses are directly above and below one another. Triangular shapes are popular. A stiff structure may span up to 105 meters.
A.
TRUSSES
B. FOLDED PLATES
STRUCTURE B. FOLDED PLATES
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
C. STRESSED SKIN D. SPACE FRAMES
5. A structure in which the loads are carried in two directions, first in the transverse direction through each plate supported by adjacent plates and secondly in the longitudinal direction with each plate acting as a girder spanning between v-ertical supports, since the plates act as beams between supports. there are compressive stresses above the neutral axis and tensile stresses below. These are usually constructed of reinforced concrete from 75 mm. to 150 mm. thick.
A. SUSPENSION
A
A
B
C
D
0000
C. INFLATABLE STRUCTURE D. RIGID FRAMES
6. A structure which has a curved surface that resists loads through tension compression, and shear in the plane of the structure only. Theoretically, there are no bending or moment stresses in this structure. The material is practically always reinforced concrete from about 75 mm. to 150 rrim. The forms can be domes, parabolas, barrel vaults that span from 12 M. to over 60 meters and the
159
A
B
C
D
0000
cornplexed shape of the saddle-shaped hyperbolic paiaboloid that spans from 9 M. to 48 meters. A. STRESSED SKIN
C. THIN SHELL STRUCTURES
B. SPACE FRAMES
D. TRUSSE~
7. These structures comprise panels up of a sheathing material attached on one or both sides of immediate web members in such a way that the panel acts as series of 1-beams with the sheathing being the flange and the intermediate members being the webs, since the panel is constructed of two or more pieces, the connectiOn between the outer and interior web members must t.ransfer all the horizontal stress developed. The structures are typically made of wood. A. SPACE FRAMES
C. SUSPENSION STRUCTURES
B. THIN SHELL STRUCTURES
D. STRESSED SKIN STRUCTURES
8. These are structures most commonly seen in suspensiOn bridges but their use is increasing in buildings, most notably in large stadiums with suspended roofs. These structures are similar to arches in that the loads they support must be resisted by both vertical reactions and horizontal thrust reactions. The difference is that the vertical reaction is outward since the sag tends to pull the ends together. It can only resist loads with tension. A. SUSPENSION
C. RIGID FRAMES STRUCTURES
B. INFLATABLE
D. SPACE FRAMES STRUCTURES
9. These are structures that can only resist loads in tension. They are held in place with constant air pressure. Which is greater than the outside air pressure. The simplest structure is the single membrane anchored continuously at ground level and filled with air. These structures are inherently unstable in the wind and cannot support concentrated loads. They are often stabilized with a network of cables over the top of the membrane These structures are used for temporary enclosures and for large single space buildings such as Sports Arenas.
160
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A. FOLDED PLATES
C. ARCHES
B. INFLATABLE
D. TRUSSES STRUCTURES
Ill. STRUCTURAL SYSTEM SELECTION CRITERIA 1. When analyzing possible system to use, the primary consideration is the ability of the structural system to resist the anticipated and unanticipated loads that will be placed on it. Anticipated loads can be calculated directly from known weights of materials and equipment and from requirements of buildings codes such as people (occupancy loads). Unanticipated load include such things as changes in the use of the building, overloading caused by extra people or equipment, ponding of water on a roof. A. RESISTANCE TO LOADS
C. RESISTANCE TO BOND
B. RESISTANCE TO STRESS
D. RESISTANCE TO BEND
2. This criteria is one of the primary determinants of a structural system. A parking garage need spans long enough to allow the easy movement and storage of automobiles. An office building works well with spans in the 9 M. to 12 M. foot range. Sport Arenas need quite large open areas. Some buildings have a fixed use over their life spans and may work with fixed bearing walls while others must remain flexible and require small columns widely spaced. A. BUILDING
C .. BUILDING CODE SPECIFICATIONS
B. BUILDING AND FUNCTIONS
D. BUILDING USER MATERIALS
3. Although a building's structure is an important element, it does not exist alone, Exterior Cladding must be attached to it, ductwork and pipes run around and through it, Electrical wires among it, and interior finishes must cover it. Some materials and strl -;tural systems make it easy for other c~rvices to bP. c~,.,bi .... P.d into one unit. For instance a steel column-and-beam :.'ystem with openweb steel joists and concrete floors over metal decking yields a fairly penetrable structure for pipes, ducts, and 161
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
working while still allowing solid attachment of ceilings, walls, and exterior cladding. A. COMBINATION SYSTEMS
C. MODULAR SYSTEMS
B. INTEGRATION WITH OTHER
D. INTEGRAL ·sYSTEMS BUILDING SYSTEMS
4. There are two primary elements of selecting a structural system based on the criteria. The first is selecting materials and,systems that are most appropiiate for the anticipated loads, spans required, style desired, integration needed, fire resistance called for. This generally leads to major decisions such as using a concrete flat slab construction instead of steel, or using a steel arch system instead of glue-laminated beams. The second part is refining the selected system so that the most economical arrangement and use of materials is selected regardless of the system used (altering the spacing of beams, changing the direction of beams may result in savings in the weight of steel).
A. MATERIALS AND
C. COST INFLUENCES LABOR
B. MARKET VALUE
D. INFLATION
5. This criteria is-dictated by the building code. Structural members require this criteria and is generally greater than other components in the same occupancy type and building type. Two considerations are noted. One is tHe combustibility of the framing itself and other is the loss of strength a member may experien.;e when subjected to intense heat. (Steel bends and collapse while wood may slightly burn but will maintain its strength.
A. FIRE RESISTANCE
C. MATERIAL WEIGHT
B. BURNING TIME
D. RESILIENCY
6. The realities of construction often are a decisive factor in choosing a structural system. Some of these include schedules, due to material costs, financing, climate and weather. Related to the cost of labor are the skills of the work force which may require technically skilled work force. Finally equipment needed to assemble a structural system maybe unavailable or prohibitively expensive.
162
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. CONSTRUCTION PROHIBITION
C. CONSTRUCTION LIMITATIONS
B. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
0. CONSTRUCTION CODE
7. Some stl\lctural systems are more appropriate as an · expression of a particular character than others. The. "International Trend" which can only be achieved with a steel post-and-beam· system. The Architect and client determine what character the building will be and then require the structural solution adapt to the need. A. FAD
C. FORM
B. CHARACTER
D. STYLE
8. Related to the style of a building are those on the architecture of a geographical location and particular time period. The architect must be sensitive to these influences. For example, in a historic area like lntramuros, where most buildings are constructed of Adobe Stones and bricks, a masonry bearing wall structural system certainly should be considered. In a newly developing industrial park, more contemporary and daring structural systems might be appropriate. A. GEOLOGICAL
C. HISTORICAL
B. SOCIAL AND
D. CLIMATE CULTURAL
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
DIRECTION: Choose what form of loads is referred to by the statements below and shade the circle (e) of the correct answer to each question.
IV. LOADS ON BUILDINGS
The succeeding numbers refer to : A. GRAVITY LOADS
C. MISCELLANEOUS LOADS
B. LATERAL LOADS
D. NONEOFTHEABOVE
1. When a load is applied suddenly or changes rapidly, It is called a DYNAMIC I,.OAD. When a force is only applied suddenly, it is often called an IMPACT LOAD examples of dynamic loads are automobiles moving in a parking garage, elevators traveling in a shaft, or a helicopter
163
A
B
C
D
0000
landing on the roof a building. A unique type of dynamic load is a resonant load. This is a rhythmic application of a force to a structure with the same fundamental period as the structure itseH. The fundamental period is the time it takes the structure to complete one full oscillation, such as a complete swing from side to side in a tall bu1lding in the wind or one up-and-down bounce of a floor.
2. Loads from WATER can occur in many situations. In water tanks, swimming pools and against retaining walls holding back groundwater. The load developed from water and other fluids is equal to the unit weight of the fluid in kilonewton per cubic meter multiplied by its depth. ~or water, the weight is about 9.8 kilonewton per cubic meter and the water force exerted on structures is called HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE.
3. DEAD LOADS are the vertical loads due to the weight of the building and any permanent structural and nonstructural components of a building. These include such things as beams, exterior and interior walls, floors and fixed service. equipment. Most dead loads are easily calculated from published lists of weights of building materials found in brochures.
c D 0000 A
8
c D 0000 A
8
4. SOIL LOADS. Retaining walls are required to resist the lateral pressure of the retained material in accordance with accepted engineering practice. Building Codes allows retaining drained earth to be designed for pressure equal to that exerted by a fluid weighing 4. 7 krn/cm. meter and having a depth equal to that of the retained earth.
c D 0000
5. WIND LOADING on buildings is a dynamic process. That
c D 0000
is, the pressures, directions and timing are constantly changing. For purposes of calculation, however, wind is considered a static force. There are several variables, that affect wind loading. The first is the wind velocity itself. The second variable is the height of the wind above the ground which is usually 10 meters. 6. LIVE LOADS are those on the building by its particular use and occupancy, and are generally considered movable or temporary such as people, furniture, movable equipment and snow. It does not include wind loading or earthquake loading.
164
A
A
B
8
c D 0000 A
8
7. "fEMPERATURE-INDUCED LOADS. All materials expand when they are heated and contract when they are cooled. The amount of the· change is dependent on the material and is expressed as the coefficient of expansion measured in mm per degree centigrade. Some materials, like wood, have a low coefficient of expansion while others, like plastic have a high value. If a material is restrained so it cannot move and then subjected to a temperature change, a load is introduced on the material in addition to any other applied loads. 8. LIKE WIND, an EARTHQUAKE produces dynamic loads on a building. During an earthquake, the ground moves both vertically and laterally, but the lateral movement is usually most significant and the vertical movements is ignored. For some tall buildings or structures with complex shapes or unusual conditions, a dynamic structural analysis is required.
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
DIRECTION: Read the definitions below and answer the questions that follow. Shade the circle (e) of the correct answer to each question.
~
STRUCTURALFUNDAMENTALS 1. In all solid bodies, There is a point at which the mass of the body can be considered concentrated. This is the center of gravity. The point on a plane surface that corresponds to the center of gravity is called--~A. CENTER POINT
C. CENTRAL AXIS
B. CENTROID
D. CENTERING
2. There are times when it is desirable to combine two or more concurrent forces into one forces such that the one force produces the same effect on a body as the concurrent forces. This single force is called the ---~· If the forces are colinear, the resultant is sii'Jl)ly the sum of the forces, with forces acting upward or to the right considered positive and forces acting downward or to the left considered negative. A. COLLECTIVE FORCE
C. RESULTANT FO~E
B. CENTRAU7r!)
D. AXIAL FORCE FORCE
165
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
3.
is the branch of mechanics that deals with bodies in a state of equilibrium. Equilibrium is said to exist when the resultant of any number of forces acting on a body is zero. A. STATICS
C. LIMITATIONS
B. STABILITIES
D. MECHANICS
4. The of a plane area with respect to an Axis is the product of the area times the perpendicular distance from the centroid of the area to the axis. A. STATISTICAL
C. MOMENT OF WEIGHTS MINUTE
B. STABILIZING
D. STATICAL MOMENT MOMENT
5. Just as a resultant can be found for two or more forces, so can a. single force be resolved into two _ __ This is often required when analyzing loads on a sloped surface (a roof) and it is necessary to find the horizontal and vertical reactions.
A. PIECES
C. COMPONENTS
B. PARTS
D. SEGMENTS
6. A is any action applied to an object. In architecture, external action are called loads and result from such actions as the weight of people, wind, or the weight of building materials. A. FORCE
C. PRESSURE
B. ACTION
D. VELOCITY
7. The structural design of buildings is primarily concerned with selecting the size, configuration and material of component to resist, with a reasonable margin of safety, external forces acting on them. A force has both direction and magnitude and as such is called a _ _ _ __
A. TOTAL QUANTITY
C. APPLIED ENERGY
B. VECTOR QUANTITY
D. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
166
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
8.
is the internal resistance to an external force. There are three basic types of this resistance. Tension. compression and shear. A. FATIGUE
C. CRACKING
B. LOSS OF WEIGHT
D. STRESS
A
B
C
D
0000
9. A type of shear in which a member is twisted is called a
A
B
C
D
0000
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
A. TORSION
C. TORQUE
B. CONVULSION
D. COLLISION
is stress in which the particles of the member tend to pull apart under load. For example a rod elongates.
A. MOVING AWAY
C. TENSION
B. BENDING·
D. STRETCHING
is stress in which the particles of the member are pushed together and the member tends to shorten or widen. A. TIGHTENING
C. FOLDING-UP
B. COMPRESSION
D. SQUEEZED ACTION
is when a material is subjected to a change in temperature. It expands if heated or contracts if cooled.
A. MODULUS OF
C. WEATHER CONDITION ELASTICITY
B. ALTERNATE HEAT
D. THERMAL STRESS AND COLD
is the deformation if a material is caused by external forces. It is the ratio of the total change in length of a material to its original length.
A. WARPING
C. SIEVE
B. STRAIN
D. SETTLING
is a measure of the bending stiffness of a structural member's cross-sectional shape. A. MOMENT OF STABILITY
C. MOMENT OF RIGIDITY
167
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B. MOMENTOF ENERGY 15.
D. MOMENTOF INERTIA
is a measure of the stiffness of the material of a structural menber.
16.
A B C D
0000
A. COLLECTIVE MEASUREMENT
C. MODULUS OF ELASTICITY
B. COEFFICIENT OF WEIGHT
D. TOTALITY OF STRENGTH
is a special condition of a force applied to a structure. This is the tendency of a force to cause rotation about a point. As such, it is the product of the force times tpe distance to the point about which it is acting. The units are in newton-millimeter, kilonewton-meter or kipfeet.
A. MOMENT
C. SECOND
B. MINUT~
D. SCHEDULE
A B C D
0000
VI. DEFINITIONS 1. A is a structural system without a complete vertical load-carrying space frame in which the lateral loads are resisted by shear walls or braced frames. This walls or bracing systems provide support for all or most gravity loads. A. SHEAR WALL
C. BEARING WALL
B. SUPPORTING
0. FREE FORM WALL WALL
2. A is a vertical element that resists lateral forces in the plane of the wall through shear and bending. Such a wall acts as a beam cantilevered out of the ground or foundations, and part of its strength derives from its depths. Examples are interior wall of a multistorey building, enclosing stairways, elevator shafts and mechanical chases which are mostly solid and run the entire height of the building. A. TENSION WALL
C. STANDING WALL
B. SHEAR WALL
D. SCREEN WALL
168
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
3.
is to bend, warp, bulge or collapse, or to give way suddenly, as with heat or pressure. A. STRAPPING
C. ROLLING
B. TWISTING
D. BUCKLING
4. the ability of a structure to absorb some of the energy is known as which occurs when the building_ deflects in the inelastic range without falling or collapsing, an example of this material is steel which has the ability to deform under a load above the elastic limit without collapsing. A. DUCTILITY
C. MALLEABILITY
lJ. ELA8TICITY
D. fDLDA[))J:JTY
5. Pertaining to, of the nature of, or caused by an earthquake. A. TREMBLOR
C. SEISMIC
B. SCALE
D. WAVE LENGTH
6. This is a kind of wall that are relatively small members, closely spaced and tied together with exterior and interior sheating. The sheathing is necessary to brace the small members against buckling and to resist lateral loads.
A. WINDOW WALL
C. THIN WALL
B. EXTERNAL WALL
D. SifUD WALL
7. A wall that consists of a single unit of unreinforced masonry that can act as either a bearing or non-loading bearing wall.
A. SINGLE WYTHE
C. ONE WAY WALL
B. SINGLE LINE
D. SOLID WALL
8. This is a wall that consist of two wythes of masonry, separated by an air space normally 50 mm wide. These walls provide extra protection against water penetration and additional insulation value because of the air. A. NON-BEARING
C. CHB WALL WALL
B. CAVITY WALL
D. RETAINING WALL 169
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
9. A slab that has its reinforcement running in one direction perpendicular to the beams supporting the slab. A. SINGLE LINE SLAB
C. STRAIGHT SLAB
B. ONE WAY SLAB
D. SOLE SUPPORT SLAB
10. A slab that have rebars in both directions and are more efficient because the applied loads are distributed in all directions, usually column bays supporting them are almost square.
11.
12.
A. DUAL SLAB
C. TWO-WAY SLAB SUPPORT
S. DOUBLE SLAB
D. EACH WAY SLAB SYSTEM
measures the consistency of the concrete, usually at the jobsite. In this test, concrete is placed in a 300 mm high truncated cone, 20 mm at the base and 100 mm at the top. It is compacted by hand with a rod and then the ·mold is removed from the concrete and placed next to it. The distance the concrete goes down from the original 300 mm is then measured. Too great the settlements indicates excessive water, and a very small settlement indicates the mixture will be too difficult to place properly.
A. DRYNESS TEST
C. MIXED AGGREGATE TEST
B. WETNESS TEST
D. SLUMP TEST
is a test that measures compressive strength. As the concrete is being placed, samples are put in cylinder molds, 150 mm in diameter and 300 mm high, and are moist-cured for 28 days at which time they are laboratory-tested according to standardized procedures. (usually tested in 7 days) A. CYLINDER TEST
C. ROUND STRENGTH TEST
B. CUBE TEST
D. CIRCULAR MOTION TEST
170
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
13.
a test used when a portion of the structure is in place and cured, but needs to be tested. (Usually used when regular cylinder test do hot come up to the specified design strength) A cylinder is drilled on the concrete and then tested in the laboratory to determine its compressive strength.
A. CENTER CYLINDER TEST B. MIDDLE CYLINDER
A
B
C
D
0000
C. CENTRALIZED ROUNDED TEST D. CORE CYLINDER TEST TEST
14. A slight arch usually making the reinforcement higher in the middle so that when the beam or slab is cured or settles it goes to a horizontal position rather than sagging.
A. CHAMBER
C. OGEE
B. CAMBER
D. SLOPE
15. This foundation is used when soil bearing is low or where loads are heavy in relation to soil pressures. With this type of foundation, one large footing is designed as a two-way slab and supports the columns above it. Sometimes beams are placed above the foundation to give added stiffness.
A. CRIB FOOTING
C. MAT or RAFT FOUNDATION
B. DOUBLE FOOTING
D. WIDE FOUNDATION
16. A common footing which is placed under a continuous foundation wall which in turn supports bearing wall
A. WALL FOOTING
C. COMBINED FOOTING
B. LINE FOOTING
D. LINEAR FOOTING
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS: VII. SELECTION OF STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS 1. Rigid frames have which of the following characteristics?
I. Rigid frames should be hinged at the column bases.
171
A
B
C
D
0000
II. Moment connections must be designed at the intersection of beam and column. Ill. Loads are transferred vertically to the foundations. IV. Rigid frames are more efficient than simple post-andbeam systems. V. Sloping the horizontal members can reduce the amount.of steel required. A. I, II, and IV
C. II, Ill, IV, and V
B. II, IV, and V
D. all of the above
2. Which of the following would be most important in s-electing a structural system for a proposed restaurant and warming house at the mid-slope of a mountain resort?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. cost, resistance to loads, and construction limitations B. style, integration with building, systems, and fire resistance C. building occupancy, co~struction limitations, and style D. fire resistance, resistance to loads, and cost
3. Select the incorrect statement concerning exterior wall facings and the building structures.
c D 0000 A
8
A. Heavy materials with low coefficient of expansion require expansion joints as much as materials such as steel, aluminum, and wood. B. Transfer of wind loads from curtain wall systems is accomplished with clip angles connecting the facing and the structural frame.
c.
Long-term deflections of both wood and concrete can cause problems with cracking of exterior facings.
D. Simple, lightweight exterior materials such as thin paneling or stucco can be attached directly to the exterior studs.
4. What type of structure resists loads through shear tension, and compression in-the plane of the structure?
A. THIN SHELL
C. ARCH
B. RIGID FRAME
D. WAFFLE SLAB
172
c D 0000 A
8
5. Select the system that allows extra reinforcement at the columns. A. FLAT PLATE
C. FLAT SLAB
B. LIFT SLAB
D. FOLDED PLATE
6. A bearing wall with a high slenderness ratio would probably require what kind of construction?
A. CATENARY
C. CREEP
B. CAVITY
D. CAMBER
7: What economical two-way system of steel or concrete would be a appropriate for a span over 45 M?
A. FURNICULAR
C. SINGLE WYTHE
B. COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
D. SPACE FRAME
8. Which of the following is not true about arches?
A. Horizontal thrust must be resisted by foundations or
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
tie rods.
B. The thrust on an arch can be decreased by doubling its height. C. Supporting an arch with two hinges will make it statically determinate D. The furnicular shape of an arch can be easily determined without calculations. 9. Which of the following statements are correct? I. The amount of camber in a prestressed concrete beam can be varied to suit the requirements of loading. II. Flat plate and flat slab construction should be- designed for square bays while waffle slabs should be more rectangular. Ill. A one-way concrete joint system is easy to form and can span 8 to 12M. IV. When a long prestressed member cannot be delivered to a site, post-tensioned construction may be warranted.
173
A
B
C
D
0000
V. Topping is often omitted on single tee construcf10n if floor-to-floor heights are limited. A. I and IV
C. II and IV
B. I, Ill, and IV
D. IV and V
10. Select the incorrect statement about steel framing. A. A beam-and-girder system is efficient for spans in the range of 8 to 12M.
A
B
C
D
0000
B. Open-web steel joists are best supported on steel beams.
C: The ductile properties of steel make it advantageous / for intermittent lateral loading. D. Steel is used for high-risP, buildings because of its ductility and strength.
VIII. LOADS ON BUILDINGS 1. Cars parked on a driveway at the top of a retaining wall are considered what type of load? A. SEISMIC LOAD
C. SURCHARGE
B. DEAD LOAD
D. IMPACT LOAD
A
B
C
D
0000
2. Cross-bracing can lessen the effects of what? A. DRIFT
C. LIVE LOAD
B. LATERAL LOAD
D. TEMPERATURELOAD
3. What might be induced by an elevator? A. IMPACT LOAD
C. CONCENTRATED LOAD
B. STATIC ANALYSIS
D. DYNAMIC LOAD
4. An aerobics class could produce what type of load? A. RESONANT LOAD
C. IMPACT LOAD
B. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
D. LIVE LOAD
174
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
5. What is necessary to design for at a basement wall with undrained soil under an automobile drive-through?
A. LATERAL LOAD
A
8
C
D
0000
C. DEADLOAD
B. COMBINATION LOAD D. CONCENTRATED LOAD 6. A tuned dynamic damper would be used in which of the following situations?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. a mid-rise concrete structure in an earthquake zone B. near a mechanical room that contained several vibrating machines C. in a high-rise building subject to earthquake resonance D. at the top of a tall building 7. A small commercial office building has 2" x 10" (50 x 250 mm) wood joists spaced 16 inches (400 mm) on center supporting a hardwood floor over 1/2-inch (12 mm) gypsum wallboard. Ignoring the beam weight, what is the design live and dead load per linear meter on a beam supporting a central structural bay 4.27 M long before allowance is made for live load reduction? (See diagram.)
I·
(4.27 M)
·I
(4.88 M)
-.-
-beam
(4.88 M) : I
+
A. 14.0 KN pounds per linear meter B. 16.41 KN pounds per linear meter C. 18.75 KN pounds per linear meter D. 19.1 KN/Iinear meter
175
A
B
C
D
0000
8. Which of the following is not correct concerning live load calculations?
A
B
c
0
0000
A. Live loads can be reduced when a structural member supports more than 15 square meter the occupancy is not public assembly and if the live load is less than 80 pst.
B. Live loads include snow, people, and furniture.
c.
Any live load reduction cannot exceed 40 percent for structural members supporting load from one story.
D. Snow load reduction is calculated according to the R~ = S/40 - 0.5 if the roof pitch is more than 20 degrees.
9. Select the correct statements about lateral loads. I. Wind load varies with the· height above the ground.
A
B
c
D
0000
II. Full wind load and snow load should be calculated together to check the worst case situation. Ill. Wmd load varies with the square of wind velocity. IV. Total horizontal shear at ground level is used in the dynamic analysis method of seismic design. V. Drift should not exceed the height of the building divided by 500.
v
A. II, Ill, and V
C. I, Ill, and
B. I, Ill, IV, and V
D. Ill, IV, and V
10. What is the total earth pressure acting on the left side of the retaining wall shown fn the following diagram? Assume an equivalent fluid pressure of 30 pounds per square foot per foot of height.
4.50M
1.50 M
A. 6.35 KN/M
C. 47.69 KN/M
B. 8.48 KN/M
D. 84.78 KN/M 176
A
B
c
D
0000
IX. STRUCTURAL FUNDAMENTALS 1. What are the horizontal and vertical components of the force shown?
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
F = 120 KN
A. Fx= 60 KN; F = 103.48 KN 1
B. Fx= 69.28; F = 97.98 KN 1
C. Fx= 138.56 KN; F
1
= 240 KN
D. Fx= 103.92 KN; F = 60 KN 1
2. The elastic limit of a material is: A. the point at which a material continues to deform without any increase in load.
A
B
C
D
0000
B. the maximum unit stress that determines the engineering working stress to design a member. C. the point beyonc4 which unit stress increases faster that unit strain. D. the unit stress below which deformation is directly proportional to stress 3. The stiffness due to a structural member's shape is described by what term? A. MODULUS OF ELASTICITY B. MOMENT OF INERTIA C. STATICAL MOMENT D. CONCURRENTFORCE
177
A
B
C
D
0000
4. What are compression and bending examples of?
A. FORCE
C. STRESS
B. STRAIN
D. EQUILIBRIUM
5. A force can be considered acting anywhere along the line of action of the force if its direction and magnitude do not change because of what principle? A. EQUILIBRIUM
C. COLINEAR FORCE
B. ULTIMATE STRENGTH
D. TRANSMISSIBILITY
6. What causes the tendency of a body to rotate?
A. MOMENT
C. NONCONCURRENT FORCE
B. RESULTANT FORCE
D. COUPLE
7. A load of 13.34 KN is applied to the support struts shown. What is the compressive force in each strut? F = 13.34 KN
!
A. A= 4.45 KN; 8 = 7.46 KN B. A= 4.21 KN; 8
= 8.81
KN
C. A= 4.51 KN; 8 = 8.70 KN D. A= 5.0 KN; 8 = 12.87 KN
178
A 8
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
8. The bridge railing shown must support a maximum load of 600 Newtons laterally. What is the compression force in the diagonal member?
A
B
C
0
C
D
ooco
(1.05 M)
A. 2184 Newtons
C. 624 Newtons
B. 21 00 Newtons
D. 577 Newtons
9. What are the magnitudes of the reactions at the beam supports shown? Assume that the weight of the uniform load acts at its center as a concentrated load.
A
B
0000
8.89 KN 13.34 KN
~
2.92KNIM
~
~
2.40M 1.22 M
3.66M
A. R1 = 10.75 KN; R2 = 16.49 KN B. R1 =1.04KN;R2 =24.75KN C. R1 = 9.36 KN; R2 = 17.68 KN D. R1 = 1.56 KN; R2 =21.68 KN 10. Thermal stress in a restrained member is dependent on:
A
B
C
D
0000
I. the change in temperature II. the area of the member Ill. the coefficient of linear expansion 179
IV. the unit strain V. the modulus of elasticity A. I, II, Ill, and IV
C. I, Ill, and V
B. I, Ill, IV, and V
D. all of the above
X. BEAMS AND COLUMNS 1. What is the most important factor in determining the loadcarrying of a column? A. BENDING MOMENT
C. SLENDERNESS RATIO
B. END CONDITIONS
D. SECTION MODULUS
2. Identify the following formula: r = .,)1 1A A. NEGATIVE MOMENT C. DEFLECTION
A
l::$
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B. FLEXURE FORMULA D. RADIUS OF GYRATION 3. What stress is more important to check in wood beams than in steel beams?
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A. HORIZONTAL SHEAR C. EFFECTIVE LENGTH B. VERTICAL SHEAR
D. POINT OF INFLECTION
4. What theoretically determines the stress on a column just prior to failure?
A. MOMENT DIAGRAM
C. NEUTRAL AXIS
B. EULERrS EQUATION
D. DEFLECTION
5. The reaction for which of t.he following types of beams
cannot be found using the principles of equilibrium? A. continuous beams
C. simply supported beams
B. cantilevered beams
D. overhanging beams
6. Select the correct statements about a simply supported beam with a uniform load. I. The maximum bending stresses occur at the extreme fibers.
180
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
II. Moment is maximum where vertical shear is zero.
Ill. The shear stress remains. constant for one-haH the beam's length. IV. The higher the value of the beam's modulus of elasticity, the more it will deflect.
V. Horizontal shear is at its greatest at the neutral surface.
A. I, II, ancllll
C. I, II, and V
B. II, Ill, and VI
D. I, II, Ill, and V
7. What is the maximum moment in the beam shown? Ignore the weight of the beam.
A B C D
0000
2.3KNIM
t
t 14M
4M
A. 68.88 KN-Meter
C. 50.12 KN-Meter
B. 84.2 KN-Meter
D. 137.76 KN-Meter
8. The maximum bending stress a wood beam must resist is 3000 ft-pounds. If the maximum allowable bending stress is 1500 psi, what is the minimum section modulus the beam, must have to resist bending?
A. 10011.13 mrnl
C. 33370.4 mm3
B. 20022.25 mm3
D. 4004451 mm3
9. Which of the following statements are true about
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
designing beams?
I. If the vertical shear on a simply supported beam is different at each reaction, both values are critical to know. II. The point where the shear diagram crosses zero is important. Ill. If negative moment occurs, it is not critical to know its value.
181
IV. Most beams are designed for maximum moment. V. Moment at any point on a beam can be found by calrulating the area under the shear diagram up to the same point. A. II, IV, and V
C. Ill, IV, and V
B. I, II, IV, and V
D. II, Ill, and V
10. A nominal6" x 8" wood column supports a load of 2500 pounds. If the column is 8 feet 0 inches long and has a moment of inertia of 104 in4 about the axis parallel to the 8 inch dimension, what is the slenderness ratio? A. 5.0
C. 17.5
B. 16.0
D. 60.4
A
B
C
D
0000
XI. TRUSSES 1. Select the incorrect statement. A. Trusses are usually required to have lower chord bridging.
A
B
C
D
0000
B. Spacing of trusses depends entirely on the spanning capabilities of purlins and the type of truss used. C. Parallel chord trusses usually have greater stresses toward the center of the span. D. The method of joints is often used to find a the forces in a truss
2. What is wrong with the wood truss detail shown?
A B C D
0000
182
A. There is eccentric loading.
B. There are not enough bolts. C. The ends of the web members are not cut properly. D. A gusset plate should be used instead of direct con-
nections. 3. Which truss usually requires a larger depth?
A. BOWSTRING TRUSS C. PITCHED TRUSS B. FLAT TRUSS
D. SCISSORS TRUSS
4. What is used in place of the centroidal axis in detailing some steel trusses?
A. CENTER LII"1E
C. GRAPHIC ANALYSIS
'3. CENTROIDAL AXIS
D. GAGE LINE
5. What design procedure is best for finding the force in the first horizontal member next to a support?
A. METHOD OF SECTIONS B. SUMMATION OF MOMENTS C. METHOD OF JOINTS D. SUMMATION OF HORIZONTAL COMPONENTS 6. What are loads on a truss genera:'y placed on? A. PANEL POINT
C. CHORD MEMBERS
B. TRUSSED RAFTER
D; GUSSET PLATES
7. What is the force in diagonal member A in the truss shown? 15KN
1SKN
1
1
15KN
15KN
1
1
15KN
1.-----.--
~11.80M AJ...~.B
I~-~~~ '
"
~.
6 Pli'NELS 0 3M= 18M
183
I
A. 17.38 KN coi'J1)ression C. 14.56 KN coi'J1)ression B. 17.38 KN tension
D. 14.56 KN tension
8. The most common depth-to-span ratio for a steel truss
A
B
C
D
0000
is:
A. 1:5to 1:15
C. dependent on its type
B. no more than 1:12
D. 1:10 to 1:20
A B C D
9. The following truss would best be analyzed with: A method of joints
C. method of sections
B. graphic method
D. any of the above
0000
18KN
~
1o. What is the force in member AB as illustrated?
A
A. 21 :2 KN compression
C. 28.3 KN compression
B. 21.2 KN tension
D. 28.3 KN tension
10KN
10KN
10KN
5KN
!
!
!
!
!
184
2.5 M
C
D
0000
5KN
~+I·.=2.5::..::M::.. .+I...,___......:5::....::M::....__---J.,I-··-~5-=M--·11
B
I
XII. SOIL AND FOUNDATIONS 1. Soil tests made prior to construction have indicated that excessive groundwater is present. If the project has a basement, what suggestions would you make to your client to alleviate the potential problem and in what order to priority?
A
B
C
D
0000
1. Specify that drainage matting be placed against all basement foundation walls. 11. Add extra drain pipes from the roof and drain away
from the building.
Ill. Detail and specify drain tile around the footings and connect to atmosphere or a dry well. IV. Use 25 mm to 50 mm gravel under the basement slab. V. Draw the site plan so the ground has a positive slope away from the building on all sides.
A. V, IV, Ill, I. II
C. V,I,IV,III, II
B. Ill, IV, I, V, II
D. Ill, I, IV, II, V
2. Which of the following techniques would be most appropriate to prepare the soil for a building site that tests have shown to be primarily composed of silt and organic silt? A. compaction
C. densification
B. surcharging
D. fill
A
B
C
D
0000
I
3. The retaining wall shown holds back compacted soil with a coefficient of earth pressure of 1 .0 and an equivalent fluid weight of 4. 71 KN/m 3 . What is the total earth pressure against the retaining wall per too t and at what point is it considered to be acting for design purposes? A. 0.6025 KN at the top of the footing
B. 2.1195 KN at the level of the lower grade C. 2.1195 KN above the lower grade level D. 1.0482 KN at the level of the lower grade
185
A
8
C
D
0000
1.80M
0.90M
4. The footing and foundation wall shown support a live lo'ad of 7 Kilonewton per meter and a dead load of 3.5 KN/M. Assuming concrete weighs 23.56 KN/M 3 and the soil weighs about 15.71 Kilo newton per cubic meter, J'low wide should the footing be if· the allowable soil bearing pressure is 71.79 KPa?
A
B
C
D
0000
p
~ 1.00 M 0.30M ..._...
. .. ~
b .•
.~
:
v.
~:· ~ ~ :··. ·:.=-~ '.
" " . '<)
•
•
• .,
6
A. 0.30 M
C. 0.505 M
B. 0.75 M
Q. 0.90 M
& .'
A
5. Soil tests are:
A. ordered by the architect and included in the sitework portion of thP specifications. B. ordered by the stn.:ctural engineer and made part of the structural drawings.
186
B
C
D
0000
C. not part of the contract documents, but test locations and boring logs are often shown for information only. D. paid for by the client and included on the site plan as part of the architectural drawings. 6. Bearing capacities are determined by:
A
B
C
D
0000
I. building codes II. the amount of water present in the soil Ill. unified soil classificatio(l system IV. field tests V. extent and amount of compaction A. I, II, and IV
C. II, Ill, and IV
B. I, II, and V
D. all of the above
7. What is used to specify the required compaction of fill material?
A. STRAP FOOTING
C. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
B. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
D. PROCTOR TEST
8. Which soil type would be best for heavily loaded spread footings? A. GRAVELS
C. SILTS
B. SANDS
D. ORGANICS
9. Information on what item is necessary if retaining walls are not to be used? A. BORING LOG
C. TEST PIP REPORT
B. REPOSE
D. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
10. If a soil test confirmed the presence of bentonite, what type of foundation would probably be best for a one-story building? A. BELLED PIER
C. GRADE BEAM
B. COMBINED FOOTING D. RAFT FOUNDATION 187
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0 0
<:)
0
XIII. CONNECTIONS 1. Which of the following are the most important variables in designing a bolted wood connection?
A
B
C
0
0000
I. the angle of the load to the grain II. the thickness of the merTi>ers through which the bolt is placed
Ill. the species of wood IV. the type of washers used under the head and nut V. the area of the net section at the bolt holes A. I, Ill, and
v
B. I, II, Ill, and V
C. I, II, IV and V
D. I, Ill, IV, and V
2. What connector would be best for a wood truss covering a temporary building with a rong span? A. SHEAR PLATE
c.
B. SPLIT RING CONNECTOR
D. LAG SCREW
A
B
c
D
0000
WELD PLATE
3. What is used to account for wood members that are loaded at an angle to each other? A. OVERSIZE HOLE
C. HIGH STRENGTH BOLT
B. HANKINSON FORMULA
D. LAG SCREEN
4. What type of weld would most likely be used to connect two overlapping steel plates in compression? A. BEVEL
C, PLUG
B. VEE
D. FILLET
5. In designing a composite section, what device would most Ukely be used? A. COMMON BOLT
C. HEADED ANCHOR STUD
B. DOWEL
D. HIGH STRENGTH BOLT
188
A
B
c
D
0000
A
B
c
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
6. Two 6 mm x 150 mmA36 steel bars are welded, as shown in the figure, with E70 electrodes. What is the maximum allowable tensile load that this joint can resist?
A
B
C
D
0000
7( til!!_ 7A.
185,000 KN
c.
B. 137,800 KN
125,200 KN
D. 133,920 KN
7. Which of the welding symbols would indicate that the weld shown be made at the job site?
~·~
c.-r\
.B·v\
D.~
8. A 50 x 150 mm PINETREE member is suspended from a 100 x 200 mm member as shown in the illustration with four 16 mm bolts. Assuming the edge, end, and spacing distances are adequate, what is the allowable load on this joint?
189
A
8
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
100 X 200 mm
0 0
p A. 4.50 kilos
C. 1073 kilos
~ 1015 kilos
D. 1800 kilos
9. Which of the following types of bohs should be used in a joint with long slotted holes where the load perpendicular to the length of the hole is repeatedly reversed?
A. A325 friction-type B. A490
bea~ing-type
A
B
C
D
0000
C. A307 bearing-type
D. none of the above
10. Which of the following should be avoided when designing wood joints?
A
B
C
D
0000
I. bohed joints with load perpendicular to grain II. screws attached to the end grain Ill. nails with penetration more than 12 times the nail diameter IV. nails attached in withdrawal from side grain
v.
steel plates bohed to wood members
A. I, II, and IV
C. IV and V
B. I, Ill, and IV
D. II and IV
XIV. BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS ON STRUCTURAL DESIGN 1. Select the correct statement about lateral loads.
A. For both winds and earthquake loads, forces must be calculated as though loads can come from any direction and act on the building.
190
A
B
C
D
0000
B. In zones of high earthquake probability, the forces produced by seismic lo~s always take precedence over wind loads. C. Wmd stagnation pressure is assumed to act at a point 50 feet above ground. D. Buildings can only be designed to resist seismic forces according to specified procedures in the UBC or with approved wind tunnel tests. 2. The maximum possible allowable stress tor steel members is:
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A. F,= 0.60Fr (on net effective area) B. F,= 0.66Fr (on net effective area) C. Fb= 0.66FY(tor laterally supported compact sections) D. Fb= 0.75Fr(for laterally supported compact sections) 3. Select the incorrect statements about wood construction. I. Foundation sills may be any type wood if located more than 6 inches above the earth.
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
II. Fire stops are not required in vertical openings of twostory residential construction. Ill. Untreated wood joists over crawl spaces must have their bottom edges at least 0.45 M above ground, while beams only need 0.30 M clearance. IV. Concrete beam po~kets ml!lst be sized to allow for 25 mm air space at the sides and tops, and 50 mm at the ends, unless the wood is treated or of a species with a natural resistance to decay. V. Each 150 square meter of crawl space area requires a one square rnet6r net vent opening. A. I, II, and Ill
C. II, IV, and V
B. I, II, and IV
D. Ill, IV, and V
4. What is important to protect the structural integrity of reinforcing bars? A. FIRE RETARDANT FACTOR B. CLEARANCE FROM EMBEDDED CONCRETE
191
A
B
C
D
0000
C. REBAR BENDING REQUIREMENTS D. CONCRETE COVER 5. What building code provision attempts to minimize the Hkelihood of roof failure through ponding?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. DURATION OF LOAD FACTOR
e:
SLENDERNESS FACTOR
C. DEFLECTION CRITERIA D. COMBINATION LOADING 6. What is one of the bases for defining allowable stresses
00~~
A
B
C
D
0000
A. CAMBER C. ULTIMATE STRENGTH B. MINIMUM TENSILE STRESS D. WORKING STRESS 7. A 150 mm x 325 mm wood beam supporting solid wood decking would have its allowable stress modified by what? A. SIZE FACTOR
C. SHORING REMOVAL
B. YIELD STRESS
D. TEN PERCENT
8. If the allowable stress on a wood beam is 10 MPa what is the required section modulus if the beam must resist a moment of 623 N~M caused by snow loading?
A. 487325 mm3
C. 52829 mm3
B. 49825 mm3
D. 54174 mm3
9. Which of the following loading conditions does not have to be investigated? A. dead plus floor live plus snow plus one-half seismic B. dead plus floor live plus snow C. dead plus floor live plus wind plus one-haH snow D. dead plus floor live plus one-h::1lf wind plus snow 192
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
10. Which of the following are true statements?
I. 249 Kilos per square meter of dead load must be factored into normal dead loading when designing speculative office buildings.
A
B
C
D
0000
II. Live loads can be reduced on structural components supporting more than 15 square meter in all occupancies except educational. Ill. Structural continuity affects load calculations.
IV. Pitched roofs over 5 in 12 allow for a reduction in snow loads over 90 kilos per square meter. V. Required live loads are clearly stated in the UBC.
A. II, Ill, and V
C. I, Ill, and V
B. II, Ill, and IV
D. I, Ill, IV, and V
XV. WOOD CONSTRUCTION 1 . Which of the following statements is correct? A. Glue-laminated beams may shrink excessively once on the job site.
A
B
C
D
0000
B. Selecting a premium appearance grade glue-lam allows an increase in allowable bending stress.
C. 3/4-inch laminations are used in glue-lam beams primarily when a tight curve must be formed.
D. A nominal8-inch wide glue-lam is actually 7 .x; inches wide. 2. An outdoor deck in a mountain region is supported on #2 western red cedar joists with an Fb of 7.23 MPa for repetitive members and an Fv of 0.516 MPa. The joists are cantilevered 0.60 M as shown in the figures. If the snow load creates a uniform load on each joist of 2516.25 N per square meter, what size joist is required (neglecting the weight of the joist and considering both bending and horizontal shear)?
193
A
B
C
D
0000
2516.25 N/M
beam loading
----------3.-0-M---------IO.SOMI
3692
shear di&gram
-4003.38
2693.08 N.M.
-473.18 N-M
A. 2x6(50x150mm)
C. 2x10(50x250mm)
B. 2 X 8 (50 X 200 mm)
D. 2 X 12 (50 X 300 mm)
3. Which of the following is usually not checked when designing floor joists for heavy loads? A. vertical shear
C. moment effects
B. horizontal shear
D. deflection
4. What must be used in designing bearing plates for girders? A.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
DEFLECTION CRACKING
B. COMPRESSION PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN C. VISUAL GRADING D. COMPRESSION PARALLEL TO GRAIN 5. What would be used to design a column with its lower end encased in concrete? A. SLENDERNESS RATIO
C. LATERAL SUPPORT
B. VERTICAL SHEAR
D. BUCKLING LENGTH FACTOR
194
A
B
C
D
0000
6. What is as important as wood species in selecting allowable stresses?
A. MOISTURE CONTENT
A
B
C
D
0000
C. EXTREME FIBER IN BENDING
B. APPEARANCE GRADE D. SIZE CATEGORIES
7. Which of the following affect the selection of a value for allowable tension parallel to the grain, before modification due to duration of loading?
A
B
C
D
0000
I. wood species II. size of member
Ill. single or multiple member use IV. grade of lumber V. duration of loading A. I, II, and IV
C. II, IV, and V
B. I, Ill, and IV
D. all of the above
8. What is the maximum axial load a 100 x 150 mm top chord truss member can resist if it spans 0.90 M between panel points, its Fe is 6.545 MPa and its modulus of elasticity is 11024 MPa?
A. 78345.22 N
C. 87473.45 N
B. 79482.48 N
D. 88425.22 N
A B C D
0000
I
9. The maximum bending moment on a 6.0 M long beam is 11085.97 N-M. If the beam is Douglas fir-larch dense no. 1, and lateral support is provided, what is the most economical size that should be used? (Neglect effects of deflection.)
A. 100 x 250 mm
C. 150 x 200 mm
B. 100 x 300 mm
D. 150
B
C
D
0000
x 300 mm
10. Select the incorrect statement below. A. Design values can be increased 33 ~ percent for wind loading on wood structures. B. Structural lumber should be specified at an absolute maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
195
A
A
B
C
D
0000
C. Horizontal shear is almost always more critical than deflection or bending in short, heavily loaded beams. D. Beams can be notched a maximum of one-sixth of their depth at end supports.
XVI. STEEL CONSTRUCTION 1. What is most often used for columns in steP.I construction?
A. CARBON STEEL
C. A36 STEEL
B. WIDE FLANGES
D. COMPACT SECTIONS
2. What is the most important consideration in column design? A. SLENDERNESS RATIO
C. RADIUS OF GYRATION
B. BUCKLING
D. LATERAL SUPPORT
3. What property of steel makes it good for earthquaKeresistant structures? A. HIGH MODULUS OF ELASTICITY
C. UNIFORM LOAD CONSTANTS
B. DUCTILITY
D. FLEXURE
4. A steel girder supports a concentrated load of 53.38 KN at its center. If the girder is A36 steel, spans 4.87 M and is laterally supported, what is the most economical section that can support the load?
A. W 8 X 24 B.
w 8 X 28
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A
B
C
D
0000
C. W12x16
D.
w 12 X 22
5. Open-web steel joists are to span 27 feet and are placed 21/2 feet on center. A maximum depth of20 inches is allowed for the joist. The live load is 80 psf, the dead load is 40 psf, and the maximum deflection is limited to 1/360 of the span. What is the best joist to use? A. 18K4
C. 20K4
B. 18K5
D. 20K6 196
A
B
C
D
0000
6. A W12 x 79 beam of A36 steel spans 22 feet. What maximum load per foot can the beam support and what is the maximum allowable unsupported length?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. 3.53 kips per foot; 12.8 feet B. 3.53 kips per foot; 10.1 feet
C. 6.48 kips per foot; 12.8 feet
D. 77.7kipsperfoot; 10.1 feet 7. A W 14 x 120 column of steel with Fr= 50 ksi has an unbraced length of 14 feet. It is rigidly fixed at the base, fixed in translation at the top but free to rotate at the top. What is the allowable concentric load?
A. 690 kips
C. 935 kips
B. 887 kips
D. 949 kips
8. Which of the following is not true about open-web steel joists?
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. Proper bridging is important for joists. B. All components of open-web joist construction conform to standards of the Steel Joist Institute.
C. Open web joists can span up to 144 feet.
D. The K-series is for spanning the shortest distances up to 60 !eet. 9. A uniformly loaded W 10 x 60 beam spans 16 feet. If it is · A36 steel, laterally supported, and carries a total load of 60,000 pounds, how much will it deflect?
A. 0.560 inches
C. 0.656 inches
B. 0.614 inches
D. 0.674 inches
10. Which of the following statements about shear in steel beams are true? I. Shear is evenly distributed throughout the web and flanges of the beam. II. Unit shearing stress is partly a function of the maximum vertical sh~ar. Ill. Shear stresses can be significant for beams with concentrated loads at mid-span. 197
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
IV. Shear is not usually a problem in steel beam design. V. It is necessary to know the actual depth of a beam rather than the nominal depth when calculating the unit shearing stress.
A. I, II, and V
C. II, Ill, and IV
B. I, II, IV, and V
D. II, IV, and V
XVII. CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION 1 . Which of the following admixtures would you recommend to use in a construction project in a northern climate that )Nas built during the summer months if the concrete will be exposed to the weather?
A. accelerator
C. air-entraining agent
B. plasticizer
D. accelerator and air-en training agent
A
C
D
0000
2. Which of the ·following would be the correct placement for primary reinforcing steel for the beam shown below if the spans supported a uniformly distributed load?
A
B
C
D
0000
1
A.
B.
B
1
....
D.
1
....
3. The concrete beam shown is proposed to have rebars placed schematically as shown. The strength of the concrete is 27.5 MPa, or 4000 psi. and the steel is grade 60. The percentage of steel to achieve a balanced design has been calculated to be 0.0285. What are the minimum and maximum steel areas allowed? 2
A. minimum= 1.06 in ; maximum= 9.19 in
C. minimum= 1.06 in ; maximum= 6.90 in
2
D. minimum= 1.19 in 2 ; maximum= 7.70 in 2
198
B
C
D
0000 -
,.
' ~
2
B. minimum= 1.19 in2 ; maximum= 9.19 in2 2
A
564mm
c- •
..... . '
.•
p
~
• .'
.• I>
0
, ..
.
' 0
•
641.. • • • '. ·I 300mm 1
4. Which of the following are not true about the watercement ratio:
A B C D
0000
I. For typical concrete mixes, the minimum water-cement is about 0.50 to 0.65. II. The water-cement ratio is critical to the concrete strength. Ill. Water is only needed for workability and to start drying process.
ttw
IV. Excess water form small bubbles in the cement paste. V. The water-cement ratio is sometimes referred to by gallons of water per sack of cement. A. II and Ill
C. I and Ill
B. Ill and IV
D. I and IV
5. A number 10 rebar has the following diameter: A.
A
8
c
D
0000
I~ inches
Ys inches Ys inches
B. 1
c.
D. The exact diameter depends on the producing mill.
6. Select the correct statements from the following list. I. The development length of rebars depends primarily on the s1rength of the steel and the perimeter length of the bar. II. Diagonal tension stress can be counteracted by using either stirrups or some of the tension steel bent up at a 45 degree angle.
Ill. Reducing the percentage of steel to close to minimum can improve the stiffness of the beam. IV. Compression steel is seldom used unless negative moment is present.
v.
Long-term deflection can be two or more times initial deflection.
A. I, II, and Ill
C. II, IV, and V
B. I, Ill, and V
D. II, Ill, and V
199
A
8
c
D
0000
7. What should be carefully controlled during placement of A. FACTORED LOAD
C. MOISTURE
B. COMPACTION
D. TEMPERATURE
8. What safety provision accounts for some of the many variables in concrete construction? A. LOAD FACTORS
C. NEGATIVE MOMENT
B. TWO-WAY SLAB ACTION
D. STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTOR
9. What usual property of concrete construction improve its structural efficiency? A. CONTINUITY
C. T-BEAM ACTION
B. HYDRATION
D. CURING
10. What should you see to judge the quality of concrete being placed ·at a job site.?
XVIII.
A
B
C
D
0000
co~~
A. SLUMP TEST
C. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
B. CORE CYLINDER TEST
D. CYLINDER TEST
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
WALL CONSTRUCTION 1 . What should be used to allow for the wetting of an exterior wood panel system?
A. EXPANSION JOINT
C. SLIP JOINT
B. SLOTTED HOLES
D. THROUGH WALL JOINT
2. What is a metal stud wall system with decorative concrete block on the exterior known as? A. CURTAIN WALL
C. SHEAR WALL
B. VENEERED WALL
D. CAVITY WALL
200
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
3. The lintels of masonry walls with small openings do not carry as much load as might be expected due to what?
A. ECCENTRICITY
A
B
C
D
0000
C. FLEXIBLE BUSHINGS
B. HIGH-LIFT GROUTING D. ARCH ACTION 4. In earthquake-resistant structures, metal wrtain wails should be attached vertically at the column lines and horizontally at the floor lines because:
A
B
C
D
0000
A. these points are the strongest possible places for anchoring. B. building movement during an earthquake is at a minimum at these locations. C. forces are concentrated at these points and should not be bridged across with panels. D. it is more likely that the workmanship of connectiOns will be better at these points. 5. Select the correct statements about concrete bearing walls when empirical design methods are used.
A
B
C
0
0000
I. Reinforcing bars should be placed no more than 1 '6" apart. II. The unsupported height cannot exceed 20 times the thickness. Ill. Eccentricity is not critical when the wall is more than 10 inches thick and reinforced with #5 bars or larger. IV. Openings are reinforced all around with #5 bars or larger extending at least 2'0" beyond the corners. V. Minimum reinforcing percentages change when bar sizes exceed #6 size. A. I and IV
C. II, Ill, and IV
B. I, II, and Ill
D. IV and V
6. If a client requested you to design a building true to the principles of masonry construction, what type of lintel over openings would you most likely design? A. concealed steel B. reinforced masonry units
201
A
B
C
0
0000
C. precast concrete sized to fit the masonry module D. arches of the same material as the walls 7. The exterior finish of a small, two-story building is to be stucco. Which of the following wall systems would be a good choice it cost must be minimized and the labor force is relatively unskilled?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. masonry cavity B. steel studs C. balloon frame wood studs D. platform frame wood studs 8. Which of the following is not true about masonry reinforcing?
A
B
C
D
0000
A The spacing of required reinforcement is grouted masonry walls cannot exceed 3 feet. B. Joint reinfqrcement is normally placed 16 inches on center. C. Ties between wythes of a cavity wall are provided for every 4 lj2 square feet of wall surface regardless of their size or type. D. In low-lift grouting, the size of the horizontal reinforcing must not be included in the determination of minimum cavity width. 9. A concrete block cavity wall must extend 14 feet from the foundation to a row of joists which will be supported by the wall. What wythe combination must be used for the most economical wall? A. two 4-inch blocks separated by a 2-inch space
B. one 4-inch block and one 6-inch block with a 1-inch space C. two 6-inch blocks separated by a 2-inch space D. one 4-inch block and one 8-inch block separated with a 1-inch space
202
A
B
C
D
0000
10. Which of the following affect the bearing capacity of a masonry wall?
A
B
C
D
0000
I. workmanship
11. thickness Ill. number of wythes
1y.
mortar type
V. unsupported height VI. joint reinforcement A. I, II, Ill, and V
C. II, IV, V, and VI
B. I, II, IV, and V
D. all of the above
XIX. LATERAL FORCES -WIND 1. The John Hancock Building in Chicago is an example of what type of framing system? A. PORTAL FRAME
C. X-BRACING
B. TRUSSED TUBE
D. FRAMED TUBE
2. What must be used for designing gabled rigid frames? A. RESONANT LOAD
C. SHEAR WALL
B. MOMENT RESISTING FRAME
D. NORMAL FORCE METHOD
3. A line of columns used to resist wind forces is called what? A. KNEE BRACING
C. ANEMOMETER
B. BENT
D. DRIFT
A
A. Drift of adjacent floors must be limited to 0.0025 times
the floor height. B. Overturning is resisted by the dead load moment, which must be 1 1/2 times the overturning moment. C. K-bracing provides for a more rigid high-rise structure than X-bracing.
203
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A
4. Select the incorrect statement.
B
B
C
D
0000
D. Wind tunnel testing or special calculations are frequently required for buildings over 400 feet high. 5. Using Method 2, what is the design wind pressure on the upper part of a wall of a 45-foot high hospital in downtown Salt Lake City, Utah?
A. 18.2 psf
C. 20.9 psf
B. 19.4 psf
D. 31.4 psf
6. In designing a sheathing and roofing system for a roof with a 5:12 slope, what pressure coefficient should be used? A. 0.4 outward
C. 1.1 outward
B. 0.7 outward
D. 1.6 inward
7. A wood ledger is being used to support and connect a plywood diaphragm floor to a 38-foot long stud wall that is acting as a shear wall. 8d nails, which can hold 82 pounds laterally, are to be used. If the total force on one of the shear walls is calculated as 4600 pounds, what is the minimum nail spacing required to attach the floor to the ledger?
A. 4 inches
C. 8 inches
B. 6inches
D. 10 inches
8. Select the correct statements from the following list.
I. Shear walls are more efficient if they are relatively deep compared with their height.
II. Trussed-tube construction is often used for both steel and concrete construction. Ill. Wood frame buildings must often be anchored to the foundation to resist uplift as well as shear
IV. Welded connections offer an economical way to fabricate moment resisting frames while simplifying erection.
V. Dividing the total shear on a shear wall by its length gives the value for diaphragm shear.
A. I, Ill, IV, and V
C. II, IV, and V
B. II, Ill, and V
D. all of the above 204
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
9. The effect of intermittent wind gusts is taken into account in the UBCwith the:
A B C D
0000
q8 factor
A. C., factor
C.
B. Cq factor
D. I factor
10 .. Which of the following are not true about wind forces on buildings?
A
B
C
D
0000
I. Wind stagnation pressure is greater in open areas than in urban areas. II. Corners of buildings require special consideration during the design phase. Ill. The negative pressure on the leeward side of a building is taken into consideration in both Method 1 and Method 2 of the UBC design procedure. IV. Wind velocity increases when the area it moves through is decreased in area. V. The direction of the prevailing winds at a particular site is used to calculate wind stagnation pressure.
A. I, Ill, and V
C. I and Ill
B. I and V
D. Ill, IV, and V
XX. LATERAL FORCES - EARTHQUAKE 1. A building is constructed of an ordinary moment-resisting space frame and is raised on columns above an open plaza below. What is this an example of?
A. BUILDING FRAME
A B C D
0000
C. SOFT STORY
SYSTEM B. BEARING WALL SYSTEM
D. SH~AR WALL DISCONTINUITY
2. What provides information most useful for seismic design? A. RICHTER SCALE
C. REENTRANT CORNER
B. ACCELEROGRAPH
D. MODIFIED MERCALLI SCALE
205
A
B
C
D
0000
3. What describes a building whose lateral force-resisting system consists stressed in flexure?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. MOMENT-RESISTING C. FRAMED TUBE SPACE FRAME B. BRACED FRAME
D. NATURAL PERIOD
4. A store in Seattle, Washington will have a steel, ordinary moment-resisting space frame. It will be 36 Meters wide, 60 Meters long, 17 Meters, with two stories. Soil reports show stiff soil with the soil depth exceeding 60 Meters. The structure has a dead load of 28,913 KN, and its period of vibration is 0.19 second in the longitudinal direction. What is the total base shear in the longitudinal /direction?
A. 1,989.15 KN
C. 3,975.54 KN
B. 2,652.20 KN
D. 6,563.75 KN
A
C
D
0000
A 5. A dynamic analysis method would be required if which of the following conditions existed?
B
B
C
D
0000
A. a five-story, square hotel building with a skylighttopped atrium in the middle which comprises 55 percent of the building's area B. a 40-story, rectangular office building in seismic zone 3 with an ordinary moment-resisting space frame C. a three-story, L-shaped department store D. all of the above A 6. Select the incorrect statement from the following.
A. Ductility is important above the elastic limit. B. Flexible buildings are good at resisting earthquake and wind loads. C. A penthouse swimming pool would not be a good idea in seismic zone 2B. D. All of other things being equal, reinforced concrete is a poorer choice than steel for a structural system in seismic zone 3.
206
B
C
D
0000
7. Which of the following are true? I. The epicenter is the location of fault slippage.
A
B
c D
0000
II. Vertical ground movement is usually critical when calculating its effect on a building. Ill. A building's fundamental period of vibration is dependent on its mass and stiffness. IV. Building seismic zones 1 require some earthquakeresistant design considerations. V. Useful information in seismic zones 3 and 4 can be gathered from existing buildings.
A. I, II, and Ill
c.
B. II, Ill, and IV
D. Ill, IV, and V
II, IV, and V
8. What value of CP would be used on the first floor in seismic zone 3 to check the stability of a 6-foot-high bookcase?
A. 0.75
c.
B. 1.5
D. 4.0
c D 0000 A
B
A
B
2.0
9. The distribution of base shear in a multistory building does not depend on which of the following? A. the height of the building
C. the distribution of mass
B. the rigidity of the diaphragms
D. the height of the floors
10. Select the correct statements about shear walls. I. The width-to-height ratio should be made as large as possible. II. The force normal to the shear wall is not critical compared to the shear force in the plane of the wall. Ill. Shear walls are best located at the perimeter of the building. IV. Shear walls should not be offset. V. Shear walls can be used in a bearing wall system.
A. I, Ill, and IV
C. I, Ill, IV, and V
B. I, II, and IV
D. all of the above
207
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
XXI. LONG SPAN STRUCTURES -ONE WAY SYSTEMS 1. Partitions should not be rigidly attached to the underside of a long span structural member because:
A
B
C
D
0000
A. This would decrease the flexibility of future room layouts. B. Lateral loads transferred to the partitions would cause them to tip slightly. C. Temperature changes would crack the finish material. D. Long-term deflection would buckle the partition structure.
2. What is common to both deep, long span steel joists and prestressed double tees? A. PONDING
C. CAMBER
B. TENDONS
D. PLATE GIRDER
A
B
C
D
0000
3. What is the ideal shape for an arch?
A. FURNICULAR
C. PARABOLIC
B. CIRCULAR
D. RIGID FRAME
4. Name the truss that does not have intermediate vertical members. A. PRATT
C. HOWE
B. WARREN
D. GOTHIC
5. Which of the following is not true about open-web steel joists?
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. The LH-series and DLH-series are used where open space is needed for floor and roof spans up to 144
teet. B. A top chord, single pitched joist can be purchased for either top or bottom chord bearing.
C. The architect need not specify the required camber. D. A 24LH06 joist must always be braced with bridging; regardless of its span. 208
6. A sports complex is being planned for a large university. One portion will include a 50-meter pool with competition diving boards and areas for sJ)ectators. The size of the pool area has been tentatively set at 110 feet wide by 220 feet long by 50 feet high with the spectator area on one side of the long dimension. Glazing is planned along both short dimensions, and the primary exterior finish material is brick.
A
B
C
D
0000
What structural roof system would probably be best for this situation?
A. deep, long span joists B. glued laminated rigid frames
C. prestressed, single-T concrete sections
D. pitched steel trusses
7. Slotted holes are used to: I. provide for erection tolerances
A B () "'
,j
c
D
r, \
'~
-·
r·,
I
II. make shop fabrication easier
Ill. allow for temperature changes IV. let the exterior envelope move to prevent stress buildup
v.
make precise alignment possible
A. I, IV, and V
C. I, Ill, and V
B. II, Ill, and IV
D. all of the above
8. Select the incorrect statement.
A. Camber is used to prevent pondong.
B. Thrust action must be considered when using long span arches. v. Glued laminated beams can span farther than sawn '"'
timber because the allowable extreme fiber in bending stress is greater. D. Special moment connection are required for Vierendeel trusses.
209
A
G
c
D
0 0 0 0
9. Careful construction observation of long span structures is critical for which of the following reasons?
A
B
C
D
0000
I. to look for overstressing caused by temporary construction loads placed on the structure II. to check for proper construction sequence Ill. to make sure that connections are made according to the shop drawings IV. to compare on-site materials and components against the drawings and specification V. to determine that secondary members are aitached to primary members properlv.
A. I, II, and IV
C. II, Ilk IV, and V
B. II, Ill, and IV
D. all OT me above
10. What one-way system normally can span the farthest?
A. deep, long span joists C. wood arch B. flat steetl truss
A
8
C
D
0000
D. prestressed single-T
XXII. LONG SPAN STRUCTURE -TWO WAY SYSTEM
1. Select the incorrect statement about spaces frames. A. Space frames are different from many long spa'n structures because of their redundancy.
A
8
C
D
0000
B. Top and bottom grids of a space frame can run in different directions, but they usually are oriented the same way. C. Regularly spaced supports with overhands are more efficient than supports'located at the perimeter of a space frame structure. D. Space frames are economical structures because their many connections can be prefabricated. 2. Match the related systems and spans.
A
B
C
D
0000
folded plates II. hyperbolic parabolids
210
Ill. geodesic domes IV. suspended cable structure V. space frames 1. 30 to 160 feet 2. 50 to 100 feet 3. 80 to 220 feet 4. 50 to 400 feet 5. 50 to 450 feet A. 1-1, 11-2, 111-5, IV-3, V-4
C. 1-2, 11-1, 111-4, IV-5, V-3
B. 1-2, 11-3, 111-4, IV-5, V-1
D. 1-3, 11-1, 111-4, IV-4, V-2
3. A thin shell dome gets its strength and efficiency from which of the following?
A
B
C
0
0000
A meridiana! action and hoop tension B. compression, shear, and tension in the place of the dome C. distribution of hoop compression in the upper part of the dome and hoop tension in the lower part D. arch action in three dimensions 4. What describes a structure with diagonal bracing and individual arches?
A SCHWEDLER
C. CATENARY
B. THIN SHELL
D. HYPERBOLIC PARABOLOID
A
B
C
D
0000
5. Three of the structures listed above share an important property. What is this property?
A HOOPS
C. NODE
B. MERIDIAN
D. REDUNDANCY
6. What describes most pretensioned membrane structures?
A SYNCLASTIC
C. INDETERMINANT
B. ANTICLASTIC
D. LAWELLA
211
A
B
C
D
0000
7. Which of the structures listed above is the least stable under wind loads?
A. Geodesic dome
C. Preu matic
B. Space frame
D. Barrel vault
8. A dome is a very stiff structure for whichof the following reasons?
A
B
·c
0
0000
A 8
C 0
0000
A. Strain is small due to all stresses being in compression or tension.
B. The boundary of a dome is prevented from moving because of its circular shape.
C. Lateral loads are evenly distributed throughout the dome. D. Tension and compression are balanced.
9. Select the correct statements. I. labor is often the primary reason many long span
A 8
C 0
0000
structures are not economical. II. A high-rise dome in the winter experiences tension above the meridian angle of 45 degrees and compression below this point. II:
Both flat plates and barrel vaults need to have a length greater than transverse span width to be efficient.
IV. The thrust on a cable-suspended structure is directly proportional to its sag.
v
10
A structure like a suspension bridge makes the cable assume the shape of a parabola.
A. 1. 111. and B
C II, Ill, and IV
B.
D. Ill and V
! II, IV,
and V
Membranes are good structures to use because:
A
B
C
0
0000
A. They are easy to erect.
B. There is always direct, positive drainage C. They make very efficient use of material D. Their form is one of the most dramatic types of lqng span structures.
212
AREA ''B'' PART II
BUILDING MATERIALS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
AREA "B"
PART II
DIRECTION: Read the passages and answer the questions that follow. Shade the circle (e) of the correct answer to each question.
I. BUILDING MATERIALS A. CONCRETE 1. To avoid making concrete surfaces slippery. what material is used? A. CONCRETE TILE B.
ABRA~IVE:
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
C. ROUGH WOOD ON EDGES D. PLASTIC
MATERIAL IN THE TOPPING 2. An admixture which is usec.J to speed up the initial set of concrete (early removal of forms). A. DECELARATORS
C. HARD AGENTS
B. HI-TECH LIQUID
D. ACCELERATORS
3. Plain concrete surfaces which are subjected to live loads, the impact action of foot traffic, and other types of wear begin to dust and crumble at the surface, finally resulting in the destruction of the surface to prevent this. Use _ _ __ A. STONE
C. DAMP-PROOFER
B. CHEMICAL HARDENER
D SAHARA POWDER
4. The function of the admixture is to delay or extend the setting time of the cement paste in concrete. Usually used in very hot weather where hydration is accelerated by the heat, and leads the concrete to crack. This is also used for transit mix concrete that
214
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
has to be hauled in long distance to ensure that it reaches its destination in a plastic and placeable condition.
A. STOPPER
C. RETARDER
B. CONTROLLER
D. DELAYER
5. Common quality-control test of concrete, based on 7 and 28 day curing periods. Specimens are usually· cylindrical with a length equal to twice the diameter or 0.15 M. diameter and 0.30 M. height.
A. COMPRESSIVE
A B C D
0000
C. STIFFNESS TEST
STRENGTH TEST B. TENSILE STRENGTH TEST
D. BONDING TEST
6. When freshly mixed concrete is checked to ensure that the specified deflection is being attained consistently. A standard cone is 30 em. high and 20 em. diameter at the bottom and 10 em. diameter on top and open on both ends. The cone is filled in three equal layers and tamped 25 times. When cone is filled it is lifted and measure the deflection.
A. OVERFLOWING
A
B
C
0
0000
C. SLUMP TEST
TEST B. WATER TEST
D. BREAKUP TEST
7. Concrete can be considered to be an artificial stone made by binding together particles of some inert material with a paste made of cement and water. These inert material of sand, crushed stone, burnt clay are called _ _
A. UNION OF MATERIALS B. SUMMARIES
ADDITIVES B. ADD-ON MATERIALS
B
C
0
0000
C. MIXTURE OF MATERIALS D. AGGREGATES
8. In addition to the basic ingredients of concrete, other materials are often added to the mix or applied to the surface efc freshly placed concrete to produce some special result and is known as _ _ __
A. CONCRETE
A
C. CONCRETE COM E-ONS D. PLUS FACTOR CONCRETE 215
A
B
C
0
0000
9. Made from materials which must contain the proper proportions of lime, silica, alumina and iron components. Four parts of limestone to one part clay are the basic ingredients. These are mixed, burned then pulverized. A. POZZOLAN CEMENT
C. PORTLAND CEMENT
B. HI-GRADE CEMENT
D. CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
A
B
C
D
0000
Stones used for building purposes are classified according to form in which it is available commercially. 10.
includes rough fieldstone which may merely have been broken into suitable sizes, or it may include irregular pieces of stone that had been roughly cut to size usually as escombro or filling material, when used as a facing to a wall, it is laid at random meaning when no attempt is made to produce either horizontal or vertical course line.
A. CRUSHED ROCK
C. RIP-RAP STONE
B. SAND STONE
D. RUBBLE
11 . These are stones that consists of using slabs ot stone cut to dimension and thickness to cover backup walls and provide a finished exterior, like marble and granite. A. LIMESTONE
C. FLAGSTONE
B. PANELING
D. DIMENSION STONE
12. This kind of stone, when used as the facing is so called when the work requires the use of cut stone and includes broken irregular coursed, and regular coursed _ __ A. RUBBLE
C. ASHLAR
B. RANDOM
D. TRIM
13. The basic ingredient of is clay which has some specific properties such as plasticity when mixed with water, so that it can be molded or shaped; it must have sufficient tensile strength to keep its
216
A
8
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000 •
A B C D
0000
shape after foaming; and ctay particles must fuse together wheri subjected to sufficiently high temperature. This material is molded solid.
A. CHB
C. SLATE
B. ADOBE
b.
BRICK
14. These are hollow units as opposed to brick which is solid. They are made from the same materials as brick, but all are formed by extrusion in the stiff-mud process.
A. STRUCTURAL CLAY TILE
C. FURRING TILE
B. BACK-UP TILE
D. VIGAN TILES
15. Meaning ·'fired earth" is a clay product which has been used for architectural decorative purposes. since ancient Greece and Rome. Modern ____ _ is machine-extruded and molded or proposed. The machine-made product is usually referred to as CERAMIC VENEER, and is a unit with flat face and flat or ribbed back.
A. CERAMIC TILE
C. BRICKS
B. TERRA COTTA
D DECORATIVE TILE
16. The method of laying bricks in a wall in order to form some' distinctive design is referred to as the
A. DESIGNED BOND
C. FLEMISH BOND
B. HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL BOND
D. DECORATIVE TILE
A
B
C
D
0000
A 8 C D
0000
A
8
C
0
0000
B. WOOD, BOARDS
1. "DEC IDUO US" tress are trees that have broad leaves which are normally shed in the winter time. These are classed as _ _ __
A. FOREST WOODS
C. SOLID WOODS
B. STURDY WOODS
D. HARDWOODS
217
A
8
C
D
0000
2. "CONIFERS" are trees that have needles. rather than leaves and that bear their seeds in cones. These are called _ _ __
A. SOFT WOODS
C. LIGHT WOODS
B. TENDER WOODS
D. BALSA WOODS
A
B
C
D
0000
As clay is burned. steel is tempered, so lumber must be dried. 3. Lumber is strip-piled at a slope on a solid foundation. This allows air to circulate around every piece while the sloping allows water to run off quickly. This may take months to dry. A. SUN-DRIED METHOD
C. WIND-DRIED METHOD
B. AIR-DRYING
D. BLOW-DRIED METHOD
4. Expensive !.umber such as those used for furniture must be dried using this method, so that wood will not move. It must be dried artificially to a moisture content of not more than 5 to 10 percent done using an oven in a large air fight structure and may take weeks only to dry. A. ELECTRIC RAY
C. KILN-DRYING
B. HUNG-DRYING
D. FIRE-DRYING METHOD
a
5. A term used to describe wooden member built-up of several layers of wood whose grain directions are all substantially parallel, and held together with glue as fastening, commonly used for beams. gardens, posts, columns. arches. bowstring truss chords usually softwoods are used. A. STRESSED-SKIN
C. COMBINED MATERIAL
B. BOX-TYPE
D. GLU-LAMINATED TIMBER
218
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
6. When lumber is subjected to pressure and injected with chemicals or salts to insure it from rots. This is termed as _ _ __
A
B
C
D
0000
A. TREATED LUMBER C. PAINTED LUMBER B. INJECTED LUMBER
D. PRESSURIZED LUMBER
7. Plywood is made by bonding together thin layers of wood in a way that the grain of each layer is at right angles to the grain of each adjacent layer. Each layer of plywood is called a _ _ __ A. FRAMING
C. VENEER
B. SHOW-IN
D. FACING
8. A group of sheets of building materials often faced . with paper or vinyl, suitable for use as a finished surface on walls. ceilings. etc. These are flat, relatively thin in section and have been made to standard sizes. usually 1.20 x 2.40M.
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. FINISHING BOARD C. CONSTRUCTION BOARDS B. BUILDING BOARDS
D. ARCHITECTURAL BOARDS
9. A building board made from processed wood chips. Chips of controlled size are subjected to highpressure steam in pressure vessels. When the pressure is released. the chips "explode" and the cellulose and liquid are separated from the unwanted elements and then mixed into a homogenous mass and formed into a continuous board. These are pressed into a uniform. hard grainless sheets in heated process. A. STONE BOARD
C
B. HARD BOARD
D. STRONG BOARD
A
B
C
D
0000
PLY-BOARD
10. A building board made by impregnated standard board with a compound of oils and resins and baking it to polymerize the material. This board is brittle and stiff. has improved machining qualities and much greater resistance to water penetration. making it suitable for exterior use. 219
A B C D
0000
A. RIGID BOARD
C. WATERPROOF BOARD
B. FLEXI-BOARD
D. TEMPERED HARDBOARD
11. Made from three types of fiber; wood, sugar cane, and asbestos, and binder formed into a board. They are softened with live steam, sheared to break chips down into fibers.
A. INSULATING FIBERBOARD · B. TEMPERATE BOARD
C. CHIPBOARD
B. SLICED BOARD
D. SIZED-BOARD
13. A hard board made from relatively small materials The materials are graduated from coarse at the center of the board to fine at the surface to help produce a product with a smooth dense surface. Both surfaces are sanded. Uses are floor underlay and shelvings common as a base for wood veneers, plastic laminates.
A ARTICLE BOARD
C. GROUNDED BOARD
B UNIT BOARD
D. ATOMIZED BOARD
From the outer bark of· an oaktree. Granules is mixed with synthetic resin, compressed and formed into sheets from 25 mm. to 150 mm. thick and baked under pressure into rigid boards. The standard board length is only 0.91 m. (36 inches) and widths are 30, 45. 60 and 75 em. this board is exclusively for thermal insulating material and yibration control. PAPERBOARD
B CORKBOARD
C
D
0000
D. 'vVEATHERPROOF BOARD
A. PIECE WORK BOARD
A.
B
C. NOISE REDUCING BOARD
12. Large class of building board made from wood and particles and a binder often faced with veneer. Panels are made into two types, plain and patterned. Plain panels may be unsanded, sanded on one side or both. Patterned panels have one grooved surface, either evenly spaced or random.
14
A
C. SOFTBOARD D. LIGHTWEIGHT BOARD 220
A
B
C
D
0000
A B c D 0 0 0 0
A
B
C
D
0000
15. Roofing paper which are used in maktngabuilt~up roof and are usuaHy "produced in 91 em. wide rolls, in various weight from 1.3 kilos to 9.08 kilos per square. A. ROOFING ROLLS
C. ROOFING FELTS
B. ROOFING FOILS
D. ROOFING SHEETS
16. Two thicknesses of paper laminated together with a film of asphalt. Two kinds of paper is used- one is a kraft paper. The other, a mixture of ground wood pulps, treated by the sulfate and the kraft methods
A B C D
0000
A B C D
0000
A. WATER PROOFED C. TEMPERATE PAPER PAPER B. ASPHALT PAPER
D. VAPOR-BARRIER PAPER
C. METALS 1
Metal in which iron is the principal element. Steel wrought iron and stainless steel
A MINEDMETALS
('
A
B
•_,
c
<...! ',_
A
B C
,~,
(
L·
-.,
HEAVY WEIGHT METALS
B FERROUS METALS D. ANTI-RUST METALS 2 Metal 1n which it contains NO or very little iron Aluminum, copper, orass, tin, lead, zinc.
A NON-MAGNETIC METALS B TEMPERED METALS
D
0000
C. NON-FERROUS METALS D. MIXED METALS
3. High tensile strands used lor pre-stressing or post tensioning concrete. A. TENDONS
C. TEMPERATE BARS
B. WIRE MESH
D. ROLED BARS
221
A
B
C
D
0000
4. This metal is produced when pig iron is melted in such a way as to remove nearly all of the carbon and other impurities. It is easily worked and is tough and ductile. It's main use are for roofing sheets, wire and metal ornamentals. A. HAMMERED METALS
C TWISTED IRON
B. STRUCTURAL STEEL
D. WROUGHT-IRON
5. Made from new steel or from discarded railway car axles or nails. This comes in plain or deformed bars. That is, bars which have lugs or deformations rolled on the surface to provide anchorage in concrete. A. CHANNEL BARS
C. ANGLE BARS
B. STRUCTURAL STEEL
D. REINFORCING BARS
6. Another type of reinforcing material. It consists of parallel, longitudinal wi(es welded to transverse wires at regular intervals (cold drawing process).
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A. EXPANDED METAL C. WELDED WIRE FABRIC B. CYCLONE WIDE
D. GALVANIZED IRON WIRE
7. This metal is lustrous, silver-white non-magnetic, lightweight metal which is very malleable; has good thermal and electrical conductivity; a good reflector of both heat and light often anodized for better corrosion resistance, surface hardness and/or architectural color requirement. A. NICKEL SILVER
C. STAINLESS STEEL
B. ALUMINUM
D. MUNTZ METAL
8. A lustrous reddish metal, highly ductile and malleable; has high tensile strength, is an excellent electrical and thermal conductor is available in a wide variety of shapes; widely used for downspouts, electrical conductors, flashings, gutters. A. COPPER
C. BRASS
B. ZINC
D. MONEL
222
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
9. Whenaluminumisanodizedtoabrownorblackcolor this is called A. DECORATIVE SHADE
C. ANALOK
B. ALCAN-PLANAR
D. METALLIC-DYE
10. To impart strength or toughness to steel or cast iron by heating it to some temperature below the transformation point, maintaining it there for sometime then cooling it under controlled conditions. it is called _ _ __
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A
B
C
D
0000
A. HAMMERED STEELC. MOLDED STEEL B. TEMPERED STEEL D. PULLED STEEL 11. A process of coating a metal object by using powder in place of traditional solution paints for the surface treatment of steel and other metals. The process involves applying electrically charged coating materials to a grounded metal object and come in a wide range of colors form.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. LIQUID PROCESS C. POWDER-COATING B. CHEMICAL PROCESS
D. PAINTING METHOD
12. The most familiar process in coating finishes for __ . which is an electroAluminum is the chemical process that deposits an integral coating on the metal. It can include the familiar silvery coating of aluminum or a number of colors in the black or brown ranges called ANAL OK. A. ANODIZING FROCESS
C. MOULDING PROCESS
B. COLD-ROLLED PROCESS
D. CHEMICAL PROCESS
223
A
B
C
D
0000
D. GLASS, PLASTICS, SEALANTS 1. A hard brittle inorganic substance ordinarily transparent or translucent; provided by melting a mixture of silica, a flux and a stabilizer; while molten, may be blown, drawn, rolled pressed or cast to a variety of shapes.
A. GLASS
C. CELLULOID
B. PLASTIC
D. VINYL
2. A type of glass that is used to control glare and reduce solar heat. It is the product of a glass-coating process which is carried out in a large, rectangular vacuum chamber. The glass is coated with microthin layers of metallic films which provide the performance characteristtcs of the glass. This results in savings in operating costs of air-conditioning and diminishes interior glare and brightness.
A. IMAGE-GLASS
C. ARCHITECTURAL GLASS
B. REFLECTIVE GLASS
D. DIFFUSING GLASS
3. A glass that contains a pattern or texture impressed usually on one surface by a patterned roller.
A. CATHEDRAL & FIGURED GLASS
C. WIRED GLASS
B. ROUGH CAST GLASS
D. VITREOUS COLORED PLATE
4. Three to five times as strong as regular plate of the same thickness and area in resisting compressive forces and fracture due to strain or thermal shock used for swinging doors, sliding patio doors, windows in sports areas, skating rink. Thickness from 6.35 mrn., 12.70 mm., 15.88 mm., 19.06 mm. and 25.41 mm. (1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4 and 1 inch).
A. WATERPROOFED GLASS
C. TEMPERED PLATE GLASS
B. INSULATED GLASS
D. HEAT-ABSORBING GLASS
224
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
5. Widely used in the automotive industry and transportation, but now finding some uses in the building industry, like glass that can withstand firearm attack and explosions. This is made of two thicknesses of plate or sheet glass bonded by a thin, tough layer of polyvinyl butyral resin, a transparent plastic.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. TEMPERED GLASS C. FLOAT GLASS B. LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS
D. PLATE GLASS
6. This consists of two sheets of plate or sheet glass, separated by an air space and joined around the edges to produce a hermetically sealed unit. This restricts sound and condensation and reduce external noise. but still permit the entry of natural light
A.
INSULATING GLASS
B. FIGURED GLASS
A B C D
0000
C. TEMPERATE GLASS
D. WIRED GLASS
7. Comparable in many ways to uhit masonry but have the added feature of transmitting light. They are made into two separate halves, which are heat-sealed together to form a hollow unit with reasonably high thermal efficiency and sound insulation.
A. SOLID BLOCKS
C. RECTANGULAR GLASS
B. GLASS BLOCKS
D. REINFORCED GLASS
8. A large group of synthetic materials which are made from a number of common substances such as coal, salt, natural gas, cotton, wood and water. From these relatively simple chemical known as monomers, which are capable or reacting with one another chainlike molecules of high molecular weight called polymers, which can be molded, extruded, cut or worked into a great variety of objects. A. PLASTICS
C. RUBBERS
B. VINYLS
D. MAGNESITES
225
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
9. These materials are so called because they consists of three or more layers of material bonded together with plastic adhesive under high pressure. The base is made up of multiple layers of strong kraft paper, impregnated with phenolic, amino or epoxy liquid resin. This is covered with a printed patterns sheet saturated with melamine resin. A picture top sheet is also saturated with melamine resin, and in some cases a sheet of aluminum foils is inserted between the base and decorative center layer to dissipate heat and prevent marring the surface with burns. A. POLYSTERENE
C. PLASTIC LAMINATES
B. VINYLS
D. POLYURETHANE
10. A hard, impure, protein gelatin, obtained by boiling skins, hoofs and other animal substances in water, that when melted or diluted is a strong adhesive. A. PLATE
C. GLUE
B. JOINT
D. TAPES
11. These compounds are products which are used to close the surface of various materials against the penetration of water or other liquids or in some cases to prevent the escape of water through the surface. To do this, they must have some adhesive qualities and the ability to fill the surfaces pores and form a continuous skin on the surface to which they are applied sanding for wood and silicone _ _ _ _ for masonry. A. PASTE
C. FUSES
B. SEALERS
D. CLOSERS
12. To fill or close seams or crevices of a tank or window in order to make wate~light, airlight. If used for sealing glass it is known as glazing.
A. LAMINATING
C. CAULKING
B. WATER STOPPING D. MOLDING
226
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
E. INSULATION 1. To prevent hot air outside during hot summer season to enter inside and prevent cold winds to enter the house during cold months. All of these are done by the judicious use of materials to prevent the transfer of heat we call _ _ __ A. TEMPERATE INSULATION
C. HEAT INSULATION
B. THERMAL INSULATION
D. CLIMATIC INSULATION
2. A kind of insulating mate~ial that is either a fibrous type made from mineral wool or glass wool fiber and granular type made from expanded minerals such as perlite and vermiculite or granulated cork.
A. LOOSE FILL . INSULATION
C. PIECED INSULATION
B. BREAKWAY INSULATION
D. SEGMENTAL INSULATION
3. Made from some fibrous materials such as mineral wood. wood fiber, cotton fiber or animal hair. manufactured in the form of a mat 40, 50 or 60 em. in width, in 2.41 m. long controlled thicknesses of 2.54, 3.81, 50.82, 76.23, 10.16 em. some have a paper back on one side. This is used where large areas are to be insulated. If it comes only or restricted to 2.41 m. long it is called a "BATT' for installation between stud spacings.
A. SHEET INSULATION
C. COATED INSULATION
B. ROLLED-UP INSULATION
D. BLANKET INSULATION
4. Made from organic fiber-wood, cane, straw or cork. The wood and cane raw material is first pulped, after which it is treated with waterproofing chemicals. The fibers are then formed into sheets of various thicknesses and cut into standard lengths. These are called strawboards and corkboards in to market.
A. RIGID INSULATION C. STRUCTURAL BOARD INSULATION BOARD B. HARD INSULATION D. ARCHITECTURAL BOARD INSULATION BOARD 227
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
5. Made from such materials as aluminum or copper foil or sheet metal with bright surfaces that does not absorb heat. A. IMAGING INSULATION
C. ANTI-GLARE IN.SULATION
B. DIFFUSER INSULATION
0. REFLECTIVE INSULATION
6. This is a polyurethane product made by combining a poly isocyanate and a polyester resin. This type of insulation can be applied either by pouring wherein a carefully measured amount of the mixture is deposited in an existing cavity or by spraying wherein a number of thin coats of this material applied, one over the other with sufficient time being left between each application for this material to set up.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. FOAMED IN PLACE-C. SITE POURED
B. CAST IN PLACE
D. SITE SPRAYED
7 This type of insulation is so called because the units are relatively stiff and inelastic. In most cases, inorganic materials are used in their manufacture. This include'mineral wool with binder, framed plastic, . cellular, glass, foamed concrete, cellular hard rubber, shredded wood and cement. Suitable for use in roofdeck insulation. Foamed plastic insulation made from expanded polystyrene and polyurethane formed into slabs like styropor is in this type.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. SOLID INSULATION C. BLOCK OR RIGID SLAB INSULATION
B. STIFFENED INSULATION
D. HARDPRESSED INSULATION
8 Materials used as polyurethane foam asbestos fibers mixed with inorganic fibers, vermiculite aggregate with a binder such as portland cement or gypsum and perlite aggregate using gypsum as a binder. Machines are used for blowing these insulations into place. As a result, the shape or irregularity of the surface being insulated is of little consequence. This type of insulation also seals cracks and crevices to prevent dust from shifting through. A. SI?LASHED-ON
INSULATION B. SPRAYED-ON INSULATION
C. BLOWN-UP INSULATION D. SPATTERED INSULATION 228
A
B
C
D
0000
DIRECTION: Matching type. Match the material shown at the le\t side to those that are shown on the right side. Write the correct letter at the parenthesis provided. F. DOORS, HARDWARES 1 . FLUSH DOOR ....................... (
A. A door mounted on track which slides in a horizontal direction usually parallel to one wall.
2. PANEL DOOR ........................ (
B.
A protective plate surrounding the keyhole of a door or a light switch (also a flange on a pipe)
3. FRENCH DOOR ................... (
c.
A door that swings in both directions When mounted on pivot hardware or special double acting hinges.
4. DUTCH DOOR ..................... (
D. The door can be opened whether you are inside or outside the garage, or inside your car. Just click the gadget in your hand and the transmitter code automatically opens the garage door.
E.
5. SLIDING DOOR .....
6. SLIDING POCKET DOOR ................................... (
7. DOUBLE ACTING DOOR .................................... (
229
A smooth- surfaced door having laces which are plain and conceal its rods and stiles or other structure. When used inside. it is of hollow core, when used for exterior, it is of solid core.
F. A door having glass panels from the top and to the bottom nail.
G. A rigid overhead door which opens as an entire unit by using a special spring attached to the sides, with an overhead horizontal track.
8. ACCORDION DOOR ............. (
H. These are devices that automatically return a door to its closed position after it is opened. They also control the distance a door can be opened. These can be sur1ace mounted on the door and/or the frame
9. REVOLVING DOOR .............. (
I. An electronic gadget that projects an invisible light beam across the approach of the door. If a person approaches the door, he interrupts the invisible beam. The opener is activated and the door automatically slides open.
10. OVERHEAD SWING-UP GARAGE DOOR .................... (
J. A door made up of small hori-
11. REMOTE CONTROL ............. (
K. A door which slides inside a hollow of the wall.
12. ROLL-UP DOOR ................... (
L. A hinged door which is divided
13. HINGE .................................. (
M. A hinged door consisting of a system of panels which are hung from an overhead track when the door is open, the faces.of the panels close.
zontal interlocking metal slats which are guided in a track. The configuration coils an overhead drum which is housed at the head of the opening, either manual or motor-driven
14. AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSETS ........ :..................... (
230
into two parts. The upper part can be opened while the lower portion is closed.
N. A door having tiles, nails and sometimes muntins, which form one or more frames around recessed thinner panels.
15. ESCUTHCHEON .................. (
0. A movable joint used to attach support and turn a door about a pivot. consists of two plates joined together by a pin which support the door and connect it to its frame, enabling it to swing open or close.
16. ELECTRIC EYE ..................... (
P. An exterior door consisting of four leaves (at 90 9 to each other) which pivot about a common vertical axis within a cylindrically shaped vestibule, thereby eliminating drafts from outside.
G. WINDOWS, HARDWARES 1. MULLION ............................... (
A. A window sash opening on hinges that are generally attached to the upright side of its frame
2 STILE .................................... (
B. This window system eliminates requirements for glass suspension from above. It is unique, thoroughly tested floor load system and requires no special structural steel members tor hanging glass walls (It has no aluminum frame to obstruct the view.) It can be 9 M. high and 19 mm. thick.
3. AWNING .............................. (
C. A clasp for a door, lid, etc. one passing over a staple and fastened by a pin or a padlock in this case, the staple is the movable lock, turned to close or opened by a key.
4. CASEMENT ........................... (
231
D. An electronic lockset wherein the room is automatically closed when the door is pulled and the deadbolt is in place. The door can be opened not by a key, but by a plastic key card 1 3/4" x 1/2" (44.46 mm. x 12.70 mm.) (1/32") thickness
which has a magnetic black stripe underneath it. Used like an ATM card, when inserted, a green light flushes then pull it at once and turn the knob to open the door. 5. FRENCH WINDOW ............... (
E.
6. ORIELor BAY WINDOW ....................... (
F. This is used in a cabinet to
A hardware or handle attached to a drawer or a closet door to draw or tug them open.
take hold of door when closed. It is either a friction magnetic or bullet type. 7. MULLIONLESS ALL GLASS WINDOWWALL .................... (
G.
A hinge hanging lipped or overlapping cabinet doors available in overlay, twin and inset. These hinges does not necessitate to use catches. It is best used when the edge of the cabinet door touches a wall and the hinge is to be placed there.
8. NIGHT LATCH ....................... (
H.
A hinge used for closet doors than is 1" x 1" (0.25 x 0.25) and can be continuous up to 1.80 M.
9. FOOT BOLT ........................... (
I. A vertical member, as of stone or wood. between the lights of a window.
10 HAS PLOCK ........................... (
J.
11. PIANO HINGE ....................... (
K. An alcove of a room project-
A rootlike shelter of a canvas or other material extending over a doorway from the top of a window in order to provide protection, as from the sun. Also a window when opened from its lower part and extends or opens with an angle at the top part.
ing from an outside wall and having its own windows. One
232
cantilevered or corbeled out from a wall. 12. CONCEALED OR HIDDEN HINGES .................. (
L. Any of various upright members framing panels or the like, as in a system of paneling, a paneled door, window sash, chest of drawers.
13. ELECTRONIC DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .................... (
M.
A window extending to the floor, closed by french doors and usually usable as an entrance or exit usually made of small panels
14. CATCHES ............... .
N. A door lock operated from the inside by a knob and from the outside by a key
15. KNOBS ...... .
0. A movable rod or bar which when slid into a socket fastens a door In this case it is fastened to a door to bolt to the floor and is closed using the toot
P. A proJectmg part. usually rounded. forming the handle of a door. drawer or t.,e like.
16. PULLERS ............. .
H. ABILITIES> QUALITIES, CAPACITIES, PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 1. RESILIENCE ........................ (
A. Rigid or firm. difficult or impossible to bend or flex like an I beam
2. MALLEABILITY ...................... (
B. To force or press out, to form (metal or plastic) with a desired cross section by forcing it through a die.
3. BRITTLENESS ...................... (
C. When cement and water are mixed and ttF c:;m8nt particles tend to g<:ar;c;r ;n clumps.
4. PLASTICITY .......................... (
D. The caoacity of a material to recover its original shape at-
233
ter deformation as in plastic vinyl tiles.
5. ELASTICITY .......................... (
E.
6. PERMEABILITY ..................... (
F. This will make a material break
To combine, unite or blend together by melting together two materials such as welded iron structures. Reinforced concrete, or plastic laminated plywoods.
suddenly like ceramic tile or an asbestos vinyl tile.
7. DUCTILITY ............................ (
G.
Something that binds, fastens, confines or holds together. Adhesion between two objects as concrete and reinforcing bars.
8. ADHESIVENESS ................... (
H.
Capable of being extended or shaped by hammering or by pressure from rollers like cast iron.
9. COHESIVENESS .................. (
I. Capable of being hammered out thin, as certain metals like tin. Capable of being drawn out into wire or treads, as gold. Able to undergo change of form without breaking.
10. STIFFNESS ........................... (
J. Capability of molded or shaped or being made to assume a desired form.
11. CONDUCTIVITY .................... (
K.
12. FLOCULATE .......................... (
L. To pass through the substance
Ability to resist or overcome depression. The property of a substance that enables it to change its length, volume or shape in direct response to a force (a wire will stretch, a beam will bend).
or mass, to penetrate through the pores, interstices, to be diffused to, saturate. The property or state of being permeable.
234
I
II
l •I
13. BONDING .............................. (
M. To form an object by pouring metal, plaster, etc. is a fluid state into a mold and letting it harden.
14. FUSION, FUSING.........
N. The ability of a material to fix itself and cling or sticking together tightly to one another. Same material.
. (
0. The ability of a material to fix 1tself and cling to an entirety different material to stick to ad-
15. EXTRUSION ...
here. To glue. P. The property or power oflransrnittmg heat, electricity or
)
16. CASTING
sound
I. MATERIALS A~D SUPPLIERS OR MANUFACTURERS )
1. PLASTIC LAMINATE ............. ( Z. VINYL 11LES .. / ......... , .
A. Vasquez Commodities B. Phelps Dodge, Phils PHILFLEX
(
3. CORK SHt:ETS
C. Hi Eles Industrial Corp.
4. MARBLE SLABS
0. Republic Asahi Corp.
S. PAINTS ..................... 6
TH~RMAL
E. Formica
(
& ACOUSTIC
F. Atlanta Industries, Inc., Moldex Products, Inc.
INSUlATION
1.
G. AVO Nlarketing
PLYWOOD
H. Jardine- Davies
8. STEEL BARS.
!. Campos Rueda
9. GLASS .........
10. PVC PIPES .............
J. Boysen, Dutch Boy
(
11. LONG SPAN ROOFING ........ (
}
K, Oelta Faucet Co , W.M.H. Rennolds Co. 1nc.
12. TEGULA ROOFING TlLES .... (
)
L. "ERO" Corporation
235
13. FLOOR & WALL CERAMIC TILES ................... (
M. Asia Pacific Gondek, Int.
Insulation
14. "ARMSTRONG" ACOUSTICAL CEILING ................................. (
N. Apo Quartz
15. ELECTRICAL WIRES ............ (
0. Teresa
16. BATHROOM FIXTURES ....... (
P. Philmetal Coating Corp.
17. PLUMBING & SANITARY PRODUCTS, FAUCETS ........ (
Q. Sta Clara
18. SOLIGNUM WOOD PRESERVATIVES ................. (
R. Saniwares
19. THOMPSON WOOD PROTECTOR & FIRESTOPPER FIRE-RETARDANT ............... (
S. Mariwasa, First Lepanto
20. ESCALATORS, ELEVATORS ......................... (
T. Pag-asa Steel Works, Inc.
J. PAINTING 1. PAINT ........................ (
A. Used for superior resistance to abrasion, grease, alcohol, water, and fuels. They are often used for wood floors especially for gymnasiums and for antigraffiti coatings
2. VARNISH ..
····· (
B. Materials used to apply color to wood surfaces. They are intended to impart color without concealing or obscuring the grain and not to provide a protective covering.
3. QUICK-DRY ENAMELS ........ (
C. A high quality rust inhibitive primer formulated to prepare iron and steel surfaces for subsequent coats.
. ..
236
4. SHELLAC ............................... (
D. The purpose of this material is to close the surface of the wood and prevent the absorption of succeeding finish coats. It may be applied to bare wood that has been sanded smooth or applied over the stain or filler.
5. LACQUERS ........................... (
E. A mixtuie consisting of vehicles or binders with or without coloring pigments, adjusted and diluted with correct amounts and types of additives and thinners which when applied on a surface, forms an adherent continuous film which provides protection, decoration, sanitation, identification and other functional properties.
.(
F. To be used on all non-painted concrete, synthetic finishes, rubble, brick and wash-out finishes as a protection from absorption of water and prevent moss, alkali, fungi to destroy the surface used for bricks, limestones, etc.
7. FILLERS ........................... (
G. A solution of resin in drying oil or in a volatile solvent such as alcohol in turpentine. It contains no pigments and constitutes a transparent liquid to provide protective surface coating at the same time they allow the original surface to show but add a lustrous and glossy finish to it.
8. SEALERS .............................. (
H. A two-component water-based acrylic recommended for use on concrete floorings for garage. It offers outstanding durability, chemical and abrasion resistance that can withstand automotive tire.imprints. Used also for traffic markings.
6. OIL-WOOD STAINS
237
I. This is the only liquid protec-
9. NEUTRALIZER ...................... (
tive coating containing a resin of animal origin. The resin is crushed and dissolved in denatured alcohol to produce orange color. By bleaching the resin pure white liquid is produced. Used as a seal coat over stains and fillers. or as a finish in itself. 10. SILICONE WATER REPELLANT .......................... (
J. This allows for a "seamless wall paper alternative". It provides decorator with polychromatic patterns that can be used to contrast or accent plain paint finishes. May be applied as a single color spray pattern or intermixed with other colors, to provide polychromatic patterns. Only one spray coat is needed.
11. ACRYLIC LATEX PAINT ..
K. A new product from synthetic materials to take the place of varnish for clear finishes Combination of synthetic resins and plasticizers are dissolved in a mixture of volatile solvent which evaporate the protective covering.
12. URETHANE.
L. These are tmlshing materials
13. RED LEAD PRIMEFi
M. A water based, full bodied paint with a well-balanced formula that lends elegance and provides excellent protection indoors. It works well on concrete and wood ceili11gs and wa.lings, creating a beautiful textured finis!l comes only in white. To color, just paint over
which are used on wood surfaces. particularly those with open grain, to fill pores and prov1de a perfectly smooth. uniform surface for varnish or lacquer
'238
it with latex for concrete or enamel for wood. 14. MULTI-COLOR PAINT ........... (
N. When pigment is added to a varnish, this is the result.
15. TEXTURED FINISH TOPCOAT ............................. (
0. For masonry, with excellent
16. CONCRETE FLOOR EPOXY COATING ................. (
P. A liquid solution applied to new
hiding durability and dirt pickup resistance. It finishes a painting job in less coats to be applied to new masonry after 14 days to 28 days.
masonry or plastered wall painting to neutralize the alkali and acid Solution to ensure adhesion.
K. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1. Which of the following is not a copper alloy? A. MONEL METAL
C. NICKEL SILVER
B. MUNTZ METAL
D. ALL ARE COPPER ALLOYS
2. Which of these water-related soil problems would be the most important to solve for a large building being planned with a two-level basement used for meeting rooms? A. uplift pressure on the lowest slab B. moisture penetration caused by hydrostatic pressure C. deterioration of foundation insulation D. reduced load-carrying capacity of the soil
239
A
B
C
0
0000
3. In the sketch shown, where should the v::\P()r barrier be located?
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
c 0
.:luestions 4 and 5 refer to the following sketch:
4. What is the purpose of the block shown at 3? A. to counteract the thrust of the stair
B. to provide a nailing base for the riser board C. to give lateral stability to the vertical supports D. to help locate and lay out the stair
240
A
B
C
D
0000
5. The parts identified as 1 and 2 respectively are: I. tread II. nosing
IV. ledger
v.
A
B
c
D
0000
stringer
Ill. carriage A. Ill and I
c.
B. V and I
D. IV and V
Ill and II
6. Tempered glass is required in:
A
B
C
D
0000
A. entry doors
B. sidelights with sills below 18 inches C. glazing within 1 foot of doors
D. all of the above 7. If a soil is analyzed as being primarily silty, what characteristics could you expect?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. very fine material of organic matter B. rigid particles with moderately high bearing. capacity
C. particles with some cohesion and plasticity in their behavior D. smaller particles with occasional plastic behavior
8. What type of glass would probably not be appropriate
A
B
C
D
0000
for a ten-story building?
A. tempered
C. heat-strengthened
B. annealed
D. laminated
9. A fire-rated gypsum board partition must always consist of: A. type X gypsum board B. full height construction C. attachment according to testing laboratory standards D. all of the at;K>ve
241
A
B
C
D
0000
10. Which mortar type has the highest compressive strength? A.M
c. 0
B. N
D. S
11. What type of brick would most likely be specified for an eastern exposure in New Hampshire?
A. NW
C. MW
B. FBX
D. SW
12. In order to achieve the most uniform, straight-grain appearance in wood paneling, you should specify: A. plain slicing
C. quarter slicing
B. rotary slicing
D. half-round slicing
13. Asphalt-impregnated building paper is used under siding
to:
A
B
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
A. improve thermal resistance B. increase the water resistance of the wall C. act as a vapor barrier D. all of the above 14. Which area in the masonry wall assembly shown would be most susceptible to water penetration?
c
242
15. Concrete expansion joints should be located at a maximum spacing of: A. 1.50 M
C. 6.00 M
B. 3.00 M
D. 7.50 M
16. Which of the following are characteristics of stainless?
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
I. It cannot be welded. II. It should not be in contact with copper. Ill. It is an alloy of steel and chromium. IV. It is only available with mechanical and coated fin ishes. V. It is just as strong as bronze. A. ·1, II, and Ill
C. II, IV, and V
B. II, Ill, and IV
D. Ill, IV, and V
L. MISCELANNEOUS QUESTIONS 1 . The horizontal member that holds individual pieces of shoring in place is called a:
A. wale
C. raker
B. breast board
D. none of the above
2. When the architect is on the job observing concrete placement, what is most likely to be of least concern?
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
c
D
0000
A. the height of a bottom-dump bucket above the forms as the concrete is being placed
B. the type of vibrator being used
c.
the location of the rebar in relation to the forms
D. the method of support of the forms 3. A nominal3" x 6" (25 mm classified as:
x 150 mm) piece of lumber is
A
B
c
D
0000
A. timber
C. dimension
B. board
D. yard
243
4. Select the incorrect statementfrom among the following:
A.
The larger the pennyweight, the longer the nail.
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
B. Design values for bolts are dependent on the thick ness of the wood in which they are located. C. Split ring connectors are often used for heavily loaded wood structures that must be disassembled. D. In general, lag bolts have more holding power than large screws. 5. What cement would be used in slip form construction? A. Type I
C. Type Ill
B. Type II
D. Type IV
6. Which of the following most affects lumber strength? A. split
C. check
B. wane
D. shake
7. What is used to measure the rate of transfer in a thickness of material? A. k
C. R
B. r
D. C
8. Which of the folowing would be at least appropriate fot insulating a steel stud wall?
A polystyrene boards
C. fiberglass batts
B. rock wooi
D. perlite board
9. Three courses of a bull str~tcherusing a standard brick and standard mortar joints equals what dimension?
A. 8 inches
C. 15 inches
B. 12 inches
D. 24 inches
244
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
10. Which of the sketches depicts a half-surface hinge?
A B C D
0000
A.
B.
c.
D.
11. Select the incorrect ~tatement concerning fire-rated door assemblies.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. Hi11ges must always be the ball-bearing type. B .. Under some circumstances a closer is not needed. C. Labeling is required for both the door and frame D. The ma).Cimum width is 1.20 M. 12. Which of the following would be most appropriate for damproofing an above-grade concrete wall with a moderately rough surface?
A. cernentitious coating
C. synthetic rubber
B. bituminous coating
D. silicone coating
13. The depth of elevator lobbies serving four or more cars should generally not be less than: A. -6 feet(1.81 M) B. 11/2 times the depth of the car C. 10 feet (3.00 M) D. 3 times the depth of the car
245
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
·14. Which of the following would probably not be reasons for using a copper roof?
A
B
C
D
0000
I. worKability II. resistance to denting Ill. cost IV. corrosion resistance A. land ll
C. ll and lll
B. land Ill
D. Ill and IV
15. If cracking occurred along the joints of a brick wall in a generally diagonal direction from a window corner up to the top of the wall, which of the following would most likely be the cause?
c D 0000 A
B
A
B
A. lack of the vertical control joints B. horizontal reinforcement placed too far apart C. poor grouting of the activity D. inadequate mortar
16. What is used to keep water from penetrating an expansion joint at the intersection of a roof and wall? A. base flashing
C. sealant
B. counter flashing
D. coping
c
D
0000
M. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1. The portion of paint that evaporates or dries is called the: A. binder
C. solvent
B. pigment
D. vehicle
246
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
2. 'In the partial plan of a concrete basement shown, what would be the best way to improve the economy of the concrete form work?
A
B
C
D
0000
2
.·. 0
I
.' B ----
I
:'..,.. -----------
...
·a~~-
.
---
I I
A. ma.ke the column square B. separate the pilaster at A2 from the wall C. form the pilaster at A1 with a diagonal D. make the wall along grid line 1 a uniform thickness 3. Structural steel typically contains what percentage of carbon?
A. above 2.0 percent
C. from 0.20 to 0.50 percent
B. from 0.5~ to 0.80 percent
D. from 0.06 to 0.3 percent
4. What is used to minimize corner chipping of concrete?
A. CHAMBER STRIP
C. ISOLATION JOINT
B. BACKSET
D. RUSTICATION STRIPS
5. What part of a panel door is the lockset mounted in? A. TERNE PLATE
C. STRETCHER
B. STILE
D. COORDINATOR
247
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
6. What is the building code requirement for pairs of exit doors with astragals?
A. BOOKMATCHING
C. STRONG BACK
C. SEQUENCE MATCH
D. COORDINATOR
7. What is the most important fire-resistant property of a CMU partition? A. EQUIVALENT THICKNESS
C. EFFlORESCENCE
B. DENSIFICATION
D. HEAT OF HYDRATION
8. What is a requirement for an opening for a door in a masonry partition?
A. CYLINDER TEST
C. SURCHARGING
B. ANNEALING
D. BOND BEAM
9. Galvanic action can be avoided by:
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
A. using neoprene spacers B. increasing the thickness of the materials C. reducing contact with dripping water D. all of the above 10. A geared traction elevator would be most for which of the following applications?
appropriat~
A
8
C
D
0000
A. a five -storv medical office building B. a sixteen-story office building C. a four-story department store D. an eight-story apartment .building 11. In determining the width and gage of gypsum board framing, what are some of the important considerations? I. thickness of the gypsum board II. spacing of studs Ill. height of the wall
248
A
8
C
D
0000
IV. size of piping and other built-in items V. number of layers to be supported A. I, Ill, IV and V
C. II, Ill, IV and V
B. II, Ill, and IV
D. all of the above
12. What is the purpose of the gravel in the drawing shown?.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. to reduce hydrostatic pressure B. to keep the soil from direct contact with the concrete C. to provide a firm base for concrete bearing
b.
to hold the membrane in place and protect it
13. Joining two metals with heat and a filler metal with a melting point above 800 2 F (409QC) is called wl1at?
A. annealing
C. brazing
B. soldering
D. welding
14. Which of the following is not true about veneer stone? A. It can be fabricated 3/8 inches thick (9.53 mm) B. Copper or steel clamps are used to anchor the stone to the substrate. C. Only special types of portland cement mortar or seal ants should be used in the joints. 249
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
D. It can be supported on masonry, concrete, steel, or wood framing. 15. Which of the following is the most important consideration in detailing a wood strip floor?
A. flame spread rating
C. nailing method
B. expansion space at the perimer
D. moisture protection
A
B
C
D
0000
from below
16. In the window elevation shown, what is represented at point 1?
A
B
C
D
0000
1-...,.
t///
'' ''
l//
'' '
A. mullion
C. stile
B. muntin
D. rail
/
/
/
'
/
''
'
'
N. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1. Which of the following are of most importance in wood frame construction? I. sheathing type II. differential shrinkage Ill. location of defects IV. firestops V. headers A. I, II, and Ill
C. II, Ill, and IV
B. I, II, and IV
D. Ill, IV, and V
250
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
2. Which type of lock would be most appropriate for an entry door into an office suite?
A. cylindrical lock
C. mortise lock
B. unit lock
D. rim lock
3. Which of the following an~ true about built-up roofing?
I. It may be applied on slopes from 0 to 1 inch per foot. (.075 M or 75mm per Meter)
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
II. They are best applied only over nailable decks. Ill. The top layer should be protected from ultraviolet degradation. IV. Proper installations is more important than the num ber of plies. V. Roof insulation can either be placed above or below the roofing.
A. I, Ill and V only
C. II, Ill and IV only
B. I, II, IV, and V only
D. Ill, IV and V only
4. Ceramic mosaic tile in a public shower room is best installed over:
A
B
C
D
0000
A. water-resistant gypsum board B. a bed qf portland cement mortar C. concrete block walls coated with a waterproofing membrane D. rigid cement composition board made for this pur pose 5. What are two important considerations in designing a fire-rated ceiling? I. hold-down clips II. the structural slab Ill. thermal insulation IV. composition of the floor/ceiling assembly V. style of grid
251
A
B
C
D
0000
A. I and IV
C. II and IV
B. I and Ill
D. Ill and V
6. What is the primary purpose of the voids in a cored slab? A. to allow electrical services to be concealed in the slab
A
8
C
D
0000
B. to make a more efficient load-carrying member C. to make erection easier D. to minimize weight 7. Which of the vertical joints shown would be appropriate jor a concrete basement wall?
A
B
C
D
0000
II II II II II //
~
/ /
,, ' ,,
I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I 1·1
I I
I I I I
1__1
I I
B.
A.
c.
8. A reasonable elevator capacity tor a medium-size office building is:
A. 905 kilos
C. 1,810 kilos
B. 1,357.5 kilos
D. 2,715 kilos
9. Select the incorrect statements about steel doors. I. Fire ratings up to 11/2 hours are possible. II. The frames are normally 12, 14, or 16 gage depend ing on use. Ill. Steel doors must be used with steel frames. IV. Hinges or offset pivots can be used with steel doors.
252
D.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
v.
The standard thickness is 13/8 inches.
A. I and V
C. II and IV
B. I, Ill, and V
D. II, Ill, and V
10. The allowable stress ratings for lumber in the building
A
B
C
D
0000
codes are based primarily on:
A size groups
C. types of defects
B. species
D. all of the above
11. Millwork for installation in the southwestern part of the .United States should have a maximum moisture content of: A. less than 5 percent
C. 5 to 10 percent
B. 4 to 9 percent
D. 8 to 13 percent
12. On floors subject to deflection, both terrazzo and granite installations should include: A. a membrane
C. thin-set mortar
B. a latex additive in the mortar
D. a sand cushion
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
II. METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION 1. When a concrete is poured at the jobsite whose beams, slabs and columns are set in forms or scaffoldings and later on removed after the concrete hardens or is cured. This system is classified into two general types. The oneway slab system and the two-way slab system. This method of construction is called the _ __ A. PRECAST CONCRETE
C. SLIP FORM METHOD
B. CAST-IN PLACE
D. TILT-UP CONSTRUCTION
2. This is a method of construction which is performed right on the construction site. The system enables the wall or floor panels to be precast in engineered steel forms under strict procedures of quality and precision. Conduits for
253
A
B
C
D
0000
electrical wires and water pipes are non-exposed by systematic embedment during casting. Crawler and mobile cranes utilize special lifting devices. This enables the quick and efficient erection and assembly of a housing unit. A. COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
C. TILT-UP CONSTRUCTION
B. FLOOR DECKING
D. SLIP FORM METHOD
3. This method has been utilized extensively in agricultural and industrial complexes like silos, elevator cores, etc. It utilizes very much less framework, no scaffolding at all and some braces. The whole form system is distributed over several hydraulic jacks.
A. FLOOR DECKING
C. CAST-IN PLACE
B. PRE-TENSIONED
D. SUP-FORM METHOD
4. Prefabricated normally reinforcea concrete which have been poured and cured in a factory rather than in place on the site, then· delivered to the jobsite by trucks and installed by welding together all the components.
A. PRE-CAST CONCRETE
C. COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
B. POST-TENSIONED TECHNIQUE FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
D. SPANTRESS
5. Made of high strength zinc-coated steel decking which acts as both permanent formwork and positive tensile reinforcing steel in one-way reinforced concrete slab construction for second level to high floor decking. It mechanically and chemically bond on concrete slab to form a solid flooring panel and as a ceiling below. A. SPANSTRESS
C. FLOOR DECKING
B. TILT-UP CONSTRUCTION
D. PRE-CAST WAFFLE SLABS SYSTEM
6. Any structural system consisting of two or more materials designed to act together to resist loads. This system of construction is employed to utilize the best characteristics of the individual materials. Reinforced concrete is the most typical of this system of construction, but others
254
c D 0000 A
B
c D 0000 A
B
c D 0000 A
B
A
B c
D
0000
include steel deck and concrete, concrete slab and steel beam systems, and open-web steel joists with wood chords.
A. PRE-STRESSED
C. LIFT-SLAB
B. COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM
D. POST-TENSIONED
7. This is a system designed to fit your requirements instead of trying to make you fit its requirements. Floor and roof slabs are cast one on top of the other. After a short curing time, they are raised to their final positions by hydraulic jacks and secured to vertical supports.
A. LIFT-SLAB BUILDING SYSTEM
C. PRE-CAST WAFFLE SLAB SYSTEM
B. PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
D. POST-TENSIONED TECHNIQUE
8. A method wherein the reinforcement, in the form of hightensile steel strands called tendons, is first stretched through the form or casting bed between two end abutments on anchorages. Concrete is then poured into the form, encasing the strands. As the concrete sets, it bonds to the tensioned steel; when it has reached a specific strength, the ends of the tension strands are released. These pre-stresses the concrete, putting it under compression and creating built-in tensile strength having been pre-stressed.
A. CAST-IN PLACE
C. LIFT-SLAB METHOD
B. SPANSTRESS
D. PRE-TENSIONED TECHNIQUE FOR PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
9. This system involves placing and curing a pre-cast member which contains normal reinforcing and in addition, a number of channels through which poststressing cables or rods called tendons may be passed, one side is anchored securely at the end and one side is held by a cone. After concrete has hardened to the desired strength, the cone is fitted to a hydraulic jack and is pulled to the allowable strength, then a small steel plate is wedged in between the cone and concrete so as the stretche9 tendons will not go back to its normal position.
255
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. PRE-CAST WAFFLE SLAB SYSTEM
C. PRE-CAST CONCRETE SYSTEM
B. POST-TENSIONED TECHNIQUE FOR PRESTRESSED CONSTRUCTION
D. COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM
10. A basic principle of design in which stresses are built into a structural element, such as a beam, in order to offset load carrying stresses. The stresses directly oppose the stresses created when a load is applied to the beam, and in effect, tend to "cancel out" the load stresses. In this case, high tensile strength strand or tendons is used.
A. POST-TENSION TECHNIQUE
C. LIFT SLAB METHOD
B. PRE-CAST CONCRETE
D. PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE or (Integrated Bldg. System)
11. This modular pre-cast post-tensioned slab system is the first application of two-way post-tensioning in a pre-cast concrete floor system. It consists of singular square precast concrete modular elements laid out in checkerboard pattern and integrated together into the structural flooring system of a building by means of post-tensioning in two perpendicular directions. A. PRE-CAST WAFFLE SLAB SYSTEM
C. SLIP FORM METHOD
B. PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
D. LIFT SLAB BUILDING SYSTEM
12. This method speeds up construction, and saves on expensive equipment since it takes cranes out of the way. Pre-stressed concrete t-joist floor and roof system is more compact and light-weight, easier to transport and handle. This can be used with filler blocks or plywood forms, eliminates scaffoldings to the minimum. Length goes from 3.00 M. to 9.00 M. and can be carried easily by two men. A. PRE-TENSIONING TECHNIQUE
C~ SPANSTRESS
B. TILT-UP CONSTRUCTION
D. SLIP FORM
256
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
AREA ''B'' PART Ill
UT I L IT I ES
1. SANITARY AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT
AREA "B"
PART Ill
UTILITIES
DIRECTION: Read the passages below and answer the questions that follow. Shad& the circle (•) below the letter of the correct answer to each question.
1. SANITARY AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT A. WATER SUPPLY 1. A method of purifying water wherein particles of matters that are suspended in the water are allowed to stay in a container so that they will settle in the bottom, then drawing the water out, leaving these matters in the container. A. SEDIMENTATATION
C. SEPARATION
B. SETTLEMENT
D. COLLECTION
2. Water is treated by giving to kill the harmful bacteria present and to cure the turbid taste or mudtaste, remove clay, salts, iron, etc. commonly used treating liquids is chlorine.
A. AIR PRESSURE
C. LIQUID PURIFIER
B. CHEMICAL TREATMENTS
D. MEDICINAL TABLETS
3. Water is purified by
. In various process, so as to remove the particles of vegetable matter, mud and other particles of matter present in the water, most commonly used materials are sand and gravel.
A. SILTATION
C. ABSORPTION
B. SIEVING
D. FILTRATION
258
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
4. Raw water is made to pass on pipes of tiny sieves and exposed to air of fine mist to purify it. This is called the method.
A. SPRAYING
C. AERATION
B. DRYING
D. SPLASHING
5. A is a water equipment used whenever the water supply at its natural pressure cannot be directly piped to a building, tank or reservoir.
6.
7.
A. GENERATOR
C. PRESSURE TANK
.B. PUMP
D. BOOSTER
. consist of a piston traveling up and down within a cylinder which is connected with a pipe extending down into the source. The piston and the bottom of the cylinder are each provided with a valve opening upward. Upon the piston's upstroke, valve ·a· closes and valve 'b' opens. Upon the piston's downstroke valve 'a' opens and 'b' closes. A. SUCTIONPUMP
C. UFTPUMP
B. AIR PUMP
D. JUMP PUMP
pump is used to deliver water at a point higherJhan the position of the pump itself. When the plunger descends, the valve 'a' is closed and the water in the cylinder is forced out through the valve 'b' and up to the storage. When the plunger is raised. valve 'b' is closed and 'a' open to admits water to the cylinder.
A. FORCE PUMP
C. ELEVATED PUMP
B. STRUCTURAL PUMP
D. PLUNGER PUMP
8. This is a kind of pump attached to the end of deep well pipe enclosed in a casing where the pump is capable of functioning while submerged. A. UNDERGROUND PUMP
C. SUBMARINE PUMP
B. REVERSIBLE PUMP
D. SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
259
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
9. A reservoir, tank or vessel for storing or holding water or other liquids.
10.
A. CESSPOOL
C. CISTERN
B. SWIMMING POOL
D. SEPTIC TANK
may be used either for the collection of water without consideration of pressure, or for storing water under air pressure or under a static head for future distribution by pneumatic or gravity means materials used are PVC, G. 1., reinforced concrete, stainless steel or plain steel. A. CISTERN
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
C. STORAGE TANK
B. UNPRESSURIZED D. WATER TANK TANK 11. A is a tank constructed of riveted or welded steel plate; the larger tanks often being divided into two compartments. They should be large enough to contain at least one day's supply for the entire building in case. the city main is temporaril~ shut off. The pipe from the pump to the tank should be across connected to the city main so that the water may be pumped directly from the main in case of fire. These tanks are used so that the pneumatic tank or other pumps sucks the water from this tank and not from the public main, so that it will not deprive the neighbors of water due to pressure. 1\.
SIPPING TANK
B. SUCTION TANK
A
B
C
D
0000
C. AIRTANK D. PLUNGER TANK
12. A tank using air pressure from a suction tank to distribute water for tall buildings which cannot be reached by normal pressure.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. PNEUMATIC TANK C. FORCE PUMP B. AIR-PRESSURE
D. POWER PUMP
13. Water is distributed from the normal water pressure coming from the public water main, for low rise buildings. A. VERTICAL FEED
C. POSITIVE SYSTEM
B. ANTIGRAVITY SYSTEM
D. UPFEED SYSTEM
260
A
B
C
D
0000
14. By gravity, water is distributed from overhead water tanks and are supported either by structural frames or on the roof decks. Fixtures are below the gravity tank. These elevated tanks are installed when normal water supply from main public service pipes is not frequent and when normal pressure from city main is npt enough to force the water to the highest fixtures.
A. DOWNFEED SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
0000
C. LOWDOWN SYSTEM
B. GRAVITY SYSTEM- D. NEGATIVE SYSTEM 15. The pipe from the public water main or source of water supply to the building served is called
A
B
C
D
0000
A. ADDITIONAL PIPE C. SERVICE PIPE B. SUPPLEMENTAL PIPE
D. AIDING PIPE
16. The vertical supply pipe which extends upward from one floor to the next is called a and the horizontal pipes that serves the faucets are called branches.
A. FEEDER
C. SUPPLIER
B. RISER
D. FLIER
A
B
C
D
0000
B. WATER SUPPLY
1.
refers to the public water system laid underground along the streets where house service is connected.
A. WATER LEADER
C. WATER SOURCE
B. WATER MAIN
D. WATER SUPPLIER
2. One end is 0.30 M. and the other end is 0.90 M. long. This prevent the pipe from snap,>ing when the soil settles.
A. S-CURVE
C. EXTENSION
B. BALANCER.
D. GOOSENECK
261
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
3. A stop valve placed in a service pipe close to its connection with a water main. A. CORPORATtON COCK
C. COMPANY LOCK
B. COCK VALVE
D. UNION COCK
4. A kind of G. I. fitting used as reducer from a bigger diameter to a lesser diameter. A. REDUCTION
C. BUSHING
B. COUPLING
D. BUILD-UP
5. A G. I. fitting which is used when a pipe has already been installed but dismatling is difficuH. A. EXPANDER
.C. COMBINATION
B. UNION.
D. DOUBLE
6. Excessive pressure produces a rumbling sound . This occurs when a valve is called the suddenly turned off and causes the water to stop, forcing the pipes to shake and to reduce this, an additional 0.30 M. to 0.90 M.length of pipe is added to the riser to give air pressure which absorb it. A. WATER QUIVER
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A
B
C
D
0000
c D 0000 A
B
C. WATER HAMMER
B. WATER RAMBLER D. WATER BARRIER
7. A kind of G. I. fitting that has one end external treads; while the other end has internal treads. A. INTERCHANGEABLE TEE
C. TWO-WAY FITTING
B. CLOSE OPEN ELBOW
D. STREET ELBOW or TEE
8. To insure no leakage, a G. I. pipe when threaded tape has to use while lead liquid or around the thread before tightening the fittings. A. TEFLON
C. PVC
B. PLASTIC
D. SEALER
262
c D 0000 A
B
c D 0000 A
B
9. What does uPVC mean? A. UNPROTECTED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
C. UNPLASTICIZED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
B. UNPREPARED POLYETHYLENE COATED PIPE
D. UNPRESSED POLYURETHANE CHLORINE PIPE
10. This consists of a wedge-shaped plug which is sdewed down to seat between two brass rings surrounding the inlet pipe so that a double seal is obtained. The inlet and outlet are in a straight line. This valve is used when a normal fully open or closed position is desired. Either end may be used as inlet A. FENCE VAi_VES
C. ENTRY VALVES
B. DOOR VALVES
D. GATE VALVES
11. These valves are used when it is desired that the flow through a pipe be always in one direction and there is a possibility of a flow taking place in the opposite direction. One type has a pivoted flap which is readily pushed open by the pressure ot water from one side but is tightly closed by the force of a reverse flow.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
A. ONE-WAY VALVES C. SWING-IN VALVES B. CHECK VALVES
D. CORRECT VALVES A
12. A material used as a covering, such as a pipe bigger than the main pipe of a deep well so that the main pipe can be pulled out for repair.
A. CASING
C. COATING
B. ENCLOSING
D. PROTECTIVE
A. STATIC HEAD
C. VERTICAL HEIGHT
B. OVERHEAD HEIGHT
D. PRESSURE LENGTH
263
C
D
0000
A 13. This is the vertical distance from the higher source of water or overhead tank to the outlet (faucets, shower head) and is distributed by gravity.
B
B
C
D
0000
14. Subsurface conditions of ground wat-. and rook must be known. Siles with high (about 1.80 M. to 2.40 M below grade) ca.n cause problems with excavations, foundations, utility placement and landscaping. This is described as the level underground in which the soil is situated with water. A. WATER LEVEL
C. WATER LINE
B. WATER TABLE
D. WATER CONTAINER
15. An opening or space to accommodate a group of pioes.
A. PIPE CONNECTORS
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
C. PIPE CHASE
B. PIPE GROUPINGS D. PIPE HOLE 16. When the water supply of very tall building is designed as a unit, the required capacities or tanks, pumps and pipings become unduly large and excessive pressures are developed in lower portions of the dowrifeed risers, The buildings therefore is divided into horizontal sections or , and to design the hot and cold water supply systems separately for each.
A. AREA METHOD
C. GROUPING
B. STORY DIVIDER
D. ZONING
A
B
C
D
0000
C. FIRE PROTECTION, STORM WATER 1. Fire companies with their apparatus find difficulty _ _ _ _ with separate water reserve or upfeed pumping are extremely valuable in any buHdings but become highly essential in tall buildings. This system, intended for use by building personnel until the fire engines arrive and thereafter by the trained staff of the fire department.
A STANDPIPES & HOSES
C. VERTICAL PIPES
B. FIRE USE PIPES
D. STEADY PIPES
264
A
B
C
0
0000
2. Automatic systems consist of a horizontal pattern of pipes placed near the ceilings of industrial buildings, warehouses, stores, theaters and other structures where the fire hazard requires their use. These pipes are provided with outlets and heads so constructed that temperatures of (55° to 70"C) Celsius will cause them to open automatically and will cause them to open automatically and emit a series of time water sprays.
A. SPLASHERS
C. DROPLETS
B. RAIN WATER
D. SPRINKLERS
3. ·A system of sprinklers with its pipes constantly filling both mains and distribution pipes.
A. WATER FILLED
A
B
C
0
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
C. WET PIPE SYSTEM
SYSTEM B. LIQUID ENHANCED D. SOAKING SYSTEM SYSTEM 4. Generally confined to unheated buildings, There is no water in the distribution pipes except during a fire. Remote valves may be actuated by sensitive elements to admit water to sprinkler's heads.
A. UNLIQUIFIED
A
8
C
D
0000
C. EMPTY PIPE SYSTEM
SYSTEM B. DRY PIPE SYSTEM D. CLEAN PIPE SYSTEM 5. An inlet placed outside a building close to ground level, having two openings so that fire engines can pump water to the dry stand pipes and sprinkler system of the building.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. DOUBLE HEADER C. SIAMESE TWIN B. DUAL ENTRANCE
D. TWO WYE SYSTEM
6. Sprinkler heads are of the quartzoid bulb type. The bulb is transparent and contains a colored liquid. At 360°F the bulb breaks and releases a water stream. one is called "upright" when used above piping when piping is exposed but when it is hidden inside ceilings that shows only the bulb it is called a _ _ __
A. HIDDEN HEAD
C. EXPOSED BULB
B. PENDENT
D. BALANCER
265
A
8
C
D
0000
7. That portion of the plumbing system which conveys rain water to a suitable terminal. This is usually discharged into a street gutter conveyed by a public _ _ _ _ system and carried to some drainage terminal such as lakes or rivers.
A. RAIN WATER PIPE
C. STORM SEEPAGE
B. STORM MAIN
D. STORM DRAIN
8. When the soil is not permeable, and it touches a concrete or hollow block wall of a basement, rain water will seep on it and may flood. The gravel is placed all around this wall 0.30 M. wide and about 0.30 M. below the basement floor rain water from the gravel towards the drainage terminal.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. PERFORATED PIPE C. OPENED SIDE PIPE
B. HAMMERED PIPE
D. GUTTER PIPE
D. SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 1. Water plus human waste, solid and liquid, urine·that is flushed out of toilets and urinals. A. GRAY WATER
C. BLACK WATER
B. CONTAMINATED WATER
D. DIRTY WATER
2. A vertical soil pipe conveying fecal matter and liquid waste.
A. SOIL STEADY PIPE
C. SOIL CONDUCTOR PIPE
B. SOIL LEADER
D. SOIL STACK PIPE
3. A pipe which conveys only liquid wastes free of fecal matter. A. CONVEYOR PIPE
C. TRASH PIPE
B. WASTE PIPES
D. LIQUID CONTAINING PIPE
266
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
4. A pipe or opening used for ensuring the circulation of air in a plumbing system and for reducing the pressure exerted on trap seals. A. VENT
C. FLUE
B. AIR
D. DUCT
5. A metallic sleeve, calked or otherwise, joined to an opening in a pipe, into which a plug is screwed that can be removed for the purpose of cleaning or examining the interior of the pipe.
A
B
C
D
0000
c D 0000 A
B
A. CLEANOUT PLUG C. CLEANOUT FERRULE B. TESTING FERRULE D. TESTING PLUG 6. A fitting or device so constructed as to prevent the passage of air, gas and materially affecting the flow of sewage or waste water through it. A. TRAP
C. WATER PLUG
B. CLOSER
D. CLOGGER
7. The part of the lowest horizontal piping of. a plumbing system which receives the discharge from soil, waste and other drainage pipes inside of a building and conveys it to the house sewer. It should have a slope of at least 1/4" to a foot or 6 mm. for every 300 mm.
c D 0000 A
B
c D 0000 A
B
A. HOUSE STRAINER C .. HOUSE SIEVE B. HOUSE DRAIN
D. HOUSE TRAP
8. A pit or receptacle at a low point to which the liquid wastes are drained.
A. BASEMENT PIT
C. LOW POST PIT
B. SUMP PIT
D. UNDERGROUND PIT
9. A vertical opening through a building for elevators, dumbwaiters, light, ventilation and others. A. VERTICAL HOLE
C. CHUTE
B. VOID
D. SHAFT
267
c D 0000 A
B
c D 0000 A
B
10. A sheet metal placed when concrete is pOUred to accommodate~ pluning pipes (through the hole
made). A. SLEEVE
C. GUIDE
B. OPENING
D. HOLE
11. Plugging an o~ning around pipe joints with oakum (hemp soaked With oil) lead or other materials like epoxy adhesive on vinyl that are pounded place.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. WATERPROOFING C. CAULKING B. CLOGGING
D. STUFFING
1,2'. All horizontally piping shall run in practical alignment and at a uniform grade of not less than two (2%) percent, 20 mm. rise per meter length, and shall be supported or anchored at intervals not exceeding 3.00 M. length (10 feet). All stacks shall be properly supported at their bases and all pipes be rigidly hundred (100 inches) length.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. SLOPES. OF C. ALIGNMENT OF HORIZONTAL PIPING PIPING B. GRADES OF D. DEFLECTION HORIZONTAL PIPING OF PIPING 13. This kind of trap must be installed wherever oily, lard contained wastes from hotels, restaurants, club houses or similar public eating places are discharged into the sewer or septic vault. Sand traps shall be placed as near as possible to the fixture from which it receives the discharge and shall have an air-tight cover, easily removable to permit its cleaning.
A. DREASES TRAPS
C. OIL & LARD BINS
B. LEFTOVER CONTAINERS
D. GREASE DRAIN
14. This is the vertical distance between the dip and the crown weir (an embankment or levee) built to hold water in its course or to divert it to a new course of a p-trap. Also it is the water in the trap between the dip and the crown weir to prevent unpleasant and odorous gases to enter the room through the fixtures.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. ANTI-ODOR TRAP C. WATER PLUG B. TRAP SEAL
D. P-TRAP
268
,,
J
15. The resun of a minus pressure in the drainage system. (Pressure is a force required to move gas or liquid) When .a large amount of water of the trap (seal) is absolutely discharged. When the seal is lost, back flow of gases from the sewer line will pass into the trap, finds its way to the fixture drain outlet and spread into the room.
I
I
A. DRIPPING
C. SEEPAGE
B. BACKFLOW
D. SIPHONAGE
16. Upon the completion of the entire water distribution system including connections to apprentices, devices, tanks, or fixtures, it shall be tested and inspected by means of _ _ __
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. GAS AND AIR TEST C. WATER AND AIR TEST B. WATER AND GAS TEST
D. PRESSURE TEST
E. SEWAGE DISPOSAL SYSTEM, REFUSE HANDLING 1. A receptacle or water tight vault used to collect organic waste discharge from the house sewer and designed and constructed so as to separate solids from the liquid, digest the organic matter through a period of detention, and allow the effluent to discharge a storm drain.
A. SEPTIC TANK
C. SLUDGE POOL
B. CESSPOOL
D. SOLIDS CHAMBER
2. A receptacle in which liquids are retained for a sufficient period of time to deposit setteleable materials.
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A. COLLECTION TUB C. WATER CHAMBER B. WATER TRAP
D. CATCH BASIN
3. A public sanitary waste disposal system consisting of a treatment unit which conveys the raw waste to the disposal system.
A. COMMUNITY MAIN C. PUBLIC SANITATION B. PUBLIC SEWER LINE
D. PRIVY
269
A
B
C
D
0000
4. A common way of disposing of solids is by _ __ This is a controled burning of combustible waste. This can be an effective waste reduction method for 70 percent of all solid municipal wastes. If this is operated property, it can reduce bulk by 90 to 95 percent. Ash left over is generally disposed off in a landfill.A. FIREPLACE
C. INCINERATION
B. BURNER
D. HEATING
5. Another method of disposing municipal solid wastes is by dumping of refuse at a pre-planned site, compacted and covered with a layer of earth. This method is called a
A. WASTE COLLECTION
C. SANITARY LANDFILL
B. CLEAN-AIR EARTH FILL
D. SANITARY GARBAGE PILE
6. When garbage from different floors of a high-rise building is disposed off from an opening and is directly led to the basement garbage bin. This is called the A. TRASH PIPES
A B C D
0000
c D 0000 A
B
c D 0000 A
B
C. GARBAGE CONDUCTOR
B. RUBBISH CHUTES D. WASTE GUIDES 7. This is a contraption inverted to dispose leftovers straight from the kitchen sink. Simply tum on the faucet, flick the power switch and place the leftovers such as bones, fruit pits, rotten vegetables, spoiled bones and washed down the drain pipes.
A. GARBAGE COLLECTOR
-C. WASTE GRINDER
B. LEFT-OVER CHOPPER
D. GARBAGE DISPOSER
270
c D 0000 A
B
8. After the ground preparation a should be laid out on the area enclosed for sanitary landfill. The main purpose is to prevent the seepage of leachate (dirty water, to cause liquid to percolate) deep down to the ground water strata. This consist of soil or composite material such as synthetic plastic or asphaH sheets. A. LINER
C. BLANKET
B. WATERPROOFER
D. COATING
9. A method of landfill wherein a tractor digs a trench with a bulldozer blade, and trucks dump the refuse to it. Then the tractor compacts the refuse thoroughly and covers it with earth that was dug up earlier. This method is primarily used on level ground. A. LINING METHOD
A
B C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
C. CANAL METHOD
B. TRENCH METHOD D. DUGOUT METHOD 10. This method of landfill is generally used on rolling terrain where the existing slope of the land can be used as a basin. In this method, trucks deposit refuse over a selected area. Huge, heavy tractors with special compacting wheels press down the refuse. Then refuse is covered with earth hauled in from elsewhere. A. COLLECTION METHOD
A
B
C
D
0000
C. SCATTER METHOD
B. SPREAD METHOD D. AREA METHOD 11. Collection of human wastes is done by elaborate systems to carry most liquid sewage to _ _ __ where the sewage undergoes a series of treatment steps to remove polluting materials, biological and chemical contaminants that can harm human health or ecological systems. The first stage is the trapping or screening of coarse suspended matter into a grit chamber. Then the use of aerobic microorganisrl)s to break down the organic matter left in the sewage called the biological oxidation. Then the 3rd phase, chemical treatments used to remove undesirable constituents that remain. What resuHs is a drinking quality water.
A. WASTE TREATMENTC. WASTE ANTIPLANTS POLLUTANT PLANTS B. SEPTIC VAULT
D. WASTE COLLECTION DEPOT
271
A
B
C
D
0000
fixture that aPP&ars •• a water closet, since a person sits down on it. But it is designed as a
12. A
combination lavatory which can plug the drain and collect hot and cold water, with an inverted water sprayer to clear the most delicate and well-guarded parts of the body.
A. LAVATORY CLOSET
C. BIDET
B. CESSPOOL
D. SANITARY CLOST
A
B
C
D
0000
F. MISCELLANEOUS QUESnONS
1. What determines the size of a leading field? A. POTABLE WATER
C. WATER TABLE
B. PERCOLATION TEST
D. GREY WATER
2. What is an important concern in private water supply?
A. HARDNESS
C. FRICTION LOSS
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B. BUILDING SEWER D. POTABLE WATER
3. What part of water suppty design is affected by building height?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. FIXTURE UNITS
C. FIXTURE LOSS
B. CASING
D. STATIC HEAD
4. Select the incorrect statements:
I. Dry pipe sprinkler systems are more efficient than wet pipe systems.
II. Siamese connections serve both sprinklers and standpipes.
Ill. The hazard classification does not necessarily affect sprinkler layout.
IV. Standpipes must be located within,stairways or vestibules of srnokeproof enclosures.
V. Standpipes are required in buildings four or more stories high or those exceeding 150 feet.
A. I, II, and IV
C. II, IV, and V
B. II, Ill, and V
D. Ill, IV, and V
272
A
B
C
D
0000
5. The pressure in a city water main is (0.39273 MPa). Hthe pressure lOss through piping, fittings, and the water meter has been calculated as 23 psi (0.15847 MPa) and the highest fixture requires 12 psi (0.08268 MPa) to operate, what is the maximum height the fixture can be above the water main?
A. 9 feet (2.70 M)
C. 50 feet (15M)
V. 24 feet (7.20 M)
D. 78 feet (26 M)
6. You have been retained by a client to design a house in a suburban location. The nearest water main is one block away (about 1000 M.) and the city has no plans to extend the line in the near future. City and county regulations do permit the drilling of wells. What should you recommend to your client regarding water supply?
A
B
C
D
0000
c D 0000 A
8
A. Estimate the cost of extending the municipal line. since the. water quality is known and it would ensure a long-term supply. Consult with nearby property owners who plan to build in the area to see if they would be willing to share the cost of extending the line.
B. Drill a test bore to determine the dept, potential yield, and water quality of a well and compare this information with the cost of extending the municipal line.
C. Assist the owner in petitioning the city to extend the water line to serve new development sooner than they had planned to. D. Consult with nearby property owners who use wells and with well drillers to estimate the depth and yield of wells in the area. Compare the estimated cost and feasibility of drilling with the feasibility of extending the municipal line at the owner's cost. 7. Which statements about drainage are correct?
I. Drains should always slope at a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot. (.0099 per meter) or 9.9 mm II. The vent stack extends through the roof.
1!1. Vents help prevent the drainage of water from traps.
273
c D 0000 A
B
IV. The house drain cannot also be called the building sewer. V. Clea•.outs are always a necessary part of a drainage system.
v
A. I, II, and V
C. II, Ill, and
B. I, Ill, and IV
D. Ill, IV, and V
8. Water hammer most often occurs when: A. the incorrect type of valve is used
A
B
c
D
0000
B. water suddenly stops when flow is turned oft C. expansion joints are not installed in water lines D. water flows backward against a check valve 9. One component of a plumbing system that every building has is a:
A. stack vent
C. backflow preventer
B. vent stack
D.
c D 0000 A
B
A
B
house trap
10. Select the incorrect statement:
A. Several types of plastic can be used for cold water piping, but only PVDC is used for hot water supply where allowed by local codes. B. Steep pipe is more labor intensive and requires more space than copper pipes in plumbing chases. C. Type M pipe is normally specified for most interior plumbing. D. ABS is suitable for water supply.
274
C
D
oooc
AREA ''B'' PARTIII
UTILITIES
2. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
AREA "I" ---
UTILITIES
.
.
PART Ill ~
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. HEAT, MOISTURE, HUMAN COMFORT 1. What does Ashrae mean? Energy conservation is the theme of this. A. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIRCONDITIONING ENGINEERS
C. ALASKAN SOCIETY OF HOUSING, RESTORATION AND AREA CONVERSION ENVIRONMENT
B. AMERICAN SYSTEM OF HEATING RESISTANCE AND AERIAL COMFORT ENGINEERS
D. AUSTRALIAN SYSTEM OF HEATING, REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING ENVIRONMENT
2. Food taken into the body may be thought of as a fuel that is subject to a low-grade burning process sufficient to maintain a body temperature of (37°C). There is a wide variation in metabolic (METABOLISM) rates dependent on physical activity. For aA average size man; the Met unit corresponds to 360 BTu:-.. A sleeping inan gives off 0.7 to 1.2 METABOLIC RATE or MET UNITS so 360 x 0.7 = 252 BTuh. A basketball player in action generates and loses2136BTuhofthe Met units is 7.6 (7.6x360). What then is BTuh? (Definition: The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one pound water by one degree fahrenheit). A. BUILDER'S TEMPERATURE UNITS per hour
C. BRITISH THERMAL UNITS per hour
B. BEST TEMPERATURE UNITS per hour
D. BRICK TOWN UNITS per hour 276
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A
B
C
D
0000
3. H it is very very cold outSide during December in Baguio, where would you put the heater?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. ABOVE THE WINDOW INSIDE B. BELOW THE WINDOW INSIDE C. NEAR THE WAU AWAY FROM THE WINDOW D. BELOW THE WINDOW OUTSIDE 4. For energy conservation, walls and roofs, and sometimes floors- if there is outdoor space belowmust be resistant to the rapid transrrission of heat. Slow pasage of heat also resuls in warmer, more comfortable inside surface temperatures. Insulation is highly essential . are needed to prevent colder parts of roofs and walls where it condenses or freezes. A. DAMPPROOFING
C. TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS
B. DEW COLLECTORS
D. VAPOR BARRIERS
A
B
C
D
0000
The human body loses heat in three ways 5. One way is through . This is the transfer of heat through the movement of a fluid, either a gas or liquid. This occurs when the air temperature surrounding a ·person is less than the body's skin temperature, around 85 degrees fahrenheit (30°C). The body heats the surrounding air, which rises and is replaced with cooler air. A. CONDUCTION
C. CONDUCTIVITY
B. CONDUCTANCE
D. CONVECTION
6. The other way is by . Heat loss through this way occurs when moisture changes to a vapor as a person perspires or breathes. A. EVAPORATION
C. DEWPOINT
B. ENTHALPY
D. COEFACIENT OF HEAT TRANSFER
277
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
7. Another way is by . This is the transfer of heat through electromagnetic waves from one surface to a colder surface. The body can lose heat to a cooler atmosphere or to a cooler surface. A. LATENT HEAT
C. INFILTRATION
B. RAOIATION
D. MEAN RADIANT TEMPERATURE
8. Heat gain is most affected by: I. Motors
Ill. People
II. Sunlight
IV. Fluorescent Lighting
v.
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
Humidity
C. I, II, Ill and IV
A II and Ill B. II, 111 and
A
v
D. ALL OF THE ABOVE
9. The is a graphic representation of the thermodynamic properties of moist air. It is used for a wide· variety of applications in heating and airconditioning design, including dew point temperatures, determining relative humidity, calculating ENTHALPY (in thermodynamics) and determining humidity ratios. These values are needed to compute the relationships of heat and air flow in air conditioning design.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. PSYCHROMETRIC C. TEMPERATURE CHART CHART B. BAR CHART
D. THERMODYNAMIC CHART
10. Heat is lost through insulating glass by what process?
A VENTILATION
C. AIR CONDITIONING
B. RADIATION
D. CONVECTION
11. In calculating solar heat gair., what value must you have in addition to the area of the glass?
A. SENSIBLE HEAT
C. EFFECTIVE TEMPERATURE
B. DESIGN COOLING LOAD FACTOR
D. MEAN RADIANT TEMPERATURE
278
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
12. A high value of what property is desirable in heat loss calculations?
A
PROPORTION OF GLASS
C. RESISTANCE
B. TIGHT CONSTRUCTION
D. ABSORPTION
13. Weatherstripping is a good energy conservation strategy because it affects what? This is the transfer of air into and out of a building through open doors, through
A INSULATION
C. INFILTRATION
B. BODYHEAT
D. EXHAUSTION
14. Select the incorrect statement.
A RELATIVE HUMIDITY is a measure of thermal comfort
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B. PEOPLE FEEL more comfortable in the cold months if the MAT is high. C. THERE ARE DIFFERENCES in comfort level between different cultural groups. D. The range of comfortable dry bulb temperature is dependent on air movement. 15. A roof covers an area 12 meters wide and 24 meters long. With heavy insulation, the resistance has been calculated as 38 and th.e design equivalent temperature difference as 44. If the design temperature is -5° and it is desired to maintain a 70° indoor temperature (F), what is the heat loss through the roof?
A. 3661 BTuh
C. 5824 BTuh
B. 5455 BTuh
D. 6240 BTuh
16. What would be the best design strategy for passive cooling during the summer in a hot-humid climate? A. Design a series of pools and fountains to cooi by evaporation B. Include broad overhangs to shield glass and outdoor activities from the sun C. Orient the building to catch summer breezes D. Use light-colored sw1aces to reflect sunlight and solar gain.
279
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B. HEATING, VENTJLAlWG, SOLAR ENERGY Heat flows through Homogenous solids. Beginning with the combustion of fuel in boilers or furnaces, heat flows by various methods to warm the OCaJpied spaces and hence minimally outdoors by transmission through exterior room surfaces or by the loss or expulsion of warmed air through openings in the building. There are three ways where\n heat is transferred. 1. One way is by . The inside of a concrete wall which has one side exposed to outside extreme cold tempera1Ure feels coki to the touch. Heat is being lead from the side Of higher tefl1)erature to that of lower temperature. To prevent heat loss by this way, we must use materials that are poor conductors. (An example is when a cold steel rod is heated at one end, soon your hand will feel the heat at the other end). A. FEEDER
C. FORWARDER
B. CONDUCTION
D. LEAD-ON
2. The second way is by . From this point, it is transferred to the outside air by this system. To prevent heat loss, materials must be used which will reflect rather than radiate heat. (An exalll>le is 3 lamp.which when heated is felt by a person near it). A. REFLECTION
C. RADIATION
B. EMISSION
D. EJECTION
3. The third way. is by . When air is heated, it expands and begins to circulate. During the circulation, it comes in contact with cooler surfaces, some of its heat is given up to them. It is therefore important to try to prevent air currents from being set up in the waDs and ceilings of our building. (in a cavity wall, a hollow wall, or a metal fireplcfce, cold «Ur enters from below, is heated, expands and become lighter. Hot air goes up, and cooler air again enters). A. CONVEYANCE
C~ CONVERSION
B. TRANSPORTATION D. CONVECTION
280
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
4. To prevent heat from the inside to escape to the cold climate outside or to prevent the transfer of hot outside temperature in summer to the living spac~ within the building, we should specify and use _ _ _ _ _ .Materials such as blankets, batts. slabs, loose fill. A. THERMAL INSULATION
C. HEATERS
B. BLOCKADE
D. TEMPERATURE GAUGE
A
B
C
D
0000
Solar energy is being tapped in many strange and wondrous ways. However there are two ways of heating or cooling a building using the solar (sun's) heat. 5. The" "is so called because it employs no sophisticated collectors and no expensive technology to.harness the sun's energy. This is used for an "energy conscious" building. It is low-energy consuming building which uses solar power for air conditioning and other methods which use little or no energy at all, and at usually low cost. A. BUDGETED SOLAR DESIGN
C. PASSIVE SOLAR DESIGN
B. COST-CONTROL SOLAR DESIGN
D. SUN CONTROL DESIGN
6. The systems require expensive and energy consuming equipment to operate electric water heaters and air conditioners. In short they are technologically designed solar buildings. The awesome energy of the sun's radiation is harnessed, absorbed, transferred and stored for building heating and cooling. Using this system, the temperatures inside a house will stay at 68° to 70°F (19°C to 21 °C) during even the coldest days. A. HEAT GENERATING DEVICE
C. MECHANICAL SOLAR DESIGN
B. ACTIVE SOLAR DESIGN
D. SUN CONTROL DESIGN
281
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
7. A is an integration of a house, a greenhouse, a solar heater, and a solar still. The space between the solar collector and the heat storage wall is large enough to be used for growing food: A. BIOSPHERE
C. ENVIRONMENTAL ARENA
B. ECO-SPHERE
D. SOLAR HOUSE
8. In Thermodynamics, an , is a quantity expressed as the Internal Energy of a system plus the product of the pressure and volume of the system, having the property that during an isobaric process, the change in the quantity is equal to the heat transferred during the process. A. ENTASIS
C. ELEMENT
B. ANALYTIC
D. ENTHALPY
9. The occupants of a building produce two (2) kinds of heat: one· is the LATt;:NT HEAT and the other is _ _ _ _ _ in the form of moisture from breathing and perspiration. This is assumed to be about 225 BTuh, simply multiply the number of occupant by 225 to calculate the heat. A. DEW POINT
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
C. HOT POINT
B. EXCESSIVE HEAT D. SENSIBLE HEAT 10. In warm air heating, a is needed. This is constructed of sheet metal or glass fiber - either round or rectangular.
A. CONDUCTOR
C. PIPE
B. DUCT
D. SLEEVE
11. These wil be necessary to balance the system and adjust it to the desires of the occupants. These are used where branch ducts leave the larger trunk ducts. Each user can have its flow controlled by an adjustable splitter in the basement at the foot of the riser. Labels should indicate the rooms served. A. VANES
C. DAMPERS
B. BLINDS
D. SLATS
282
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
12. SUpply (sometimes called diffusers) should be equipped with dampers and should have their vanes arranged to disperse the air and to reduce its velocity as soon as possible after entering the room. A common method is to provide vanes that divert the air half to the right and half to the left. Provide wall slotted type return grilles. A. REGISTERS
C. EXHAUSTS
B. GRILLES
D. CONTROLLERS
13. This kind of FIREPLACE give off as much radiant heat as conventional types, but to this they add circulating air warmed by convection. These fireplaces have a double or triple-wall firebox with an intervening air space several inches wide. Vents at the bottom of the firebox draw cool air into this space between the inner and outer walls, where it is warmed. The heated air rises by convection to be expelled through vents located above the firebox opening or farther away - even to other rooms through ducts. A. HEATERS
C. CENTRAL HEATING
B. HEAT CIRCULATING
D. HEAT GENERATING DEVICE
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
14. Smoke and combustion gases from the burning wood
A B C D
. Usually made of Terra pass up the Cotta pipe or 0.30 M. x 0.30 M. hollow block smoke chase.
0000
A. SMOKE ESCAPE
C. AIR SUPPLY
B. HOLLOW SPACE
D. CHIMNEY FLUE
15. This is often used in factories, whether for hanging on from the ceiling or attached to the wall or window. It can also be with four wheels and back curtain, put on the ground for easy moving. This is also called a long distance ventilator tor vessel workshops, steel mill, basement and tunnel ventilation, etc.
A. JUMBO FAN
C. PACKAGED AIR
B. AIR INDUCTOR
D. BLOWER
283
A
B
C
D
0000
, (OZVENT is one product name) II an aU aluminum ventilator which uses no electricity, it is deSigned to allow natural breeze to provkte all the turning requirements for maximum ventilation.
1'8. A
A
B
C
D
0000
Once installed, there is no further running cost for resk:tential and Industrial use, attached to the roof.
c.
A. CIRCULAR AIR EXHAUST
C. TURBINE VENTILATOR
B. MOVABLE VENTILATOR
D. ROOF EXHAUST
AIR-CONDITIONING
-1. The process of treatrng air so as to control 'simultaneously its temperature, humk:tity, cleanliness, and distribution to meet the requirements of the conditioned space.
A. AIR FRESHING
C. AIR CLEANING
B. AIR CONDITIONING
D. AIR CONTROLLING
2. This type of air conditioning system having 2 units, the indoor unit and the outdoor unit. The heat inside a room is absorbed through the indoor unit and is released through the outdoor unit. This type can be wall-mounted, ceiling-mounted, floor-mounted, or, packaged. A. DUAL-TYPE
C. SPLIT-TYPE
B. HALF-TYPE
D. COMBIN-ATION TYPE
3. This type of air conditioning system is a semi-fixed, air conditioning system. It is so because it requires a wall opening for it to be installed. A. EXTERIOR TYPE
C. SINGLE-UNIT TYPE
B. WALL-MOUNTED TYPE
D. WINDOW-MOUNTED TYPE
284
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
4. In larger buildings and those wlh varied and diverse occupancy, it is usually preferred to _ _ __ the refrigeration plant. The condenser is cooled by water circulated to an outdoor cooling tower and the evaporator produces chilled water. The latter is then pumped to whenever it is needed in the building or to the A.H.U. (Air Handling Unit), each serving many
A
B C
D
0000
rooms. A. CENTRALIZED C. ONE STATION TYPE AIR CONDITIONING B. OVERALL AIR CONDITIONING
D. GENERAL A. C.
Question 1, 2 and 3 are based on the following situation. A Developer is planning to build a small shopping mall for resale. You have been hired as the architect. The mall will consist of 4,000 sq.m. of rentable area on one level surrounding a small enclosed courtyard. Existing utilities adjacent to the site include water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, natural gas and electricity. 5. Which mechanical system for the lease area would you recommend?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. a multizone system with economizer cycle B. an active solar energy system for heating and evaporative cooling C. a direct expansion system with passive solar design of the building D. individual rooftop heat pumps 6. What cooling system would work best for the enclosed courtyard?
A. EVAPORATIVE COOLING WITH A CLOSED WATER LOOP B. ABSORPTION COOLING WITH SOLAR ASSIST
C. COMPRESSIVE REFRIGERATION
D. PASSIVE COOLING
285
A
B
C
D
0000
7. Wtich of the following would be most important in the selection of an HVAC system for this project?
I. Flexibility Ill. Economics
A
B
C
D
0000
II. Cimatic Zone IV. The Tenant's Preference V. Building Scale
A. 1,11 and V
C. II, Ill and v
B. II, Ill and IV
D. ALL OF THE ABOVE
8. A seven-storey office building is to have a variable air volume system. The building will have 10,500 square meter of net space and an estimated 12,600 sq.m. of gross area. About how much space should be allowed for HVAC systems? A. 250 sq.m.
C. 630 sq.m.
B. 380sq.m.
D. 760 sq.m.
A
C
D
0000
A 9. Select the iilcorrect f;tatement.
B
B
C
D
0000
A. A health center would probably use no.4 or no.5 fuel oil. B. Heat pumps rely on solar energy more than electricity. C. Natural gas has a higher heating value than propane D. Electricity is not a good choice for powering boilers in remote areas 10. A main trunk duct is to be placed above a suspended ceiling and below the structural framing. If ceiling space for the duct is not a problem, which of the following shapes of duCts would be the best to use assuming equal capacities?
A RECTANGULAR, with the long dimension horizontal B. SQUARE
C. RECTANGULAR, with the long dimension vertical D. ROUND
286
A
B
C
D
0000
11. A standard gas furnace has aft the follOWing concept: A. FLUE
C. COMBUSTION CHAMBER
B. DAMPER
D. FILTERS
12. The heat gain for a building has been calculated at 108,000 BTuh. What size compressive refrigeration machine should be specified? A. 9 tons
C. 36tons
B. 12 tons
D. 54 tons
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
13. An Economizer cycle: A. only cools as much chilled water as required by the demand load
0000
B. uses outdoor air to cool a building C. automatically reduces the amount of time the compressor runs D. uses air and water to cool the condenser coils 14. The cooling system for a restaurant kitchen must remove which of the following?
A. sensible heat only
C. sensible and latent heat
B. latent heat only
D. sensible heat and latent heat at 30% of sensible heat.
287
A
B
C
D
0000
D. CONVEYORS, VERTICAL TRANSPORTATioN, BUILDING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 1.
is a term that describes all the methods used to move people and materials vertically. This- includes passenger and freight elevators, escalators, dumbwaiters, vertical converyor, moving ramps, wheelchair lifts, and platform lifts.
A. VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION B. VERTICAL MOVEMENT 2.
A
B
C
D
0000
C. FLOOR TO FLOOR CONVEYANCE D. UP AND DOWN MOVEMENT
are one of the two major types used for the movement of people and freight; This elevator is lifted by a plunger, or ram, set in the ground directly under the car and operated with oil as the pressure fluid. As a consequence, the cylinder for the ram must be extended into the ground as high as the elevator rises. This is used for two to six stories high only. Travel time is 7.50 M to 48 M per minute and are therefore not appropriate for moving large numbers of people quickly. A. COMPUTERIZED ELEVATORS
C. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
B. OIL-FILLED ELEVATORS
D. MECHANIZED ELEVATORS
3. This is the most common type used for passenger service. They are capable of much rngher lifts and greater speeds than hydraulic types and can be precisely controlled for accelerating and decelerating. The system employs a cab suspended by cables (known as ropes) that are draped over a sheave and attached to a counterWeight. A motor drives the sheave, which transmits lifting power to the ropes by the friction of the ropes in grooves of the sheave. This type is also called the TRACTION ELEVATORS. A. GENERATOR OPERATED ELEVATORS
C. COMPUTER-AIDED ELEVATORS
B. AUTOMATED ELEVATORS
D. ELECTRIC ELEVATORS
288
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
4. There are two types of Electric Elevators. One is the _ _ _ which uses a direct current (de) motor directly connected to the sheave. The break is also mounted on the same shaft. These are dependable and easy to maintain and used on high-speed elevators.
A. IDLER-TYPE
A
B
C
D
0000
C. NOISELESS TYPE
MACHINES B. GEARLESS TRACTION MACHINES
D. TRANSMISSION TYPE MACHINES
5. The other type is the _ _ _ . Which is used for slow speeds from 7.50 m to 150m per mrnute. A highspeed de or ac motor drives a worm gear reduction assembly to provide a slow sheave speed with high torque. With the many possible variations in gear reduction ratios, sheave diameters, motor speeds, and roping arrangements, This type provide a great deal of flexibility for slow-speed, high-capacity elevators A. TRACK TYPE
C GEARED TRACTION ELEVATORS
B. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
D. ROLL E:R TYPE
6. __________ refers to the arrangement of cables supporting the elevator. The simplest type is the single wrap, in which the rope passes over the sheave only once and is then connected to the counterweight. For high-speed elevators, additional traction is usually required so the rope is wound over the sheave size This is known as a double-wrap arrangement
A. BINDING
C. ROLLING
B. ROPING
D. WRAPPING
7. For skyscraper buildings such as the world trade center and multi-use buildings such as the John-Hancock Tower - both are stacked. multiple buildings - The elevator solution involves transporting large groups of people from the street lobby to an upper lobby, called a . At this point, the passengers transfer to another elevator to continue their upward journey.
A. BALCONY SYSTEMS
C. BREATH TAKING SYSTEMS
B. LANDSCAPE VIEW D. SKY PLAZA SYSTEMS
289
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
8. By placing the traction lifting mechanism behind the car, attaching the car at the back, and using a glassenclosed, car, a spectacular unit car. be constructed that becomes an attraction in itseH. If the back screen is treated properly the car gives the impression of movement without any apparent motive force or machinery. A. OBSERVATION CAR ELEVATORS
C. OPEN VIEW
B. VIEW DECK
D. EXPOSED ELEVATOR
9. Although elevators are normally conceived as travelling vertically, this is not necessarily so. _ _ _ _ _ Elevators have been constructed in numerous locations. The design varies depending on the angle of incline.
A. SLOPING
C. LEANING ELEVATOR
B. SLANTOF INCLINED ELEVATORS
D. UNEVEN
10. Although recognition of the special needs of the handicapped has only of late been made official through legislation, and only for public buildings. the elevator industry has been providing for the handicapped for years, on a private basis ~----_and private residential elevators are widely used to overcome the stair barrier in private homes. All units operate on household electric current and require minimal maintenance.
11.
A. SINGLE FLOOR
C. ESCALATOR
B. HYDRAULIC LIFT
D. WHEEL, CHAIR LIFTS
are designed and intended to transport only equipment and materials and those passengers needed to handle these equipments. These are commonly available in capacities from 1,136 kilos to 3,636 kilos, with some multiple ram hydraulic elevators capable of lifting up to 45,455 kilos. Speeds range from 16M per minute to 66M per minute with speeds up to 267M per minute available for very tall buildings. A. BULK ELEVATORS C. FREIGHT ELEVATORS B. MASS ELEVATORS D. SOLID ELEVATORS
290
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
12.
are very efficient devices for transporting large numbers of people from one level to another. They are also useful for directing the flow of traffic where it is desired. This device (also called the Electric Stairway) is power driven and are rated by speed and width. The two available speeds are 9 meters per minute and 12 MpM. The two available widths are O.BOM and 1.20M. These are housed in a trussed assembly set at a 30-degree angle. A. ESCALATORS
C. RAISERS
B. RAMP STAIRS
D. HORIZONTAL LIFTS
13. This often provide the most convenient and economical means of transporting relatively small articles between levels. In department stores, such units transport merchandise from stack areas to .selling or pick up counters; in hospitals, these are often utilized for transporting food, drugs, linens, etc. In multi-level restaurants and office, they are used for delivery of food from the kitchen and for return of soiled dishes. Cars are limited to 0.81 sq.m and a maximum height of 1.20M. Controlled by call and send. A. SHAFT ELEVATORS
C. SERVICE FLOOR TO FLOOR
B. MANUAL LIFTERS
D. MANUAL DUMBWAITERS
14. These units are also known as "EJECTION LIFTS" because of the method of delivery used in institutions that require rapid scheduled vertical movement of relatively large items, like food carts, linens, dishes, bulk liquids, containers, etc. This lifts maybe a "CART", a "BASKET" or just containing the items being transported. Payload capacity is available up to 45 kilos, Round trip time about 21/2 minutes, disadvantages are high cost and large shaft area required. A. MATERIAL ELEVATORS
C. AUTOMATED DUMBWAITERS
B. AUTOMATIC TRANSFERER
D. VERTICAL WAITERS
291
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
15. ESCALATORS have as their primary function the movement of large numbers of people vertically. However serves a dual function, that is, Horizontal and Vertical transportation. This is the combined function. It differs from Escalators in application, function, construction, and capacity. A. MOVING WALKS of incline and MOVING RAMPS of 15° incline
C. MOVING FLOORS
B. MOVING SIDEWALKS
D. CIRCULATING FLOORS
so
16. When a parking space is limited. This Hightech Parking invention is used. It is called ___________ . This can be installed in two hours, anywhere you want to double the available parking space - one car would be parked on top of the other.
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A. EXCHANGEABLE C. DOUBLE DECK PARKING PARKING SYSTEM B. SPACE SAVER LIFT D. ELECTROHYDRAULIC S!NCLE POST LIFT E. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS Questions 1 through 3 are based on the tollow1ng Situation: A developer in a midsize Metro Manila City is planninr:J a small shopping mall for resale. The Mall will consist of 4,000 square meter of rentable area on one level surrounding a small enclosed courtyard. Existing utilities adjacent to the site include water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, natural gas, and electricity. 1. Which mechanical system for the lease area would
you recommend?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. a multizone system with economizer cycle B. an active solar energy system for heating and evaporative cooling
292
C. a direct expansion system with passive solar design of the building D. individual rooftop heat pumps
2. What cooling system would work best for the enclosed courtyard?
c D 0000 A
8
A. evaporative cooling C. absorption cooling with solar assist with a closed water loop
B. compressive refrigeration
D. passive cooling
3. Which of the following would be most important in the selection of an HVAC system for this project. I. flexibility If. climatic zone
c D 0000 A
B
A
B
IV. the tenant's preference
v.
building scale
Ill. economics A. I, II, and V
C. II, Ill, and V
B. II, Ill, and IV
D. all of the above
4. A seven-story office building is to have a variable air volume system. The building will have 10,500 square meter of net space and an estimated 12,600 square meter, of gross area. About how much space should be allowed for HVAC system? A. 250 square meter
C. 630 square meter
B. 380 square meter
D. 760 square meter
5. Select the incorrect statement. A. A health center would probably use no. 4 or no. 5fueloi. B. Heat pumps rely on solar energy more than electricity. C. Natural gas has a higher heating value than propane. D. Electricity is not a good choice for powering boilers in remotP. areas.
293
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
6. A main trunk duct is to be placed above a suspended ceiling and below the structural framing. If ceiling space for the duct is not a problem, which of the following shapes of ducts would be best to use assuming equal capacities?
A
B
c D
0000
A. rectangular, with the C. rectangular, with the long dimension horiz0ntal B. square
long dimension vertica
D.
round
7. A standard gas furnace has all of the following except:
A. flue
c.
combustion chamber
B. damger
D.
filters
8. The heat gain for a building has been calculated at 108,000 BTU h. What size compressive refrigeration machine should be specified?
A. 9 tons·
c.
36 tnns
B. 12 tons
D.
54 tons
9. An economizer cycle:
A
c D
0000
A
B
c D
0000
A
A. only cools as much chilled water as required by the demand load
B
B
c D
0000
B. uses outdoor air to cool a building C. automatically reduces the amount of time the compressor runs
D.
uses air and water to cool the condenser coils
10. The cooling system for a restaurant kitchen must remove which of the following? A. sensible heat only
C. sensible and latent heat
B. latent heat only
D.
sensible heat and latent heat at 30% of sensible heat
294
A
B
c D
0000
AREA ''8'' PARTIII
UTILITIES
3. ELECTRICAL AND OTHER POWER SYSTEMS
AREA "8"
UTILITIES
PART Ill
A. PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRICITY Electricity constitutes a form of energy itself which occurs naturally only in unusable forms such as lighting. The primary problem in the utilization of electric energy is that, unlike fuels or even heat, it cannot be stored and therefore must be generated and utilized at the same instant. 1. The bulk of electric energy utilized is in the form of _ _ _ _ _ generators produced by alternators.
2.
A. ALTERNATING CURRENT
C. POWER SUPPLY
B. VOLTAGE
D. CIRCUITRY
generators are utilized for special applications requiring large quantities of this. In the building field, such a requirement is found in elevator work. Smaller quantities for this generator, furnished either by batteries or by rectifiers are utilized for telephone and signal equipment, controls, etc.
A. DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT
C. DEMAND-CURRENT
B. ALTERNATING (a-c)
D. DIRECT-CURRENT (d-e)
3. The UNIT OF ELECTRIC CURRENT is the _ _ _ _". When electricity flows in a conductor, a certain number of electrons pass a given point in the conductor in 1 second or 6.25 x 1018 electrons. On a 120 volt service, the ordinary 100 watt lamp filament carries about 0.833. The motor for a desk calculator, about 1 00.
A. VOLTAGE
C. AMPERE (amp)
B. WATT
D. IMPEDANCE
296
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
4. The UNIT OF ELECTRIC POTENTIAL is the _ _ _ _ _".The electron movement and its concomittant energy, which constitutes electricity, is caused by creating a higher positive electric charge at one point on a conductor that exists at another point on that same conductor. In a storage battery there is a force attraction between the negative and positive charges.This is EMF (electromotive force) produced by a battery or generator which causes· current to flow when the terminals between which this potential exists are connected by a conductor. A. TIME HOURS
C. KINETIC ENERGY
B. VOLT or V
D. OHM
5. The UNIT OF ELECTRIC RESISTANCE is the ______ ... The flow of current in an electric .circuit is impeded (resisted) by resistance; which is the electrical term for friction. In a direct current( d-e) this unit is called resistance and is abbreviated R; in an alternating current circuit (a-c) it is called impedance and is abbreviated Z.
A. OHM
C. POWER FACTOR
B. VOLT
D. REACTANCE
6. Materials display different resistance to the flow of electric current. Metals generally have the least resistance and are therefore called _ _ _ __ The best materials are the precious metals- silver, gold, platinum - with copper and aluminum only slightly inferior. A. LEADERS
C. WIRINGS
B. CONDUCTORS
D. CONDENSER
7. Conversely, materials that resist the flow of current are called . Glass, mica, rubber, oil, distilled water, porcelain, exhibit this property, and is used around the conductor for safety. Common examples are rubber and plastic wire coverings, porcelain lamp sockets, and oil-immersed switches.
A. ALANKETS
C. INSULATORS
B. ISOLATORS
D. ABSORBERS
297
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
8. The current I that will flow in a d-e circuit is directly proportional to the voltage V and inversely proportional to the resistance R of the circuit. Expressed as an equation, we hav9 the basic OHM's
A
B
C
D
0000
LAW that I = V . An Incandescent lamp having a hot
R
resistance of 66 ohms is. put into a socket that is connected to a 115V supply. What current flows through the lamp? (using a 200W bulb)
A. 1.65 amperes
C. 2.25 amperes
B. 1.28 amperes
D. 1.74 amperes
-9. Resistance therefore is expressed in the equation R = V . A house electric water heater is rated 220V
I
A
B
C
D
0000
.
and 20 amperes. What is the unit's resistance when drawing this amount of current? (using a 1320 watt portable heater) A. 9 ohms
C. 12.8 ohms
B. 11 ohms
D. 15 ohms
An electric CIRCUIT may be defined as a complete conducting path that carries current from a source of electricity to and through some electrical device (or load) and back to the source. A current can never flow unless there is a complete (closed) circuit.
10 One arrangement of a circuit is the
---~
circuits. In this way, the elements are connected one after the other: Thus, the resistance and voltages add. In any of this kind of circuit, the total resistance R is the sum of the resistance around the circuit. A practical application of this kind of circuit is found in an incandescent lamp street lighting cicuits. The loss of one lamp can disable the entire circuit. Furthermore, the point of fault is difficult to pinpoint, necessitating individual testing of lamps. (also christmas lights)
A. SINGLE
C. SERIES
B. ALIGNED
D. GROUP
298
A B C
D
0000
11. When two or more branches or loads in a circuit are connected between the same two points, they are said to be connected in " " circuits or MULTIPLE. This connection is the standard arrangement in all building wiring. Such that groupings can be done like convenience outlets, one group, the other group are ceiling lights.
A. DOUBLE
C. DUAL
B. COUPLED
D. PARALLEL
12. The unit of Electric Power is the WATT or W. The power input to any electrical device having a. resistance R and in which the current is I is given by
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
v
the equation W = FR or W = I(IR) and since I=-
R
then V = IR or W = I(V). This is the product of volts times current in d.c. circuits. An incandescent lamp has a resistance R = 66 ohms, with a 115V supply. Find the power drawn in watts.
A. 200 watts
C. 165 watts
B. 250 watts
D. 225 watts
B. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: MATERIALS, WIRING 1.
of a typical building electrical system, from the incoming service to the utilization items at the end of the system. This is so called when electrical symbols are used in lieu of the blocks.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. ELECTRICAL PLAN C.· SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM B. SERIAL ~YMBOL DIAGRAM
D. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2. A or block diagram is done using rectangles to indicate the major components. It shows the spatial relations between components. An example is to show the vertical section on each floor the circuit from meter to panels to machine room to circuit breakers to upper floor circuits or from high-voltage primary feeders to transformer vaults to secondary service conductors to main switch boards to main feeders to distribution panels to lighting and appliance panels to receptacles and ceiling outlets.
A. MULTI-STORY DIAGRAM
C. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
B. RISER DIAGRAM
D. CONNECTING I)IAGRAM
299
A
B
C
D
0000
3.
are used to change alternating current voltages, either up or down. In most cases, power is supplied to a building at a high voltage because the lines can be smaller and there is less voltage drop. These are rated on their kilovolt-amperes capacity (kva) and described by their type, phase, voltages, method of cooling, insulation type, and noise level. For cooling, they are either dry, oil filled, or silicone filled.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. DIFFERENTIATOR C. CHANGER B. ALTERNATOR 4.
5.
D. TRANSFORMER
is required for electrical systems that relate to the safety of occupants or community needs. This includes such things as exit lighting, alarm systems, elevators, telephone systems, and fire pumps, as well as equipment that could have lifethreatening implications if power were lost, such as some medical equipments. This is supplied by GENERATORS or BATTERIES. Generators for large electrical loads for long periods of time. Batteries are used for smaller loads for shorter time periods. A. EMERGENCY POWER
C. STANDBY POWER
B. ALTERNATIVE POWER
D. ELECTRICAL STORAGE
on the other hand, provides electricity for functions thatthe building owner requires to avoid an interruption in business. This often includes computer operations or industrial processes A. STORED POWER
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
C. EMERGENCY POWER
B. STANDBY POWER D. FUTURE USE 6.
1s a type of wiring system that relies upon the construction of the cable itself for protection both of and from the 'hot' conductors, since raceways are not required in the installation. These are exposed insulated cables. It is an assembly of wires, normally plastic insulated, bounded together with a tape or braid and then wrapped with a spiral-wound interlocking strip of steel tape. It is then enclosed with a flexible steel armor. A. MOVABLE WIRE
C. FIREPROOF WIRE
B. ARMORED WIRE
D. AC ("BX")
300
A B C D
0000
7. Known by its trade name as" ",this is a non-metallic sheathed cable, similar to BX. However, not having the physical protection of metallic armor, use is restricted to small buildings up to three floors. Easier to handle, this cable type comprises an assembly of two or more plastic-insulated conductors and a ground wire, all covered with a flame retardant, moisture-resistant plastic jacket. A. DUMEX
C. ROMEX
B. FLAT WIRE
D. ESSEX
8. A is a factory-assembled channel with conductors for one to four circuits permanently installed in the track. Power is taken from the track by special tap-off devices that contact the track's electrified conductors and carry the power to the attached lighting fixture. The tracks are generally rated 20 amperes, and are restricted to 120V. The · electrified conductors are permanently installed in the aluminum track, which is grounded for safety. A. SLIDING LIGHT
C. TRACK CIRCUIT
B. HANGER
D. LIGHTING TRACK
9. This is an . A CABLE TRAY is a continuos open support for approved cables. When used as a general wiring system, the cables must be selfprotected, jacketed types. The advantages of this system are free-air rated cables, easy installation and maintenance, and relatively low cost. The disad'{antages are bulkiness and the required accessil1ility.
10.
A. OPEN RACEWAY
C. OPEN TRACK
B. EXPOSED TROUGH
D. BARE PIPE
. Included here are CONDUIT PIPES, surface raceways and underfloor ducts which are FIRST INSTALLED, then the wiring is inserted and pulled in later. The nominal trade sizes are 1/ 2 ", 3/ 4", 1"", 11/ 2 ", 2", 21/ 2 ", 3", 3 1/ 2 ", 4", 5" and 6". (12.70 mm, 19.05 mm, 25.41 mm, 38.11 mm, 50.82 mm, 63.52 mm, 76.23 mm, 88.93 mm, 101.64 mm, 127.05 mm and 152.46 mm) the total number of conductors in the sizes of conduct pipes are shown on a table. Materials are G. I steel pipe and now uPVC is also used. A. UNEXPOSED RUNAWAY
C. CLOSED SLEEVE
B. CLOSED RACEWAY
D. CLOSETED CIRCUITRY 301
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
11. In order to provide access to the conduits for installing the necessary wires and for making connections to them, the continuos conduit runs are interrupted at frequent intervals by sheet-metal or cast-metal boxes. These boxes are usually of a rectangular, octagon, or round form having punched holes to fit the conduits which terminate in them. The threaded ends of the conduit are held rigid in the holes by means of a BUSHING on the inside and a LOCKNUT on the outside of the box.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. JUNCTION BOXES C. PULL BOXES AND CONNECTION BOXES B. UNION BOXES
D. SAFE BOXES
12. An is an elevated (0.60 x 0.60M) modular slab that gi~es the building's users instantaneous access to a below floor plenum which can accomodate HVAC, electrical communications and EDP lines, as well as unforseen future developments and capacity. The building's users and visitors will walk confidently on a surface with the solid feeling of a poured slab. Since the system uses no grid of stringers, maximum accessibflity is assured when you need to change office layout, repair utilities, or upgrade capabilities, you can do it with a minimum of expense and disruption. Simply lift the floor panels and move the services.
A. ACCESS FLOORING B. HANDY FLOORING
A
B
C
D
0000
C. REPLACABLE FLOORING D. COMPUTER FLOOR
C. SERVICE AND UTILIZATION 1. Electric Service is normally tapped onto the utility lines at a mutually agreeable point at or beyond the property line. The service tap may be a connection on a pole with an drop to the building. Materials can be bare, weatherproof or preassembled. Bare copper cable supported on porcelain or glass insulators on crossarms is normally used for high voltage (2.4 KV and higher) lines. A. NPC SERVICE
C. UTILITY SYSTEM
B. OVERHEAD SERVICE
D. OUTSIDE SERVICE
302
A
B
C
D
0000
2. Another electric service is by or direct burial techniques. The advantages of this is attractiveness (lack of overhead visual clutter) service reliability and long life. Disadvantages are high cost.
A. BASEMENT SERVICE B. DEEP EARTH SERVICE
B
C
D
0000
C. UNDERGROUND SERVICE D. CREMATION SERVICE
3. As a Service Equipment, between the high voltage incoming utility lines and the secondary service conductors is required whenever the building voltage is different from the utility voltage. It may be pole or pad-mounted outside the building, or installed in a room or vault inside the building. These are devices that changes alternating current, (a-c) of one voltage to alternating current (a-c) of another voltage. This devices cannot be used on (d-e) direct current. A. CHANGERS
C. ALTERNATORS
B. REFORMERS
D. TRANSFORMERS
4. A transformer rated 120/480V transforms the lower volt 120V a-cto 480V a-c bigger load. This is called the transformer.
A. STEP-UP
C., INCREASE-UP
B. RAISE-UP
D. REAR-UP
5. When a service load is bigger a-c say 480V and you need only 120V to lower a-c. Then use a _ _ _ _ _ transformer.
6.
A
A. SLIDE-DOWN
C. RUNDOWN
B. STEP-DOWN
D. CHANGE-DOWN
must be provided at either the utility or the facility voltage, and at either the service point or inside the buildings which must be accessible to the utility (electrical consumption) reader.
A. METERING
C. ADDING
B. READING
D. COMPUTING 303
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
7. Find the daily energy consumption of the appliances listed below if they are used daily for the amount of time shown. Toaster (1340 W) or 1.34 kw 15 min. or
A
B
C
D
0000
1
4 hour
Percolator (500 W) or 0.50 kw 2 hours Fryer (1560 W) or 1.56
1
2 hour
Iron ( 1400 W) or 1.40 15 min. or
1
4 hour
A. 2.65 Kwh
C. 3.650 Kwh
B. 3.15Kwh
D. 2.815 Kwh
'8. In considering an average power demand of a household is 1.2 kw per day, calculate the monthly electric bill of such a household, assuming the rate of per kilowatt hour is P5.00. A. 750 Kwh @ P3,750.00
C. 864 Kwh @ P4,320.00
B. 805 Kwh@ P4,025.00
D. 600 Kwh@ P3,000.00
9. The purpose of the electric is to disconnect all the electric power in the building except emergency equipment. Thus, in the event of fire, no electrical hazard will face fire fighters. It is therefore obvious that this disconnecting apparatus must be located at a readily accessible spot near the point the service conductors enter the building. A. MAIN SWITCH
C. OVERHEAD SWITCH
B. UTILITY SWITCH
D. SERVICE SWITCH
10. An Electrical is a device intended for on/off control of an electrical circuit and is rated by current and voltage, duty, poles and throw, fusibility and enclosure. The currentrating.is the amount of current that this can carry continuously and interrupt safely. These devices are intended for normal use in light and power circuits are call GENERAL-USE SAFETY, and are rated no for normal duty. Those intended for frequent interrupting are rated HD for heavy duty and those intended to be opened load only occasionally, such as for service, are rated LD for light duty. These devices are rated 250 V, 600 V or 5 KV as required. A. OPENER
C. SWITCH
B. TOUCHDOWN
D. LIGHTER 304
A
B
C
D
0000
A B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
11. When there is one ceiling light intended for the stairway, and can be opened, or switched either from the ground floor of 2nd floor and vice versa, that is you can switch it closed either at the ground or second floor, you have to use a single pole double throw switch.
12.
A. THREE-WAY
C. DOUBLE-ACTION
B. FOUR-WAY
D. ALTERNATE
is a device which is an essential part of all standby power arrangement, is basically a double throw switch- generally 3 pole, so arranged that on failure of normal service is restored, it automatically retransfers to it. The control devices are voltage sensors that sense the condition of the service and operate the switch accordingly. Auxilliary devices can be built on to the basic switch, the common of which are emergency generator starting equipment. A. AUTOMATIC GENERATOR
C. AUTOMATIC CHANGER
B. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER
D. AUTOMATOR
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
D. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1. In order to protect insulation, wiring, switches, and other apparatus from overload and SHORT CIRCUIT currents, it is necessary to provide automatic means for opening the circuit. One of the devices employed to fulfill this function is the . It consist of a link or wire of flow melting temperature that when enclosed in an insulating fiber tube is called a CARTRIDGE, and when in a porcelain cup is known as a PLUG. When this device is subjected to excess current, the energy loss in the link generates heat and melts it. Plugs are normally used in residences all rated from 5 to 30 amp. cartridge are made in sizes from 5 to 600 amp. A. FUSE
C. UNION
B. WELD
D. MIXER
305
A
B
C
D
0000
2. Another CIRCUIT PR<:JfECTIVE DEVICE is the _ _ _ _ _ .This is an electromechanical device that performs the same protective function as a fuse and, in addition, act as a switch. Thus it can be used in lieu of a switch-and-fuse combination to both protect and disconnect a circuit. Most of this protective device are equipped with both thermal and magnetic trips. The THERMAL TRIP, which acts as on overload, is similar in action to a THERMOSTAT (an instrument which responds to the changes in temperature). Heat generated by excessive current causes an element to move and trip the latching mechanic of the breaker, Thus opening the breaker contacts and thereby the circuit. The MAGNETIC TRIP comprises a coil with a movable core. On short circuits, magnetic forces actuate the core which trips protective device latch.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. CIRCUIT STOPPER .C. CIRCUIT STALLER
B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS
D. CIRCUIT BLACK-OUT
3. Transfer Load Centers or , are an assembly of primary ·switch-and-fuse or breaker, step-down transformer, meters, controls, buswork, and secondary switchgear. It is available for indoor or outdoor use, to supply power from a primary voltage line to any large facility (usually located at the basement). A. UNIT HOUSING
C. UNIT SUBSTATION
B. UNIT SPACER
D. UNIT LOCATION
4. A serves basically the same function as a switchboard, except on a smaller scale, that is, it accepts relatively large of power and distributes it in smaller blocks. Like the switchboard, it comprises main fuses to which are connected circuit-protective devices (breakers or fuses), which feed smaller circuits. These level of the system is usually the final distribution point, feeding out to the branch circuits that contain the electrical utilization apparatus and devices, such as lighting, motors and so on. A. CIRCUITRY BOARD
C. FUSIBLE LINK BOARDS
B. BASE PLATES
D. PANEL BOARDS
306
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
5. What precautions should be taken if aluminum conductors are used in a building? I leads should be clearned prior to making connections II special conduct should be specified Ill licensed electricians should be required to make the installation
c D 0000 A
B
IV all joints should be soldered larger sizes should be used
v
A. I, II and Ill
C. II, Ill and V
B. I, Ill and V
D. Ill and V
6. Which would be the best location for a trar .sformer for a large school building?
c D 0000 A
B
A
B c
A. on the power pole serving the building B. outside, on a transformer pad close to the main switchgear C. in a separate room at the exterior wall D. in a prQtective shed where the power from the utility company enters the property
7. High voltages are used in commercial buildings
D
0000
because: A. conductors and conduit can be smaller B. a wider variety of loads can be accomodated C. commercial buildings require more power D. transformers can step down the voltages to whatever is required
8. Which of the following would not be appropriate 1or fire protection in an elementary school? A. IONIZATION DETECTOR
C. PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR
B. TEMPERATURERISE DETECTOR
D. NONE OF THE ABOVE
307
c D 0000 A
B
AREA ''B'' PARTIII
UTILITIES
4. ACOUSTICS AND ILLUMINATION
AREA "B"
UTILITIES'
PART Ill
DIRECTION: Read the passages and answer the questions that follow. Shade the circle (•) of the correct answer to each question.
A. SOUND SOURCES, HUMAN RESPONSE 1.
is a physical wave, or a mechanical vibration, or simply a series of pressure variations, in an elastic medium. For architects, this is defined as an audible signal. This travels much faster in liquids and solids than it does in air. A. SOUND
C. MUSIC
B. TONE
D. NOISE
2. The number of times the cycle of compression, pressure fluctuations and rarefaction of air (or to and for variations) that the source makes in a given unit of time or 1 second is described as the _ _ _ _ _ of a sound or vibration, expressed in HERTZ hz. For example, if there are 1000 cycles in one,second, this is 1,000 hertz. The higher this is, the higher the pitch in sound and vice-versa. A. TRANSMISSION
C. REVERBERATION
B. DECIBEL
D. FREQUENCIES
3. The persistence of sound after the cause of sound . A result of has stopped is called the repeated reflections. A. ATTENUATION
C. REVERBERATION
B. COEFFICIENT OF ABSORPTION
D. ECHO
309
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
4. When a "free' sound wave strikes a uniform surface that is large compared to the wavelength of the sounq, the of the wave is similar to that of a mirror. The angle the sound makes with a surface, equals the angle of incidence. This is the return of sound waves from a surface.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. SOUND PRESSUREC. DISTANCE B. REFLECTION
D. VELOCITY
5. Ideally, every listener in a lecture hall, theater, or concert hall should hear the speaker or performer with the same degree of loudness and clarity. Since this is obviously impossible by direct-path sound, the essential design task is to plan methods for reinforcing desirable reflections and minimizing and controlling undesirable ones. Normally; only the first reflection is considered in , since it is the strongest. A. RAY ALIGNING
C .. RAY DIAGRAMMING
B. RAY PROGRAMMING
[}. RAY TRAVERSING
A
A .. NOISE
C. SOUND
B. ECHOES
D. VOLUME
7. A is perceived as a buzzing or clicking sound, and it is comprised of repeated echoes traversing back and forth betWeen two non-absorbing \ parallel (flat or concave) surfaces. These often occur between shallow domes and hard; flat floors. The remedy for this sound is either to chan~e the shape of the reflectors, their parallel relationship, 1or add absorption. The solution c~osen will depend on reverberation requirements, cost;· or_ esthetics. (small music practice rooms uses splayed walls) A. GUTTER
C. SPLATTER
B. SHUTIER
D. FLUTTER 310
C
D
0000
A at sufficient intensity reaches a listener approximately 70 msec ormore after he hears the direct sound. This occurs whenever the reflected sound path is more than 70ft (21M) longer than the direct path. Typical Surfaces producing this sound in an auditorium are the back wall and the ceiling above the proscenium
B
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
8. Concave domes, barrel vaulted hallways, and circular rooms will reflected sound into certain areas of rooms. This has several disadvantages. For example, it will deprive some listeners of useful sound reflection and cause hot spots at other audience positions.
A. FOCUS
C. DIFFUSE
B. AIM
D. TARGET
9. This is the converse of focusing and occurs primarily
when sound is reflected from convex surfaces. A degree of is also provided by flat horizontal and inclined reflectors. A. ABSORPTION
C. REDUCTION
B. DIFFUSION
D. SECLUSION
10. A describes the reflection of sound along a curv,ed surface from a source near the surface. Although the sound can be heard at points along the surface, it is inaudible away from the surface. A. STEEP
C. CREEP
B. BLEEP
D. KEEP
11.
.. is a unit of power ratio, the number
of units being equal to a constant times the logarithm to the base 10 of the same kind such as power intensity or energy density. It is often used a unit to express the intensity of a sound wave, equal to 20 times the common logarithm of the ratio of the pressure produced by the sound wave to a reference pressure, usually .0002 microbar or 1 microbar.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
0
0000
I The formula is IL = 1Ologlo
A. DECIBEL
C. HERTZ
B. SOUND INTENSITY D. BARRIER
12. The unit of sound absorption is called the _ _ __ Theoretically, one square foot (12"X12") or 0.96 sq. m of a perfectly absorptive surface having an absorption coefficient of 1.00
A. OCTAVE BAND
C. WAVELENGTH
B. PHON
D. SABIN
311
A
8
C
D
0000
B. ACOUSTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 1. The rate which sound is taken in, without echo or reflected in a room is a prime factor in reducing noise and controlling reverberation. This is called _ _ _ _ .All materials used in the construct1on of buildings sucks some sounds, but proper acoustical control often requires the use of materials that have been especially designed to function primarily as sound is taken in such materials are popularly known as "ACOUSTICAL" materials to reduce noise in offices, hospitals, theatres and restaurants.
A DIFFUSION
C. REDUCTION
B. ABSORPTION
D. FLOODING
A
B
C
D
0000
Choose Acoustical materials with proper acoustical characteristics. Also, all other physical and decorative properties of the materials must be given proper attention. The Architect must raise about each material such questions as the following: a. Is it combustible or fire-resistant? b. How much light will it reflect? c. What about its structural length absorption of water, and attraction to 'vermin (rats)? d. How foolproof is it? e. Can its ~pplication be entrusted to the average carpenter? f. What is ifs appearance, and what are its decorative
possibilities? g. How much does the material cost? h. Will it be expensive to install and maintain? 2. Sound is ABSORBED by a mechanism which converts the sound into the other forms of energy and ultimately into heat. Most manufactured materials depends largely on their (full of holes permeable by air) for their absorptivity which, when sufficient and of appropriate thickness, as much as 95 percent of the energy of an incident sound wave may be absorbed in this manner. Many materials, such as mineral wool pads. and blankets, have a multitude of small deeply
312
A
B
C
D
0000
penetrating intercommunicating pores. The sound waves can readily propagate themselves into these INTERSTICES (an intervening space, a small or narrow space or interval between things or parts). where a portion of the sound energy is converted into heat by frictional and viscous resistance within the pores and by vibration of the small fibers of the material.
A. POROSITY
C. DENSITY
B. VISCOSITY
D. THICKNESS
3. A or POROUS material absorb the frictional drag produced by moving the air in small spaces within the material. The absorption provided by a specific material depends on its thickness, density and porostty and resistance to airflow. For example, materials must be thick to absorb low frequency sound effectively. Since the action depends on absorbing energy by "PUMPING" air through the material, the air paths must extend from 011e side to the other. A material of this type is useless as an acoustic absorbent (Therefore, painting will generally ruin a porous absorber). A. GRANULAR
C. FIBERGLASS
B. VEGETATIVE
D. FIBROUS
4. One type of ACOUSTICAL material is the _ _ _ _ _ .These include ACOUSTICAL TILE, well adapted to rooms in which a relatively small surface is available for acoustical treatment; MECHANICALLY PERFORATED UNITS backed with absorbent material; and certain WALL BOARDS, TILE BOARDS and ABSORBENT SHEETS A. COLLAPSIBLE UNITS
C. PRE-FABRICATED UNITS
B. MADE TO ORDER UNITS
D. STANDARD DESIGN UNITS
5. Another type is the . materials, These materials comprise plastic and porous materials applied with a trowel; and fibrous materials, combined with binder agents, which are applied with an air gun or blower.
A. CORKBOARD
C. ACOUSTICAL FELT
B. ACOUSTrCAL PLASTER AND SPRAYED-ON
D. CHEMICAL IMMERSED
313
A B C D
0000
A B C D
0000
A B C D
0000
6.
are made up chiefly of mineral or wood. wool, glass fibers, kapok batts, and hair felt. A. ACOUSTICAL BOARDS
C. ACOUSTICAL CUSHIONS
B. ACOUSTICAL ROLLS
D. ACOUSTICAL BLANKETS
7. Which of the following are not true? I. Sensitivity to sound varies between sexes. II. People are generally more sensitive to middle and high frequencies than to low frequencies for sounds of equal energy.
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
Ill. Most healthy young people can hear sounds in the range of 15 to 25,000 Hz. IV. Practically all common sounds are rnade up of energy in a wide range of frequencies. V. Speech is composed of frequencies in the range of 125 to 8000Hz. A. I and V
C. I and Ill
B. Ill and V
D. II and 111
3. The construction assembly shown would be the best for controlling which of the following kinds of acoustic situations? ~"gypsum
board
double laver~ .. gypsum board
1" sound absorbing panel
sound attenuation insulation
room A
room B
I. impact noise
11. excessive reverberation in room B
Ill. transmission from A to room B IV. transmission from room B to room A
V. mechanical vibration A. II and IV
C. Ill and IV
B. II and Ill
D. I and II 314
A
B
C
D
0000
9. In an office, a copy machine is found to produce 65 dB. If a computer printer is added to the room and it produces a sound intensity of 69 dB, what will be the resulting sound level?
A. 70 dB
C. 72 dB
B. 71 dB
D. 73 dB
10. What is the single number often used to evaluate partitions? A. SOUND ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT
C. SOUND INTENSITY
B. SOLJND TRANSMISSION CLASS
D. TRANSMISSION LOSS
11. What method is used to specify the maximum allowable intensity of background sounds? A. NOISE CRITERIA
C. NOISE REDUCTION
B. NOISE INSULATION CLASS
D. INVERSE SQUARE LAW
12. What is one variable affecting reverberation time? A. SOUND INTENSITY C. NGISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT B. ROOM VOLUME
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
D. PHON
13. Which of the following is not true about noise reduction between two rooms? A. Noise reduction increases with an increase in the transmission loss of the wall separating the two rooms. B. The stiffness of the wall has little effect on noise reduction. C. To improve noise reduction, you should place absorptive materials on both sides of the wall. D. An increase in wall area separating the two rooms is detrimental.
315
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
14. A room 4.50 M wide by 6.00 M long by 2.55 M high is finished with the following materials of listed absorptions. There is a window on one wall1.05 M high by 2.40 M long. What is the total absorption of the room? NRC
125
250
500
1000 2000 4000
floor wood
0.10
0.15
0.11
0.10
0.07 0.06 0.07
walls, gypsum board
0.05
0.10
0.08 0.05
0.03
0.03 0.03
ceiling acoustical tile
0.60 0.29
0.29 0.55
0.75
0.73 0.57
window, glass
0.15 0.35
0.25 0.18
0.12
0.07 0.04
A. 228 Sabins
C. 266 Sabins
B. 244 Sabins
D. 242 Sabins
15. If a material supplier told you that adding his product to a wall assembly in a critical acoustical situation would increase the noise reduction (STC rating) between two spaces by more than 3 dB, what should your reaction be?
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A. Determine what the additional cost would be and then decide whether or not to use the product. B. Thank him for stopping by but explain that you probably will not be using his product because that amount of noise reduction does not make It worth the effort of cost.
C. Specify the product as long as it does not affect the design or construction cost by more than 5%. D. Inquire whether some modification can be made to the product to increase its rating to 6 dB and say that then you might consider it. 16. During your design development presentation to the building committee of .a middle school, one of the teachers on the committee mentions that there might be a noise problem between the classrooms shown in the partial plan because the larger classroom will be used for open discussions, movies, lab. work, and other loud activities. Both classrooms are scheduled to have gypsum board partitions, vinyl tile floors; and suspended acoustical ceilings.
316
A
B
C
D
0000
cl.uroom B
corridor
If cost is a consideration, what changes in the design should you suggest, in order of priority from most important to least important?
I. Substitute carpeting for tile in both rooms. II. Move the operable windows near the separating wall so they are not so close together, and change the direction of the swing. Ill. Reroute the ductwork and conduit penetrations through the separating wall above the suspended ceiling and write spec~ications to direct that any remaining penetrations be tightly sealed. IV. Replan the layout so there is a small audiovisual storage room between the classrooms. V. Add an extra layer of gypsum board to each side of the separating partition and specify that the cavity be filled with sound- attenuating insulation. *ATTENUATION is the reduction of sound.
vr.
Hire an acoustical consultant to determine the special frequency problems associated with the activities planned for the larger classroom, and design custom sound - absorbing surfaces and partitions accordingly. A. Ill, 1·1, V, I, VI, IV
C. II, Ill, V, I, IV, VI
B. IV, II, Ill, V, VI, I
D. V, Ill, II, I, IV, VI
317
C. SOLID STRUCTURE AND AIR-BORNE NOISE REDUCTION
1. One way of reducing the noise is the selection of the location or . The existence and persistence of quiet locations is dependent on zoning ordinances and their enforcement. Architects in every comm.mity should cooperate with the civic authorities in the segregation of noxious activities including noisy industries, power stations, airports, traffic arteries. Inter urban automobile and truck traffic should be routed around, not through, area that have been zoned for schools, residences and hospitals, expressway that must pass through zones requiring quiet surroundings should be isolated by means of embankments or parapets along the outer edges of the highways. Trains should enter large metropolitan centers by underground routes; parks and landscaping should be planned to impede the propagation of no~se into quiet zones; and approaches to airports, which are increasing noise nuisance in all large cities, should be from the outskirts ·of the city, not over it.
2.
A. ORIENTING
C. SITING
B. LAYOUTING
D. GROUPING
is an effective way of NOISE CONTROL. An embankment placed between the listener and the train that passes by, is effective. An earth embankment or a masonry garden wall often can be used to reduce the noise that impinges on a building and aid in the establishment of quite conditions within the building without resorting to costly measures of sound insulation. It may reduce the level by as much as 5 dB. Use Hedges or trees with dense foliage, dense vines, grassy turf to face the sources of NOISE as sound barriers and reflectors.
A. PLANTING AND FENCING B. GRADING AND LANDSCAPING
C. FILLING AND EXCAVATION D. WALLING
318
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
3. The location of a building on its site, the arrangement of rooms, corridors and vestibules, and the location of doors and windows, all have a bearing on the control of noise. This is called the _ _ _ __ For example, the noise level at the end of a room adjacent to a busy street maybe at least 5 db higher than it is at the opposite end. In such a situation it is advantageous to place the speaker's platform at the end of the room. The side of a building facing streets, playgrounds, or other sources of noise should house those activities that can tolerate the greatest amount of noise, and the sides of the building that face the quieter environment should be reserved for those rooms that require the quietest conditions windows should not open on noisy street or yards.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. BUILDING LAYOUT C. GROUPING
B. PLANNING
D. FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
4. Compound-wall constructions or is one way of reducing air-borne noise. provide two adjoining walls with an open space in between without any materials like wood connectors, or chunks of plaster thrown in between that touches both walls. Another technique is to fill in the void with porous sound absorbent material. A. DOUBLE WALL
C. BEARING WALL
B. THICK WALL
D. CAVITY WALL
5. Another way to reduce Air-borne noise is to use _ _ _ _ _ windows. 1/4" thick with at least 1/2"
(.0125} air space. One sheet is tilted at 1 inch in 12 inches to suppress high transmission of certain resonant requencies. In radio stations sometimes three sheets are required with at least 0.15 M separation between the sheets of glass. In such rooms, the periphery of the space between sheets should be lined with sound absorptive material.
A. DOUBLE GLASS PANE
C. LAMINATED GLASS
B. TEMPERED GLASS
D. WIRE GLASS
319
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
6. Just as sound win pass through the acoustically weakest part of a composite wall, so it will also find paralel or paths. That is, an acoustic short circuit. Proper design of window locations to avoid this path should be the following: In a corner design where corr.er windows are closely spaced such that noise from open window apt. A goes to open window apt B, solution, put hinge of window such that it buffers the sound when opened and put planting in between. Put a wide separation of straight wall windows. In a noisy walkway outside put windows away from this path. Also put sound barrier between the second floor and ceiling of the first floor.
A. ALIGNING
C. SINGLE
B. FLANKING
D. FILING
7. The isolation provided by a ,floor system against mechanical impact can be greatly improved by the use of a floor which rests on the structural floor but is separated from it by a resilient support af quilt (on top of the sub-floor is a 1/2" fiberboard or a resil.ient blanket then a 1"X2" wood sleeper then finish floor. Below the floor would be a false ceiling. Meaning a ceiling with a horizontai2"X6" ceiling foist never touching the floor (do not use 2''X2" or 2 "X3" hangers) A. CARPETED
C. HOLLOWED
B. DOUBLE STACK
D. FLOATING
MECHANICAL NOISE sources, those coming from the components of the air conditioning and AHU, or air handling units such as fans, compressor, cooling towers, condensers, ductwork, dampers, mixing boxes, induction units, and diffusers can be controlled. Pumps are another source, of mechanical noise, which is frequently transmitted along pipes to remote points. Elevators, escalators and freight elevators also introduce mechanical noise into the building. The ,motors and switchgear are located on or above the prime upper floors of a building, and must be properly controlled to prevent annoyance to building tenants located near the shaftways or mechanical penthouses.
320
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
8. Machines cause noise by vibration. This noise is imparted directly to the surrounding air and by vibrational contact to the surrounding structure. Therefore there are three ways to reduce this noise:
A
B
C
D
0000
I. Reduce the vibration itself
II. Suspend the structure itself Ill. Wrap the enclosure with acoustical materials IV. Reduce the Air-borne noise by decoupling the vibration from efficient radiating sources V. Decouple the vibrating source from the structure VI. Locate the mechanical machine 20 meters away. A. I, II and IV
C. I, IV and V
B. II, Ill and IV
D. II, IV and VI
D. PHYSICS OF LIGHT AND SOURCES 1. The of a meterial such as a iixture or diffuser is a measure of its capability to transmit incident light. (it goes through) It's factor or coefficient is the ratio of the total emitted light to the total incident light (source). An example is a· clear glass which displays this measure between 80% and 90%, frosted glass between 70 and 85% and solid opal glass between 15 and 40%.
A. LUMINOUS TRANSMITTANCE
C. RESISTANCE
B. ILLUMINATION
D. SPREADING FACTOR
2. The is the unit of luminous intensity. It is analogous to pressure in a hydraulic system and voltage in an electric system and represents the force that generates the light that we use.
A. LAMP POWER
C. GLOWING POWER
B. BRIGHTNESS
D. CANDLE POWER
321
A
t.
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
3.
is a term used to describe all the factors in a lighting installation not dire~tly concerned with quantity of illumination. Certainly it is obvious that if a given room is alternatively lighted with a bare bulb and with a luminous ceiling, both giving the same average quantitative illumination, there is a vast, difference in the two lighting systems. This is also a term which describes the luminance ratios, diffusion uniformity and chromaticity of the lighting. This is also a description of the visual comfort and visual adequacy of the system. A. CHARACTER OF LIGHTING
C. QUALITY OF LIGHTING
B. USAGE OF LIGHTING
D. TYPE OF LIGHTING
4. Ucomfortable brightness ratios, where background luminance exceeds object luminance is called a
A. FLICKER
c.
B. GLARE
D. BUBBLE
A
B
c
D
0000
A
B
c
D
0000
SPARKLE
5. When the discomfort glare is caused by light sources in the field of vision it is known as (looking at the light at 45Q angle).
A. STRAIGHT GLARE ~· DIRECT GLARE B. EYE TO SOUROE GLARE
D. ECHO GLARE
6. When the glare is caused by reflection of light source in a viewed surface (say a table) it is known as or "VEILING reflection". The object mirrors the source of light in the room. A. TANGENT GLARE
C. TRANSMITTED GLARE
B. REFLECTED GLARE
D. DIFFUSED GLARE
7. EFFICACY increases with wattage. Therefore it is energy- economical to use a small number of higherwattage lamps than big or many number of lowerwattage lamps. It is usually more economical with
322
c D 0000 A
B
c D 0000 A
B
respect to fixtures since electric lighting ifl nonresidential buildings consumes 25 to 60% of the electric energy utilized, any attempt to reduce this must necessarily include integration of the cheapest (in sofar as energy is concerned). Most abundant and , in many ways, most desirable form of lighting available, the _ _ _ __ A. SUNLIGHT
C. TASK LIGHT
B. NATURAL LIGHT
D. DAYLIGHT
A
8
C
D
0000
Daylighting is an amenity rather than a necessity. As such its provision has been the province of architecture rather than lighting design. Windows provide visual contact with the outside and the resultant daylight provides a bright, pleasant, airy ambience. When DAYLIGHT enters through windows (side lighting) its horizontal directivity provides good modeling shadows, minimal veiling reflections, and excellent vertical surface illumination, aside from continual variation of daylight, it provides a constantly changing pattern of space illumination; one that is NOT or is unattainable with artificial fight. B. An
consists of a tungsten filament placed within a sealed bulb containing an inert gas. When electricity is passed through the lamp the filament glows, producing light. These lamps are produced in a wide variety of shapes, sizes and wattages tor different applications. The ADVANTAGES of these lamps are inexpensive, compact, easy to dim can be repeatedly started without a decrease in lamp fife, and have a warm color rendition. In addition, their fight output can be easilycontrolled with reflectors and lenses. Their DISADVANTAGES include low efficacy and heat production makes these lamps undesirable for farge, energy- efficient installations. For example, a 150-watt lamp produces less than 20 lumens per watt while a 40watt cool white fluorescent lamp has an efficacy of about 80 lumens per watt with much less heat output. TYPES of this kind of lamp are the Arbitrary (standard), Globular, Pear-shaped, Flame-shape: cone shape, Par, parabolic aluminized reflector; R, Reflector, T, Tubular. A. INCANDESCENT
C. TOUCH LAMP
LAMP B. FLUORESCENT LAMP
D. METAL HAliDE LAMP
323
A
B
C
D
OOC'O
9. Another type of incandescent lamp is the _ _ __ Light is produced by the incandescence of the filament, but there is a small amount of a halogen, such as iodine or bromine, in the bulb with the inert gas. Through a recurring cycle, part of the tungsten filament is burned ott as the lamp operates, but it mixes with the halogen and is redeposited on the filament. instead of on the wall of the bulb as in standard incandescent lamps. This results in longer bulb life, low lumen depreciation over the life of the bulb, and more uniform light color. Because the filament burns under higher pressure and temperature, the bulb is made from quartz and is much smaller than standard incandescent lamps.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. MERCURY VAPOR C. TUNGSTENHALOGEN B. METAL HALIDE
10
D. HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM
are lamps that contain a mixture of an inert gas and low-pressure mercury vapor. When the lamp is energized, a mercury arc is formed that creates ultra violet light. This invisible light, in turn. strikes the phosphor-coated bulb causing it to fluoresce and produce visible light. The three types of this type of lamp are the PREHEAT, RAPID START, and INSTANT START, according to their circuitry. A. SODIUM LAMP
C. VAPOR LAMP
B. ULTRAVIOLET
D. FLUORESCENT
There are several general types of LIGHTING SYSTEMS. The terms used to describe them can refer to individualliminaires or to the entire lighting installation. They are broadly described as: DIRECT II SEMI-DIRECT Ill DIRECT-INDIRECT IV SEMI-DIRECT V INDIRECT
324
A B C D
0000
11. This type provides approximately equal distribution of light upward and downward, resulting in a bright ceiling and upper wall background for the luminaire. For this reason, brightness ratios in the upper-vision zone are usually not a problem. Since the ceiling is a major, though secondary source of room illumination, diffuseness will be good, with resultant satisfactory vertical-plane illumination.
A
B
C
D
0000
One example of this type is a GENERAL DIFFUSE or an Opal Diffusing Globe fixture hanging from the ceiling which give light in all directions. The other type is an open top luminous side and bottom luminaire, which have little horizontal component. Stems from the ceiling should not be less than 0.30 M.
A. Ill
C. IV
B. II
D.
12. Ninety to one hundred percent of the light output of the luminaires is directed to the ceiling and upper walls of the room. This lighting system is called ____ because practically all of the light reaches the horizontal working plane indirectly, That is, via reflection from the ceiling and upper walls. Therefore, the ceiling and upper walls in effect become the light source and, if these surfaces have a high-reflectance finish, the room illumination is quite diffuse (shadowless). This luminaire is suspended at least 0.45M. METAL REFLECTOR$ is under this type. Also Architectural COVES near the ceiling wherein the light is not seer~.
A. II
c.
B. V
D.
A
B
C
D
0000
Ill
13. Since essentially all the light is directed downward, ceiling illumination is entirely due to light reflected from the floor and room furnishings. This system requires a light, high-reflectance, diffuse floor unless a dark ceil.ing is desired from an architectural viewpoint. This system is called the lighting since it provide all light output on the task. A recessed fluorescent luminaire is an example of this type. Another type is a metal-enclosed fluorescent light, (no light goes to the ceiling and sides).
A. IV
C. II
B.
D. V
325
A
B
C
D
0000
14. Sixty to ninety percent of the light is directed upward to the ceiling and upperwalls. This is somewhat efficient and allows higher levels of illumination without undesirable brightness contrast between fixture and surroundings along with lower ceiling brightness. A typical fixture employs a translucent diffusing element through which the downward component shines.
A. II
C. IV
B. V
D. Ill
15. With this type of lighting system, 60% to 90% of the luminaire output is directed downward and the remaining upward component serves to illuminate the ceiling. This consists of a circular plastic housing flat on the surface and with solid backing attached to the ceiling. This gives light horizontally and also a rectangular shaped housing for a fluorescent lamp that has luminous sides, but closed top.
A. Ill
C. V
B.
D, II
16. Another common LIGHTING SYSTEM is the ______ . This approach to lighting design recognizes that it is inefficient to try to illuminate an entire room to the level required for individual tasks scattered around the room. Instead, a general background level of illumination is provided and separate light fixtures used to increase the light level at individual work stations. This can be done with desk lamps, directed spotlights, or more fixtures near the tasks requiring more illumination. In addition to being energy efficient and responding to individual lighting needs, These systems usually create a more pleasant work environment. A. TASK AMBIENT
C. ROOM USAGE
B. EFFICIENT LIGHTING
D. SPECIAL LIGHTING
326
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
E. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1. The unit of luminous intensity approximately equal to the horizontal light output from an ordinary wax candle is called the . In the Sl system of measurement, this unit is the CANDELA. A. CANDLE POWER
C. REACTANCE
B. POWER FACTOR
D. MELTING POINT
2. The unit of luminous FLUX equal to the flux in a unit
solid angle of one steradian from a uniform point source of one candlepower. On a unit sphere (1-foot radius) an area of 1 square foot or 12"X12" (0.31X0.31) or 0.961 sq.m. will subtend an angle of one steradian. Since the area of a unit sphere is 4 times , a source of one candlepower produces 12.57 of this unit which is called the _ _ _ __
3.
A. IMPEDANCE
C. VOLTAGE
B. LUMEN
D. CIRCUIT
is the luminous flux per unit of projected (apparent) area and unit solid angle leaving a surface, either reflected or transmitted. The unit is the FOOT LAMBERT (fl) where one footlambert equals 1/ candelas per square foot. Luminance takes into account the reflectance and transmittance properties of materials and the direction in which they are viewed. Thus, 100 footdmdles striking a surface with 50 percent reflectance would result in a luminance of 50 footlamberts. Luminance is sometimes called "BRIGHTNESS" and surface emitting, transmitting, or reflecting one lumen per square foot in the direction being viewed has a luminance of one footlambert. A. LUMINANCE
C. GLARE
B. RESISTANCE
D. BRIGHTNESS
327
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
4. What steps could an architect take to increase the anticipated lighting level of a room of a selected fluorescent luminaire could not be replaced with another with a higher CU?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. CHANGE lamp types B. SUGGEST to the owner .that the lamps be replaced often C. USE finishes with a higher reflection value D. ALL OF THE ABOVE 5. A spotlight shining perpendicular to a wall 15 feet away (4.50M) has a candlepower output of 3,500 candelas. If the wall is painted to a reflectance of 75 percent, what is the luminance of the wall at the point perpendicular to the direction of light?
A. 4.9 :=ootlamberts
C. 15.56 Footcandles
B. 11.7 Footlamberts
D. 55.7 Footcandles
6. Which of the following·would an architect be most concerned about when designing the lighting for an office space with computer work stations and star.dard desk?
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
color - rendering Index II VisuaiComfort Probability II Veiling Reflection IV Reflected Glare V Task/Surrounds Brightness Ratio
A. I, II, IV and V
C. Ill, IV and V
B. II, Ill and IV
D. all of the above
7 The brightness of daylight coming through a window would be measured in: A. Footcandles
C. Footlamberts
8. Candelas
D. Candlepower
328
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
8. What combination of lighting would an architect probably recommend for a moderate - sized women's clothing store?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. Color- improved mercury lamps with metal halide accent lighting B. Limited neutral daylight, warm white deluxe fluorescent for general illumination, and tungsten halogen for accent lighting C. Incandescent general lighting with low-voltage accent lighting on displays D. Daylighting for general illumination and PATC lamps for dressing areas and display lightings 9. Why should high-pressure instead of low-pressure sodium lamps be used in a storage warehouse?
A. They are less Expensive B. They have a longer lamp life C. They canoperate at higher, more efficient volt· ages D. They have better color-rendering properties
329
A
B
C
D
0000
AREA ''B'' PARTIII
UTILITIES
5. • BUILDING PROTECTION • FIRE PROTECTION • INTRUSION PREVENTION (SECURITY)
AREA "B"
PART Ill
UTILITIES
A. BUILDING PROTECTION Choose one answer and encircle (e) with black under A,B, C, D. 1. A method of protecting the ferrous materials like steel, iron from rusting or corroding. A. RUST PROOFING
A
B
C
D
0000
C. WATERPROOFING
B. PAINTS AND PRO- D. DAMP PROOFING TECTIVE COATINGS
?. Damage to buildings is caused by heat generated by lighting which turns the moisture content into steam, producing high pressure and explosive splitting of walls, masts and trees, etc. This kind of protection is therefore, necessary. It consists of continuous metallic conductor effectively earthed.
A
FLOOR PROTECTION
B. LIGHTNING PROTECTION
B
C
0
0000
C. FIRE PROOFING
D. WATERPROOFING
3. Protection from the outside is provided by water repellant materials which turn water aside and force it to return to the earth. The dampness that sometimes occurs inside the building can be caused by penetration of moisture from the outside or by condensation of water vapor generated on the inside. A. WATER PROOFING C. FLOOR PROTECTION
B. CLEAR PROTECTIVE TREATMENT FOR LIMESTONE
A
D. DAMP PROOFING
331
A
B
C
D
0000
4. A chemical liquid painted and applied to lumber to preserve it for years. It protects wood against powder post beetles (bukbok), powder post termites (unos), Decay causing fungi, such as sap stain and dry rot. A. FLOOR PROTECTION
A
B
c
D
0000
C. WOOD PRESERVATIVE
B. WATERPROOFING D. DAMP PROOFING
5. A method of protecting against the destructive effects of water.
c D 0000 A
B
A. WATERPROOFING C. WOOD PRESERVATIVE B. DAMP PROOFING
D. PAINTS AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
6. For buildings that need total control of the incoming and outgoing individuals for the protection qt the building as a whole from robbers, stealers, etc. There are so many equipments which can be installed.
A. RAT PROOFING
C. SECURITYINTRUSION PRbOF
B. LIGHTNING PROTECTION
D. FIREPROOFING
7. This is a clear invisible silicone water repellant specially formulated for application on masonry and bricks, (standard) and for limestone and concre~e that seeps much rain water (special formula). The silicone liquid is applied by brush or by low pressure spray and does not affect the color or the naturalness · of the material. A. RUST PROOFING
C. PAINTS AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
B. CLEAR PROTECTIVE TREATMENT FOR MASONRY
D. WOOD PRESERVATIVE
332
c D 0000 A
B
A
B
C
D
0000
8. A method of protecting rooms against the intrusion of rats and other small destructive animals from gnawing the wooden parts of the house, habitating on ceilings and floors of houses and buildings.
A. WOOD PRESERVATIVE B. RUST PROOFING
B
C
D
0000
C. SECURITYINTRUSSION PROOFING D. RAT PROOFING
9. It is important to poison the soil anay (white ants) in order to stop the anay from infesting the main spots, walls and flooring.
A. WOOD PRESERVA-
A
A
B
C
0
0000
C. RUST PROOFING
TIVE B. TERMITE PROOFING
D. RAT PROOFING
10. When floors are subjected to wear and tear, or from chemical abrasions and heavy use, a special kind of material should be used to protect the flooring.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. WOOD PRESERVA- C. WATERPROOFING TIVE B. DAMP PROOFING
D. FLOOR PROTECTION
11. This is applied to the surface for the reason of decoration, to be used for sanitation, preservation, impro,ved lighting effects, improved working conditions, safety and economy. A. PAINTS AND PROTECTIVE COATING
C. WOOD PRESERVATIVE
B. rLOOR PROTECTION
D. DAMP PROOFING
12. A clear liquid applied easily on wood, plywood, lumber and other board that retains the natural beauty, gives added strength and protects materials against fire, weather, decay, insects and warping. Since the liquid penetrates into the woodwhen there is fire, it reacts by dispersing the flame, preventing progressive burning. A. LIGHTNING PROTECTION
C. FIRE PROOFNG
B. WATER PROOFING D. RUST PROOFING
333
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B. BUILDING PROTECTION MATERIALS 1. Waterproofing Medium in powder form is added and mixed with the aggregates of concrete: In this case one pack of usually 1 kilo of powder is added to one bag of 40 kilos sement. Some of the known brands are sahara and sakura (semi-waterproofing and damproofing). A. WATERPLUG
A
B
C
D
0000
C. VAPOR BARRIER
D. INTEGRAL TYPE B. SILICONE WATER REPELLANT THOROCLEAR SPECIAL
2. Recommended for waterproofing use where direct rain, or standing water a_re eminent. There are about ~ 4 uses. The materials used depending on the manufacturer is either asphalt, impregnated asbestos felt, sometimes thick polyethylene sheets is also used.
c D 0000 A
B
A. MEMBRANE TYPI; C. WATER STOPPER B. THOROCLEAR 777 D. ELASTOMETRIC SILICONE WATER FLUID COATING REPELLANT 3. Thi$ type is applied by roller, brush, spray or squeegee. This is based on heavy compound formulated to waterproof and preserve the substrate, like concrete, wood, bricks and steel. Th~ waterproofing is monolithic, seamless, flexible and elastic over a whole wide temperature range, withstands extreme thermal movement, settling and cracking. It resists puncture and tearing abrasive overlayments.
c D 0000 A
B
A. VAPOR BARRIERS C. ELASTOMETRIC FLUID COATING B. SILICONE WATER D. THOROSEAL REPELLANT THOROCLEAR SPECIAL 4. Rainwater usually seeps from the ground to the concrete wall or from the floor of the basement. To stop this, a perforated pipe is laid with a slope leading to the street drainage or away from the house and 0.40 M below the basement floor level and a 0.30 M 334
c D 0000 A
B
,;1
I
thick loose gravel placed between the soil and the concrete wall. Water goes down by gravity through the loose stones.
A. WATER STOPPER C. WATER PLUG B. FILTERING METHOD
D. SILICONE WATER REPELLANT (SPECIAL)
5. When a Basement wall cannot be poured in one time, there will be a vertical connection when a new concrete will be continued to be poured. This may be the cause of rainwater leak therefore a vinyl or rubber material must be integrated in the ends of the concrete wall to prevent rainwater to enter !hrough th·e connection. This is called the
A. FILTERING METHOD
A
B
C
D
0000
C. WATER STOPPER
B. SILICONE Hp D. WATER PLUG REPELLANT THOROCLEAR 777 6. This is in dry-powder form and mixes easily with water to become a heavy-duty patching material and is available in 1 pint cans and 1 quart cans also in 1 gallon cans (10 lbs) and 5 gal. drums (50 lbs.J containers. This is used to seal cracks and lloles in the basement walls. Whether water is pouring in under pressure or seeping in as slow leak (during rain) this material stops it. FAST! Running water is stopped in 3 to 5 minutes. It is non-shrink and expands as it sets and won't pull away from the edges of the patch area. It even sets up underwater. This packaged in dry-powder form, and mixes easily with water applied by hand to become a heavy-duty patching material.
A
B
C
D
0 Cl 0 0
A. VAPOR BARRIERS C. FIRE RETARDANT B. WATER PLUG
D. FLOOR SEALER (ANTI-SKID)
7. These are mat~rials which effectively retard or stop the flow of water vapor and normally are produced in sheets or thin layers. These should be installed on the warm side of ihe insulation. They should be
335
A
B
C
D
0000
continuous surfaces of asphalt or wax coated papers, aluminum or other metal foil sheets or polyethylene film, and maybe attached to the insulation as a part of the manufactured product of installed separately in or on the warm side of the wall, floor or ceiling. A. VAPOR BARRIERS DAMP PROOFING
C.
B. FLOOR SEALER (ANTI-SKID)
D. MEMBRANE TYPE
WATER STOPPER
8. A cement based, heavy-duty, easy-to-apply, water proof sealant and coating. This is ideal for basement walls, which is porous, permitting dampness to enter and turn the space into a dunk, unattractive void. This material ends all this by going deep to fill and seal the pores and minor surface, imperfections, becoming, as it hardens, a totally waterproof skin; positively prohibiting moisture penetration. This materiat is NOT a paint. Although it comes in attractive colors. It is cementitious. That means it chemically·combines ~ith the concrete or masonry surface it's applied to become an actual part of the wall.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. SILICONE THORO- C. ELASTOMERIC CLEAR SPECIAL
FLUID COATING
B. SILICONE THORO- D. THOROSEAL CLEAR 777 9. A clear protective treatment for masonry, concrete, BRICKS, synthetic adobe. This come in silicone liquid and is used to be spread around the surfaces by using paint brush. This liquid is clear and does not change the natural color of the materials.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. SILICONE THORO- C. THOROSEAL CLEAR SPECIAL B. SILICONE THORO- D. FIRE RETARDANT CLEAR 777 WATER REPELLANT 1o. This is also called the SOIL POISONING, to protect the house by being infested by infesting white Ants (or termites). This stops the insect by infesting the main posts walls, and flooring. 1 part solution to 50 parts water is mixed and spread to the soil by an
336
A
B
C
D
0000
ordinary garden can. Application is made after excavation and after placing of footings, after grading and levelling, after construction and after earth filling. A. INTEGRAL TYPE
C. RAT PROOFING
B. ELASTOMERIC FLUID COATING
D. ANAY PROOFING
11. A synthetic resin-based coating incorporating an abrasive aggregate to provide an anti-slip finish. Normally applied by trowel. It comes in different colours like blue, green, grey, red and yellow. This is an anti-slip coating over many types of base, especially in locations where wet or oily conditions prevail, Example: on steps and ladder treads, around machinery, or inclined ramps, platforms, steel or wooden decks, around swimming pools and showers, in kitchens, garages, etc. It may also be applied to steel, wood, aluminum, tiled surfaces but should NOT be applied to asphaltic surface. A. SILICONE WATER REPELLANT
C. FLOOR SEALER (ANTI-SKID)
B. FILTERING METHOD
D. RUST PROOFING
12. A clear, invisible silicone, especially formulated for application on aged LIMESTONE and horizontal concrete. Furnished in liquid form. Application by brush or low pressure spray. A. THOROCLEAR SPECIAL SILICONE
C. THOROSEAL
B. THOROCLEAR 777 SILICONE
D. VAPOR BARRIER DAMP PROOFING
13. When thoroughly applied protects lumber for years, from termites, decay causing fungi such as sap stain and dry rot. This is applied undiluted with a paint brush (2 or 3 coatings) or a sprayer. A liter can treat a minimum of 10 sq.M per coating. Some brands are xyladecor by boysen, cuprinol of dutchboy and solignum by Jardine Davis.
A. WATER STOPPER C. WOOD PRESERVATIVE B. FIRE RETARDANT D. RUST PROOFING
337
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
14. ON!::-way of discouraging rodents from gnawing the wood is to put a galvanized sheet on the corners of a room. Science had proven that Rats almost always start to chew or gnaw only at the corners of a room and not on the middle. The G.l. sheet is placed 0.30 M high from the floor and 0.30 M wide from the wall before the finish walling or plywood and the T and G floor is placed.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. FILTERING METHOD C. ANAY PROOFING B. RAT PROOFING
D. WOOD PRESERVATIVE
15 This protects G.l. Sheets and Steel from rusting. Brand names are weatherkote by shell and by Pacific paints, Colorless Anti-Corrosion system, RED LEAD primer (red oxide)
A
B
C
D
0000
A. MEMBRANE TYPE C. FILTERING METHOD B. FIRE RETARDANT D. RUST PROOFING 16. To prevent the fire from· spreading at once, lumber, plywood, wood doors are painted with a liquid that penetrates into the wood. When there is fire, it reacts by dispersing the flame, preventing progressive burning. One brand is fire stopper by EROCORP. This liquid when applied, retains the natural beauty, gives ~ded strength and more marketable value as it protects materials against fire, weather, decay, insects and warping. Painting can be applied over this liquid.
A. FIRE RETARDANT C. RAT PROOFING B. MEMBRANE TYPE D. TERMITE PROOFING
338
A
B
C
D
0000
C. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARMS 1. The most common residential alarm initiating device is the Temperature detector, sometimes called a _ _ _ _ _ . These detectors are of two types; The Fixed Temperature Unit and the Rate-of-Rise Unit. The former operates ~ set of contacts when a present (non-adjustable) temperature is reached. The latter operates when the rate of ambient temperature changes exceeds a predetermined amount, indicative of an incipient fire. A. RHEOSTAT
C. CLIMATE CONTROLLER
B. HEAT GAUGE
D. THERMOSTAT
2. The function of the , is to energize the audible devices (bells, buzzers, and gongs) upon receipt of a signal from the detector, which will continue to sound until the emergency condition is cleared or until they are manually silenced at the _panel. Other functions that the panel may be designed to serve are shut-off of oil and gas lines, shut-off of attic fan to prevent fire spread, and turnout of lights, both inside and outside. In order to assure system operation even in the event of a power interruption, most systems are provided with a standby battery.
3.
A. OPERATOR
C. CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL
B. GENERAL COMPTROLLER
D. GENTRALIZED SWITCH
comprises conventional bells, gongs, buzzers, and horns. Most commonly used is the a-c vibrating bell, since gongs are normally only used in coded non-residential systems. A weather-proof external bell, to alert neighbors and passersby, is also desirable. A. ALERTING
C. SIGNAL DEVICES
SYSTEM B. AUDIBLE ALARM DEVICES
D. SOUND ALARM
339
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
4.
are rated by temperature and coverage; for example 57°C and 20 sq. M. and are normally located on the ceiling in all rooms and stairwalls, including the attic and the basement. Because of high ambiant temperatures, the units installed in the kitchen, attic and basement near the heating unit are normally rated at 88c£ to 93«C, whereas the units in the other rooms are usually set at 57(£. These are normally placed adjacent to the house heating unit in the bedroom area, in the kitchen, and occasionally in the garage and in unoccupied areas such as the attic. A. SMOKE DETECTORS
A
B
C
D
0000
C. MISTFOG DETECTORS
B. HEAT DETECTORS D. FIRE DETECTORS 5. A system which is normally deenergized and carries no current except when functioning is called an _ _ _ _ _ . Such a system is the simplest and most economical type but has the disadvantage of not indicating a broke~ wire or other malfunction that will render the system inoperative.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. EXPOSED CIRCUIT C. LOOSESYSTEM CONNECTION SYSTEM B .. OPEN CIRCUIT SYSTEM
D. UNCOVERED CIRCUIT SYSTEM
6. In contrast to be automatic detectors that constitute the most common alarm initiation devices, in residential systems, There is a which is operated by hand. The detector monitors automatically and is therefore best applied in buifdings with sleeping residents and in unoccupied spaces in other buildings. This kind of station serve to spread the alarm, which has already been detected by other means, either human or automatic. An example is a small manual fire alarm station with break glass rod and single set of contacts. A. NON-CODED
MANUAL STATIONS
C. UNLISTED MANUAL STATIONS
B. UNTITLED D. UNCODED MANUAL STATIONS HANDHELD MANUALS
340
A
B
C
D
0000
7. When the system design is such that immediately aural identification of the operated station is is used. The code sent necessary, a out by the station is received at the control panel, processed and then transmitted audibly on the system gongs. Not less than 3 rounds of code, and normally 4 rounds are transmitted. The code usually comprises 3 or 4 digits, for example 2-3-2 with a pause between the ringing groups and a longer pause between the rounds. The FIRST number may identify the building floor, the SECOND digit the wing, and the THIRD digit the individual station. Establishment of codes is left to the user. A. SIGNAL MANUAL STATIONS
C. TITLED MANUAL STATIONS
B. LISTED MANUAL STATIONS
D. CODED MANUAL STATIONS
8. Various circuit ·arrangements are possible by use ( ! _ _ _ switches that are placed in sprinkler pipelines and operate when a sprinkler head goes off. In this indicator, the unit bolts onto a sprinkler pipe with the paddle inside the pipe. Any water motion deflects the paddle, causing a signal to be transmitted from the microswitch mounted in the box on top of the pipe. A. DRIP METHOD SWITCHES
C. WATER FLOW SWITCHES
B. WETPIPE SWITCHES
D. COUNTER FLOW SWITCHES
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
There are FOUR (4) Types of FIRE DETECTORS. 9. These devices respond to elevated temperatures that accompany actively burning fires. As such they act much like the fusible link in a sprinkler head. Rise-ofTemperature devices detect the presence of heat and can be set to trip an alarm when a particular temperature is reached in the room. The major disadvantage is that flame must usually be present before tne alarm temperature is reached. By that time it may be too late, since a fire can smolder and produce deadly smoke long before it reaches the flame stage. A. FORECAST DETECTORS
C. TEMPERATURE DETECTORS
B. CLIMATE CONTROL DETECTORS
D. HIGH FLOW DETECTORS
341
A
B
C
D
0000
10. These detectors respond to smoke which obscures a light beam in the device. These are useful in spaces where occupants may be asleep, where potential fires may produce a great deal of smoke poisoning (asphyxiation) may occur. A. AUTOMATIC DETECTORS
A
B
C
D
0000
C. X-RAY DETECTORS
B. PHOTO ELECTRIC D. MAGNETIC DETECTORS DETECTORS 11 . These devices all purport to react to "products of combustion" particulates. They do not detect smoke. They are not appropriate where fires may produce a lot of smoke but few particles because they can detect particles from a smoldering fire before it bursts into flames, these devices are considered Early Warning Devices. A. IONIZATION DETECTORS
C. MICRO DETECTORS
B. ATOMATION DETECTORS
D. MINIMALIZATION DETECTORS
12. There are also Detectors that respond to infrared or ultraviolet radiation given off by flames. However, like rise-of-temperature detectors, they do not give an early warning of smoldering fire. A. FIRE DETECTORS C. WARMTH DETECTORS B. HEAT DETECTORS D. FLAME DETECTORS
342
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
D. FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS; DEFINITIONS The answers to Questions 1 through 14 can be found on the following key list. Select only one answer for each question. AO ALARM INITIATING DEVICE, AUTOMATIC
80 CODED SYSTEM
A1 ALARM INITIATING DEVICE, MANUAL
B1 CONTROL UNIT (FIRE ALARM PANEL)
A2 AUTOMATIC SYSTEM
B2 DOUBLE SUPERVISED SYSTEM
A3 AUXILIARY FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
B3 DUAL-CODED SYSTEM
A4 BELL-SINGLE STROKE
84 LOCAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
AS A BREAK GlASS
85 LOCAL NONII'HERFERING CODED STATION
A6 CODED ALARM SIGNAL
B6 MANUAL SYSTEM
1. One in which the alarm initiating device is operated manually to transmit or sound an alarm signal
A. A6
C. B1
B. 86
D. A4
2. A system in which a unique coded alarm is sounded for each separate box or fire zone to notify Owner"s personnel of the fire location, while noncoded or common coded alarm signals are sounded on separate signals to notify other occupants to evaluate the building A. A2
c.
B. B1
D. B3
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B2
3. An alarm signal that represents a 1, 2, 3, or 4-digit number indicative of the location of the fire alarm station operated;
A A1
C. A6
B. A3
D. B4 343
A
B
C
D
0000
4. Alarm devices, such as fire detectors, smoke detectors, and water flow switches, are devices that automatically transmit an alarm signal when a condition indicative of a fire to which they respond
A B
C
0
0000
occur A. AO
C. B1
B. A2
D. B2
S. A system in which an alarm initiating device operates automatically to transmit or sound an alarm signal
A. AO
C. AS
B. A2
Q,
A
B
C
D
0000
BO
6. An Electricity operated system producing signals at one or more places at the premises served, primarily for the notification of the occupants
A. B4
C. A6
B. B5
D. A4
7. Compromises the controls, relays, switches, and associated circuits necessary to
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
(1) furnish power to a fire alarm system (2) receive signals from alarm initiating devices and transmits them to indicating devices and accessory equipment (3) Electrically supervise the system circuitry.
A. A3
C: B1
a
D. BS
AS
8. A devic~ whose gong is struck only once each time operating energy is applied to the bell.
A. B6
c.
B. B1
D. A4
A B C D
0000
B4
9. A ftre alarm station that will transmit an alarm signal when manually operated
A. BO
C. A1
B. B4
D. AS 344
A
B
C
D
0000
10. A fire atai1Tl station, that, once actuated, wtH transmit not le.ss than 4 rounds of coded alarm signals and cannot be interferred with by any subsequent activation of that station until it has transmitted its complete signals
A. AJ
c. A6
B. 85
[,). 80
11. A system that is maintained and supervised by a responsible person or corporation and having alarm initiating devices that, when operated, cause an alarm to be transmitted over a municipal fire alarm system to be fire station or to the fire alarm headquaters for retransmission to the station. A. 82
c.
B. AS
D. A3
B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B3
12. Refers to a false-alarm deterrent available in fire alarm stations; a glass rod is placed across the pulllever and breaks easily when the lever is pulled
A. AS
C. A3
B. A2
D. B6
13. One in which not less than 3 rounds of coded alarm signals are transmitted, after which the fire alarm system' may be manuaHy or, automaticaHy silenced A. A6
C. A2
e.
D. A3
BO
A
14. A system in which the source of power for the trouble signal is supervised in addition to the circuitry. A. B3
C. A5
B. BS
D. B2
345
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
E. FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS, DEFINITIONS The answers to the questions 1 through 12 can be found on the following key LIST. Select only one answer for each question. AO MASTER CODED SYSTEM
BO REMOTE-STATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A1 NONCODED SYSTEM
B1 SELECTIVE CODE!) SYSTEM
A2 POSITIVE NONINTERFERING B2 STATION, FIRE ALARM AND SUCCESSION CODED STATION A8 PRESIGNAL SYSTEM
B3 SUPERVISED SYSTEM
A4 PROPRIETARY FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
B4 TROUBLE SIGNAL
AS RECORDER (PUNCHED TAPE)
BS ZONE CODED SYSTEM
1. A fire alarm station that once actuated, will transmit not less than 4 rounds of coded alarm signals without interference from any other station on the circuit. One or more of these stations, if subsequently operated, will transmit not less than 4 rounds of their coded signals without interference with each other or with the first station actuated.
A. A2
C. B3
B. A4
D. B5
2. A device for tape recording the actuation of a fire alarm initiating device. The station or code is punched on the tape may be used with a TIME STAMP.
A. AO
C. B1
B. AS
D. B2
3. A system in which each manual fire alarm station and each group of automatic detectors has its own individual code, which sounds on all alarm indicating devices in the system when the manual station or automatic detector is actuated
A. AO
C. B3
B. A3
D. B1
346
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
4. A system in which the btritding has been divided into zones. Alarm initiating devices in each zone activate a zone code that indicates only the location of the affected zone.
A. B2
c. BS
B. A4
D. AS
S. One in which a common coded alarm signal is transmitted for not less than 3 rounds, after which the fire alarm system may be manually or automatically silenced. The same code is sounded regardless of the location of the alarm initiating device. This system can be arranged to ring continuously.
A. B2
c.
B. BO
D. AO
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B4
6. A system with supervision by competent and experienced observers and operators in a central supervising station at the property to be protected.
A. A1
C. A4
B. A2
D. A3
7. A manually operated alarm initiating device may be equipped to generate a continuous signal (non-coded station) or a series of code~ pulses (coded station).
A. 82
C. A4
B. B3
D. AS
8. A signal indicating trouble of any nature, such as a circuit break or ground, occuring in the device or wiring associated with a fire alarm system. A. A3
C. A1
B. B4
D. B1
347
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
0
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
9. A system of electrically supervised devices employing a dlrect-circ:ul connection between alarm initiating devices or a control unit is protected premises and signal-indicating equipment in a station, such as fire or police headquarters.
A. A2
c.
B. 82
D. A4
A
B
C
D
0000
80
10. One in which the operation of an automatic detector or the first operation of a manual fire alarm station actuates only a selected grc)up of alarm indicating devices for the pt.trpose of notifying key personnel. A general alarm may be sounded on these, some indicating devices and on an additional group of devices from any manual station to warn all occupants. A.B4
C. AO
R. A3
D. BO
11. A system in which a break or ground in the wiring which prevents the transmission of an alarm signal will actuate a trouble signal.
A. B3
c.
B. A3
D. AO
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B1
12. One on which a continuous audible alarm is transmitted for a predetermined length of time, after which it may be manually or automatically silenced,
A AS
C. B4
B. 85
D. A1
348
A
B
C
D
0000
f~ FIRE PREVENTIONIPROTECTION
V ONE·TWO HOUR Ft~EDOOR
\ STANOP\PES A HOSES
RATINGS FOR STAIRWAYS VI WATER & STANDBY POWER
II SIAMESE TWINS
VII FIRE RETARDANT LIQUID
Ill SPRINKLERS
VIII SMOKE DETECTORS
IV COMPARTMENTATION
1. An Inlet placed outside a building close to the ground level, having two or more openings so that fire engines can pump water to the standpipes and sprinkler system of the building. A. II
C. VI
B. VIII
D. Ill
2. A very large industrial plant stores water in an underground cistern or may use an adjacent artificial lake in case of fire. When such reserves must be delivered by pumping during a fire, and electrical power outage could be a tragedy; when this system must cut in, These should be separately housed in fire-resistant enclosures. A. I
C. VII
B. V
D. VI
3. This applies to floors located more than 12 meters above grade served by multi-floor air conditioning system. These are areas with one hour separations, partitiOned into ~aces not to exceed 750 sq. M. A.V
C. IV
B. I
D.
B
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
A
8
C
D
0000
VIII
4. Normally located at ceilings, on each elevator landing. Activation shaH stop all fans, activate smoke exhaust or stair pressurization fans, returh affected elevators to terminal landing, and autoli'latiQally sound alarm and notify fire department. A. VI
c.
B.
D. II
VIII
A
Ill
349
A
B C 0
0000
5. This consist of a horiZontal pattem of pipes placed near the ceilings of industrial buildings, warehouse, stores, theatres and other structures where the fire hazard requires their use. These pipes are provided with outlets· and heads so constructed that temperatures of 135° to 160°F (55° to 70°C) will cause them to open automatically and emit a series of fine water sprays.
A. I
C. VII
B. V
D. Ill
6. To prevent the fire from spreading at once, lumber, plywood, wood doors, etc. are painted with a liquid that penetrated into the wood-When there is fire. it reacts by dispersing the flame, preventing progressive burning. This liquid, when applied, retains the natural beauty, ·gives added strength, and more marketable value as it protects materials against fire, weather, decay, insects, and warping. Painting can be applied. over this liquid
A. VII
C. VIII
B. V
D. II
7. STEEL doors and frames are used to prevent fire from entering a room or stairway where people are gathered during fire, recommended for fire exits, closed stairway exit in commercial buildings and can withstand fire for either one hour or two hours.
A. IV
C. VII
B. V
D. VIII
8. Fire companies with their apparatus find difficulty in fighting fires from the street in tall structures. This system is used by building personnel until the fire engines arrive which attach the fire hoses to a siamese twin device. Thereafter the trained staff of the fire department can now break the glass of the emergency cabinet with hoses. This is called the DRY TYPE. The WET PIPE TYPE has water in the pipes at all times. A. VI
c.
B. VIII
D. Ill
350
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
G. SECURITY-BURGLAR PROOFING SECURITY systems include methods for detecting intruders, for preventing entry, for controlling access to secure areas, and for notification in the event of unauthorized entry or other emergencies. There are a wide variety of INTRUSION DETECTION DEVICES. a. MOTION DETECTORS and HEAT DETECTORS ·sense the pressure of someone in a room or within the field of view. b. MICROWAVE and INFRARED BEAMS trip a circuit when the path of their beam is interrupted. c. PRESSURE SENSORS detect weight on a floor or other surface.
d. OTHER TYPES of systems ean be installed on glass in door openings, and on fences and screens to set off an alarm when unauthorized entry is made through the opening. ACCESS to SECURE areas can be controlled with a n11mber of devices. a. LOCKS can be connected to card readers. b. A PLASTIC CARD containing a coded magnetic strip is used that allows entry when a Valid Card is passed over the reader. c. NUMBERED KEYBOARDS can serve the same purpose. In order to unlock a door, the user must enter the correct numerical code into the keyboard. d. NEW DEVICES are now being developed that can read individual BIOLOGICAL FEATURES such as the retina of the eye or the palm of a hand, providing a counterfeit-proof method of identification. In the Event of an unauthorized entry or other emergency, ALARM SYSTEMS can include a. Simple NOISE ALARMS b. NOTIFICATION of the breach of security at a monitored central guard station, c. AUTOMATIC NOTIFICATION over phone LINES to a Central Security Service. An increasing number of private residences are utilizing INTRUSION (BURGLAR) alarm systems, often in conjuction with fire alarm equipment. Basically, an INTRUSION ALARM System is similar to a fire detection system except that instead of thermal detection, devices such as metallic tape and micro-and-magnetic switches are used to detect door and window motion, glass breakage, and so on.
351
More ·sophisticated devtcea. Such· as motton detectors are al$o used occask>rialty.A manual switCh at the.end of a long cord is also often provitted
so t~t the resident may at wiR set off tl"!e aJarm in the event an intruder is heard. The system may e"1)1oy the sal'ne audible signals as the fire system or tts own components. Although done Infrequently, INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEMS can be continuously supervised by connection with Central Stations of companies whose business such supervision is, and who will either respond directly to area alarm call or notify local police authorities of any ilegal entry.
Condoplex
One new system that is useful to condominiums and other highrise developments is the Condoplex. Developed in Canada and soon to be tJistributed by APRO Asian Protection, the Condoplex is a complete microprocessor-based apartment monitoring system capable of monitoring up to 1,000 apartments unit~. The relatively user-friendly system is especially an audio-video intercom system which incorporates several security features. It consists of a threeway communication system- from the central computer at the guard house to the apartment block and then to the individual unit. All communications are continuously recordeq. The system provides round the clock security and also comes with an option of remote monitorirg by an external security company. So if the guard is sleeping on the job, your home is still being monitored externally. The systems address panel lists the names of the residents instead of addresses thus allowing the security tb verify names of residents. In other systems, visitors would have to key in eithe.r the address or make a search through what miQht be a long alley of buttons before he could get to the right tenant. The apartment suite panel, which is located in the individual units, can warn against burglary, fire, tampering and other emergencies. This is done with a wireless link to ten security detectors placed around the apartment. Each time there is a problem, the apartment can be called from the computer through the intercom. The system also comes with an Audio option.
Top security For larger establishments there is a whole range of choices. The old dependable jagah might be difficult to find one day what with the turnover rate for security guards remaining high. Furthermore it will become more difficult and costly to provide for a manpower-based security. Highly advanced tethnologic~l developments in cameras, lenses, video recorders and the various peripherals such as pan and tilt control has progressed to a level where the right perspective can be achieved.
352
The ClOsed Circuit Television (CCTV) t1as been established tor the past 25 years as one of the most effective tools in the fight against crime. It can provide remote eyes and an accurate record of what is happening in sensitive areas. The rate of development associated with CCTV and the intelligence of the peripher.al equipment can only be compared with today·s development of the computing world. One of the most important developments in the industry has been the introduction of video multiplexer. These systems can record multiple camera pictures onto a single video recorder, and then replay those camera pictures in split screen displays on a single monitor. Another important development is the new 3-Dimensionallntelligent Space (3D IS) System which is a three-dimensional video motion detection system. Developed in Australia, this monitoring system uses the overlapping fields of standard CCTV cameras to create invisible, three-dimensional detection zone that protect valuable assets or secure designated areas. Thus, no one can hide from the system.
Information for this article was provided by Cisco, Dedicated Micros (Asia) anci APRO Asian Protection Pte. Ltd.
Silicon 'human' brain
ax
One ingenious system is the Proteq security system. It uses the latest Neuronic Reasoning Machine (NRM) to integrate security, home controls and communication. The system derives this ability from a silicon neuro chip, which gives the system the reflexes of a human brain, and the ability to distinguish between a real break-in and a false alarm. Therefore, if pets were to run around the house, or if a vehicle happened to pass by, the alarm would not trigger off-thanks to the system's ability to filter a false alarm from a genuine one. This neuro chip enables the system to analyze incoming signals, and simultaneously make decisions and initiate a response within milliseconds. The Proteq is also able to track and record the intruder's movements through a graphic display or via the CCTV camera connected to the house TV monitor. Being user-friendly, it can prompt and interact with the user by voice messages. Specially recorded messages would inform the house occupant of an intrusion, with description of details during the event. A special feature of the system is that it can also relay the status of connected equiment such as the refrigerator when they encounter a breakdown or malfunction. Once the user is informed of the fault, it can initiate a temporary solution by switching to a stand-by system.
353
The user can thus control the system via a handphone or a telephone even If he is away from the premises. Likewise, the system can contact the user via the pager, a handphone or a telephone during an emergency. Small or medium-sized businesses who do not have staff running round the clock to take care of contingencies would no doubt benefit froin such a system as it that provides security surveilance and at the same time monitors the status of the equipment and machinery of the plant.
HOW TO BURGLAR PROOF YOUR HOME
Security basics "Security does not only mean just posting a guard at the gate," "It is an encompassing surveillance system which ensures that life, property and business are safeguarded. But when one talks security, one has to talk about needs and priorities. Usually in a lot of new buildings, the management would leave the minimum amount of its budget to security -the lowest of . its priorities." Broadly, security involves an all around protection of a facility- a home, office, shop, factory or warehouse. In most cases this is done through fencing, then comes a surveillance of the·entry points through close circuit monitoring or the traditional jaga. When humans cannot monitor an area, an alarm system is required. Finally, there is the good old lock and key to keep things safe. There are a whole range of security solutions that can refer to the various budgets and needs. Besides manpower, there are electronic systems which include audio and video surveillance, locking and alarm systems. Nowadays through, the presence of diverse facilities dictates the need for a more cohesive, integrated system that will link all facilities into one. To achieve a more complete and effective control. We lobk at some of these integrated systems. 1. Intruder breaks in through the door and sets the system in ALARM 2. Calls you on pager, handphone or any phone and tells you exactly what's happening and where 3. Alerts the Security Company (for subscribers of the Central Monitoring Service) and mobilize their guards to check on your premises. 4. Tracks the intruders every move through a graphic display or video monitoring on the television. If desired, you can capture the act on tape for later playback. 5. Triggers the playback of pre-recorded message-s or switches on the lights to spooll and chase away the intruder. 6. Activates the siren to frighten the intruder and alert the neighbors
354
H. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS The answers to questions 1 through 8 can be found on the following key LIST. Select only one answer for each question. V. LOCKS
I. MOTION AND HEAT DETECTORS II. MICROWAVE AND INFRARED BEAMS
VI. PLASTIC CARDS
Ill. PRESSURE SENSORS
VII. NUMBERED KEYBOARDS
IV. OTHERS
VIII. NEW DEVICES
1. This detect weight on a floor or other surfaces.
A. Ill
C. V
B. IV
D. VI
2. This can be installed on glass in door openings. and on fences and screens to set off an alarm when unauthorized entry is made through the opening.
A. VIII
c.
B. VII
D. IV
3. A circuit when the path of their beam is interrupted.
A. IV
C. II
B. VI
D. VII
4. This sense the presence of someone in a room or
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A B C D
0000
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
within the field of view.
A. V
C. IV
B. I
D. VII
5. These are now being developed that can read individual BIOLOGICAL FEATURES such as the retina of the eye or the palm of a hand providing a counterfeit-proof method of identification.
A. IV
C. VIII
B. II
D. Ill 355
A
B
C
D
0000
6. This contain a coded magnetic strip that allows·entry when a valid card is passed over the rel!der. A. II
C. VIII
B. IV
D. VI
7. This can serve the same purpose in order to unlock a door, the user must enter the correct numerical code. A. I
c.
B. VII
D. V
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
Ill
8. This can be connected to card readers. A. V
C. II
B. l
D. VII
356
A
B
C
D
0000
AREA ''B'' PART Ill
UT I L IT I ES
6. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
AREA "B"
UTILITIES
PART Ill
A. SIGNAL SYSTEMS Under this title is subsumed all SIGNAL, COMMUNICATION, and CONTROL EQUIPMENT, the function of which is to assist in effecting proper building operation. Included are surveillance equipment such as fire and interior alarm; audio CJ,nd visual communication equipment such as telephone, intercom, and 1elevision, both public and closed circuit; time equipment such as clock program. Closed circuit TV (CCTV) for surveillance systems. The hundreds of signals generated throughout a large facility are logged, channeled, and applied by · means of specially programmed computers. Most recently, COMPUTER SYSTEMS, as well as local area networks (LANS) that .connect computers within one building or in a complex of buildings. Telephone Systems are the most prevalent type of communication system. In most buildings, main telephone lines enter the structure in a main cable and connect to the terminal room where they are split into riser cabres. These risers are generally located near the core and connect telephone equipment rooms on each floor. From these equipment rooms the lines branch out to serve individual spaces. With the proliferation of separate telephone companies in recent years, each tenant space in a large building usually needs its own eQuipment room. The I . . size of the room is dependent on the type of equipment used and the number of telephone lines connected. Other types of communication systems are typically prewired as the building is constructed. Cabling terminates at electrical boxes in the wall or floor with a jack into which individual equipment can be connected. Most signal cabling is run· in metal conduit like electrical cable unless the local building code allows it to be exposed. Conduit protects the cable and prevents it from burning in a fire and giving off dangerous gases.
358
1. The fire detection, smoke detection, and :ntrusion alarm device all operate from a ; the alarm bell is common.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. SINGLE CONTROL C. UNI-PANEL PANEL B. COMMON PANEL
D. ONE-WAY PANEL
2. The _ _ _ _ _ indicates the device operated and its location. A. INDICATOR
C. BULLETIN
B. LOCATOR
D. ANNUNCIATOR
3. The connection between the signal control panel and OLCP , activates all outside lights when a signal device trips. Selected lights inside t~e house can also be connected to go.
A. ON-LINE CALL PANEL
C. ONE LEVEL CALL PANEL
B. OUTSIDE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
D. OVERALL LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
4. The CENTRAL TELEVISION ANTENNA system is a desirable feature of the modern residence. Systems with mqre than two outlets generally require a booster amplifier and are known as systems.
A. ELEVATED
C. AMPLIFIED
B. INCREASER
D. LOUDNESS CONTROLL
The function of the system is to apply a television signal at each wall outlet, so that a receiver may be operated at any location and so that two or more receivers may operate simultaneously. The functioning of the system is simply to amplify the signal received by the antenna and by means of special cable to distribute these amplified signals in a concealed cable to the various wall outlets.
359
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
5.
The publiO demand tor step-saving conveniences has resulted in the wide acceptance of the home -~---·The basic system comprises one or more masters and several remote stations, one of which monitors the front door allowing it to be answered from various points within the home.
A
B
C
D
0000
In general, MASTER STATIONS allow selective calling, whereas REMOTE STATIONS operating through the master are non-selective. Systems are also available that impose the signals onto the house power wiring. This has the advantage of eliminating separate wiring and making remote stations portable. They are connected simply by plugging into a power outlet. Many manufacturers have incorporated a TUNER (AM, FM, or both} into this system so that music can be "PIPED" to each of the stations within the home. A. INTERCOM
C. INTERFACE
B. INTERSTATION
D. INTERCHANGE
In RESIDENTIAL WORK, the TELEPHONE COMPANY normally follows the route of the electric service, entering the building overhead or underground as desired. In both cases a separate service entrance means must be provided; if AERIAL, a sleeve through the wall; if UNDERGROUND, a separate entrance conduit. Wiring of telephone instruments when installed after completion of the residence consists of a single surface mounted 1/8 inch diameter, 4+conductorcable that, even if skillfully installed, is unsightly at best and completely objectionable at worst. 6.
consists of running the cables on the wall framing and into empty device boxes. This results in a completely concealed installation that is desirable from the owner's viewpoint and, depending upon the number of outlets, cheaper for the phone company to install. Instruments can be WALL type or DESK type, which is also being available for jacking into outlets around the house. A. CENTRAL WIRING C. PREWIRING B. ANTE-ENERGIZER D. ENERGIZING
360
A
B
C
D
0000
7. The usual differentiation between intercom and private telephone is interlace w~h phone company equipment, which is found on private telephones and NOT found on the intercoms. MASTERS and REMOTE stations are (requently called _ _ _ _ _ , respectively, and their functions are the same. Instruments may look like telephones in addition to a number of other functions. A. OFFICER & WORKER
C. MAINAND SUBORDINATE
B. ADMINISTRATIVE AND STAFF
D. LEADER AND FOLLOWER
A
B
C
D
0000
A typical complete private TELEPHONE and INTERCOM system will provide: 1. DIRECT-DIALING, Two way telephone communications between all master stations. 2. DIRECT Communications between all masters and remotes. 3. Staff Station call origination to the centrally located LED readout display panels from which it can be routed by a master station to any other point. In addition, options are available for conference call capability, all-call mode, and even automatic time signalling. Control Equipment is based on integrated electronic Circuitry and is therefore extremely compact, occupying no more space, than a file cabinet. Power requirements are readily provided by local branch circuitry. 8.
PABX are like the modern intercom, based on advanced solid-state technology. Thus, the entire switching system for a system that will handle up to 500 lines and trunks, 4 operator consoles, and more than 140 simultaneous conversations plus full intercom facilities, occupies a cabinet 0.60 M X 0. 70 M X 1.80 M light. The controls are completely automated, and attendants do little more than route incoming calls and provide information. A. PERSONAL ELECTRONICS BRANCH EXHIBIT SYSTEM •
C. PERSONAL ENTRY BRANCH EXCESS SYSTEM
D. B. PRIVATE ELECTRICALLY BASED EXCHANGE SYSTEM
PRIVATE ELECTRONIC BRANCH EXCHANGE SYSTEM
361
A
B
C
D
0000
TYPICAL of this type of equipment shows the operational features of this system that include:
1. Direct Internal and External dialing.
A
B
C
D
0000 2. Consultation hold, that is, ability to hold an outside call while making an inside call.
~·
Conference call capability, including internal and external units.
4. Call transfer and camp-on feature.
A
B
C
D
0000 A
B
C
D
0000 A
B
C
D
0000 5. Automatic call back.
A
B
C
D
0000 6. Call forwarding.
A
B
C
D
0000 7. Distinctive ringing for different functions.
A
B
C
D
0000 8. Paging, executive priority, dictation access, personnel location, plus other options as desired.
9. This feature on a telephone is called a · - - - - - · This permits user to program system to forward call automatically to another phone or to the attendant.
A. EXTENDER
C. SENDER
B. CALL FORWARDING
D. CALL FOLLOWER
362
A
B
C
D
0000 A
B
C
D
0000
10. Automatic callback and . A telephone permits you wait on a busy phone and hang up. System then rings both phones when they are free.
A. STAND-BY
C. DELVE-ON
B. SLEEP-ON
D. CAMP-ON
·11 .
12.
allows a ringing phone to be answered at any other phone. A. CALL ANSWER
C. CALL PICK-UP
B. CALL SLIP
D. CALL-AROUND
in a telephone lets you transfer incoming and outgoing calls to any other phone without help from the attendant. A. CALLTRANSFER
C. CALLCHANGER
B. CALL USER
D. CALL GIVER
13. _ _ _ _ _ Hold lets you put a caller on Hold
14.
A. STRONG
C. CONFERENCE
B. AGREEMENT
D. CONSULTATION
Displays the number of a party connected to a busy line. A. ADVERTISER
C. 'IDENTIFY
B. INSPECTOR
D. NAME PLATE
15. _ _ _ is used for setting up three way group calls.
16.
A. CONFERENCE
C. AGREEMENT
B. CONVENTION
D. MEETING
enables attendant to talk privately with either of the two parties in a call.
A. DUAL
C. TWOSOME
B. SPLIT
D. ON-LINE
363
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
0
ocoo A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
B. TELELINGO 1. Sometimes a design must be reached quickly to avoid costly, delay, reruns and so on, and so the recipient must be informed at once. This is called the systems, which fall into two general categories and several subcategories. They are either VISUAL, and AUDIBLE, or both, and are either COMMON or SELECTIVE.
A
B
C
D
0000
A pocket device is carried by each person likely to be called. (plant engineers, executives, foreman). An individual pocket device can be alerted by a BUZZ. In some systems, the alerted person then listens to the message directly. On othe'rs, it is necessary for this person, after being buzzed, to go to a phone and call in to the central paging desk to receive the message. Others utilize small hand-held, two-way radio transmitters.
2.
A. CALLING
C. ANNOUNCING
B. PAGING
D. CONVEYING
is a mobile-phone network in which computers track each call and pass it on form one low-power transmitter to another as a car travels from one part of a city to another. The phone unit can be either a car phone or a hand-held portable phone.
A. CALLER RADIO
C. CELLULAR RADIO
B. TRANSMITTER RADIO
D. ONE-WAY RADIO
3. A machine that transmits exact copies of documents through an ordinary Phone line at speeds up to 9.6 kbps (kilobytes per second) is called the _ _ _ _ _ .Thus, the current G-3 machines can transmit a page of text in anything from one minute to 15 seconds, depending on the amount of information involved. Forthcoming G-4 machines will send it in 4 seconds, using digital phone lines.
A. XEROX
C. FIXED (IMAGER)
B. COPIER
D. FAX (FACSIMILE)
364
A
B
G
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
4. A is launched so as to move at the same speed as earth's rotation. Hence ("GEOSTATIONAR"). This bounces and boosts communication signals from transmitters on one part of the globe to receiving antennas on another part.
A
B
C
D
0000
A. COMMUNICATION C. SPACE CONTROL SATELLITE B. ROVING SATELLITE
D. ROCKET TRANSMITTER
5. This system the ISDN allows simultaneous digital transmission of data, voice and video at speeds not possible with traditional technologies but made possible by fiber-optic lines. A single fiber-optic line replaces separate networks in current use. A sample application is a Fax that sends an A4 page in one second, simultaneously with a phone conversation or transmission of a computer database. A. INTERNATIONAL SEMI-DIGITAL NETWORK
C. ISDN INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK
B. JNTEGRATED
D. INTERNATIONAL
SOLAR DIGITAL NETWORK
RADIO B. MICROWAVE RADIO
B
C
D
0000
SOLAR DIALING NETWORK
6. Long distance wireless communications medium using very-short wavelength radio waves is called the . This consumes less power than long-wave radio and can be focused into a narrower beam so as to hit a dish antenna only a few meters in diameter and located many miles away, as long as it is in direct line of sight. Today, this wireless communications can carry tens of thousands of phone conversations simultaneously.
A. HIGH VOLTAGE
A
C. IMMENSEWAVE RADIO D. HOTWAVE RADIO
365
A
B
C
D
0000
"I. This is a Device for converting analog signals sent through telephone lines into digitalized information that can be accepted by a recipient computer. Linked with the originating computer, this _ _ _ __ translates the computer's digital information into analog which, when received by its counterpart at the other end is again translated into digital for the recipient computer.
8.
A. MODEM, MODULATOR DEMODULATOR
C. MODULAR
B. TUNER
D. LEVELER
are a very fine strand (as thin as human hair) of highly reflective glass through which binary-coded pulses of light can be sent. These cables have greater transmission capacity than the copper cables in current use, because they can carry tiny staccato pulses of light generated by lasers that turn on and off 90 million times a second. (A halfinch of this strand has 144m glass fibers and can carry 1,350,000 conversations) with this pace, it will allow the entire contents of a 2,700 page dictionary to be sent over a single f!ber in six seconds. These are immune to electrical interference. A. INVISIBLE GLASS WIRE
C. MICRO WIRES
B. FINE GRAINED OPTICS
D. FIBER OPTICS
9. Also known as an office switchboard, a: _ _ _ _ _ can now be used to switch and transmit computer data as well as ordinary phone calls. It also supports new features like abbreviated dialing, call forwarding, automatic callback, etc. A. PRIVATE INTERCHANGE
C. PABX-Private Automatic Branch Exchange
B. LINKAGE FIELD UNITS
D. ON-LINE ACCESS
366
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
10. VALUE-ADDED NETWORK: the provider of VAN Services adds value by purchasing lines from a telephone company and adding transmission and switching functions, such as . Here, a User enters his password and is able to send a message to one or several destinations. Recipient
A
B
C
D
0000
can read the message on the computer screen or print it out. If the office being sent is closed, it makes no difference since the message is stored and forwarded.
A. ELECTRICAL
C. ELECTRICAL MAIL
MESSENGER B. ELECTRONIC MESSENGER
D. ELECTRONIC MAIL
11. A company's internal communication is improved by _ _ _ _ _ . This allows people to get together, often on very short notice, in a televised discuss1a.n by hooking up to the network from various locations, cities or countries.
A. VIDEO
A
B
C
D
0000
C. VIDEO MEETING
CONFERENCING B. GROUP-TV
12.
D. SIT-DOWN VIDEO
differs from telephone only in so tar as the circuit is used for telegraphic operation instead of voice conversation. Its fastest speed is only 80 words per minute. Another system is the TELETEXT which operates at around 300 characters per second or 30 times faster.
A. TELECOPIER
C. XEROX
B. TELEX
D. TELEGRAPH
361
A
B
C
D
0000
AREA ''B'' PARTIII
UTILITIES
7. HIGH-TECH SYSTEMS
AREA ''8"
UTILITIES
PART Ill
A. BUILDINGS FUTUREHOME by Elizabeth Pennisi For Portia Isaacson a computer scientist, futurehome is a fantasy come true. The white, two storey, stucco, subarban Dallas home, will be an electronic showcase, but with spiral staircase, hot tub, art gallery and style. A quick call to-or from-a computer ensures that her hot tub will be warm when she arrives or informs her when her teenaged children have gotten home from school. If a business meeting keeps her from getting home in time for her husband's birthday, a computer controlled scenano. complete with loving messages, romantic lighting, favorite music and appropriate videos, will let him know he hasn't been forgotten. Answering the door is obsolete. A camera shows who it is by sending a close-up view of newcomers to wherever Isaacson is in the house. Then she can open the door remotely. Can't find the keys or the husband? Via video cameras she can scan shelftops and table surfaces. Motion censors track each person's room-to-room movements. It will take 13 computers, 14 telephones, 26 tv monitors, 8 miles ( 13 km) of wiring, several video casette recorders for this future home. Isaacson has robots for pets, a sculpture of stereo and video components that seem to float in space, futuristic plant stands that are really computer terminals, and a media "command center", that includes tour (4) 25-inch (60 em.) tv's a 40-inch (1 00 em.) tv projection screen, 2 VCFS, and compact and laser disc players. At futurehome, a master computer is in charge. It receives data from the rest of the house and sends out commands, dimming lights, changing thermostat setting, and switching tv channels and volumes. Using a text-to-speech converter, the computer can answer and make telephone calls. When someone - a housekeeper or tardy teenager, for instance punches in their individualized codes to get into the front door. the computer can be cued to let Isaacson know, either where she is in the home or at work. It can tell the condition of the house, not only can lights or favorite music be turned on
as a person enters a room, a synthesized voice can welcome guests, remind a son to keep his feet off furniture or wake a husband in time for dinner. Heating and airconditioning are regulated electronically, and tile computer tracks temperatures in each room so that the new occupants can assess airflow throughout 1he house. Once computerized, the entire house can be run from any one of 10 personal computers by pointing with a light pen to a particular room pictured on the
369
screen, and designating a task to be completed: Lights on or off, specific music to be played, tv show to be recorded. Or "script• can be written that coordinate activities for emergencies, normal household maintenance, even family tends to take care of intruders, a security script: If a security sensor detects a break-in, the computer could be programmed to flash all the lights, blast the stereos, wake up and tell the residents where the stranger is lurking, perhaps even inform the burglars that they are being filmed. The Interior looks like the tv series Star Trek. Instead of a wall-sized painting, an electronic sculpture welcome visitors. The black components of an audio and video systems are set into a glossy, black metal wall on shelves not visible to viewers. Recessed lighting along the wall edges adds to the effect. 'SMART HOUSES' OF THE FUTURE by: RAJ GOPAL VERMA NEW DELHI- Early morning, a melodious voice wakes you up: "Good morning. it's six a.m. big day ahead." If you do not respond, the voice becomes more insistent nagging you till you are awake. Meanwhile, the curtains of your bedroom windows would part automatically; the shower in the bathroom starts as soon as you are ready and the coffee begins to brew. This may sound like a fantasy. But well, it is a moderate estimate of the "house of the future" which will respond to your orders and no one else·s, because security sensors recognize your voice. Already there are several hundred such "smart houses" all over the world, designed around central computers that control utility and security systems, appliances and even music and fountains. While you are out, your house continues to perform programmed tasks: starting the dishwasher and watering the garden, opening the gate to certain people and activating recordings of household noises to deter burglars. The commands can be changed on telephone. If you are ahead of schedule, call home to adjust temperature and humidity levels, turn on the sauna and feed the cat. Video consoles provide security because an in-built computer can distinguish you from other persons. The "smart houses" in Japan and the US have security and decorative lights automatically switching on in sequence after dark. If motion detectors in any room sense on human presence after 30, minutes, the lights switch off. Temperature and humidity are adjusted for night-time comfort. Should late night snackers head towards the kitchens, lights will come on, one at a time, to show the way. Of late, a Japanese firm has launched a number of home appliances operable by means of telephone instructions. Washer-driers, rice cookers, electric irons, cleaning robots, refrigerators ... all fully automated and test manufactured, are being commercialized shortly. The fully-automated rice cooker sucks up a programmed amount of rice from a storage chest and bran is whisked away during cooking by an electronic brush. Cooking instructions may be set in advance by telephone so that the boiled rice is ready when the owner arrives home. The electric iron has no cord, but heats through induction. 370
After being placed on an ironing boards, built-in electro-magnetic coils heat the iron, which can be used for many hours. The cleaning robot moves around the room, avoiding obstacles using an ultrasonic wave sensor. Whenever it encounters dust accumulation the robot's sucking force automatically increases. The refrigerator has a liquid crystal door, which turns transparent at the flick of a switch. enabling one to see what is inside. If you are. driving back from the city and are caught in a traffic snarl, you dial home on your earphone to report the delay. The house computer then delays the normal sequence of operations, but activates the video recorder to catch the tete-serial you might want to see had you been at home. It also adjusts cooking and heating settings to coincide with your delayed arrival. Tomorrow's cars will be unlocked and started with plastic cards while drivers would have to check their routes on computer. Standard equipment will include dashboard navigation systems a kin to that on aircraft cockpits, speaker-telephones, ergonomic seats and voice alerts to rouse drowsy drivers. Sensors detecting oncoming objects will trigger the brakes, ac.celerator or the steering wheel to avert danger. On electronically gridded super highways, drivers can put their vehicles on automatic drive and snooze while zooming towards their destinations. The technology to manufacture these gadgets already exists today. But the danger of incompatible systems also exists. It is no good having a remote control video recorder or a burglar alarm if your neighbor's dishwasher is activated simultaneously. In 1986, the European Commission had awarded a handsome sum of money to seven companies to design communication standards for electric devices in homes which could work on mains wiring, infrared, radio waves and various types of and ultimately optical fibres. Products so designed will be registered by a special logo. In future homes, robots will provide much-needed relief to housekeepers. Today, furniture is unnecessary heavy, because thick pieces of wood, metal and plastic are needed to withstand the stresses imposed by people and objects. Technologists are now developing new materials that are far ~tronger than anything we are used to and yet, extremely lightweight. A future housekeeper will be able to literally lift a sofa with a finger. And it may not even need to be lifted, if it has a motorand is voice commandable. The robots that clean the floors and rugs may be able to order the sofa to move out the way while it does the cleaning (PNA/PTI). SMART HOUSE This allows occupants to dictate how the home will be run in their absence. Before leaving for work, a homeowner can instruct the master computer to video tape a television program at 3:00p.m .. begin warming dinner at 4:30, and turn on the heating or air conditioning at 5:00. These directions may also be delivered by phone. A smart hOuse offers cost savings as well as convenience. Linked to the local power company, a home's central computer can run energy-gobbling appliances when electricity rates are lowest. The computer can also choreograph the operation of all appliances that JSe hot water, such as the washing maching and dishwasher, to make the most economical use of the water heater. Although the comfort and economy of a smart house offset its cost over the long run, homes remain far more expensive than conventional abodes.
sue~
371
A DATA NETWORK In a smart house, a "central computer" oversees !he functioning of myriad information appliances- VCR, for fax machine; telephone, security sensors, smoke detector, PC, audiovisual system, intercom, cable TV. The central computer can be programmed from a master terminal or from a telephone. A HOUSEHOLD NETWORK A second network links household appliances (master terminal) -washer, dryer, store, dishwasher, microwave, oven, freezer, shower, not tub. This household network can be modified to accommodate telephone hook-ups to outside computers, allowing the occupuant to bank, shop, travel agency, and make travel arrangements from home. REFURfJfSH- to renovate, polish up again, brighten. RETROFIT- to modify equipment that is already in service using parts developed or made available after the time of origin.al manufacture. To retrofit is to replace (example is to replace an old window with a new thermal window).
B. ROBOTICS c '>habnam Gupta ne term "robot" is derived from the Czeck word "Robota", meaning "forced labour", A mechanical copy of a living being is called an "Automation" an example is a model of a child that dips his pen in an ink pot, shakes off the excess ink and then writes in the best handwriting. In Disneyland, President Abe Lincoln stands up from his chair, walks a few steps towards the audience. stops and begins to declaim with his hands moving. A "ROBOT" is an automically operated machine. It is a computer 'Brain'· which can be taught or programmed to perform human tasks autom1cally. The development of true robots was made possible only by the invention of the silicon chip in the computers, which provides robots with brains. Robots, generally speaking, are mechanical arms controlled by computers to accomplish those handling activities of men which are repetitive or hazardous by nature. Robot workers never get tired or bored. or make a careless mistake. Robots are specially useful in industry, to produce a wide range of goods with precision. In the automobile industry, robots are being used to lift, weld and spray paint. The movements of the "Mechanical arms" are recorded in the computers r:~erc~· ·y so that they can be repeated precisely. There are some robots whirr: e•Je! ha1· a sensor device to help them correct their own movemer1ts. if they .w::: :··.. t ~~c: •g according to the programmed instructions. They are usually driven by electric motors, but may also be pneumatic 1air e: "IE::r) or hydraulic (water driven), and can lift weights of about one kilogram or rTJore. All thq! is needed to run a small robot at home is a micro computer.
372
Areas where robots are highly useful are dangerous areas. A bomb-detecting robot can help protect humans from danger. They can be usdd in environments which are harsh or dangerous such as radiation zones, space coal mines, under-sea areas and now on active volcano craters. Recently, a robot was invented that can climb stairs, more so, a ladder. Robots that work under water are unmanned submarine vehicles, linked by cable or sonar links to human operators. They perform tasks such as inspection of pipelines or locati~n of ship wrecks. They are also used for undersea drilling and mining practises. Another application is a robot as a bartender. There is a lightweight microphone through which the waiter communicates with the robot-controlled bar, and places orders. The order can be placed directly from the customer's table. The drinks are then poured and mixed automically, and are then served by the waiters. Meanwhile, the computer does stocktaking and cash control, thereby leaving very little chance of inaccuracy Robots can help disabled people feed themselves. or use a typewriter and can act as guides to the blind. In dentistry schools, a robot is used to teach students. It gives a ioud electronic "ouch" if they drill too far into its tooth. Movies and fiction have made robots popular as brainy iror·,-men with intelligence enough to even overtake men. Based on this, the engineers are working on the design of a micro-robot and a whole range of "ROBOTIC" games for children. Another rnteresting development in the field of robotics is sport. Here the combat is between man and robot. This is already done with the game of chess.
373
"ROBOTICS" is the use of computer-controlled robots to perform manipulative tasks especially an assembly lives. (Robot+ ics) (coined by Isaac Asimor) How do all these robots work? If you wanted to ieach a robot how to open a window, there are four ways: 1. Show it by holding its 'harid' and moving it through all the steps - reaching out, taking hold of the handles, turning the handles, and finally opening the window. The robot records every movement and then, at a signal, plays back the movements like a tape-recorder. This is especially useful for teaching skills like paint spraying and welding. 2. Another way to teach a robot is by using a remote control device called a teaching pendant. This is a box attached to the robot's computer. It has switches that operate the motors in each of its joints. The robot is taught to move its arm to each position the job requires and then a "record" button is pressed so that it will remember the position. 3. A more comp 1icated way of teaching a robot is by writing a computer programme, in a special language, to tell it how to move each of its parts. A language called Logo is often used to teach people about robots. It is especially designed to control simple mobile robots such as the turtle. It contains instructions such as FORWARD 10 RIGHT 90 (which means "go forward 10 units and then turn 90 degrees to the right"). 4. Robots can learn by working a problem out for themselves. In the 1960's a rpbot called shakey was built at Stanford University. It could find its way around a room, avoiding obstacles which it could "see" with a TV camera. It could even find an electric socket and recharge itself. The industrial robots are generally made of three (3) basic units: ( 1) Power supply, the (2) Manipulator arm with joints and gripper, and (3) the computerized control system. 1. POWER SUPPLY: It is the power supply that produce$ a set of forces which move the parts of the robot at its different jomts. Three (3) types of power supply are commonly used: electric, hydraulic and pneumatic. a. ELECTRIC Systems use AC (Alternate Current) or DC (Direct Current) motors, with each joint of the robot being controiiP.d bv an individual motor. b. Hydraulic Systems use force provided by liquids, such as oil, which is forced along the tubes. under high pressure. c. Pneumatic Systems are powered by compressed air. It is difficult to accurately control air complicated procedures. 2. The "ARM": The visible part of the robot is the manipulator arm, with its gripper or "end effector" and joints. The joints are like those of human beings and are capable of five (5) basic types of Movements. a. Rectangle Coordinate- This moves along 3 basic axes, x, y, and z, or left-right, backward-forward and up-down.
374
b. Cylindrical Coordinate- This type can rotate around the vertical axis. c. Spherical Coordinate- This type achieves its vertical motion by pivoting at the shoulder joint. d. Revolute Coordinate- This type has joint at the 'shoulder', 'elbow·, and 'wrist' and it resembles the human arm closely. e. SCARA Systems- SCARA stands for Selective Compliance Assembly Robot Arm. In this, all the joints are in the horizontal plane. The "END EFFECTOR" - takes the place of the hand in the robot "arm". End Effectors are for specific operations. Some commonly used ones are grippers, suction pads, shovels and hooks. Robots in a factory can change their "end effectors" to suit the particular job they are doing.
3. The CONTROL SYSTEM- this third component not only directs the motion but is also responsible for the sensory processing of the robot mechanisms. The computer is used as the controller system that contains sets of instructions which direct the motor in the robot to brinq about a certain specific motion or function. For the control system to function properly, the robot sensory system gathers specific information needed for adequate control of the robot. In the more advanced systems, the sensory system of the robot maintains an internal model of the environment to enable prediction and decision making. But it is not enough for robots to simply perceive and understand the world around them; it is just as important for them to be able to understand how their actions influence or change the particular task at hand. This means that a robot has to have "FEEDBACK". SENSORS are used by the robot to detect position. velocity, acceleration and DATA (which may be in different forms: tactile, optical, acoustic, thermal and multi-function). a. Tactile Sensors, or Touch Sensors are commonly mounted in the robot gripper to detect contract with objects. These can be pressure pads, which allow it to feel whether it is actually grasping an object. They can also be in the form of a photo-electric cell built into the robot's "end effector". This acts as an "eye" and by the presence or absence of light shining on it, can tell the mact1ine whether it is holding something. Strain gauges are used to detect the pressure the robot's grippers are exerting, and to assess how hard or soft the pressure has to be by measuring the degree of resistance. b. Optical Sensors capture an image, such as a part to be handled or a certain distance to be measured. A robot's vision is through video cameras. The. images is processed by computer analogies, which is then used to evaluate, grasp positions, and determine flows based on comparison with the stored images in the computer. One of the most 375
commonly used is a photoelectric diode which produces off-on signals such as "gripper closed" or "part missing". An example of this is the {APOMS) Automated Propeller Optical Measurement System developed for the U.S. Navy. c. Acoustic Sensors or "hearing" sensors, are insensitive.to variations in optical reflections, and they can penetrate clouds or dust or moisture, water or oil and solid materials. Thus, these sensors are successfully used in space and underwater. Acoustic transducers are designed to be very efficient in coupling sounds. Usually, the sound transmitter and sound receiver are separate. d. Thermal Sensors- are used to measure an object's temperature though their application is not very common, engineers are still looking into their development. This sensor finds its application in temperature dependent functions, like maintenance and repair of tau lty components in an electrical circuit. e. Multi-function Sensors are sensors that carry out more than one function. This means that incoming information is processed from different sensory modalities. One example of this is the research by P. Dario and colleagues at the University of Pisa in which a multilayer "skin" is being developed for "end effectors" which has sensibility for touch as well as temperature.
C. INTELLIGENT BUILDINGS A term defined as "a building which provides a productive and cost-effective environment through optimization of its four basic elements -- STRUCTURES. SYSTEMS SERVICES and MANAGEMENT and the interrelationships between them ...... optimal building intelligence is the matching of solutions to occupant need."
1
In the framework of such a definition, the intelligence of a building, resides essentially in its designers' and operators' abilities. An intelligent building is, therefore, not necessarily packed with electronic systems, nor even one with an extensive BAS (Building Automation System) unless it is necessitated by the building program and can demonstrate its cost-effectiveness. Rather, it is a building designed with forethought and perhaps some inspiration, both of wh1ch are necessary to satisfy immediate and predictable need, and yet also to anticipate the occupants' future requirements, since modern building usage is rarely static. (a) Building Structure - These are essentially architectural and marketing considerations, since there is a vast difference betVIteen speculative construction for immediate return, construction for rental, and owner-use buildings. Since every additional em. of slab-to-slab height and every square meter of utility closet space increases construction costs or reduces occupant space, the speculative builder will be interested only if. an immediate return is likely:
376
1
The rental builder will consider it in the light of his or her immediate rental prospects: and the informed owner-user builder will analyze the rate of return for initial investment and decide accordingly. These comments apply all the more when referring to additional costs for unseen items such as spare ducts and conduits and ''fuels" such as fixtures, finishes and furnishings. (b) Building Systems- This is the area of high-tech equipment such as BAS (Building Automation System), plus all the individual subsidiary systems. One difficultly lies in the highly proprietary nature of all of this equipment, making integration between systems and future alterations difficult if not problematic. Second, the resistance of some major manufacturers to open protocol (ex: inter-equipment communication compatibility) places another difficult problem into the-design process. Experience has shown clearly, however. that in the very fast-moving building systems market, today's high-tech can become tomorrow's albatross, and therefore planning for future requirements means intelligent preparation as much as immediate 1Jrovision. · (c) Building Services and Management- with the exception of communication facilities, these items are not within our scope. and with respect to communications, which are the lifeline of all modern commercial ard industrial facilities, the foregoing remarks are equally applicable lnsummary, then, the INTELLIGENT BUILDING IS essentially the building that is designed with foresight. Hindsight will determine the degree of intelligence.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) The trend in modern construction, except for small or simple structures, is clearly to use integrated system design plus centralized monitoring and control of building systems. The subsystems almost always include in a building automation system (BAS) are HVAC, energy management, and lighting control. Inclusion of security, life safety (fire alarm, fire control and suppression, plus emergency aspects of ve.iical transportation), material handling, and some aspects of communications depends on the specific needs of the building. This trend toward building automation which previously had been economically justifiable only in large owner-user facilities, is today not only economically feasible but very nearly an economic necessity because of high labor costs and the relati_vely low cost of computer and microprocessor controls.
377
MULTIBUILDfNG FACILITIES The advantages in the use of a single building wide BAS are redoubled when applied to a multibuilding facility as compared to precomputer technology. A graphic representation of such a multibuilding system is hereby shown below.
378
The intelligent building BAS controls its building systems and interconnects via telephone cables (and microwave link) to other buildings 1n the network and to the central office. It matters little whether the various buildmgs in the network are geographically concentrated in campus fashion as would br~ the case in an industrial park, a university campus, or a multibuilding industrial facility or spread out: the control, monitoring, and alarm functions remain the same. The same principle of building interconnection can be applied to a particular systems rather than the BAS. Thus in the figure below, il shows a single processor- wori<-slation (PC-type computer) controlling the security aspect of a number of facilities via controllers, modems, and telephone cable connections 1n a single-user local area network (LAN) system. This workstation can then be incorporated into a multisystem, multiuser computer network.
01al Telephone Network
Stngle-user Lan System
Modem Controller
Remote S•re
Modem
Contr::)tler
'----------~ Controller Readers Local Cont•ollers
Processor/Workstat1on
Entry/Ex•! Entry/Ex•! Readers Readers
Readers
Computer control of a single system (security) at multiple locations via telephone link, in a single-user local area network (LAN), (Courtesy of CSI Control Systems International.)
379
AREA ''C'' -----PARTI
PRE-DESIGN BUILDING PROGRAMMING
PART I
AREA "C"
I. PRE-DESIGN - BUILDING PROGRAMMING Architecturai Programming is a process that seeks to analyze and define an architectural problem along with the requirements that must be met in its physical solution. It is a process of analysis, where design is a process of synthesis once the problem is clearly defined. The process can apply to an Individual space or room, a building, or an entire complex of structures. Thorough programming includes a wide range of information. In addition to stating the goals and objectives of the client, a program report contains a site analysis, aesthetic considerations, space needs. adjacency requirements, organizing concepts, outdoor space needs, codes. budgeting demands, and scheduling limitations.
1. fUNCTlONAL REQUIREMENTS Of all programming information. the amount of space and the relationships between spaces are two of the PRIMARY FACTORS in determining building size and configuration. In addition to the primary function of a building in housing a specific use. there are always support spaces required that add to the overall size. These include such areas as mechanical rooms, toil.et rooms, storage. and circulation space. A. Determining Space and Volume Needs
Space Standards of a corporation may dictate that a senior manager have a 22 square meter office while a junior manager be alloted 15 square meter. Where square meters are not defined by one of these methods. space for a particular use is determined in one of three ways: a. by the number of people that must be accomodated b. by an object or piece of equipment c. by a specific activity that has Its own. clearly specified space needs People engaged in a particular activity most commonly define the space required. For example, a student sitting in a classroom needs about 1.35 sq.M. This includes space for actually sitting in a chair in addition to the space required for circulating within the classroom and space for the teacher's desk and shelving. An office worker needs from 30 to 85 square meter. depending on whether the employee is housed, in a private office or is part of an open office plan. This space requirement also includes room to circulate around the desk and may include space for visitor's chairs, personal files. and the like.
382
Occasionally, space needs can be based on something other than the number of people but which is directly related to the occupancy. For instance, preliminary planning of a hospital may be based on an area per bed, or library space can be estimated based on the number of books. Some Common Space Planning Guidelines Offices .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. ... ..
30-70 net sq M. per person
restaurant dining .......................................................
1.35-1.65 net sq.M per seat
restaurant kitchens................................... ........ ......
o 30-0.45 net sq.M. per room
hotel (1.5 persons/room) ........................................ ..
50-54 gross
library reading room ..................................................
1.80-3.15 net sq.M per person
book stacks ...............................................................
.0075 net sq.M per bound volume
theaters with fixed seats ................... ............ ............
0.66 net sq. M per person
assembly areas;'movable seats................................
1.35 net sq.M per person
the~ter
lobbies ....... .
30% of seating area
classrooms stores .................................................................... .
1.35-1.70 net sq.M per student 2.70-4.86 net sq.M per person
1. Whichever way it is done, the number of people that must be accomodated is determined and multiplied by the square meter per person. However this only includEls the space needed for the specific activity, not the space required to connect several rooms or spaces or for support areas such as mechanical rooms. These must be added to the basic area requirements. 2. The second way space needs are determined is by the size of an object or piece of equipment. The size of a printing oress. for example, partially determines the area of a press room. Automobile sizes determine the space needs for parking garages. 3. The third way space needs are defined is through a built-in set of rules or customs related to the activity itself. Sports facilities are examples of this method. A basketball cou·rt must be a certain size regardless of the number of spectators present, although the seating capacity would add to the total space required. A courtroom is an example of an activity where the procedures and customs of a process (the trial) dictate an arrangement of human activity and spacing of individual areas in the courtroom that only partially depend on the number of people.
B. Determining Total Building Area The areas determined with one of the methods described above resu.lt in the net area of a facility. These areas do not include general circulation space between rooms,
383
mechanical rooms, stairways, elevator and mechanical shafts, elect'ical and telephone equipment rooms, wall and structural thicknesses, and other spaces not directly musing the primary activities of the building. Sometimes the NET AREA is referred to as the net ASSIGNABLE area and the secondary spaces are referred to as the UNASSIGNED areas. The sum of the net area and these ancillary areas gives the GROSS building area. The ratio of the two figures is called the "net-to-gross"ratio and is often referred to as the "efficiency" of the building. EFFICIENCY depends on the type of occupancy and how well it is planned. A hospital that contains many small rooms and a great number of large corridors will have a much lower efficiency ratio than a factory where the majority of space is devoted to production areas and very little to corridors and other secondary spaces. Generally, net-to-gross ratios range from 60 to 80 percent, with the same uses more or less efficient than these numbers. A list of some common efficiency ratios is shown in Table 1.1. In some cases, the client may dictate the net-to-gross ratio that must be met by the architect's design. This is usually the case where the efficiency is related to the amount of floor space that can be leased, such as in a retail mall or a speculative office building. Increasing the efficiency of a building is usually done by careful layout of the building's circulation plan. A corridor that serves rooms on both sides of it, for example, is much more efficient than one that only serves rooms on one side. Table1.1 Some Common Efficiency Ratios 0.75-0.80 0.75 0.65-0.70 0.75-0.80 0.83 0.60-0.75 0.50-0.65
offices retail stores restaurants public libraries m~seums
theaters. hospitals
Once the net square Meter is determined and th8 appropriate efficiency ratio established (or estimated), the gross area of the building is calculated by dividing the net square Meter by the net-to-gross (efficiency) ratio. Example 1.1 The net assignable area of small office building has been programmed as 6,500 square Meter. If the efficiency ratio is estimated to be 73%, what gross area should be planned for? · gross area
=
65,000
or
0.73
6,500
0.73 = 8,900 square Meter
89,000 square feet
The design portion of the Board Exatns. often requires that you provide various unassignable spaces within the context of the problem without giving you the square meters. You are expected to make a reasonable allowance for mechanical rooms, toilet rooms, elevators, and the like if they are not specifically listed in the program.
384
Table 1.21ists some typical space requirements with which you should be familiar {,,.r projects of the size and type normally found in the design portion of the exam.
C. Determining Space Relationships Spaces must not only be the correct size for the activity they support, but they also must be located near other spaces with which they share some functional relationship. Programming identifies these relationships and assigns a hierarchy of importance to them. The relationships are usually recorded in a matrix form~t or graphically as adjacency diagrams. See Figure 1 .1. Table 1.2 Space Requirements for Estimating Non-assignable Areas m~chanical rooms, total heating, broiler rooms heating, forced air fan rooms
5%-9% of 3%-5% of 4%-8% of 3%-7% of
vertical duct space
0.36 sq.M per 100 sq.M of floor space available
toilets water closets
4.5 sq.M per water closet 1 per 15 people up to 55: 1 per 40 people over 55 Substitute or.e for each water closet, but total water closets cannot be reduced less than 2/3 of the number required 1 per 15 people for offices and public buildings up to 60 people
urin.als
lavatories
gross gross gross gross
building building building building
area area area area
1 per 100 people for public assembly use hydraulic elevator,91 kilos
2.20 M wide by 1.80 M deep
elevator lobby space
1.80 M deep
main corridors
1.50 to 2.1 0 Meters
exit corridors
1.20 M; 1.10 M minimum by code
monumental stairs
1.50 to 2.40 Meters
exit stairs
1.20 M; 1.10 M minimum by code
385
entrY living room dining room kitchen study
bedrc.om becJroom
bath
(a} adjacency matrix
(b) adjacency diagram
Figure 1.1 Methods of Recording Space Relationships
There are three ba~ic types of adjacency needs: people, products, and information. Each type implies a different kind of physical design response. Two or more spaces may need to be phys_ically adjacent or located very close to one another when people need face-to-face contact or when people move from one area to another as part of the building's use. For example, the entry to a theater, the lobby, and the theater space h(lve a particular functional requirement for being arranged the way they are. Because of the normal flow of people, they must be located adjacent to one another. With other relationships, two spaces may simply need to have access to one another, but this can be with a corridor or through another intervening space rather than with direct adjacency. Products, equipment, or other objects may move between spaces and require another type of adjacency. The spaces themselves may not have to be close to one another but the movement of objects must be facilitated. Dumb waiters, pneumatic tubes·, assembly lines, and other types of conveying systems can connect spaces of this type. Finally, there may only be a requirement that people in different spaces exchange information. The adjacency may then be entirely electronic or with paper-moving systems. Although this is quite frequently the situation, personal, informal, human contact may be advantages for other reasons. The programmer analyzes various types of adjacency requirements and verifies them with the client. Since every desirable relationship can seldom be accommodated, the ones that are mandatory need to be identified separately from the ones that are highly desirable or simply useful. 2. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS During programming, general concepts are developed as a response to the goals and needs of the client. These programmatic concepts are statements about functional solutions to the client's performance requirements. They differ from later 386
design concepts because no attempt at actual physical solutions is made during programming; programmatic concepts guide the later development of design concepts. For example, a programmatic concept might be that a facility should be easily expandable by 20 percent every three years. Exactly how that would happen with a building would be developed as a design concept. It might take the form of a linear building that could be extended by a simple addition to one wing. Some ot the more common design considerations that must be addressed during programming are outlined in the following sections.
A. Organization Concepts The functional needs of a particular type of building most often influence how the physical environment is organized. At other times, the client's goal, the site, the desired symbolism, or additional factors suggest the organization pattern. There are six fundamental organization concepts: linear, axial, grid, central, radial, and clustered. These are shown diagrammatically in Figure 1.2. Linear organizations consist of a series of spaces or buildings that are placed in a single line. The spaces can be identical or different sizes and shapes, but they always relate to a unifying line, usually a path of circulation. A linear organization is very adaptable; it cari be straight, bent, or curved to meet the requirements of the client, the site, solar orientation, or construction. It is easily expandable and can be built in a modular configuration if desired.
(a) linear (b) axial
(d) central (c) grid
387
(e) radial
(f) clustered Figure 1.2 Organization Concepts
Axial plans are variations of the linear system with two or more major linear segments about which spaces or buildings are placed. There may be additional, secondary paths growing out of the primary axes and the major linear segments may be at right angles to each other or at some other angle. Grid systems consist of two sets .of regularly spaced parallel lines, which create a very strong pattern and one that is quite flexible. Within a grid, portions can be subtracted, added or modified. The size of the grid can be changed to create different sizes of spaces or to define special areas. However, it can become very monotonous and confusing if not used properly. Since a grid system is usually defined by circulation paths, it is more appropriate for very large buildings and building complexes where a great deal of circulation is required. Central organizations are based on one space or point about which secondary elements are placed. It is usually a very formal method of omanizing spaces or buildings and inherently places the primary emphasis on the central space. Central organizations are often used in conjunction with axial or linear plans. When more than one linear organization extends from a centralized point, it becomes a radial organization. Radial plans have a central focus but also have the ability to extend outward to connect with other spaces, or for expansion. These types of organizing plans can be circular or assume other shapes as well.
Clustered organizations are loose compositions of spaces or buildings related around a path, axis, or central space, or simply grouped together. The general image is one of informality. Clusters are very adaptable to requirements for different sizes of spaces and they are easy to add onto without disrupting the overall composition.
B. Circulation Patterns Circulation patterns are primary ways of organizing spaces, buildings, and groups of buildings. They are vital to the efficient organization of a structure and provide people with their strongest orientation within an environment. Paths of circulation provide · the means to move people, cars, products, and services. 388
Circulation is directly related to the organizational pattern of a building, but it does not necessarily have to mimic it. For example, a major circulation path can cut diagonally across a grid pattern. Normally, there is a hierarchy of paths. Major r..:>utes connect major spaces or become spaces themselves and have secondary paths branching from them. Different sizes and types of circulation are important for accommodating varying capacities and for providing an orientation device for people using them. Circulation for different functions may need to be separated as well. In a government building; one set of halls for the public may be separated from the internal set of corridors for the workers. A jail may have a secure passage for moving prisoners completely separate from other areas of public movement Establishing and maintaining a simple, efficient, and coherent circulation scheme is critical to successfully completing the design portion of the Board Exam. One of the common mistakes is to let the arranging of spaces according to the adjacency requirements take over your design and to connect them with a circulation path as an afterthought. You are then left with a maze of awkward corridors that decreases the efficiency ratio and creates dead end corridors and other exiting problems. All circulation paths are linear by their very nature, but there some common variations, many of which are similar to the organizational patterns described in the previous section. Since circulation is such an important aspect of successful completion of the design portion of the examination, you should have a good mental picture of the various circulation concepts and the advantages and disadvantages of each F1ve basic patterns are shown in Figure 1.3, along with a hypothetical structural grid on top of them to illustrate how some patterns are better suited than others to integration of structure, adjacencies, and circulation system. Also remember that mechanical services can easily follow a logical circulation system. The linear, dumbbell layout is the simplest and one of the most flexible. Spaces are laid out along a straight path that connects two major elements at the ends These are usually the entrance to the building at one end and an exit at the other, although the primary entrance can occur anywhere along the path. Spaces are laid out along the spine as required. Various sizes of spaces can be easily accommodated by simply extending their length perpendicular to the path, and if outdoor spaces are required they are simply located as needed. The double-loaded corridor makes the building very efficient. Site constraints may restrict the length of the spine, but the concept can still be used by bending the path at a right angle. With this layout it is very easy to establish a regular, one-way structural grid perpendicular to the direction of the path. Simply extending the length of a bay can accommodate larger spaces as the program requires.
389
I
entry
I
.I
1
I
D'o D .D!D!O!D!Di 1
1
1
I
I I
!
!DID! !
I
!
exit
l!!
1
I
I
1
1
structural grid
1
two-Y structural grid
I i '
I
f\
!
I
I
I
,
~
,(a) dumbbell
.
--~---<=-==
entry
L_ ___,
entrv
(b) donut
(d) radial
(e)
Figure 1.3 Circulation Patterns 390
field
Conversely, eliminating a line or two of structure gives you the location for a very large space and a long-span structural system. A two-way structural grid can also be used with this layout. Making a complete loop results in a doughnut configuration. Th1s is also very efficient because it provides a double-loaded corridor and automatically makes a continuous exit way. Building entries, exits, and stairways can be placed wherever needed. Spaces that do not need exterior exposure can be placed in the middle. Various sizes of spaces are easily accommodated on the perimeter because they can be expanded outward just as wHh the dumbbell layout. A simple structural grid-can be coordinated with the space layout as required. A doughnut pattern is good for square or nearly square sites and for buildings that must be compact. A grid system is often used tor very large buildings where access must be provided to many internal spaces. For the small buildings that are usually found on the Board Exam., a grid system is seldom appropriate because it results in a very inefficient layout, with single spaces being surrounded by corridors. A radial layout is oriented on one major space with paths extending from this central area. The radial configuration generally requires a large site and is more appropriate for large buildings or huilding complexes. Establishing a simple structural system is more difficult with this pattern unless the circulation paths extend from the central space at 90 degree angles. Each corridor must also have an exit at the end if it is longer than 20 feet. Finally, a field pattern consists of a network of paths with no strong direction. There are major paths with secondary routes extending from or connecting the primary routes. Orientation within a field pattern is difficult, as is integrating a logical structural system.
c.
Service Spaces
In additon to the primary programmed spaces (the net assignable), secondary spaces such as toilet and mechanical rooms must ~llso be planned from the start. They should not be tacked on after the majority of the design work is done. Depending on the type of mechanical system, mechanical rooms should be centrally located to minimize lengths of duct runs and piping. This is especially true with all air systems. Mechanical rooms usually need easy access to the outside for servicing as well as provisions for fresh air intakes. Toilet rooms should be located to satisfy adjacency requirements as stated in the program or in an area that has easy access to the entire floor. Men's and women's toilet rooms should be back to back to share a common plumbing wall and to be near other plumbing in the building, if possible. Service access must also be given careful consideration. This includes service drives for trucks, the service entrance to the buidling, and access to mechanical rooms, storage rooms, and other functional areas as required by the program. The Board Exam. design problem usually has a requirement for some type of service access that must be kept separate from the primary entrance and circulation paths.
391
D. Flexibility Flexibility is a design consideration that involves a variety of concepts. Expansibility is the capacity for a building to be enlarged or added onto easily as needs change or growth oocurs. Convertibility allows an existing building or space to be changed to a new use. For example, a school gymnasium may be converted into classroom space in a second phase of construction. VersaUiity means the ability to use the same space for a variety of uses in order to make maximum use of limited space.
If a program calls for flexibility, the designer must know or determine what type is required Expansibility may suggest one type of organizational and structural system while convertibility may require a completely different approach.
3. PSYCHOLOGICAL AND SOCIAL INFLUENCES , Developing physical guidelines that respond to the psychological needs of people is one of the most difficult tasks in programming. Although there has been a great deal of research in the field of environmental psychology, predicting human behavior and designing spaces and buildings that enhance people's lives is an inexact process. However, the architect must attempt to develop a realistic model of the people who will be using the designed environment and the nature of their activities. This model can then serve as the foundation on which to base many design decisions. During programming, tbere must be a clear distinction made between the architect's client and who the actual users will· be. They are not always the same. For example, a public housing agency may be the client for a subSidized housing complex, but the actual users will be people who probably have an entirely different set of values and lifestyles than those helping to develop the program. Environmental psychology is a very complex subject, but the following concepts are some with which you should be familiar. A. Behavior Settings A behavior setting is a useful concept for studying the effects of the environment on human activity. A behavior setting can be thought of as a particular place. with definable boundaries and objects within the place, in which a standing pattern of behavior occurs at a particular time. For example, a weekly board of directors meeting in a conference room can be considered a behavior setting. The activity of the meeting follows certain procedures (call to order, reading of minutes, discussions, and so forth). it occurs in the same place (the conference room), and the room is arranged to assist the activity (chairs are arranged around a table, audio-visual facilities are present, lighting is adequate). The idea of a behavior setting is a useful concept for the architect becc.use it connects the strictly behavioral aspects of human activity of interest to the psychologist with the effects of the physical environment on people. Although a behavior setting is a complex system of activities, human goals. administrative requirements, physical objects, and cultural needs, it provides the architect with a definable unit of design. By knowing the people involved and the activities taking place, programmatic concepts · can be developed that support the setting.
392
'
B. Territoriality As mentioned earlier, territoriality is a fundamental aspect of human behavior. It refers to the need to lay claim to the spaces we occupy and the things we own. Although partially based on the biological imperative for protection, territoriality in humans is more related to the needs for self-identity and freedom of choice. In addition to marking out objects and larger spaces in the environment, people also protect their own personal space, that imaginary bubble of distance that varies with different circumstances. Territoriality applies to groups as well as to individuals. A study club, school class, or street gang can claim a physical territory as their own, which helps give both the group and the individuals in the group an identity. Environments should allow people to claim territory and make choices about where to be and what activities to engage in.
c.
Personalization
One of the ways territoriality manifests itself is with the personalization of space. Whether it happens in one's home, at the office desk, or in a waiting lounge, people need to arrange the environment to reflect their presence and uniqueness. The most successful designs allow this to take place without major adverse affects to other people or to the environment as a whole. At home, people decorate their spaces the way they want. At the office, people bring in personal objects, family photographs, and pictures to make the space their own. In an airport lounge, people place coats and suitcases around them, not only to stake out a temporary territory but also to
make the waiting time more personal and a little more comfortable. Another way people personalize space is to modify the environment. If a given space is not conducive to meeting the needs of the people using it, they can either modify their behavior to adapt to the environment, change their relationship to the environment (leave), or try to change the environment. The simple act of moving a chair to make viewing a screen ea~ier is an example of modifying and personalizing a space. If the chair is attached, the design is not as adaptable to the varying needs of the people using the design.
D. Group Interaction To a certain extent, the environment can either facilitate or hinder human interaction. In most behavior settings, groups are predisposed to act in a particular way. If the setting is not conducive to the activities, the people will try to modify the environment or modify their behavior to make the activity work. In extreme cases, if the setting is totally at odds with the activity, stress, anger, and other adverse reactions can occur. Seating arrangement is one of the most common ways of facilitating group interaction. Studies have shown that people will seat themselves at a table according to the nature of their relationship with others around them. For intimate conversation, two people will sit across the corner of a table or next to each other on a sofa. For more formal situations or when people are competing, they will sit ace ross from one another. Where social contact is not desired, two people will take chairs at opposite corners of a table. ·
393
Round tables tend to foster more cooperation and equality among those seated around them. Rectangular tables tend to make cooperation more difficult and establish the P'JrSOn sitting at the end in a more superior position. Strangers do not like to share the same sofa or park bench. Knowing the people and activities expected to be in a place can assist the architect in making decisions. For example, individual study carrels in a library will be more efficient .than large tables because the tables will seldom be fully occupied by strangers. In places where informal group interaction takes place, studies have shown that over 97 percent of groups comprise two to four people. Designing to accommodate these sizes of groups makes more sense than anticipating groups of more people, although a plan that allows for the possibility of very large groups while preferring small groups would be the best combination. In most cases, providing a variety of spaces for interaction is the best approach.
E. Status The physical environment holds a great deal of symbolism that indicates status for some human beings. Some people like colonial houses because such designs symbolize to the occupants the idea of "home." Others prefer banks of classical design with large lobbies, because that is what they think a bank should look like. The environment can thus communicate status. In the United States, for example, someone with a corner office has more status than someone with only one exterior wall. Office size is also equated with. the status in many cultures. A house in a better neighborhood provides a higher status than one in other neighborhoods. Status can also operate at the scale of an entire building or complex. The client may want the building to symbolize some quality of the organization and give him or her a physical and psychological status in the community. An architectural program should investigate the requirements or implications of status. Sometimes clients may clearly state what status-related goals they want to achieve. Other times, the programmer must raise the issue, explore it with the client, and document the response as a programmatic concept. 4. BUDGETING AND SCHEDULING Establishing a budget and setting up a time frame for design and construction are two of the most important parts of programming because they influence many of the design decisions to follow and can determine whether the project is even feasible. During later stages of design, the initial budget and scheduling are simply refined as more information becomes available. Budgets may be set in several ways. For speculative or for profit projects, the owner or developer works out a pro forma statement listing the expected income of the project and the expected costs to build it. An estimated selling price of the developed project or rent per square meter is calculated and balanced against all the various costs, one of which is the construction price. In order to make the project economically feasible, there will be a limit on the building costs. This becomes the budget within which the architect must work. Budgets are often established through public funding or legislation. In these cases, the construction budget is often fixed without the architect's involvement and the
394
project must be designed and built for the fixed amount. Unfortunately, when public officials estimate the cost to build a project, they sometimes neglect to include all aspects of development, such as professional fees, furnishings. and other line items. Budgets may also be set by the architect at the request or H1e owner anc:l.based on the proposed project. This is the most realistic and accurate way to establish a preliminary budget because it is based on a particular building type of a particular size on a particular site (or sites if several are being reviewed for selection). There are four basic variables in developing any construction budget: quantity, quality, the budget itseH, and time. There is always a balance among these four elements and changing one or more affects the others. For instance, if an owner needs a certain amount of square meter built (quantity), needs the project built at a certain time, and has a fixed budget amount, then the quality of construction will have to be adjusted to meet the other constraints. In some cases, value engineering can be performed during which individual system and materials are reviewed to see if the same function can be accomplished in a less expensive way If time, quality. and the budget are fixed, then the amount of space constructed (quantity) must be adjusted.
A. Cost Influences There are many· variables that affect project cost. The first thing to remember is that construction cost is only one part of the total project development budget. Other factors include such things as site acquisition, site development, and financing. Figure 1.4 lists most of the items commonly found in a project budget and a typical range of percentage values based on construction cost. Of course, not all of these are a part of every development, but they illustrate the things that must be considered. Building cost is the money required to construct the building, including structure, exterior cladding, finishes, and electrical and mechanical systems. Site development costs are usualiy a separate item. They include such things as parking, drives, fences, landscaping, exterior lighting, and sprinkler systems. If the development is a large line item A
8
c D E F G H I J
example
site acquisition building costs
1,100,000
site develof}ment total construction cost movable equipment furnishings total construction and furnishings professional services inspection and testing escalation estimate
M
contingency financing costs moving expenses
N
Total Project Budget
K L
sq. M. times cost per sq. M. 10% to 20% of B B+C 5% to 10% of B
D+E+F 5% to 10% of D 2% to 10% of G per year 5% to 10% of G
G + H through M
Figure 1.4 Project Budget Line Items
395
(assume) 6,800,000 (15%) 1,020,000 7,820,000 (5%) 340,000 200 000 8,360,000 (7%) 54 7,400 15,000 (10%) 836,000 (8%) 668,800 250,000 (assume) 90,000 fJ 11,867,200
one that affects the surrounding area, a developer may required to upgrade roads, extend utility lines, and do other major off-site work as a condition of getting approval from public agencies. Movable equipment and furnishings include furniture, accessories, window coverings, and major equipment necessary to put the facility into operation. These are often listed as separate line items because the funding for them may come out of a separate budget and because they may be supplied under separate contracts. Professional services are architectural and engineering fees as well as costs for such things as topographic surveys, soils tests, special consultants, appraisals and legal fees, and the like. Inspection and testing involve money required for special on-site, full-time inspection (if required), and testing of such things as concrete, steel, window walls, and roofing. Since construction takes a great deal of time, a factor for inflation should be included. Generally, the present budget estimate is escalated to a time in the future at the expected tnidpoint of construction. Although it is always difficult to predict the future, using past cost indexes and inflation rates and applying an estimate to the expected condition of the construction, the architect can usually make an educated guess. A contingency should also be added to account for unforeseen changes by the client and other conditions that add to the cost. For an early project budget, the percentage of the contingency should be higher than contingencies applied to later budgets, because there are more unknowns. Normally, from 5 to 10 percent should be included. Financing includes not only the long-term interest paid on permanent financing but also the immediate costs of loan origination fees, construction loan interest, and other administrative costs. On long-term loans, the cost of financing can easily exceed all of the original building and development costs. In many cases, long term interest, called debt service, is not included in the project budget because it is an ongoing cost to the owner, just as maintenance costs are. Finally, many clients include moving costs in the development bud~et. For large companies and other types of clients, the money required to physically relocate, including changing stationery, installing telephones, and the like, can be a substantial amount. B. Methods of Budgeting The costs described in the previous section and shown in Figure 1.4 represent a type of budget done during programming or even prior to programming to test the feasibility of a project. The numbers are very preliminary, often based on very sketchy information. For example, the building cost may simply be an estimated cost per square meter multiplied by the required number of gross square meter needed. The square footage cost may be derived from similar buildings in the area, from the past experience, or from commercially available cost books. Budgeting, however, is an ongoing activity for the architect. At each stage of the design process, there should be a revised budget, reflecting the decisions made to that time. As shown in the example, pre-design budgets are usually based only on
396
area basis, but other units can also be used. For example, many companies have rules of thumb for estimating based on items such as cost per hospitals bed, cost per student, cost per hotel room, and similar functional units. After the pre-programming budget, the architect usually begins to concentrate on the building and site development costs. At this stage an average cost per square meter may still be used, or the building may be divided into several functional parts and different square meter prices assigned to each. A school, for example, may be classified into classroom space, laboratory space, shop space, office space, and gymnasium space, each having a different cost per square meter. This type of division can be developed concurrently with the programming of the space requirements. During schematic design, when more is known about the space requirements and general configuration of the building and site, budgeting is based on major subsystems. Historical cost information on each type of subsystem can be applied to the design. At this point it is easier to see where the money is being used in the building. Design decisions can then be based on studies of alternative systems. A typical subsystem budget is shown in Figure 1.5. Values for low-average and high quality construction for different building types can be obtained from cost databases and published estimating manuals and applied to the structure being budgeted. The peso amounts included in system cost budgets usually include markup for contractor's overhead and profit and other construction administrative costs. During the later stages of schematic design and early stages of construction documents, more detailed estimates are made. The procedure most often used is the parameter method, which involves an expanded itemization of construction quantities and assignment of unit costs to these quantities. For example, instead of using one number for floor finishes, they are broken down into carpeting, vinyl tile, wood strip flooring, unfinished concrete, and so forth. Using an estimated cost per square meter, the cost of each type of flooring can be estimated based on the area. Office 9uildings average cost subsystem
:til/sq. Mts.
foundations floors on grade superstructure
%of total
3.96 3.08 16.51
5.2 4.0 21.7
roofing exterior walls partitions
0.18 9.63 5.19
0.2 12.6 6.8
wall finishes floor finishes ceiling finishes
3.70 3.78 2.79
5.0. 3.7
conveying syste!'lls specialties fixed equipment
6.45 0.70 2.74
8.5 0.9 3.6 .
397
4.8
HVAC plumbing electrical
9.21 3.61 4.68 ~76.21
12.1 4.6 6.1 100.0
Figure 1.5 System Cost Budget
With this type of budgeting, it is possible to evaluate the cost implications of each building component and to make decisions concerning both quantity and quality in order to meet the original budget estimate. If floor finishes are over budget, the architect and the client can review the parameter estimate and decide, for example, that some wood flooring must be replaced with less expensive carpeting. Similar decisions can be made concerning any of the parameters in the budget. Paramete.tline items are based on commonly used units that relate to the construction element under study. For instance, a gypsum board partition would have an o.ssigned cost per square foot of complete partition of a particular construction type rather than separate costs for metal studs, gypsum board, screws, and finishing. There would be different costs for single-layer gypsum board partitions, one-hour rated walls, twohour rated walls, and other partition types. Two additional components of construction cost include the contractor's overhead and profit. Overhead can be further divided into general overhead and project overhead. General overhead is the cost to run a contracting business that involves such business that involves such things as office rent, secretarial help, heat and other recurring costs. Project overhead is the money it takes to complete a job that does not include labor, materials, or equipment. Temporary offices, project telephones, sanitary facilities, trash removal, insurance, permits, and temporary utilities are examples of project overhead. The total overhead costs, including both general and project expenses, can range from about 10 percent to 20 percent of the total costs for labor, materials and equipment. Profit is the last item a contractor adds onto an estimate and is listed as a percentage of the total of labor, materials, equipment, and overhead. This is one of the most highly variable parts of a budget. Profit depends on the type of project, its size, the amount of risk involved, how much money the contractor wants to make, the general market conditions, and, of course, whether or not the job is being bid. During extremely difficult economic conditions, a contractor may cut the profit margin to almost nothing simply to get the job and keep his or her work force employed. If the contract is being negotiated with on'ly one contractor, the profit percentage will be much higher. In most cases, however, profit will range from 5 to 20 percent of the total cost of the job. Overall, overhead and profit can total about 15 to 40 percent of construction cost.
C. Cost Information One of the most difficult aspects of developing project budgets is obtaining current, reliable prices for the kinds of construction units you are using. There is no shortage of commercially produced cost books that are published yearly. These books list costs in different ways; some are very detailed, giving the cost for labor and
398
materials for individual construction items, while others list parameter costs and subsystem costs. The detailed price listings are of little use to architects because they are too specific and make comparison of alternate systems difficult. There are also computerized cost estimating services that only require you to provide general information about the project, location, size, major materials, and so forth. The computer service then applies its current price database to the information and returns a cost budget to you. Many architects also work closely with general contractors to develop a realistic budget. You should remember, however, that commercially available cost information is the average of many past construction projects from around the country. Local variations and particular conditions may affect the value of their use on your project. Two conditions that must be accounte.d for in developing any project budget are geographical location and inflation. These variables can be adjusted by using cost indexes that are published in a variety of sources, including the major architectural and construction trade magazines. Using a base year as index 1000, for example, for selected cities around the country, new indexes are developed each year that reflect the increase in costs (both material and labor) that year. The indexes can be used to apply costs from one part of the country to another and to escalate past costs to the expected midpoint of construction of the project being budgeted. Example 1.2 The cost index in your city is 1257 and the cost index for another city in which you are designing a building is 1308. If the expected construction cost is 1.250,000 based on prices for your city, what will be the expected cost in the other region?
Divide
th~
higher index by the lower index: ~
1257 = 1.041 Multiply this by the base cost: 1,250,000x 1.041 =1"1,300,716
D. Scheduling There are two major parts of a project schedule: design time and construction time The architect, of course, has control over the scheduling of design and production of contract documents but has practically no control over construction. However, the design professional must be able to estimate the entire project schedule so the best course of action can be taken in order to meet the client's goals. For example, if the client must move by a certain date and normal design and construction sequences make this impossible, the architect may recommend a fast-track schedule or some other approach to meet the deadline. The design process normally consists of several clearly defined phases, each of which must be Substantially finished and approved by the client before the next one can begin. These are generally accepted in the profession and are referred to in the United Architects' Phils. owner- architect agreement as well as oth.er documents.
399
Following programming, the first phase is schematic design. During this phase, the general layout of the project is developed along with preliminary alternate studies for materials and building systems. Once the direction of the project documented in schematic design drawings is reviewed and approved by the client, the design development phase starts. Here, the decisions made during the previous phase are refined and developed in more detail. Preliminary or outline specifications are written and a more detailed cost budget is made. Construction documents are produced next, which include the final working drawings as well as the full project manual and any bidding and contract documents required. These are used for the bidding or negotiation phase, which includes obtaining bids from several contractors and analyzing them or negotiating a contract with one contractor. The time required tor these phases is highly variable and depends on the following factors: • the size and complexity of the project. Obviously, a 50,000-square-meter hospital will take much longer to design than a 3,000-square-meter office building. • the number of people working on the project. While adding more people to the job can shorten the schedule, there is a point of diminishing returns. Having too many people simply creates a management and coordination problem, and tor some phases, only a few people are required, even for very large jobs: the abilities and design methodology of the project team. Younger, less experienced designers will usually require a little longer to do the same amount of work as a more senior staff. • the type of client and the decision-making and approval processes of the client. Large corporations or public agencies are likely to have a multi-layer decision-making and approval process. The time required for getting the necessary information or approval on one phase may take weeks or even months, where a small, single-authority client might make the same decision in a matter of days. The contruction schedule may be established by the contractor or construction manager, but it must often be estimated by the architect during the programming phase so the client has some idea of the total time required from project conception to move-in. When the architect does this, it should be made very clear to the client that it is only an estimate and the architect can in no way guarantee an early (or any) estimate of the construction schedule. Many variables can affect construction time, but most can be controlled in one way or another. Others, like weather, are independent of anyone's control. Beyond the obvious variables of size and complexity the following is a partial list of some of the more common ones. • the management ability of the contractor to organize his or her own forces as well as those of the subcontractors • material delivery times
400
I
j
• the quality and completeness of the architect's drawings and specification • the weather • labor availability and labor disputes • new constructions or remodeling. For equal areas, remodeling generally takes more time and coordination than new building. • site conditions. Constricted sites or those with subsurface problems usually take more time to build on. • the architect. Some professionals ar more diligent than others in performing their duties during construction. • lender approvals • agency and governmental approvals There are several methods that are used to schedule both design and construction. The most common and easiest is the barchart. The various activities of the schedule are listed along the vertical axis and a time line is extended along the horizontal axis. Each activity is given a starting and finishing date, and overlaps are indicated by having the bars for each activity overlap. Bar charts are simple to make and understand and are suitable for small to midsize projects. However, they cannot show all the sequences and dependencies of one activity on another. Another scheduling tool often used is the critical path method (CPM) and the CPM chart. TheCPM chart graphically depicts all of the tasks required to complete a project, the sequence in which they must occur, their duration, the earliest or latest possible starting time, and the earliest or latest possible finishing time. It also defines the sequence of tasks that are critical or that must be started and finished exactly on time if the total schedule is to be met. A CPM chart for a simple design project is shown in Figure 1.6. Each arrow in the yhart represents an activity with a beginning and end point (represented by the numbered circles). Ne> activity can begin until all activities leading into the circle have been completed. The dashed lines indicate dependency relationships but not activities themselves, and thus they have no duration. They are called dummies and are used to give each activity a unique beginning and ending number and to allow establishment of dependency relationships without tying in nondependent activities. The heavier line in the illustration shows the critical path, or the sequence of events that must happen as scheduled if the deadline is to be met. The numbers under the activities give the duration of the activity in days. Delaying the starting time of any of these activities or increasing their duration will delay the wt1ole project. The noncritical activities can begin or finish earlier or later (within limits) without affecting the final completion date. This variable time is called the float of each activity. Scheduling isvitally important to any project because it can have a great influence on cost. Generally, the longer the project takes the more it costs. This is due to the effect of inflation on materials and labor as well as the additional construction interest and the lost revenue a client can- suffer if the job is not completed in a timely manner. For
example, delayed completion of a retail store or office building delay.s the beginning of rental income. In other cases, quick completion of a project is required to avoid
401
building during bad winter weather, when it costs more to build, -or to meet some other fixed date set by the client's needs. Besides efficient scheduling, construction time can be compressed with fast-track scheduling. This method overlaps the design and construction phases of a project. Ordering of long lead materials and equipment can occur and work on the site and foundations can begin before all the details of the building are completely worked out. With fast-track scheduling, separate contracts are established so each major system can be bid and awarded by itself to avoid delaying other construction. AHhough the fast-track method requires close coordination between the architect, contractor, subcontractors, owner, and others, it is possible to construct a high-quality building in 10 to 30 percent less time than with a conventional construction contract.
5.
COD~S
AND REGULATIONS
A comp(ete program for a building project will include the various legal restrictions that apply to a project. Two of the most common are zoning ordinances and building codes. Zoning is discussed. Building code requirements, including provisions for making buildings accessible to the physically disabled, are reviewed. In addition to zoning regulations, other land development regulations may apply. Such regulations as deed restrictions and easements are also discussed in other Chapters.
r\.
review site alternatMis
refine
8
with 1client
5
0
complete prefiminary code analysis
2
I
5
/continue
~ ,' analyze develop site planning alternatives site (:;\ 4 8 4 •
3
study energy I conservation , i lications I
develop building ,' work~ configuration ' configuration alternatives{.;\ alternatiVes
)---~--~
3 . 2 ',
:
; ,.
I
\
finalize design
complete , presentation
make presentation
~Qdlawifl!E (.;;\.______._{.";;\
·~~~~
'I
~
5 .i0l.3 1 11
4 prepare cost budget
~tructural framing alterna!Nes
critical path time: 30 days
(Numbers in circles are beginning and ending points. Numbers between circles indicate days.)
Figure 1.6 CPM Schedule
Other regulatory agency requirements that may be in force. in addition to zoning ordinances and building codes, include special rules of the local fire department. fire zones set by the local municipality, and rules of government agencies like the Housing
402
and Land Use Regulatory Board (HLRB) and the Environmental Protection Agency. Additional regulations may include local health and hospital department requirements that spell out needs for restaurants and hospitals. Local and state energy conservation regulations may also be in force. 6. THE PROGRAMMING PROCESS Programming is an attempt to define the problem and establish all the guidelines and needs on which the design process can be based. It is a time of a·nalysis of all aspects of the problem and a distillation of the problem's complexity into a few clear problem statements. One popular programming method uses a five-step process in relationship to four major considerations. It is described in Problem Seeking by William Pefia (AlA Press, 1987). The process involves establishing goals, collecting and analyzing facts. uncovering and testing concepts, determining needs, and stating the problem. All of these steps include the considerations of form, function, economy, and time.
A. Establishing Goals Goals indicate what the client wants to achieve and why. They are important to identify because they establish the direction of programmatic concepts that ultimately suggest the physical means of achieving the goals. It is not enough to simply list the types of spaces and required square footages the client needs; the client is trying to reach some objective with those spaces and square footages. For example, a goal for a school administration might be to increase the daily informal interaction between students and teachers.
B. Collecting Facts Facts describe the ex,isting conditions and requirements of the problem. Facts include such things as the number of people to be• accommodated, the site conditions, space adjacency needs, user characteristics, equipment to be housed, expected growth rate, money available for construction, building code requirements, and climate facts. There is always a large number of facts; part of the programmer's task is not only to collect facts but to organize them as well so they are usefuL C. Uncovering Concepts The programming process should develop abstract ideas that are functional solutions to the client's problems without defining the physical means that should be used to achieve them. These are programmatic concepts and discussed earlier in this chapter. They are the basis for later design concepts. To use the previous example described under goals, a programmatic concept concerning increasing the daily interaction between students and teachers might be to provide common spaces for mixed flow in circulation patterns. One possible design concept in response to this could be to provide a central court through which all circulation paths pass.
403
D. Determining Needs This step of the programming process balances the desires of the client against the available budget or establishes a budget based on the defined goals and needs. It is during this step that wants have to be separated from needs. Most clients want more than they can afford, so clear statements of true needs at this early stage of the process can help avoid problems later. At this stage, one or more of the four elements of cost (quantity, quality, budget, and time) may have to be adjusted to balance needs against available resources. E. Stating the Problem The previous four steps are a prelude to succinctly stating the essence of the problem in just a few statements. The problem statements are the bridge between programming and the d~sign process. They are statements the client and programmer agree describe the most important aspects of the problem and serve as the basis for design and as design criteria by which the solution can be evaluated. There should be a minimum of four problem statements, one for each of the major considerations of form, function, economy, ~nd time. F. Four Major Considerations During Programming
The four major considerations of any design problem are form, function, economy, and time. Form relates·to the site, the physical and psychologicai environment of the building, and the quality of construction. Function relates to the people and activities of the space or building and their relationships. Economy concerns money: the initial cost of the facility, operating costs, and life cycle costs. Finally, time describes the ideas of past, present, and future as they affect the other three considerations. For example. the required schedule for construction is often a time consideration, as is the need for expansibility in the future. 7. SAMPLE QUESTIONS 1. The statement "develop a multilevel system of pedestrian circulation" is an example of: A. a need
C. a goal
B. a programmatic concept
D. a design concept
2. The developer of a retail shopping complex has estimated through an economic analysis that he can afford to build up to 8,500 square meter of gross building area. If a central, enclosed pedestrian mall is planned to take up about 6 percent of the area and the efficiency ratio is estim·ated to be 75 percent, about how much net rentable area wili be available? A. 6,000 &quare meter
C. 67,600 square meter
B. 6,370 square meter
D. 10,650 square meter
3. A published cost index indicates construction in city A to be 1440 and construction in city B to be 1517. If the same index 404
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
A
B
C
D
0000
suggests that inflation will increase by 5 percent by the midpoint of construction and the project is now budgeted to cost P1 ,500,000 in city A, what should be budgeted for city B?
.A.
P1 ,495,000.00
C. P1 ,659,000.00
B. P1 ,650,000.00
D. P1,715,000.00
4. Contractor's overhead and profit typically amount to what percentage of construction cost?
A 5% to 20%
C. 15% to 30%
B. 10% to 20%
D. 15% to 40%
A
B
C
D
0000
Questions 5 through 7 are based on the following programming situation. A small medical clinic is being planned for a suburban location on an open, level site. It is to include services of general practice, obstetrics/famiiy planning, test1ng and laboratories, and dental offices, along with medical offices and an administration area comprising about 7,000 net square meter of space. Access to the building is primarily by automobile. The group developing .the project want the facility to be a comfortable, friendly place that minimizes the anxiety of a visit to the doctor and that makes it as easy as possible to get around. They expect the venture to be successful and each department to grow as the catchment area grows. 5. In order to meet the goals of the client, which of the following design responses would not be appropriate? A. Base the size of waiting rooms on a behavior setting where establishing territory should be encouraged.
A
B C
D
0000
B. Group waiting areas and the reception area together to encourage social interaction. C. Develop a different color scherme for each of the separate services. D. Arrange individual chair seating against walls and other objects so it faces room entries 6. Which of the following organizational concepts would probably be most appropriate for this facility? A. grid
C. central
B. axial
D. radial
7. Which of the following aspects of flexibility related to expected growth of the facility is most important in developing the structural framing concept? A. convertibility
C. expansibility
B. versatility
D. all of the above
405
A B C D
0000 A
B
C
D
0000
8. A clienl discovers shortly· after hiring the architect for prograrnrt*lg and design services that they must move out of their existing faclily sooner than expected. If the new schedule requ.-es that construction and move-in be completed in 18 rilonlhs instead of the original 21 months, what recommendation from the architect is the most feasible?
A
B
C
D
0000
A. Consider fast-track construction.
B. Use CPU scheduling and use a negotiated contract rather than bidding.
C. Assign more staff to programming and design and work overtime to get construction started earlier. D. Suggest that the client streamline its decision-making process and hire a construction manager.
9. Whictt element of project cost does the architect typically have' least control over?
A. the budget for escalation B. percentage of site work relative to building costs
A
B
C
D
0000
C. professional fees and consultant services D. financing costs
10. A school district is planning a new elementary school to replace an outdated·facility. A preliminary budget made during programming has shown that" the available funds set ~side for the school have been exceeded by 8 percent. What should the architect do? I. Suggest that additional funds from other school building projects be used.
II. Review the design from a value engineering standpoint for approval by the client to see if costs can be reduced without sacrificing quality. Ill. Discuss with the client the possibility of reducing the required area.
IV. Modify the statement of need concerning the desired level of finish and construction quality on non-critical portions of the facility after consultation with the client. V. Propose that building be postponed for a school term until more money can be allocated. A. V then IV
C. II then Ill
B. Ill then IV
D. IV then I
406
A
B
C
D
0000
AREA ''C'' PART II ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
AREA "C"
PART II
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN portion of the Board examination is the most difficult parts of the entire examination. The candidate must synthesize a large amount of information into a comprehensive design solution ~nd do it under severe time contraints say, in 10 hours, in what becomes, at best, an arduous test of endurance. Many candidates fail, not because they cannot solve the problem but because they let it get the best of them. They begin to make the wrong decisions and choices at the wrong tim[. spend too much time on one part of the problem. Then panic and run short on time, and end up either not solving the problem or forgetting to include critical elements. The key elements of success are to ·budget your time, stick with your scheduled procedure of solution. The exa~ination demands that the building aspects: Function, life/safety code compliance, structure, mechanical systems, lighting, and so forth. Although it does ask that the building be appropriate for human occupancy in terms of scale, proportion, relationship to its surroundings, use of materials, and other design parameters, it does not demand an award winner. Your EMPHASIS, therefore, should be on solving the stated problem in ten (10) or twelve (12) hours, as required, COMPLETELY (plans, all floors, sections, elevators, IQt and site plan, and an impressive perspective) with reasonable design decisions. I
1. HOW TO SOLVE THE 10 OR 12-HOUR DESIGN PROBLI;M
A. Strategies for Time Management (8:00- 8:15) First task should be to quickly read the problem statement and set up your own timetable. Do NOT read the program in detail the first time through; simply get a feeling for the problem, where major difficulties might be, and how much time you should· allow for the final drafting of the solution. As a startmg point, the following TIMETABLE might prove useful. Step 1:
Make a quick overview of the ..... , ........ 15 minutes (8:00- 8:15) problem statement and a · determination of your own timetable
Step 2:
Read the examination information..... booklet and translate the written data into a programming base sheet
408
45 minutes (8:15- 9·00)
Step 3:
Translate the programmed spaces ........ 30 minutes (9:00- 9:30) into graphic or and calculate the maximum allowable gross area
Step 4:
Check areas and functions .................... 15 minutes (9:30- 9:45) for each floor
Step 5:
Begin adjacency/ ................................. 90 minutes (9:45- 11 :15) circulation diagrams
Step 6:
Study the structural system ............... 30 minutes ( 11 :15 - 11 :45)
Step 7:
Study the mechanical/ ....................... 15 minutes (11 :45- 12:00) plumbing systems
Step 8:
Design the development including .... 120 rninutes (12:00- 2:00) plan, section and elevations
LUNCH BREAK .................................................... 30 minutes (2:00- 2:30) Step 9:
Make the FINAL drawings ..................... 300 minutes (5 hours) a. perspective first 3 hrs. b final drawings 2 hrs. ...................
Step 10: Make a final check................ TOTAL TIME:........................................ .... .... Note:
. . (2 30 -'7:30) .. 30 minutes (7 30-8:00) . 12 hours
If the total time required is only ten (1 0) hours. then readjust the allotted minutes.
Tip #1: a) If the project is a multi-storey building, make your final footprint or the first floor plan, then just trace it for the upper floors. b) to make the elevations or sections, use your triangle and just slide it and make vertical lines through the walls, windows so as to save time instead of using again your scale. c) Remember you should proceed from "within" to "without" meaning from the circulation or plan to the exterior looks. d) Then proceed from "General" to "Particular" meaning, when making a perspective, first form the general outline before you even make any detail. e) If the perspective comes out alright, from there, you can now translate it to the elevations, the windows, doors. balconies, porte-cochere, entrance, roofing shape, and others. f)
You may want to put in as a good design some details you have researched previously to enhance your design.
409
B. Read Information Booklet and Create a Programming Base Sheet
(8:15- 9:00) This is a process of reading and SIMULTANEOUSLY translating the written word into graphic form as much as possible. To do this, put a piece of paper over the first level site plan and schematically mark requirements and facts as given by the program as you read. These are conditions that might affect the overall conceptual siting of the building and the plan of the major elements. This will become the "programming base sheet." Some of the conditions that should be noted include: • views • probable (or required) entrance locations • any required pedestrian access to adjacent sites or buildings • service access • any special circulation requirements: for example, separation of public and private corridors or division of areas for security purposes. • any unusual or apparently important topographic or landscape conditions. • onentation requtred for energy conservation reasons • location of utiliti€\s. drainage. or any other servtce that rnay d1Ua1e tne location ot building elements Tip #2
The candidate must know how to plot the shape of the lot given from the title or from the technical descnptiops g1ven as to the start from pt. 1 to pt. 2 say (N-54 o 48'08'"E) 1~ 80 M. thence (N650-08'42"W) 10.38M and so on.
As you read the program you should also make quick bubble diagrams of critical adjacency relationships. Place these on the same sheet of tracing paper as your pfan diagram of other program requirements. but off to the side so they do not interfere with your later schematic planning. Later, you can work on smaller-scale relationships such as the adjacency of two office within a \larger office suite or the position of a steam room near a shower room.
410
C. DEVELOP GRAPHIC NOTES OF PROGRAMMED SPACES
(9:00- 9:30) In orderto give yourself a strong, graphic mental image of numbers, translate the individual programmed spaces into graphic squares or rectangles at the same scale the final drawings roost be. Take graph paper (instead of scale) to make this job easier. Use consistent dimensional increments such as 1.50 M. This will save your time and help you see spatial relationships between functional groupings more easily. (Example: is squares or rectangles, assume lounge dining - 200 sq. M, service are 50 sq. M, classrooms 100 sq. M, toilet M & W 50 sq. M and so on.) Next, group individual spaces as required and indicated by the program into their most probable, logical shape. For example, several offices that make up an administrative suite might be grouped into a rectangle two offices deep by whatever length is required too yield the programmed area {where the plan is scheme comes in). If you are grouping several small spaces, be sure to add some extra area (15 to 20 percent) for circulation so that when you begin detailed planning of the functional group, you do not have to use programmed space from net assignable areas to make up for corridors.
D. CHECK AREAS (9:30 - 9:45)
Add up net assignable square meter footage if included in the program sheet. Divide by an efficiency factor to get gross square meter allowed. Use this to check yourself once you get your first layout. If no efficiency factor is given in the program, use 25% (0.25). * note - sometimes the prograr'n states that the budget is say, P20 million only. You have to know the current price or cost per square meter during the year say at P16,000.00 per sq. M so you have at least 1.250 sq. M to work on (as of year 2001).
Next, compare square meter required for each floor. If they are divergent,
you know you have to have some setbacks or make other provisions. Be sure to consider any two-storey spaces, atrium, mezzanines, and so forth that may balance or unbalance the total square meter requirements on each floor. The program will probably state what functions are to be located on each floor. If not, study the adjacency requirements, entrances, and other external access requirements and balance the programmed square meters to approximately even out each floor area.
411
E. DEVELOP ADJACENCY DIAGRAMS (9:45- 11 :15) Adjacency diagrams should include the entire buildinq, not just the individual bubble diagrams you sketched as visual as you read through the program. Instead of using amorphous, unsealed diagrams, use the square or rectangular blocks of space you have developed as your bubbles. Begin adjacency diagrams using the larger, functional groupings developed earlier. Sketch the adjacency diagrams on a separate sheet of tracing paper, over the programming base sheet diagram you developed while you were reading the program. Both of these sheets of tracing paper should be placed over the exam pad provided to you. The diagram serves as a constant reminder of critical program requirements while you do your sketching. As you study and layout possible adjacencies. make an overall CIRCULATION SCHEME one of your primary concerns, an integral part of y6ur early planning, because it has so much learning on critical portions of the test. The circulation scheme: • gives overall organization to the building, the spaces and the required agencies • determines existing and handicapped access • provides a. logical place to separate long-span spaces from smaller spaces and can make you structural solution easier One of the common mistakes candidates make is to work on adjacencies and locations of spaces and then string them together with a resulting maze of corridors, stairways and lobbies. If your corridor has more than one change in direction, you may need to replan. Two common circulation patterns will work with the type and scale of problem given in the exam. The linear, (one straight line) double loaded corridor with rooms on its left and right and the AXIAL, (two corridors meeting at the center like a cross) with rooms on all the corridors side. The program will directly state or snongly imply many conditions for conceptual layout of the plans. These should be on your programming base · sheet. ~or example, a requirement for service from an alley will immediately locate the service entrance, loading dock, and spaces that need easy service; desired views will suggest' the location of prime offices, lounges, eating areas, and other rooms (handicapped parking should be near the entrances, and so forth). After you have two or three schematic alternatives, take a QUICK BREAK and then review them with your own mini-critique. Check your solutions against the program requirements, possible problems with or opportunities for structural and mechani~af layout, efficiency, and so forth. At this point you should be able ~o ~elect an alternative that provides a good direction for more detailed development. You may find that you want to combine the · best features of t~o or more approaches.
412
F. STUDY STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS (11 :15- 11 :45) At some point in the early stages of conceptual design, you should begin to consider a structural system. Trying to apply structure late in the test, after you have locked yourself into a plan, will only cause problems and t;>e obvious to the examiners. In the best case it will be and look awkward; in the worst case, it will result in columns in the middle of spaces. unreasonable spans. and grading marks against you. Keep your structure si111>le. The graders will not be looking for innovative structural concepts, just for your understanding of how to integrate structure into your building. Unless the program states differently, use a post-and-beam system in steel with exterior bearing watts. If the steel needs to be fire proofs, that is easy to show on the section drawing. As you layout the programmed spaces, you should begin to see patterns of dimensions that can have implications for a structural bay or rigid size while still accommodating different-sized rooms. You will probably have to adjust your preliminary room layout somewhat to work with a structural bay size that makes sense. Once again, remain mentally flexible. A structural bay size does not have to be uniform throughout- just reasonable and arranged so you do not have any impossible spans or columns in the middle rooms I
_There are may ways to logically organize a combination of small spans and large spans so that the solution works structurally, functionally, and aesthetically. Large spaces with long-span structure and higher ceiling heights may be sized to work within two smaller bay sizes or be separated from the small-span structural system with circulation system or in a separate building wiring. Before the test you may want to decide on two or three ppssible structural grids, incltJding needed dept~s of structural members and thickness of bearing walls. Once you read the problem statements, you may be able to select one of these grids and draw it right away as a framework for any subsequent planning.
G. STUDY MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS (11 :45- 12:00) After you consider possible structural systems and grid sizes with your preliminary block adjacency diagrams, quickly review how the mechanical system will layout. This simply means locating the mechanical room and horizontal and vertical spaces for ductwork\Depending on the system stated in the program or selected by you, there may be additional constraints such as outside air or social exhaust needs. If no mechanical system is specifically stated in the progr~m. a variable air volume system usually works.
413
In most cases. providing space for ductwork is not a great problem because of the sizes is not a great problem because of the size of the building in the test problem. Suspended ceilings usually provide enough flexibility for mechanical services as long as you allow enough room bek>w the bottom of the struclure and show trims in the sections drawing.
At this~. also quickly review provisions for plumbing. At least be placing toilet rooms back to back, stacking them on each floor, and k>cating other plunDng services nearby. AlsO check that other special plumbing conditions - such as unreasonably long supply or drainage lines that may have to pass through rooms above - do not present obvious problems.
H. JJEGIN DETAILED DESIGN (12:00- 2:00)
Once you have selected a workable schematic design from your alternatives and know you have a struetural grid that works, you can begin more DETAILED DESIGN. Before proceeding, be sure that you have satisfied program requirements that affect the overall siting and planning of the building. You should be sure all major life/safety considerations are satisfied. These include such things as the number of exits. avoiding dead-end conidors, andrequired distances to exits often, the same requirements is stated in the program more than once: first in the general project statements and again in the detailed program requirements. It is wise to give these highest priority. The next priority should go to requirements specifically stated in the program at least once. Finally, here are priorities that may simply be ifl1>1ied by the program or considered good design practice. For example, if you had to decide between an arrangements to improve energy efficiency or one to satiSfy your concern for appearance, you would be wise to choose energy efficiency. At this point, take a short break so you can come back to be test refreshed and able to concentrate on more detailed design. As you begin detailed development of your schematic plan you will have a very good idea of major elements, organization of the building, siting, major circulation paths, exiting, structure, and provisions tor the mechanical system. It should be fairly easy to make minor adjustments to fine tune adjacencies. modify dimensions of spaces to fit within the structural grid, layout toilet rooms. property orient exits and stairways, located doorways, and satisfy the more detailed program requirements. At this time, you should also be k>oking at the shapes and proportion of individual rooms to make sure they make sense and allow tor reasonable furniture arrangements and circulation within the room. ( Exa111>le one sketch may show a square 40 sq. M room that can accommodate only one secretary and a ~I space for waiting area, while the same 40 sq. M but rectangular in shape may accommodate two secretaries and a bigger space for waiting area.)
414
Before you proceed too far into detailed development of the FL()(lR PLAN begin a BUILDING SECTION. You may not know at this time exactly what the best location for the section cut wiH be, but make you best estimate. Beginning a section drawing at this time will help get out of the twodimensional floor plan mentality and force your attention on the THIRD DIMENSION. You should also do this with elevations. You may discover things by working on the elevations and section that wil influence how you develop your floor plans. It is better to find this out early than to wait. Until the last minute to complete the elevations when it. is too late to make corrections.
I.. CHECK. COMPLETE FINAL DRAWINGS (2:00- 2:30) Once you have finished development of the floor plans and worked on the elevations and sections enough to know everything works.
"TAKE A LUNCH BREAK AND REST" - 30 minutes When you come back, go through a final checklist following the same criteria the juror use: Check the program requirements, look at design logic, verify that building codes and exiting have been satisfied. and review technical issues of life/safety, structure, mechanical systems, energy conservation, and use of materials. Also check for conflicts such as ducts going through rooms, exit door 1.20 M above grades level, and the like. If everything is satisfactory, you are ready to begin your FINAL DRAWINGS. You should have decided on a graphic technique before coming to the test and solved the majority of problems during your design development, so this part should go smoothly. Any changes you make at this point will be minor, such as moving a door way slightly or switching two adjacent spaces of similar size.
Try to leave yourseH 30 minutes to one hour of time at the end for a FINAL CHECK. Of course, it will be too late at this time to make any major revisions, but you can check for minor omissions and incomplete graphics. If you find you have left out any indication of a required sprinkler system. for example, you can at least show a portion of it on the section and make a note on the drawing. This extra time at the end of the test also allows for making additional explanatory notes to clarify your design.
415
CHECKLIST FOR YOUR DESIGN SOLUTION (Part of lunch break)
One of your primary checklist should be the problem statement itself. When you read through the program and problem statement. underline individual words, phrases. or sentences that you can identify as having a single design consequence. Later, as you work through your solution; use these underlined items as checklist and make sure you have responded to every one. Omission any one will count against you, and omission of particularly important requirements will be enough to fail you.
of
1. PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS Q solution contains all the required spaces -~ required spaces contain the correct amount of square meters; solution
contains no less than the program requirements but may contain slightly more
0 efficiency ratio (net-to-gross) not exceeded Q required adjacencies satisfied
':l exterior adjacencies satisfied: service, pedestrian access, entries. and so forth Q correct shapes and proportions of spaces for the intended function; rea-
sonable allowances made for furniture Q furniture shown if required by problem statement
Q all desirable views considered
0 sight lines into toilet rooms considered 0 relationship to adjacent buildings appropriate in terms of scale. materials and access
u
fife/safety items addressed
2. DESIGN LOGIC 0 circulation efficient. direct. and properly sized
:..J no tight circulation spaces; consideration of handicapped access ..J direct parking - to building access :...J direct access for handicapped from parking to entrance
CJ elevator easily accessible to all users and opens in correct direction on all floors
416
0 building entrance or exit avoided through stair vestibules
o
building zoned as required by program
o o o
incompatible traffic types separated awkward crossing paths avoided service entrances and access separate from incompatible functions and leading directly to areas they serve
0 building security shown and noted as required by program 0 topography utilized appropriately 0 all major spaces with exterior exposure if appropriate
3. CODE COMPUANCE 0 two exits from each floor remotely located from each other; monumental stairs may not count as required exit 0 stairs located within minimum and maximum distances from each other 0 second-level egress exiting directly to outside as required by program statement
u
all required exit doors swinging in the direction of travel and not decreasing required corridor width when open
0 widths of exit appropriate; minimum of 1.10 Moras required by program
statement
u at least' two exits from assf}mbly spaces remotely located from each other 0 maximum travel distances from doors to exit: 15 meters (20 meters in sprinklered buildings) or as indicated in the program
,:.J maximum 28 em. riser height; 28.50 em. minimum tread width D fire separation walls and ceiling/floor assembly indicated on plan and section 0 building accessible by the physically disabled, entrance ramp, corridor widths, vestibule sizes, toilet rooms, and all parts of the building 0 ramps checked for maximum allowable slope 1:12 0 dead-enEt corridors avoided or limited to 6.00 M 0 guard rails and· handrails shown and dimensioned if required
417
4. TECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS 0 framing clearly shown and noted: beams, bearing walls. columns, floor and roof deck 0 footings and roundations shown under all walls, columns. and elevator shafts both in section and elevations
i.J footings stepped if sloping site
o
footings at correct bearing
:.J slab on grade construction shown and noted i.J bearing walls thick enough for loads and unsupported height
w all structural elements accurately drawn to scale :.J mechanical room and ductwork routing shown, heating may need to be separate from air conditioning i.:J energy conservation measures shown and noted as appropriate building orientation, building form, insulation, shading. thermal mass. landscaping, and glazing types
o
glass type noted in response to solar control and other needs
:J appropriate solar control on south and west ;.:.. natural lighting utilized
.J artificial lighting indicated and described ..1 toilet rooms stacked and other plumbing grouped as appropriate; toilet
room ventilation noted
'..! sprinklers indicated if required by program .J acoustical control techniques indicated and noted if required by programmed space
.:J all major materials indicated and noted ..1 materials use consistent. cost effective, appropriate for function. and
compatible with adjacent buildings as required by program ..1 roof slope and drains indicated on section
:.J fenestrations thought out in terms of view, energy conservation, exterior design and compatibility with adjacent buildings ..1 foundation and hydraulic shaft indicated under elevator
_. exterior spot elevations checked on site plan, especially near building, drainage slopes. handicapped ramps. and other areas :... natural features such as trees, rock outcropping, and water used to enhance design 418
5. GENERAL TIPS
a
Do not read anything into the program requirements.
0 Use only rectangular building shapes and structural system. Q Make exterior design compatible with the surrounding buildings and
neighborhood. 0 Make building spaces and exterior compatible with the human scale. 0 Be sure that composition, proportion, texture, materials, and form are appropriate to the building type and surrounding area 0 Make elevations on first-floor site plan and second-floor plan, exterior elevations, and section correspond to each other
J. GRAPHIC PRESENTATION (2:30- 7:30) A perfect solution may fail if the required drawings are NOT complete. You may have a finished perspective but no elevations and sections, or you may have a complete plan and elevations but incomplete, unsatisfactory perspective with no sections. You have then to complete a 1) combination site plan and first-floor plan, second-floor plan, 2) two elevations, and 3) a building section, and 4) a Rresentable perspective compatible with the elevations. Your drawings must be easy to read. Since the required number of drawings with the stated in the problem, they should all be rendered to approximately the same level of detail. Do npt spend all your time on three and leave yourself only 30 minutes for the last one. You will not finish and not pass. It is better to do good line drawings of all the required sketches along with the necessary notes sb you are sure the problem is solved, and then go back and darken walls and add material indications, shadows, entourage, and other graphic elements that make your drawings read better. If you run short of time, at least you will have the absolute minimum required submission. Review the following suggestions for the three types of drawings required.
A. FLOOR PLANS Use double lines for walls and single lines for windows, and poche the walls in with solid black. (This is done near the end of the exam period when you know changes are not going to be made.) • Show door swings with a one-quarter circle arc and _indicate the door itself with a single line.
419
• Draw overhangs with dashed lines. • Indicate all built-in items as well as plumbing fixtures. It is especially important to show the detailed layout of the toilet rooms. • Show stairways with individual steps drawn in and an arroW indicating direction up or down. • Draw all required furniture and furniture necessary to explain your design or show a workable plan, using a single line. • Label all rooms and spaces with the names exactly as given in the program. • Indicate the location of your section cut with a line through the building and an arrow pointing in the direction of the cut. • Indicate drainage away from the building with arrows and a note. • Use a simple paving· pattern to indicate circulation both inside and outside the building. Use quick, simple indications for tress, shrubs, and groundcover. • When drawing the second-floor plan and open volumes of high spaces below, label them "open to below". B. ELEVATIONS Show a design that incorporates aesthetic appeal, simple use of materials, and massing of forms that indicate you know how to integrate the internal functions of a building with the structure, fenestration pattern, and human scale. Keep the elevations simple; try not to use more than two exterior materials in addition to glazing. Use simple material indications that are easy an,d quick to draw. Brick can be shown with closely spaced horizontal lines, stucco, stone, and precast concrete with stipple marks. Draw a heavy profile line around the perimeter of the elevation, and use varying line weights to indicate those portions of the elevation that are closest to the viewer- heaviest lines close and thinner lines farther away. The base line should be the heaviest and must correspond to the contour lines on the first-floor plan. Show the foundations and floor and ceiling levets with dashed lines. Use a few scale figures and indicate landscaping if appropriate and if it corresponds to your site plan. However, the indications and other landscaping must not obscure the other elements of your design. Use shade shadowing if time allows this a good way to provide contrast to the elevations and to indicate overhangs and the form of the building more distinctly.
420
I 'I
C. SECTION • Take the section cut through your buUding where most three-dimensional information will be shown. This includes two-storey spaces, changes in topography or levels of the building, areas for mechanical equipment, structure, and typical wall sections. • PoeM the cut sections of walis and foundations with solid black. • Indicate ceiling heights and finish elevations of both first and second floors. • Show the existing grade with a dashed line and the new grade at perimeter walls. • Include a few scale figures. • Clearly note the mechanical system, structural system, fire rating of walls, roof system and roof drainage, ceiling finish, representative wall finishes, and footing depth. D. DRAFTING TECHNIQUES AND FINAL CHECKS (7:30- 8:00)
Before you take the test you should decide on the type of drafting techniques you will use. You can complete the sketches with either freehand or hard-line methods; use the one you feel most comfortable with and the one that is fastest for you. Use simple block lettering on all the drawings and do not overdraft. Provide just enough to clearly present all the required information. In the half hour so you should leave at the end of the test for final checking make sure you have included everything specifically required by the problem statement. If you discover something is missing for your drawings and you do not have time to make changes, at least a note on the drawing to show the examiners you did not forget it.
AREA ''C'' PART Ill
SITE PLANNING
AREA "C"
PART Ill
A. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO TOPOGRAPHY
A thorough knowledge of topography, its representation with contour lines, and how contours are modified to suit the program requirements i5 mandatory for a successful solution of the site design problem. As you work through the problem, keep the following points in mind. o
o
Although it is unlikely that you will have to locate a building on a site in this portion of the exam, remember that it is better to ORIENT buildings with their length parallel to the contour lines. This makes modifying the contours easier and makes excavating and foundation work less expensive than an orientation perpendicular to the contour lines. Driveways and roads are best run parallel to if little or no change in elevation is required. If a grade change is necessary, run the road at a slight angle to the existing contours and modify the road contour to provide for drainage.
Roads should be laid out perpendicular to contour lines only if the resulting grade does not exceed recommended limits - usually 8 percent but a more gentle slope is preferred. Calculate the slope after grade have been changed to verify that you are within recommended limits. o
Modify contours to BALANCE cut and fill. During the site exam you do not have to do detailed calculations, but it should appear that you are accomplishing this. One simple method is to draw as many new contour lines on the "FILL" side of existing contour lines as you do on the "CUT" side at approximately the same distance from the existing lines.
----- ---
78
'' CONTOUR MODIFICATIONS FOR ROADS
423
' '
-------------..........
-------------
----------
o----2 .---
4 -
area of cut (b) fill exceeds cut
(a) cut and fill balanced
BALANCE CUT AND FILL
o
o
Minimize the amount of conrour changes, since earth moving costs money and can create other problems such as steep grades; increased excavation costs. and a need for retaining walls. Make sure you have positive drainage away from buildings on all sides. This can be particularly troublesome when the building is located parallel to the contours and therefore perpendicular to the natural drainage pattern.
There should be a minimum of a 2 percent slope in landscaped areas away from the building, although 4 percent is preferred. These slopes correspond to 6.3 mm to 31 em. (1/4inch per foot) and .0126 M to 0.31 M (1/2" per foot) respectively. A comparison of percent slopes, slopes in inches per foot (mm to em) and the visual qualities of various slopes is given in the table below.
percent slope
I
inches/foot
0.5%
about
1 /
1.0%
about
1 /
1.5%
about 31, 6
2.0%
about
2.5%
about 51, 6
3.0%
about
1 /
3
/
mm/cm
appearance o
16
o
8
o
o
4
o
o
8
424
appears flat; use only for smoothest type of pavement slope hardly noticeable good minimum for rough paving noticeable in relation to level construction quite noticeable in relation to level construction very noticeable in relation to level construction
----------}-i--*--
--------10
-~------------------------8
------- ---------- -------6
------- ---------- -------4 ------- ---------- -------2
--------------------------0 (a) drainage directly into building
(b) drainage diverted around building
DRAINAGE AROUND BUILDINGS • Drain approach walks away from buildings as well as landscaped areas. A minimum of 1 percent (1/8) inch per foot) (10 mm per meter) is required. • Try to avoid elaborate drainage patterns or systems of drainage ditches and channels. In most cases, the drainage for the site design problems can be accomplished directly. • If roads or paths must traverse ditches or drainage swales, make sure you maintain drainage with culverts and call them out on the plan. • Check parking areas for proper drainage. Ideally, parking lot slopes should be between 1 1/ 2 percent and 5 percent. • Avoid very steep slopes that might be susceptible to erosion or make landscaping difficult. A 1 to 3 slope (0.10 M to 0.30 M) (4 inches per 12 inches) is considered the maximum for a mowed grass slope while a 1 to 2 slope (6 inches per foot or 12 inches) (0.15 M to o.30 M) is considered the maximum for unmowed landscape slopes. Steeper slopes require the use of retaining' walls.
B. PLANNING FOR CIRCULATION • Separate pedestrian circulation from vehicular circulation. There should be walks next to parking lots that provide a path to the building. • Provide ramps accessible by the physically disabled for all changes in elevation. Changes in elevation that cannot be made with a 1 in 20 sloped sidewalk are most efficiently accomplished with a ramp that returns on itself. • Be aware of features adjacent to the site that generate pedestrian movement, such as sidewalks, entrances to nearby buildings, and public transportation stops. When the problem mentions these, it is important to provide for them. • Locate vehicular entries to the site away from intersections. Cars waiting for a stop sign or stop light interfere with cars trying to pull into the site. In most cases, access from a one-way street is preferable to access from a two-way street. 425
• Driveways into sites facing each other with a street in between should line up exactly or be separated by at least 6.00 M. • If a driveway and a pedestrian path both need to enter a site from a street, they should either be side by side or separated by at least 18.00 M. 0.9 M clear, minimum
H
landing
handrails both sides
return handrail
EFFICIENT HANDICAPPED RAMP LAYOUT o
o
o
Both vehicular and pedestrian circulation should be direct, convenients and easy to understand. Usually the shortest distance between two points is a good rule of thumb to follow. Locate the service drive and loading area close to the area of the building that need them. Conceal service areas from view as much as possible with vegetation or structures. If require(:!, verify that there, is emergency access to the building. This may include provisions for fire trucks and ambulances.
C. PARKING REQUIREMENTS o
If a specific number of parking spaces is called for, make sure you provide at least that number. Unless stated otherwise, make each stall 2. 70 M wide by 5.70 M long. Spaces for backing out of a 90 degree parking stall should be at least 7.20 M wide.
426
• There should be at least one parking space for the physically disabled, more if the program specifically calls for it. Design guidelines for parking spaces are shown here. pedestrian
auto
GO' minimum (18 Meters) ·
(a) adjacent
(b) separated
PREFERRED LOCATIONS OF AUTOMOBILE AND PEDESTRIAN ENTRIES TO STREETS
Arrange the parking spaces and access sidewalks so that people do not have to go behind cars or across the parking drive. Handicapped parking should be as close to. the entry as possible, but never more than 37.50 M away. • Parking layout is more efficient if parking stalls are grouped rather than spread out. Ninety-degree parking is the most efficient angle. If the site design problem requires a detailed plan for more than about a dozen cars, try to use a double-loaded 90 degree parking scheme.
D. Other Design
~onsiderations
• Entries to buildings and major outdoor areas are best located on the south side of buildings where they will receive sunlight. • Make every attempt to save existing trees and major vegetation. If it is not possible to keep every tree, at least protect the larger ones. Other major site features, such as rock formations and creeks, should not be altered but used to a design and advantage. • Respect desirable views and incorporate them into the site planning. If views are important, the program usually mentions such a requirement specifically. • Make sure that no structure or site development occurs outside the limits of zoning setback lines or within easements.
427
E. DESIGN PROCEDURE AND SCHEDULING Like the building design section of the exan•. the graphic site design section requires that you synthesize a great deal of information and complete a satisfactory drawing in a very short time. You may find the following suggested procedure a useful way to proceed. Step 1 : Read .the problem thoroughly, twice
Step 1:
Read the problem thoroughly, twice. Satisfy every statement or requirement, especially those related to topography, drainage, safety, circulation, parking, accessibility for the physically disabled, and relationships with surrounding physical features. Lay a sheet of tracing paper over the site plan included with the test package and as you read, mark the requirements in some graphic format. You should try as much as possible to quickly translate the written word into a graphic form that will make sense to you as you design. These site influences m·ay include such things as adjacent buildings, pedestrian paths, wind directions, utility locations, traffic volume and direction, views, and similar constraints and design considerations. At this point, some design criteria may simply be a range of locations, such as the most probable areas for vehicle entry onto the site.
Step 2:
Be careful not to read mor~ into the problem than is there. The test writers are usually very specific about what they want; there is no need to add to the problem requirement and to your work. If a requirement is stated and a particular type of solution is strongly suggested, follow the lead.
Step 3:
Mark the corners of the site wih elevation points. This gives you a quick reference point for checking how your new grading matches up with adjacent property. You may want to mark the midpoints along property lines as well. If the problem requires the use of storm sewers, find the lowest place where the existing storm sewer can be tapped and work backward from there to determine the invert of any required drain inlets. Unless stated otherwise, use a minimum storm sewer slope of 0.5 percent (1.588 mm per 30 em.) (1/16 inch per foot)
Step 4: Draw schematic sections through ~he significant slopes. It is usually only necessary to do, this in one direction perpendicular to the slope. Draw a section in both directions if the existing contours are complicated. Draw these sections on the same sheet as your markings of site constraints. They can be placed at the tops or off to one side as a graphic reminder of the existing slope conditions. Draw the section at the same scale as the site plan. Step 5:
Using another sheet of tracing paper over the one you have marked with site constraints, begin laying out roads, walks, parking lots, plazas, or whatever major site features the problem requires.
428
You will find that the site constraints you can read through the tracing paper will resolve many planning questior.s for you. Others may not be so obvious and will require some study.
Step 6: When you have a scheme that works for the major site features. overlay another sheet of tracing paper begin to study the contour modifications that are needed. S(ep 7: Work back and forth between the contour sheet and the plan of the site features. If the problem seems to be based more on topography than road and walk design; begin with that sheet. Otherwise, start with the layout of site features. If you have difficulty solving a particular problem with the contours, you may find that you need to change the location or orientation of a plan feature. Or, the required placement of a stairway, sidewalk, or other feature may imply a change in grading. Step 8: When you have solved both major components of the site plan. overlay another sheet of tracing paper and transfer both layout of site features and the new grading plan onto one sheet. As you do this, add other required features, such as landscaping, site furniture, lighting and so forth. Step 9:
Locate spot elevations at building corners, top and bottom landings of stairs and ramps, and other critical locations. Double check that all ramps work with the proper slope and that contour lines are resolved. It abrupt changes in elevation are required, check to see that you have provided a retaining wall or culverts if natural drainage patterns are covered with roads. Double check all requirements as stated in the program.
Step 10: Place your final tracing paper sketch under the paper given to you as part of the test package and trace your solution. Incorporate suitable graphic techniques to clearly communicate your solullOn. As you do this, you can make minor modifications or corrections to problems that you found in the pre11ious step. Make sure every item is labeled so the graders know you have included what was required (allow 45 minutes to do the final drawings) 3. GRAPHIC TECHNIQUES Good graphic techniques help you in two ways First, they help you complete the test on time with the required drawings at the correct level of detail. Second, well-done graphics help communicate your solution to the graders in the short time they have to look at each solution. Part of the trick of finishing on schedule is to budget your time so you have enough left to adequately finish the drawings. However, many candidates fail to finish because they use graphic techniques that take an excessive amount of time for their abilities. This is especially true of the building design portion because there·is so much drawing to do.
429
The goal is to use graphic techniques that are easy to complete yet boldly and clearly show your solution. Before you take the test, you should have a good idea of the tools arid techniques your are going to use. Practice making lines, textures, material indications, paving, trees, entourage, and other graphic elements that will be required to draw your solution. · The graphic site design section of the exam is~ little easier than the building design portion because there is not so much drawing to do, but similar requirements apply. You need to first get the required lines that show your solution down on paper, and then add rendering techniques that improve the appearance and communication of your work. Keep the following guidelines in mind as you work. • You can use either hard-line or free-hand techniques or mix them, whichever is faster and easier for you • Complete all drawings or portions of one drawing to the same level of detail and appearance. To do this, complete a good line drawing with appropriate line weights. Then go back and add textures, material indications, shadows and other markings. Since the site design test requires only one drawing. This is easier to do than with the multiple sketches required in the b' jing design portion. • Use guidelines for lettering • Use different line weights to show hierarchy of drawn elements. The outline of an object should be da.rker and heavier than the lines within the object. Use contrast to show important elements such as walkways. • Show existing contour lines with dashed lines (usually these are already marked on the base sheet handed out with the test) and new contours with solid lines. • Do not waste your time or make the drawing hard to read by overrendering. Show what the problem requires you to show. If you are to provide screening for the delivery area, for example,, there must be an indication of landscaping or some constructed object to accomplish this. • Shades and shadows help provide contrast and interest to the drawing, but do these only if you have sufficient time and adding them does not obscure important information within the shadows. • Use markers that make it easy to lay down a variety of line and texture types. Soft pencils are preferred·because they can be erased, while markers may bleed before grading and cannot be erased. Use ink to provide very dark contrast only at the very end of the test session if you have time and if you are sure nothing will change.
430
(a) parking at large scale
(a) double line
\
)
~~~~~ll~lll~llllll~llllll~lllllli
I
I
\
\
(b) parking at
~I
small~cale
(b) half of pitched roof shaded
PARKING LOTS
--------------(a) single line with center line
(b) double lfne (c) high contrast with shadow CONTOUR LINES AND BUILDINGS
(d) shadow effect
(c) contrast with background ROADWAYS
431
ANSWER KEYS
AREA "A"
PART I
A. EXAMPLE OF BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES
c
1. D
4. H
7.
2. F
5. I
8. G
3. A
6. B
9. E
B. EXAMPLE OF BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES 1. G
3. A
5. C
2. E
4. F
6. B
7. D
C. EXAMPLE OF BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES 1. F
3. G
5. A
2. D
4. B
6. E
7.
c
D. ARCHITECTURAL CHARACTERS OF COUNTRY 1. G
4. H
7. C
2. I
5. A
8. B
3. E
6. D
9. F
E. ARCHITECTURAL CHARACTERS OF COUNTRY
,. c
3. G
5. B
2. F
4. E
6. A
7. D
F. ARCHITECTURAL CHARACJERS OF COUNTRY
c
7. B
1. D
3. G
5.
2. F
4. A
6. E
1. D
3. G
5.
c
7. H
2. E
4. F
6. A
8. B
G. DEFINITIONS
434
r
H. DEFINITIONS 1. H
4. G
7. L
2. J
5. K
8. E
11. D
3. I
c
9. A
12. B
1. L
4. H
7. F
10·. A
2. J
5.
c
8. B
11. E
3. I
6. K
9. D
12. G
1. J
4. K
7. L
10. E
2. G
5. F
8. I
11. A
6. D
9. B
12.
1. F
4. L
7. I
10. G
2. J
5. H
8.
c
11. E
3. K
6. D
9. A
12. B
1. H
5. K
9. p
13. 0
2. F
6.
10. M
14. A
3. J
7. N
11. B
15. L
4. G
8. E
12. D
-16.
1. I
4. H
7. D
10. A
2. J
5. G
8. B
11. F
3. K
6. L
9. E
12.
1. J
4. L
7. D
10. F
2. H
5. I
8. G
11.
9. B
12. E
6.
10. F
I. DEFINITIONS
J. DEFINITIONS
3. H
c
K. DEFINITIONS
L. DEFINITIONS
c
M. DEFINITIONS
c
N. DEFINITIONS
3. K
6. A
435
c
0. DEFINITIONS 13.
c
1. J
5. K
9. N
2. F
10. D
14. L
3. H
6. B 7. p
11. G
15. A
4. I
8. E
12. 0
16. M
5. G
9. D
13. A
P. DEFINITIONS 1. K
a.
2. J
6. H
10. M
14. F
3. I
7. 0
11. E
15.
4. l
8. B
12. p
16. N
1. 0
5. J
9. D
2. H
6. K
10. F
14. B
3. G
7. M
11. A
15.
4. L
8. E
12. p
16. N
1. M
5. G
9. D
2. H
6. K
10. E
14.
3. J
7. L
11. B
15. A
4. 0
8. p
12. F
16. N
1. F
5. B
9. L
2. K
6. H
10. D
13. 0 14. p
3. E
7. J
11. A
15. N
4. G
8. I
12.
c
16. M
9. M
17. B
10. 0
14. F
11. L
15. D
12. N
16. G
c
DEFINITIONS 13. I
c
R. DEFINITIONS 13. I
c
S. DEFINITIONS
T. ARCHITECTS/BUILDING DESIGNED 1. E
5. A
2. K
6. I
3. H 6. p
7.
c
8. J
436
AREA "A"
PART II
A. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF COMPOSITION
c
3. F 4. A
5. G 6. B
1. E
3. H
5. G
7. B
c
4. F
6. A
8. D
3. A 4. E
5. B 6.
1.
2. D
B. CATEGORIES
'
2.
C. CONTRASTS 1. D 2. F
c
D. PROPORTION, SCALE, BALANCE 1. L 2. F
4. G 5. H
7. J 8. A
10. B 11. D
3. I
6. K
9. E
12.
7. L
10. K
E. RHYTHM, UNITY, CHARACTER 4. I 1. D
c
c
2. H
5. A
8. E
11.
3. G
6. J
9. B
12. F
F. COLORS 1. D
3. F
5. G
7. B
2. E
4. H
6.
c
8. A
1. H
4. I
7. K
10. A
2. J
5. B
8. E
11. F
3. G
6. L
9.
c
12. D
G. FUNCTIONS
H; SPACE
1. F 2 H
3. A
5. G
7. ·C
4. E
6. 0
8. B
437
I. CIRCULATION
J.
K.
F
1. I
4. A
7. K
10.
2. G
5. J
8. E
11. D
3. H
6. B
9.
1. E
4.
7. A
10.
2. F
5. B
8. J
11. H
3. G
6. K
9. D
1. H
4. A
7. K
10.
2. G
5. J
8. B
11. E
3. I
6. D
9. F
c
MASSING
c
SITE CONTROL
c
L. ENCLOSURE AND SYSTEMS
10.
c
1. H
4. F
7. I
2. G
5. A
8. D
3. B
6. J
9. E
1. G
3. H
3.
c
7. A
2. D
4. F
6. B
8. E
M. ECONOMICS
N. HUMAN FACTORS AND BEHAVIOR
c
1. F
3. E
5.
2. D
4. B
6. A
0. ARCHITECTURAL LINGO 9. E
13. p
c
14. F
7. 0
11. H
15. D
8. N
12. B
16. G
7. K
10. D
1. K
5. A
2. L
6. M
10.
3. 4. J
P. ARCHITECTURAL LINGO 4. J 1. F 2. I
5. H
8. E
11. G
3. L
6. A
9. B
'12.
438
c
AREA "A"
PART Ill
A. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN SHELTEA 1. H
4. I
7. A
2. G
5. B
8.
3. F
6. J
9. E
10. D
c
B. NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
c.
c
1. L
4. A
7. B
10.
2. K
5. J
8. E
11. F
3. I
6. H
9. G
12. D
1. K
4. J
7. E
10. G
2. D
4. A
6. L
11.
3. H
6. I
9. B
12. F
1. J
4. B
7. L
10.
2. H
5. I
8. A
11. G
3. F
6. K
9. E
-12. D
5. B
9. p
13. K
2. H
6. J
10. 0
14. F
3. M
7. D
11. N
15. A
4. I
8. L
12. G
16. E
BUILDING CODE
c
D. BUILDING CODE
c
E. FIRE CODE 1.
c
F. OFFICE PRACTICE 1. M
5. K
9. D
13. B
2. F
6.. A
10. 0
14. G
3. J
7. L
11.
c
15 .. E
4. N
8. p
12. I
439
16. H
G. ARCHITECTS CODE OF ETHICS/RESPONSIBILITIES
H. PROJECT CLASSIFICATION I. THE SPECTRUM OF THE ARCHITECT'S SERVICES
J. CONTRACTS 1. H
3. E
5. D
7. 8
c
4. G
6. A
8. F
5. A
9. p
13. 8
~
6. J
10. M
14. F
3. G
7. D
11. 0
15.
4. I
8. K
12. E
16. N
2.
K. BIDDING 1. H
2.
c
L. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION
c
1. D
3. H
5. G
7.
2. F
4. 8
6. A
8. E
1. H
3. E
5. G
7. D
2. F
4. A
6. 8
8.
M. PROJECTS
c
N. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1. D
4. A
7. D
10. A
c
5. 8
8. 8
11. 8
3. 8
6. D
9. 8
12. D
2.
0. BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. 8
4.
c
7. A
10. 8
2. A
c
8.
8. D
1~.
A
3. D
6. 8
c
12.
c
9.
440
PART IV
AREA "A"
I. PRE-DESIGN- ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS A. INFLUENCES ON URBAN DEVELOPMENT 1. 8
5. 8
2. A
6.
3. D
c
4.
9. D
13.
c
c
14. D
7. D
11. 8
15. A
8. A
12. A
16. 8
c
10.
B. COMMUNITY INFLUENCES ON DESIGN AND ANALYSIS 1. B
2.
c
3. A
4. D
7. D
c
8. 8
6. A
9. A
5.
C. TRANSPORTATION AND UTILITY INFLUENCES 1.
A
2. D
3. 8 4.
c
5. 8
7. A
c
8. D
6.
D. CLIMATIC, ECOLOGICAL, LEGAL AND ECONOMIC INFLUENCES 1. D
5. B
9. C
13. B
2. C
6. D
10. 8
14. A
3. 8
7. C
11. A
15. D
4. A
8. A
12. D
16. C
E. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1. 8
4. D
7. D
c
5. 8
8.
2.
3. A
6.
c
c
9. 8
II. SITE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 1. A
4. 8
7. D
2.
c
5. D
8.
3
B
6. 8
9. D 441
c
10. A 11.
c
12. 8
PART I
AREA "B"
I. STANDARD STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS A. WOOD, STEEL, CONCRETE
13.
c
1. E
5. K
9. L
2. D
6. J
10. F
14. I
3, N
7. p
11. 0
15. B
4. A
8. M
12. G
16. H
II. COMPLEX STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
c
4. D
7. D
2. B
5. B
8. A
c
9. B
1.
3. A
. 6.
Ill. STRUCTURAL SYSTEM SELECTION CRITERIA 1. A
3. B
2. D
4.
c
5. A
7. D
c
8. B
6.
IV. LOADS ON BUILDINGS
1. 2.
v.
c c
c
3. A
5. B
7.
c
6. A
8. B
9. A
13. B
c
14. D
4.
STRUCTURAL FUNDAMENTALS
1. B
5.
c
c
6. A
10.
3. A
7. B
11. B
15.
4. D
8. D
12. D
16. A
c
9. B
13. D
c
14. B
2.
c
VI. DEFINITIONS
1.
c
5.
2. B
6. D
10.
3. D
7. A
11. D
15.
4. A
8. B
12. A
16: A
442
c
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS
VII. SELECTION OF STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS 1. B
2.
4. A
c
5.
c
8.
6. B
. 3. D
10. B
7. D
c
9. A
VIII. LOADS ON BUILDINGS
1.
C
4.
A
2. 3.
A D
5. 6.
B D
c
7. 8. 9.
10.
D
A
c
on Question no. 7, find the weights of building materials and calculate the dead load. Remember that office buildings require an additional 0 957 KPa allowance for partitions. From table 2.1 hardwood floor joist system gypsum wallboard partition allowance
2.5 psf 6.0 psf 1.8 psf 20.0 psf
0.120 0.287 0.086 0.957
KPa KPa KPa KPa
120 Pa 287 Pa 86 Pa
Total
30.3 psf
1.450 KPa
1450 Pa
fromtable 2.2, the live load for an office building Is 2.393 KPa. The total load is therefore 3.846 KPa. For one linear Meter on the beam1 before any reductions are made, the total load is:
4.88 x 3.843 KPa
=
18.75 KN/M
on Question 8: Load reduction is allowed if the live load is less than 47.86 Newtons per square Meter on Question 10:
6 M x 4.71 KN/M 3 x 6 = 84.78 KN/M
= 28.26 KN per linear meter the total
load is ~bh, or 0.5 x 28.26
IX. STRUCTURAL FUNDAMENTALS
c
7.
c
1. A
4.
2. D
5. D
8. A
3. B
6. A
9. B
443
10.
c
on Question 1: The horizontal component is found with Fx = Fcos 61) = 60 KN. The vertical component is found with Fy = Fcos 30 = 103.9 KN. The vertical component can also be found by Fy = Fsin 60. on Question 7: To solve this problem, draw a force triangle. Since the forces are in equilibrium, the triangle must close as shown in the illustration. 13.34 sin 130 a
z
B sin 30
13.34 KN
130°
B
8.70 KN
On side of the triangle and all three angles are known, so the other two sides can be found by the law of sines. 13.34 sin 130
A sin 15
A
4.51 KN
on Question no. 8 Draw the diagonal member as a free-body diagram with the forces acting on it as shown.
I Draw a force as shown and calculate the angle problem: tan
e from the dimensions given in the
1 e =3.5-
e = 15.945 degrees 444
Now, sin 15.945
600
=F
F = 2184 Newtons You can also solve the problem by similar triangles. First, find the length of the diagonal by the Pythagorean theorem, which gives 3.64 feet. Then,
600
F . 3.64
----1
F = 2184 on Question no. 9 By the laws of equilibrium, the summation of moments about any point must equal zero. Take moments about R 7, keeping in mind that rotation in a clockwise direction is positive and in a counterclockwise direction it is negative. about R,
13.34 (2.4) + 3.56 (4.27) + 8.89 (4.88)- R2 (3.66) R2 = 24.75 KN R, = 25.79-24.75 = 1.04 KN
X. BEAMSANDCOLUMNS
c
4. 8
7. B
2. D
5. A
8. D
3. A
6. C
9. A
1.
10.
c
on Question no. 7 First, find the reactions. The weight of the uniform load is assumed to act at its midpoint. Taking moments about R,,
2.3(14)(7)- R2 (18) = 0 R2 = 12.52 KN The summation of moments about R2 must also equal zero:
-2.3(14)(11) + R, = 0 R, = 19.68 KN
445
The maximum moment occurs where the shear is zero. Draw the shear diagram.
Calculate the distance x, where shear is zero. Since you know the sloped lined drops 2.3 KN per Meter, it will drop proportionally 19.68 KN in x Meter, or:
2.3
19.68 X
X=
8.56 M.
You can find the moment either by calculating the area of the triangle or by calculating the moment of a free-body diagram from reaction R1 to the point 8.56 Meter from R1 . Area of triangle method:
A= bh 2 19.68(8.56)
2 =
84.2 KN-M
Free-body diagram method:
A
2.3 KN/M
19.68
M
t....--..:c:8.=56::...:M~- i ...
= 19.68(8.56)- 2.3(8.56)(8.56/2)
= 168.46 - 84.26 = 84.2 KN-M
446
on Question no. 8
Dis correct
S=-M f
=
(413.86}(1 000) 10.335 MPa
= 40044.51 XI. TRUSSES 1. B 2. A
3.
7.
4. D
c
c
c
8. D
6. A
9. B
5.
mm3
10. A
EXPLANATIONS:
7. C is correct. The simplest approach to find the answer is to use the principle that the summation of vertical forces at any point must equal zero. Draw a free-body diagram through member A. 15k
15k
t
t
/l?12_{__
~
B
0
R
Since the forces in the top and bottom chords have no vertical components, it is clear that only the vertical component of the force in member/\ is available to balance the two 15 KN loads and the reaction. First, find the value of the reaction, R:
R = 1/2(15 X 5 = 37.5 KN Assuming for the moment that the member is in tension (with the arrow pointing away from the joint), the vertical component, Fy, of force A must be:
37.5 - 15 - 15 + Fy = 0 Fy = -7.5 KN The number is negative, so the assumption that the member is in tens_ion was wrong. It is in compression. Draw a free-body diagram of member A.
447
tan
3m
3 8=1.8 8 = 59 degrees
Fy = FAcos 8
1.80m
7.5 cos 59
= 14.56 KN
FA
(compression)
This problem can also be solved using the method of sections, but it is more involved because you first have to find the force in the lower chord using the summation of moments being zero and then find the force in member A. In addition, extra trigonometry is involved to find the length of moment arms. on Question no. 10 Draw a free-body of the reaction point RA.
The vertical component of FA 8 must balance the reaction and the 5 KN load. It must be acting downward toward the joint. so it is comp.ession. 20-5- Fy = 0 5KN
Fy =15M.
~/AB
Fy = FABCOS 8
-~
t
= _1_5_
F
AB
COS
45
= 21.5 KN
20 KN
XII. SOIL AND FOUNDATIONS 2. D
5.
c c
8. A
3. B
6. A
9. B
1. B
4.
7. D
10.
c
Explanation on Question no. 3 Formula 6.8 is used to find the total earth pressure, with the weight of the soil taken to be equivalent to a fluid weighing 4.71 KN/M 3
P=
h Wfi
= (0.5)(4. 71 )(0.9)
= 2.1195 KN 448
This pressure acts througn the centroid of the pressure triangle or one third from the base, which in this case coincides with the level of the lower grade. on Question no. 4 The width of the footing is found by dividing the total load by the soil bearing pressure considering a one meter length of foundation. The load allows: fol_Jndation wall
1.3 x 0.3 x 23.56 = 9.1884 KNs
footing (assume 1 meter width)
4 X 1 X 150 = 600 pounds 3 X 0.67 X 150 = 600 pounds
soil (assume 1 meter width)
3 X 1 X 100 = 600 pounds
1 X 1 X 15.71=15.71
dead load
1000 pounds
4.448 KN
live load
500 pounds
2.224 KN
total
3000 pounds
36.2824 KN
1 X 0.2
X
23.56 = 4,712
36.2824
3000 width=-1500
W=---
71 79
= 2 feet
= 0.505 M
Since a 1 meter width was assumed, the weight of the footing will be less so 0.505 M is more than adequate.
XIII. CONNECTIONS 1. B
4. D
7.
2. A
5.
c
8.
3. B
6. 0
c c
10
D
9. A
Explanation on Question no. 6 The maximum size of a fillet weld for 6 mm. thick material is 4.5 mm. From Table 7.6, the allowable load per inch for this size weld made with E70 electrodes is 490.35 N. The weld is on both sides, so the total capacity 1s: 490.35 X 150 X 2 = 147,105 However, the allowable tensile load on the single bar must be checked. From Formula 7.5, the allowable stress is: 0.60 x 248 MPa = 148.8 MPa The area of the bar is: 6 x 150 = 900 mm2
449
The total allowable load is: 900 X 148.8 = 133920 N Since this is less than the allowable load on the welds, this value governs.
XIV. BUILD lNG CODE REQUIREMENTS 1. A
2.
c
3. B
4. D
7. A
c
8. D
6. B
9. A
5.
10.
c
Explanation on question no. 8 For snow loading, allowable stresses for wood may be increased by 15 percent. 10 x 1.15 ~ 11.5 MPa allowable The section modulus is S = Mit.
S
= 623 X 1000
11.5 =
54174 mm 3
XV. WOOD CONSTRUCTION
c c
4. B
7. A
5. D
8. B
3. A
6. D
9. B
1. 2.
10. D
on Question no. 2 For snow loading, the allowable stresses may be increased 15 percent. Using the maximum moment, the re::Juired section modulus is:
$ =·2693.08
X
1000
7.23(1.15) = 323901.61 mm3 = 323.90
em~
Looking in Table 9.1, a 2 x 10 joist has a section modulus of 350.53 cm 3 so this will work for bending.
450
Next, check for horizontal shear. Take the worst case of vertical shear which is the 4003.38 pounds found on the shear diagram. You can neglect the loads within a distance from the distance from the support equal to the depth of the member, so the vertical shear to be used in the calculation is: 235 V = 4003.38- ( - 1000
X
2516.25]
= 3412.06
Using formula 9.3 to find the actual horizontal shear,
b = 1 .5 (38 mm) d = 9.25 (235 mm) 3V Fv=2bd 3 3412.06 =-x---2 2(38)(235)
= 0.286 MPa The allowable horizontal shear of 0.516 MPa psi can also be increased by 15 percent for snow loading, so the allowalbe stress is:
Fv = 0.516 x 1.15 = 0.593 MPa Since this is more than the actual, a 50 x 250 joist will work. on Question no. 8 The top chord member acts just as a column. Its lid is: 900
1/d = - = 10.23 88
Therefore, it is a short column and the allowable
F~is
the same as Fe.
The maximum axial load is: p = 950(3.5 X 5.5) =
18.3 kips
6.545 X (88 X 138) or
79482.48 N
on Question no. 9 Different values of Fb must be use<;! to find the section modulus depending on whether you use a 100 mm wide beam or a 6-inch wide beam. For a 150 mm wide beam, find
451
-
-------
--------------
the Fv value from Table 9.2 under beams and stringers, and find the seGtion modulus required.
S
= 11 085.97 X 1000
10.68 = 1038012.17 mm 3 = 1038 cm 3
From Table 9.1, a 6 x 10 has a section modulus of 1355.68 cm 3 For a 4-inch wide beam,
S
=
11085.97 X 1000 12.402
=
893885.66 mm 3
=
8938.85 cm 3
From Table 9.1. a 4 x 12 has a section modulus of 1209.82 cm3 with an area of 254 cm 2 square inches. Because there ·is less area in the 4 x 12 beam, it would be more economical.
XVI. STEEL CONSTRUCTION 1. B
4. 0
2. A
5.
3
B
c
7.
c
8. B
6. A
9. A
10. 0
on Question no. 4 First. find the bending moment t-hat must be resisted by-the beam. From Table 4.12, the equation is:
PL M=--
4
53.38 X 4.87 4
= 64.99 KN-M
452
Next, find the required section modulus:
M
S=Fb
= 64.99 X 10002 165.5 MPa = 392688.82 mm 3
= 392.68 cm 3 From Table 10.4, the most economical section is a 300 x 550 with a section modulus of 416.23 cm 3 . This does not include the weight of the beam, which would be negligible since it would only add another 0.7 kip-feet of moment.
XVII. CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
c
4. c
7. 8
2. 8
5. A
8. 0
c
6. 0
9. A
1.
3.
10. 0
on Question no. 3 The minimum percentage of steel is found with the formula
p = ~ = ~ = 0.0033 .fy 413 (Grade 60 steel means the yield point is 413 MPa) The maximum percentage by code is 0. 75 of the steel required for a balanced design, or 0.75(0.0285) = o.'o214. To find the area of the steel, the percentages must be multiplied by the width of the beam by the effective depth of the beam, or 300 x 564 = 169200 mm 2 A(min.) = 0.0033(169200) A(max.) 4.
= 0.0214(169200)
= 558.36 mm2 = 3620.88 mm 2
C is correct.
The typical water-cement ratio is from 0.35 to 0.40 for concrete mixes without plasticizers or other admixtures.
453
XVIII.
CONSTRUCTION
c
c
1. A
4.
2. B
5. A
8. A
3. D
6. D
9. B
7.
10. B
XIX. LATERAL FORCES • WIND
1. B
4. D
2. D
5.
3. B
6.
7.
c c
c
10. A
8. A 9. A
XX. LATERALFORCES·EARTHQUAKE 1.
c
4.
c
7. D
2. B
5. D
8. A
3. A
6. B
9. B
10.
c
Seattle is in zone 3, so Z = 0.30. The importance factor is 1.0. From Table 14.1 the Rw factor is 6. The S factor is 1.2 because the soil profile is 52 . Knowing the period is 0.19, the Cfactor can be calculated from
c =.L2...S J213
'"' 1.25(1.2) (0.19) 213 =
4.54
Because 2.75 is the maximum value required for C, use this. The shear is therefore ZICW V= R
w
0.30 (1.0) (2. 75)
6
= 3,975.54 KN
454
X
, 28 913
XXI. LONG SPAN STRUCTURES -ONE WAY SYSTEMS
c
.1. D
4. B
7.
c
5. A
8. A
c
9. D
2.
3. A
6.
10. B
XXII~ LONG SPAN STRUCTURES
-TWO WAY SYSTEMS
c
1. D
6. A
7.
c
6. D
8. A
3. B
6. B
9. A
2.
455
10.
c
PART II
AREA "B"
I. BUILDING MATERIALS A. CONCRETE
c
13. D
c
10. D
14. A
3. B
7. D
11. B
15. B
c
8. A
12.
c
16. D
1. B
5. A
2. D
6.
4.
9.
B. WOOD, BOARDS 1. D
5. D
9. B
13. A
2. A
6. A
10. D
14. B
3. B
7.
c
11. A
15.
4.
c.
c
12.
8. B
c
c
16. D
METALS 1. B
4. D
7 B
10. B
c
5. D
8. A
11.
2.
3. A
6.
c
9.
c
c
12. A
D. GLASS, PLASTICS, SEALANTS
c
1. A
4.
c
7. B
10
2. B
5. B
8. A
11. B
3. A
6. A
9.
c
12.
c
1 B
3. D
5. D
7.
c
2. A
4.
c
6. A
8. B
E. INSULATION
F. DOORS, HARDWARES 1. E
5. A
9. p
13. 0
2. N
6. K
10. G
14. H
3. F
7.
c
11. D
f5. B
4. L
8. M
12. J
16.
456
G. WINDOWS, HARDWARES 1. I
5. M
2. L
6. K
10.
3. J 4. A
9. 0
13. 0
c
14. F
7. B
11. H
15. p
8. N
12. G
16. E
H. BUILDING PROTECTION 1. G
4. K
7. L
10. F
2. J
5. A
8. B
11
3. H
6. I
9. D
12. E
c
I. ABILITIES, QUALITIES, CAPACITIES AND PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
J.
1. 0
5. K
9. N
13. G
2. H
6. L
10. A
14. E
3. F
7. I
11. p
15. 8
4. J
8. 0
12.
c
16. M
MATERIAL, SUPPLIERS OR MANUFACTURERS 1. E
6. M
11. p
16. R
2. N
7. Q
12. A
17. K
3. I
8. T
13.
s
18. H
4. 0
9. D
14. G
19. L
5. J
10. F
15. B
20.
c
1. E
5 K
9. p
13.
c
2. G
6. B
10. F
14. J
3. N
7. L
11. 0
15. M
4. I
8. D
12. A
16. H
K. PAINTING
L. MISCELLANEOUS, SPECIFICATIONS 1. A
5.
c
9. 8
13.
2. B
6. A
10. A
14.
c c
7 D
11. 8
15. A
8. B
12. D
16.
3. 4.
457
c c c
M. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS
c
5. B
2. D
6. D
10.
c
4. A
1. 3.
9. A
13.
c
14. B
7. A
11.
c c
8. D
12. A
16. A
15. D
N. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS
1. B
4. B
7. A
10. D
c
5. A
8. 8
11. 8
3. D
6. D
9. A
12. A
2.
II. METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION 1. 8 2.
c
3. D
4. A
7. A
10. D
c
8. D
11. A
6. 8
9. 8
12.
5.
458
c
AREA UB"
UTILITIES
PART Ill
1. SANITARY AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENTS A. WATER SUPPLY
c
13. D
c
10. D
14. A
3. D
7. A
11. 8
15.
c
8. D
12. A
16. 8
c
13. A
1. A
5. 8
2. 8
6.
4.
9.
c
B. WATER SUPPLY 1. 8
5. 8
2. D
6.
c
10. D
14. 8
3. A
7. D
11. 8
15.
c
8. A
12. A
16. D
4.
c.
9.
c
FIRE PROTECTION, STORM WATER
c
7. D
6. 8
8. A
c
9. D
13. A
2. D
6. A
10. A
14. 8
3. 8
7 8
11.
c
15. D
4. A
8. D
12. 8
c
1. A
3.
2. D
4. 8
5.
D. SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 1.
c
5.
16.
c
E. SEWAGE DISPOSAL, REFUSE HANDLING 7. D
10. D
2. D
5.
c c
8. A
11. A
3. 8
6. 8
9. 8
12.
c
7. D
10.
c
1. A
4.
F. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 2. A
5.
c c
8. 8
3. D
6. A
9. A
1. 8
4.
459
AREA "B"
UTILITIES
PART Ill
2. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. HEAT, MOISTURE, HUMAN COMFORT
c
1. A
5. D
9. A
c
6. A
10. D
14. A
3. B
7. B
11. B
15. D
4. D
8.
2.
c
12.
c
13.
16.
c
B. HEATING, VENTILATING, SOLAR ENERGY
c
9. D
13
8
c
6. B
10. B
14
D
3. D
7. A
11.
4. A
8. D
12. A
1. B 2.
c.
5.
c
15. A 16.
c
AIR CONDITIONING 1. B 2.
c
5.
c
9.
c
13. B
6. A
10. D
14.
c
3. D
7.
c
11. B
15. A
4. A
8. D
12. A
1q
D
D. CONVEYORS, VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION, BUILDING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
c
9. B
c
6. B
10. D
3. D
7. D
11.
4. B
8. A
12. A
1. A 2.
5.
13. D 14.
c
10.
c
c
E. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1.
c
2. A
7.
c
4. D
7. B
c
8. A
6. D
9. D
5.
460
AREA "B"
UTILITIES
PART Ill
3. _ELECTRICAL AND OTHER POWER SYSTEMS A. PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRICITY
c
10.
c
1. A
4. 8
7.
2. D
5. A
8. D
11. D
c
6. 8
9. 8
12. A
3.
B. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: MATERIALS, WIRING 1. C
4. A
7. C
10. B
2. 8
5. 8
8. 0
11.
3. D
6. D
9. A
12. A
9. D
13. A
c
14. 8
c
C. SERVICE AND UTILIZATION 1. B
5. 8
c
6. A
10.
3. D
7. D
11. A
15.
c
4
8.
12
16
D
2.
A
c
B
D. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS 1. A
3. C
5. 8
7. A
2. B
4. D
6. C
8. B
461
AREA "B"
UTILITIES
PART Ill
4. ACOUSTICS AND ILLUMINATION A. SOUND SOURCES HUMAN RESPONSE
c
1. A
4. B
7. D
10.
2. D
5.
c
8. A
11. A
6. B
9. B
12. D
3,
c
B. ACOUSTICAL PROPERTIES OF BUILDING MATERIALS 5. 8
9. A
2. A
6. D
10. B
14. D
3. D
7.
c
11. A
15. B
8. B
12. B
16.
4.
c.
c
1. B
c
13.
c
SOLID STRUCTURE AND AIR-BORNE NOISE REDUCTION
c
3. A
5. A
7. D
2. B
4. D
6. B
8.
1.
c
D. PHYSICS OF LIGHT, SOURCES
c
9.
c
13. B
1. A
5.
2. D
6. B
10. D
14.
c
7. D
11. A
15. D
4. B
8. A
12. B
16. A
3.
E. MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS
c
1 A
4. D
7.
2. 8
5. B
8. 8
c
9. D
3
A
6.
462
I
c
AREA "B"
UTILITIES
PART Ill
5. DISASTER PREVENTION/FIRE/SECURITY A. BUILDING PROTECTION
c
1. A
4.
2. B
5. A
3. D
6.
7. B D
8
c
9 B
10. D 11. A 12.
c
13.
c
B. BUILDING PROTECTION MATERIALS 1. D
5.
c
9. B
2. A
6. B
10. D
14. B
c
7. A
11.
c
15. D
4. B
8. D
12. A
16. A
3.
c.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARMS 1. D
4. A
7. D
10. B
c
5. B
8.
11. A
3. B
6. A
9.
c c
12. D
9.
c
13. B
10. 8
14. D
2.
D. FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1. B
5. B
2. D
6. A
c
c
3.
4. A
7.
11
D
12. A
8. D
E. FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1. A
4.
c
7. A
10
2. 8
5. D
8. 8
11. A
3. D
6.
B
c
9.
c
12. D
F. FIRE PREVENTION 1. A
3.
c
5. D
7. B
2. D
4. B
6. A
8.
c
G. SECURITY-BURGLAR PROOFING (INTRUSION DETECTION DEVICES)
1. A 2. D
3. C 4. B
5. C 6. D
463
7. B 8. A
AREA "B"
PART Ill
UTILITIES
6. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS A. SIGNAL SYSTEMS 1. A 2. D
3. 8 4.
c
B. TELELINGO 1. 8
c
2. 3. D
9. 8 10. D 11.
5. A 6.
c
c
13. D 14.
c
7. B B. 0
12. A
16. 8
4. A 5. 6. 8
7. A 8. D 9.
10. D 11. A 12. 8
c
c
15. A
AREA "C"
PART I
1. D 2. A 3.
c
4. D 5. 8 6. D
7.
c
10. 8
8. A 9. D
on answer No. 2 (A) None of the enclosed mall would be rentable so substract the 6 percent (51 0 square meter) right off the top 8,500-510
= 7,990
square M.
then, take 75 percent of the remainder, which gives about 6,000 square Meter on answer No. 3 (C) These are a number of ways of arriving at the same answer for this question, City 8 has a higher cost index so divide the lower into the highar: 1517 = 1.053 1440
Multiply this factor by the cost in City A, P1 ,500,000, to get 1 ,580,208. Then, increase this by the 5 percent inflation factor: 1,580,208 X 1.05 = 1,659,218
or 1 ,659,000 464
rounded figure
